W336 E1 10+CS CJ Series+OperManual
W336 E1 10+CS CJ Series+OperManual
W336-E1-10
OPERATION MANUAL
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units
Operation Manual
Revised October 2009
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual. The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
!DANGER
!WARNING
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Additionally, there may be property damage. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Additionally, there may be property damage. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury, or property damage.
!Caution
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information. Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product. 1,2,3... 1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
OMRON, 1999
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards/Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii xviii xviii xix xx xxiii xxv xxxi
SECTION 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-9 Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protocol Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comparison to Previous Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Serial Communications Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2 3 10 16 19 27 41 47 48
67
68 80 82
99
100 101 105 132
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5 Using Protocol Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 Overview of the Protocol Macro Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Protocol Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple Backup Function (Backup of Protocol Macro Data). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced Protocol Macro Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 173 180 196 208 211
SECTION 9 Using Modbus-RTU Slave Mode (Unit Version 1.3 or Later). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 Modbus-RTU Slave System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changes from Previous Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modbus-RTU Slave Function for Replacing Existing PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 303 306 318 323 326
viii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 10 Communications Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
10-1 Communications Performance of the Serial Communications Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Appendices
A B C D E F G H I J K L N O P Q R Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CompoWay/F Master Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-mode (Host Link) Command Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Host Link FINS Command Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual Inspection System Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Communications Port Settings Using STUP(237) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 403 433 457 481 505 525 541 563 583 599 639 661 673 709 729 767 775
ix
W341
Provides information on how to program and operate CS/ CJ-series PLCs using a Programming Console.
W339
Describes the installation and operation of the CS-series PLCs. Describes the installation and operation of the CJ-series PLCs.
W393
W394
Describes the ladder diagram programming functions and other functions supported by CS-series and CJ-series PLCs. Describes the ladder diagram programming instructions supported by CS-series and CJ-series PLCs.
W474
W342
Describes the Host Link and FINS communications commands used with CS-series and CJ-series PLCs.
W446
Provides information on how to use the CX-Programmer, a programming device that supports the CS-series and CJseries PLCs. Describes the use of the CX-Protocol to create protocol macros as communications sequences to communicate with external devices. Describes the installation and operation of CS1W-ETN01, CS1W-ETN11, and CJ1W-ETN11 Ethernet Unit. Provides the procedures for installation, uninstallation, auto-updating, and other setup procedures for the CX-One. Provides CX-Integrator operating procedures to build networks, including those for data links, routing tables, and Communications Unit setup.
W344
W343
W463
SYSMAC CXONE-AL@@C-V3, CXONE-AL@@D-V3, CS/CJ/ W464 CP/NSJ Series CX-Integrator Ver. 2.3 Operation Manual
xi
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
xii
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT LIABILITY. In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted. IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
xiii
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products. At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use. The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products: Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this manual. Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations. Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products. NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any consequence thereof.
xiv
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
xv
xvi
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards and Units. The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of Programmable Controllers. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a PLC system. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Applicable Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 EMI Measures for Serial Communications Boards and Units . . . . . 6-5 EMS Measures for Serial Communications Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards/Units . . . . . . Version Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii xviii xviii xix xx xxiii xxiii xxiii xxiv xxiv xxv xxv xxxi
7 8
xvii
Intended Audience
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent). Personnel in charge of installing FA systems. Personnel in charge of designing FA systems. Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals. Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult your OMRON representative. Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms. This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying a PLC System to the above-mentioned applications.
Safety Precautions
!WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor affecting the PLC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents. Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits. The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed. Unexpected operation, however, may still occur for errors in the I/O control section, errors in I/O memory, and other errors that cannot be detected by the self-diagnosis function. As a countermeasure for all such errors, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system. The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of the output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
xviii
When the 24-V DC output (service power supply to the PLC) is overloaded or short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being turned OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
!WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing
so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do
so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock. !Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be readable.
xix
Application Precautions
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PLC System.
!WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury. Always connect to a ground of 100 or less when installing the Units. Not connecting to a ground of 100 or less may result in electric shock. Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before attempting any of the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric shock. Mounting or dismounting Power Supply Units, I/O Units, CPU Units, Serial Communications Units, or any other Units. Assembling the Units. Setting DIP switches or rotary switches. Connecting cables or wiring the system. Mounting or dismounting terminal blocks. !Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the PLC or the system, or could damage the PLC or PLC Units. Always heed these precautions. Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines, momentary power interruptions, or other causes. Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result in malfunction. Tighten the Backplane mounting screws, terminal block screws, and cable connector screws to the torque specified in this manual. Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit. Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction. Always check polarity before wiring RS-422A/485 connectors. The polarity for the SDA/B and RDA/B signals can be different for some external devices. Check to be sure that terminating resistors have been correctly installed for RS-422A/485 systems before starting operation. Disconnect the LG terminal of the Power Supply Unit from the GR terminal when performing insulation and dielectric strength tests. Never turn OFF the power supply while writing protocol macro data. Wire all connections correctly according to instructions in this manual. Check terminal blocks completely before mounting them. Double-check all wiring, switch settings, and DM Area data settings before turning ON the power supply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
xx
Application Precautions
5
Be sure that the Bus Connection Unit and other items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper locking may result in malfunction. Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on the Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation. Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation. Changing the operating mode of the PLC (including the setting of the startup operating mode). Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory. Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory. Do not install the product near devices generating strong high-frequency noise. Do not drop the product or subject it to excessive vibration or shock. Observe the following precautions for communications cables. Do not lay communications cables near power lines or high-voltage lines. Always lay communications cables in ducts. Do not pull on the communications cables or bend the communications cables beyond their natural limit. Doing either of these may break the cables. Do not place objects on top of the communications cables or other wiring lines. Doing so may break the cables. Before touching a Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in order to discharge any static built-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage. Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the contents of the DM Area, HR Area, and other data required for resuming operation. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation. Do not touch circuit boards or the components mounted to them with your bare hands. There are sharp leads and other parts on the boards that may cause injury if handled improperly. When transporting or storing Boards, wrap them in material that will protect LSIs, ICs, and other components from static electricity and be sure that they remain within the storage temperature range. Do not connect the 5-V power supply on pin 6 of the RS-232C port on the Unit to any external device other than an NT-AL001-E Link Adapter. Otherwise, the external device and the Serial Communications Unit may be damaged. Use the OMRON Cables specified in this manual or make your own cables. Do not use commercially available RS-232C cables sold for personal computers. Otherwise, the external device and the Serial Communications Unit may be damaged. When creating Host Link FINS command frames using the CMND(490) instruction, always set the unit number for Host Link incremented by one (1 to 32) for the remote destination (send destination) node address (word C+3, bits 08 to 15 of the CMND(490) instruction). Do not set the unit number of the actual Host Link slave (0 to 31). Using the Host Link unit number without incrementing by one will access the PLC with the entered Host Link unit number less one. For example, specify the remote PLC with Host Link unit number 2 by
xxi
Application Precautions
5
entering 3 for the remote destination node address. If 2 is entered, the PLC with Host Link unit number 1 will be accessed. To access a PLC on a Host Link FINS network using the Serial Gateway from CX-Programmer, however, enter the actual Host Link unit number, without incrementing by one. (Select Change PLC, click the Display Serial Gateway Guide Button, and set unit number in the Host Link SYSWAY Settings field of the Serial Gateway Guide Dialog Box. When the Serial Gateway is executed during protocol macro execution, the communications sequence contents and the FINS command reception timing may suspend step transition of the communications sequence (when the next step does not contain the RECEIVE command, the Serial Gateway will be executed by interrupting the sequence before the next step, and the step transition will be suspended). Use the Serial Gateway send start timeout function to monitor at the source of the FINS command whether step transition in the communications sequence has been suspended due to execution of the Serial Gateway. If the converted command does not start to be sent within the set time, either retry executing the FINS command or change the communications sequence. When using 2-wire RS-422A/485 communications in Protocol Macro Mode, set only modem controls for the send control parameters, and do not use RS/CS flow controls. The following operations will result if the Serial Gateway is executed either using a pre-Ver. 1.2 Board/Unit or using a Ver. 1.2 or later Unit/Board without Serial Gateway or protocol macro mode set for serial communications at the serial port. If either NT Link or loopback test mode is used for serial communications, or if protocol macro mode is used with a pre-Ver. 1.2 Board/Unit, an undefined command response will be returned (end code: 0401 hex). If Host Link mode is used for serial communications, the message will be converted into a FINS command using Host Link slave-initiated communications and transferred (this will mainly result in a response timeout being returned, depending on the remote device (end code: 0205 hex)) If a no-protocol instruction is sent to a pre-Ver. 1.2 Board/Unit or the serial port of a Board/Unit with Unit Ver. 1.2 or later using a serial communications mode other than no-protocol mode, the following operations will occur. If TXD(236)/RXD(235) is programmed for the Board, Auxiliary Area bit A424204 (Inner Board Service Failure Flag) will turn ON. If TXDU(256)/RXDU(255) is programmed for the Unit and the serial communications mode is set to protocol macro, NT Link, loopback test, or Serial Gateway mode, an undefined command error (end code: 0401 hex) will be returned. If the serial communications mode is set to Host Link mode and the instruction will be converted to a slave-initiated function FINS command and transferred. (Depending on the remote device, a response timeout (end code: 0205 hex) is likely to be returned.) An instruction error will occur if the DTXDU(262) or DRXDU(261) instruction is executed under the following conditions. Be sure to check that an applicable Unit and serial communications mode are being used before executing these instructions.
xxii
Conformance to EC Directives
6
Executing DTXDU(262) or DRXDU(261) for a Serial Communications Unit other than the CJ1W-SCU22/32/42: An instruction error will occur 1 ms after the instruction is executed. The cycle time will be extended by 1 ms. Executing DTXDU(262) or DRXDU(261) for a serial communications port that is not set for No-protocol Mode (even if the CJ1W-SCU22/32/ 42 is used): An instruction error will occur immediately. The cycle time will not be affected. Do not restart a Serial Communications Unit if an external interrupt is being used. Doing so may make the system unstable. When using an external interrupt, mount the Serial Communications Unit in one of the following slots on the CPU Rack. External interrupt tasks will not be started if the Serial Communications Unit is in any other slot. With a CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP CPU Unit: Slots 0 to 3 With a CJ2H-CPU6@ or CJ1G/H-CPU@@H CPU Unit: Slots 0 to 4 With a CJ1M-CPU@@ CPU Unit: Slots 0 to 2
6
6-1
Conformance to EC Directives
Applicable Directives
EMC Directives Low Voltage Directive
6-2
Concepts
EMC Directives OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by the customer. EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed. The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices and the overall machine conform to EMC standards. Note Applicable EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility) and EMI (Electromagnetic Interference) standards in the EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:
Unit/Board EMS CS1W-SCB21-V1/SCB41-V1 EN 61131-2 CS1W-SCU21-V1 CJ1W-SCU22/32/42 CJ1W-SCU21-V1 EN 61000-6-2 CJ1W-SCU31-V1 CJ1W-SCU41-V1 CS1W-SCU31-V1 EMI EN 61131-2 (Radiated emission: 10-m regulations) EN 61000-6-4 (Radiated emission: 10-m regulations)
Low Voltage Directive Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 VAC and 75 to 1,500 VDC meet the required safety standards for the PLC (EN61131-2).
xxiii
Conformance to EC Directives
6-3
Conformance to EC Directives
The CS/CJ-series PLCs comply with EC Directives. To ensure that the machine or device in which the CS/CJ-series PLC is used complies with EC directives, the PLC must be installed as follows: 1,2,3... 1. The CS/CJ-series PLC must be installed within a control panel. 2. You must use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supplies used for the communications power supply and I/O power supplies. 3. CS/CJ-series PLCs complying with EC Directives also conform to the Common Emission Standard (EN 61000-6-4 or EN 61131-2). Radiated emission characteristics (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring, and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that the overall machine or equipment complies with EC Directives.
6-4
xxiv
Mount the cores as lost to the end of the communications cable as possible, as shown in the following illustration.
Serial Communications Unit/Board
6-5
Unit Versions
xxv
CS1W-SCU21-V1
SERIAL COMMUNICATION UNIT
:
Lot No. 051020 0000 Ver.1.3
OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN
xxvi
Example: In this Unit Manufacturing Information Dialog Box, unit version 1.3 is displayed. Use this dialog box to confirm the unit version of the Serial Communications Unit that is connected online.
xxvii
Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards/Units Functions Supported by Unit Version 2.0
CS Series Product Serial Communications Boards Serial Communications Units CJ Series Serial Communications Units Unit version 2.0 --------CJ1W-SCU22 CJ1W-SCU32 CJ1W-SCU42 Supported Supported Supported Supported On-request I/O refreshing Continuous I/O refreshing Select to clear or hold contents. 230,400 supported. Supported Supported
Serial gateway Host Link 1:1 links Host Link compatible device selection No-protocol Protocol Link word specification data macro exchange timing Reception buffer processing for PMCR(260) instruction execution Baud rate (bps) Standard system protocol additions MODBUS slave protocol added
Functions
Note Make sure that a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later is used when using no-protocol mode.
xxviii
Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards/Units Functions Supported by Unit Versions 1.2 and 1.3
Product CS Series Serial Communications Boards Earlier version (pre-ver. 1.2) CS1W-SCB21-V1 CS1W-SCB41-V1 Serial Communications Units CJ Series Serial Communications Units CS1W-SCU21-V1 --CJ1W-SCU21 --CJ1W-SCU41 Serial gateway Host Link 1:1 links Host Link compatible device selection No-protocol Protocol macro Link word specification data exchange timing Reception buffer processing for PMCR(260) instruction execution Baud rate (bps) Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported On-request I/O refreshing only Clearing only Unit version 1.2 CS1W-SCB21-V1 (Same as pre-ver. 1.2) CS1W-SCB41-V1 (Same as pre-ver. 1.2) CS1W-SCU21-V1 (Same as pre-ver. 1.2) --CJ1W-SCU21-V1 --CJ1W-SCU41-V1 Supported Supported Supported Supported On-request I/O refreshing Continuous I/O refreshing Select to clear or hold contents. Unit version 1.3 CS1W-SCB21-V1 (Same as pre-ver. 1.2) CS1W-SCB41-V1 (Same as pre-ver. 1.2) CS1W-SCU21-V1 (Same as pre-ver. 1.2) CS1W-SCU31-V1 CJ1W-SCU21-V1 (Same as pre-ver. 1.2) CJ1W-SCU31-V1 CJ1W-SCU41-V1 (Same as pre-ver. 1.2) Supported (Same as pre-ver. 1.2) Supported (Same as pre-ver. 1.2) Supported (Same as pre-ver. 1.2) Supported (Same as pre-ver. 1.2) On-request I/O refreshing Continuous I/O refreshing (Same as pre-ver. 1.2) Select to clear or hold contents. (Same as pre-ver. 1.2)
Functions
38,400 max. (57,600 and 115,200 not supported) Not supported ---
57,600 supported.
Supported ---
Note Make sure that a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later is used when using no-protocol mode.
xxix
Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards/Units Unit Versions and Manufacturing Dates/Lot Numbers
CS1W-SCB@1-V1, CS1W-SCU@1-V1, and CJ1W-SCU@1-V1
Classification Inner Boards Type Model Through May 2004 Pre-Ver. 1.2
Serial Communica- CS1W-SCB21-V1 tions Boards CS1W-SCB41-V1 Serial Communica- CS1W-SCU21-V1 tions Units CS1W-SCU21-V1 CS1W-SCU41-V1 CS1W-SCU31-V1 CJ1W-SCU31-V1 CX-Programmer WS02-CXPC1-JV@
Pre-Ver. 1.2
June 2004 to November 2005 October 2005 to August 2009 Unit version 1.2 Unit version 1.3 (Lot No.: 040617 and later) Unit version 1.2 Unit version 1.3 (Lot No.: 040617 and later) ----Ver. 5.0 Unit version 1.3 (Available April, 2006) Version 6.1
CJ1W-SCU@2
Classification CPU Bus Units Type Model From September 2009 Unit version 2.0
Version 8.3
xxx
Version Upgrades
Version Upgrades
CJ1W-SCU@2
Applicable Models
Improvements for Unit Version 2.0.
Unit version 2.0 of the CJ1W-SCU@2 Serial Communications Units provides the following improvements over previous unit versions (see note). Note Applicable model numbers are given as @1.
Item Added new models. Unit version 1.3 or earlier CS1W-SCB@1-V1 CS1W-SCU@1 CJ1W-SCU@1 CJ1W-SCU@1-V1 The model numbers are given as @1. Not supported. Unit version 2.0 or later CJ1W-SCU@2 The model numbers of new models are given as @2. The unit version is 2.0.
DRXDU(261)
DTXDU(262)
Not supported.
Not supported.
Clearing/holding reception buffers immediately after executing a reception instruction in No-protocol Mode. Improved transmisMaximum baud rate sion performance
A high-speed data reception instruction is now supported for a CJ2 CPU Unit with unit version 1.1 or later. A high-speed data send instruction is now supported for a CJ2 CPU Unit with unit version 1.1 or later. An external interrupt task can be executed in the CPU Unit when data is received. You can now select between clearing and holding. 230,400 bps for No-protocol or Protocol Macro, Serial Gateway, Host Link, or Modbus-RTU Mode 115,200 bps for NT Link Mode 1,200 m 0 to 18 hex (25 banks) The shape and pin layout of the connector have been changed. The connector has been changed from a D-sub connector to a terminal-block connector. Using multidrop connections is now possible.
115,200 bps for NT Link, Serial Gateway, Host Link, or Modbus-RTU 57,600 bps for No-protocol or Protocol Macro Mode Maximum RS-422A/485 com- 500 m munications distance Accessible EM banks 0 to 0C hex (13 banks) Change in RS-422A/485 connector D-sub connector
The CJ1W-SCU@1-V1 with unit version 1.3 is upwardly compatible with all functions other than those listed above.
xxxi
CS Series
CS1W-SCB21-V1
CJ Series
Same
CJ1W-SCU21-V1 CJ1W-SCU41-V1
xxxii
Version Upgrades
Item Serial communications mode Serial Gateway Earlier versions (pre-Ver.1.2) Not supported Unit version 1.2 or later
Host Link
1:1 protocol
Supported The received FINS command can be converted into serial communications protocol and then converted into either of the following protocols (using the Serial Gateway mode). CompoWay/F Modbus-RTU Modbus-ASCII Host Link FINS (This protocol can be used to make the PLC function as the Host Link Master.) The Serial Gateway can also be used in protocol macro mode. This option enables, for example, programming or monitoring of a serially connected PLC from a CX-Programmer that is connected to the PLC during execution of protocol macros (e.g., Host Link Master). Not supported (1:N Supported Host Links only) This protocol functions the same as the 1:1 Host Link supported by the earlier C200H, C1000H, and C2000H Series, thereby enabling the use of host computer programs for 1:1 Host LInks created using these earlier PLCs. Note: CS/CJ-series, C200HS/HX/HG/HE(-Z), CPM@, CQM1@, and CVM1/CV Series all support 1:N Host Links only. C200H and C500 Host LInk Units support both 1:1 and 1:N Host Links. The compatible device mode enables full compatiNot supported (not completely compati- bility of Host Link functions (see note) with C-series Host Link and CVM1/CV-series Host Link. ble with C-series Host Link and CVM1/ Note: E.g., differences in specifications for delimiter CV-series Host Link) words in response frame data Not supported Supported, but only when using a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later. (The no-protocol mode that was previously possible only at the built-in RS-232C port of CPU Unit is now available for the Serial Communications Boards and Units.) This protocol is mainly used for communications with devices that perform input or output only, such as bar code readers and printers. This mode enables no-protocol communications even if the CPU Units built-in RS-232C port is being used for another application.
xxxiii
Version Upgrades
Item Enhanced protocol macro functions Link word specification data exchange timing Earlier versions (pre-Ver.1.2) On-request I/O refreshing only (request to refresh sent to CPU Unit at every send/receive command execution, and data exchanged during I/O refresh) In this method, after the send command is executed, a delay occurs before the actual message is sent. Clearing to zero only Unit version 1.2 or later
Continuous I/O refreshing (selected in DM Area settings) is supported in addition to the on-request I/O refreshing available in earlier models. Continuous I/O refreshing is performed from the CPU Unit during protocol macro execution, regardless of requests from the Board/Unit, and data in the Board/Unit is accessed during send/receive command execution. When the send command is executed with this method, the actual message can be sent immediately.
Reception buffer processing for PMCR(260) instruction execution (immediately before communications sequence execution)
38,400 bps max. (57,600 bps not supported) Standard sys- Host Link C-mode Command None (protocols must Provided tem protocol Master be created using CX- A Host Link Master can be used to easily access Protocol) the Host Link slave PLC (e.g., A PLC slave on a Host Link FINS Command moving body can be Master accessed via a WMseries Wireless Modem in a Host Link.)
Select to clear or hold the contents of the reception buffer during full-duplex communications (set in the allocation DM Area). This enables the data in the reception buffer received in the previous communications sequence to be held after switching the communications sequence during full-duplex communications. 57,600 bps supported (115,200 bps not supported)
Host Link C-mode commands can be used to access a C-series or CS/ CJ-series PLC slave. Host Link FINS commands can be used to access a CS/CJ-series or CVM1/CV-series PLC slave. This protocol can also be used to access slave PLCs on the network.
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible, 1C frame, model 1) CompoWay/F Master ---
Provided Computer Link commands can be used to access a Mitsubishi PLC (Sequencer CPU Module) slave. Communications sequences with different send and receive protocols are provided by using send/ receive commands with ASCII conversion. The communications sequences have been expanded to include CompoWay/F commands such as VARIABLE AREA READ/WRITE and OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.
xxxiv
Version Upgrades Upgrades for Version-1 (-V1) CS-series Serial Communications Boards/Units
The following functions have been added for the upgrade to version 1 of the CS-series CS1W-SCB21/41 Serial Communications Boards and CS1WSCU21 Serial Communications Units. (See note.) There are no changes to other functions.
xxxv
Version Upgrades
xxxvi
SECTION 1 Introduction
This section introduces the hardware and software functions of the Serial Communications Boards and the Serial Communications Units, including the communications modes, system configurations, and specifications. 1-1 1-2 Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-1 1-2-2 1-3 1-3-1 1-3-2 1-3-3 1-3-4 1-3-5 1-3-6 1-3-7 1-4 1-4-1 1-4-2 1-5 1-6 Serial Communications Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Communications Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Host Link Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protocol Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:N NT Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loopback Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Gateway Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No-protocol Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modbus-RTU Slave Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Communications Boards and Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3 3 4 10 11 13 13 14 15 15 16 16 16 16 19 27 27 31 31 41 47 48 48 49
Protocol Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6-1 1-6-2 1-6-3 Serial Communications Boards and Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protocol Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparison to Previous Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Serial Communications Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9-1 1-9-2 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section 1-1
1-1
Basic procedures and operations Selecting serial communications modes System configurations for serial communications modes Memory Area allocations to the Serial Communica- 2-2 Data Exchange with the CPU Unit tions Boards and Serial Communications Unit 2-3 I/O Memory Allocations Installing and wiring the Serial Communications Section 3 Installation and Wiring Boards and Serial Communications Unit Memory Area allocations to individual serial com- 4-2, 5-2, and 8-2 Setup Area Allocations munications modes 4-3, 5-3, and 8-3 Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Communications timing for slave-initiated Host Link 4-4 Communications Timing communications Ladder diagram programming in protocol macros 5-4 Using Protocol Macros Loopback tests for ports Section 11 Loopback Test Changing the communications port settings during Appendix R Changing Communications Port operation Settings Using STUP(237) Troubleshooting and maintenance Section 12 Troubleshooting and Maintenance The contents of standard system protocols and Appendix A to Appendix N connection methods to OMRON components SYSMAC CS/CJ-series Details on Host Link communications (including CS1G/H-CPU@@-E, CS1W-SCB21/41, ladder diagram programming for slave-initiated CS1W-SCU21 Communications Commands communications) Reference Manual (W342) Details on C-mode commands Details on FINS commands Details on the protocol macro function SYSMAC WS02-PSTC1-E CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344)
Overview
Section 1-2
1-2
Overview
This section gives an overview of the Serial Communications Boards and the Serial Communications Unit.
1-2-1
Models
Connectable Devices
The following serial communications modes are supported by the Serial Communications Unit: Host Link (SYSMAC WAY) (see note 1), protocol macro, 1:N NT Link (see note 2), no-protocol (see note 1), Modbus-RTU slave (see note 3), and loopback test modes. The devices shown in the following diagram can be connected.
Programmable Terminal (PT) Programming Device (excluding Programming Console) Host computer
Host computer
Overview
Note
Section 1-2
(1) The Host Link 1:1 and no-protocol modes are supported by unit version 1.2 or later. (2) Only a 1:N NT Link is supported. A 1:1 NT Link is not supported. (3) The Modbus-RTU slave mode is supported by unit version 1.3 or later. A serial communications mode for the Serial Gateway is also provided, enabling connection with the following devices.
Modbus-RTU-compatible device (e.g., Inverter) Modbus-ASCII-compatible device (e.g., Servo) PLC (Host Link)
FINS message Serial Communications Board with unit version 1.2 or later CPU Unit
Protocol conversion Protocol conversion
FINS message
1-2-2
CS Series
Overview
Section 1-2
CJ Series
Serial Communications Unit
PA205R
POWER
SYSMAC CJ1G-CPU44
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
SCU41
RUN RDY
TERM OFF
ERC
SD1 SD2
RD1 RD2
TER1
ERH
ON
OPEN
WIRE 2
01 EF 2
3456
UNIT NO.
789A
L1
MCPWR BUSY
AC100-240V INPUT
L2/N
PERIPHERAL
PORT
CJ1W-SCU41-V1 (One RS-232C and One RS422A/485 Port) CJ1W-SCU42 (One RS-232C and One RS422A/485 Port)
RS-422A/485 port RS-232C port
RS-232C port
RS-232C port
Connectable Devices
The following serial communications modes are supported by the Serial Communications Boards: Host Link (SYSMAC WAY) (see note 1), protocol macro, 1:N NT Link (see note 2), no-protocol (see note 1), Modbus-RTU slave (see
BCD
PORT2
Overview
Section 1-2
note 3), and loopback test modes. The devices shown in the following diagram can be connected.
General-purpose external device Programmable Terminal (PT) Programming Device (excluding Programming Host computer Console)
CS/CJ-series PLC
Host computer
Note
(1) The Host Link 1:1 and no-protocol modes are supported by unit version 1.2 or later. (2) Only a 1:N NT Link is supported. A 1:1 NT Link is not supported. (3) The Modbus-RTU slave mode is supported by unit version 1.3 or later. A serial communications mode for the Serial Gateway is also provided, enabling connection with the following devices.
Modbus-RTU-compatible device (e.g., Inverter) Modbus-ASCII-compatible device (e.g., Servo) PLC (Host Link) CompoWay/Fcompatible OMRON component FINS message Serial Communications Unit with unit version 1.2 or later
CPU Unit
FINS message
Overview
Section 1-2
This improvement allows you to connect to high-speed external devices that continuously send data with a send cycle shorter than could be handled with the CJ1W-SCU@1-V1.
CJ1W-SCU@1-V1
CJ1W-SCU@1-V1 Serial Communications Unit
CJ1W-SCU@2
CJ1W-SCU@2 Serial Communications Unit
Sensor, code reader, or other general-purpose external device that sends data continuously RS-232C or RS-422A/485 Not all of the data could be received if the send cycle was too short.
Sensor, code reader, or other general-purpose external device RS-232C or RS-422A/485 Data can be received continuously even for a short cycle.
The following table lists the cycle times for which data can be received continuously.
Condition CJ1W-SCU@1-V CJ1W-SCU@2 Cycle times for which data can be received continuously No-protocol Mode Protocol Macros 34.5 ms 10.5 ms 0.8 ms 0.8 ms
Refer to SECTION 10 Communications Performance for details. Faster Processing from Data Reception to Storage in I/O Memory in the CPU Unit In No-protocol Mode, the DRXDU(261) instruction (see note) can be used in a ladder program in the CPU Unit to store data in the reception buffers of the Serial Communications Unit faster than is possible for the CJ1W-SCU@1-V1. This improves system throughput and tact time. Note Supported by CJ2 CPU Units with unit version 1.1 or later.
CJ1W-SCU@2 Serial Communications Unit CJ2 CPU Units with unit version 1.1 or later.
Reception buffers
Ladder program
DRXDU
Overview
Section 1-2
The following table lists the times required from when data is received until the data is stored in I/O memory.
Condition RXDU(255) instruction with CJ1W-SCU@1-V1 DRXDU(261) instruction with CJ1W-SCU@2 Time required in No-protocol Mode from data reception until storage in I/O memory 34 ms 0.63 ms
Refer to SECTION 10 Communications Performance for details. In Protocol Macro Mode, data received for Recv commands in communications sequences is stored in the receive data storage area faster than is possible for the CJ1W-SCU@1-V1. The following table lists the times required from when data is received until the data is stored in I/O memory.
Time required from data reception until data storage in I/O memory PMCR instruction with 10.5 ms CJ1W-SCU@1-V1 PMCR instruction with 0.7 ms CJ1W-SCU@2 Condition
Refer to SECTION 10 Communications Performance for details. Faster Processing from Instruction Execution to Data Transmission in No-protocol Mode In No-protocol Mode, the time required from executing the DTXDU(262) instruction (see note) in the ladder program in the CPU Unit until the I/O memory data is actually sent from the serial port on the Serial Communications Unit is faster than was possible with the CJ1W-SCU@1-V1. Note Supported by CJ2 CPU Units with unit version 1.1 or later. The following table lists the times required from when the instruction is executed until the data is sent.
Condition TXDU(256) instruction with CJ1WSCU@1-V1 DTXDU(262) instruction with CJ1WSCU@2 Time required in No-protocol Mode from instruction execution until data is sent 19 ms
0.105 ms
Refer to SECTION 10 Communications Performance for details. CPU Unit Interrupt Notification for Data Reception in No-protocol Mode In No-protocol Mode, an external interrupt task in the CPU Unit can be executed when data is received by the Serial Communications Unit from an external device. This can allow the CPU Unit to read the data from the Unit sooner. If the DRXDU(261) instruction (see note) is executed in the external interrupt task, data can be received with consistent timing anywhere in the cycle time. Note Supported by CJ2 CPU Units with unit version 1.1 or later.
Overview
CJ1W-SCU@2 Serial Communications Unit
Section 1-2
CJ2 CPU Units with unit version 1.1 or later.
Sensor, code reader, or other general-purpose external device RS-232C or RS-422A/485 An interrupt is generated to notify the CPU Unit when data is received.
Clear or Hold Reception Buffers after Instruction Execution in Noprotocol Mode With the CJ1W-SCU@1-V1, the reception buffers are cleared unconditionally immediately after the RXD(235) or RXDU(255) instruction is executed. With the CJ1W-SCU@2, a setting is provided in the DM Area words allocated to the Unit to specify whether to hold or clear the reception buffers after DRXDU(261) execution.
Maximum Baud Rate With the CJ1W-SCU@2, the maximum baud rate has been increased to 230,400 bps. This enables connecting high-speed external devices. This baud rate can be used for all serial communications modes except for NT Link. This compares to the previous baud rates as shown in the following table.
Model (unit version) Communications mode CJ1W-SCU@1-V1 with NT Link, Serial Gateway, Modbusunit version 1.x RTU, or Host Link No-protocol or Protocol Macro CJ1W-SCU@2 with Serial Gateway, Modbus-RTU, Host unit version 2.x Link, No-protocol, Protocol Macro NT Link Maximum baud rate 115,200 bps 57,600 bps 230,400 bps 115,200 bps
Maximum Communications Distance for RS-422A/485 The maximum communications distance of 500 m for the CJ1W-SCU31/41V1 has been increased to 1,200 m for the CJ1W-SCU32/42. This enables connecting to remote external devices.
Terminal-block Connectors
The RS-422A/485 port for the CJ1W-SCU32/42 has been changed from a Dsub connector to a terminal-block connector.
Protocol Overview
Simple Backup Function
Section 1-3
The CPU Units Simple Backup Function can be used to automatically backup, restore, and compare the Protocol Macro data (both standard system protocol and user-set protocol data) in the Serial Communications Board or Units flash memory with the data in the CPU Units Memory Card. The Protocol Macro data is backed up, restored, or compared along with all of the data in the CPU Unit. (The Simple Backup Function can be used with CS1-H, CJ1H, and CJ1M CPU Units only.) Note *The CS-series Serial Communications Boards/Units without the -V1 suffix do not support this Simple Backup Function, but the CJ1W-SCU21/41 does support this function even though the model number lacks the -V1 suffix.
1-3
Protocol Overview
A Serial Communications Board is an Inner Board for CS-series CPU Units that provides RS-232C and/or RS-422A/485 serial ports. An Inner Board is an option and is installed in the CPU Unit. A Serial Communications Unit is a CPU Bus Unit that provides two RS-232C serial ports or one RS-232C and one RS-422A/485 port. The following eight serial communications modes can be used as required for each serial port. Host Link: For connections between host computers and PLCs Protocol macro: For communications between PLCs and general-purpose external devices 1:N NT Link: For communications between PLCs and Programmable Terminals (PTs)
Loopback test: For testing the communications ports Serial Gateway No-protocol 1:1 Host Link Modbus-RTU slave mode Note (1) The Serial Gateway can also be executed in protocol macro mode. (2) Modbus-ASCII mode is not supported.
PLC Series Product Model number Serial ports Host Link Protocol macro Serial communications mode 1:N NT Link (See note 2.) Loopback test Serial Gateway Serial Gateway in protocol macro mode OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Noprotocol (See note 3.) OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK 1:1 Host Link ModbusRTU slave
CS
CS1WSCB21-V1 CS1WSCB41-V1
OK OK OK OK OK
OK OK OK OK OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
10
Protocol Overview
PLC Series Product Model number Serial ports Host Link Protocol macro Serial communications mode 1:N NT Link (See note 2.) Loopback test Serial Gateway Serial Gateway in protocol macro mode OK OK OK OK OK OK
Section 1-3
ModbusRTU slave
CJ
RS-232C RS-232C
OK OK
OK OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK PT
OK OK OK OK OK OK None
OK OK OK OK OK OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK
RS-422A/485 OK (See note 1.) OK RS-422A/485 OK (See note 1.) OK RS-422A/485 OK (See note 1.) OK RS-232C OK Host computer or Programming Device OK Generalpurpose external device
---
Device to be connected
Note
1. A 4-wire connection must be used when using Host Link communications for an RS-422A/485 connector. 2. A 1:1 NT Link is not supported. 3. No-protocol Mode can be used with CS1 and CJ1 CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later and CJ2 CPU Units only. 4. High-speed, no-protocol communications are possible when the DRXDU(261) and DTXDU(262) instructions are used with a CJ1WSCU22/32/42 Serial Communications Unit combined with a CJ2 CPU Unit with unit version 1.1 or later. A connection example for each serial communications mode is shown in the following sections for a Serial Communications Unit. The examples apply equally as well to the Serial Communications Boards.
1-3-1
11
Protocol Overview
Sending C-mode Commands
Section 1-3
Host Link
C-mode (Host Link) command
FINS command
Host Link
FINS command FINS command
Host Link
Slave-initiated Communications
SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490) Host Link
FINS command
SEND(090): Sends data to host computer RECV(098): Reads data from host computer CMND(490): Executes any FINS command
Slave-initiated FINS commands can also be sent from PLCs on remote networks. SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490) Host Link
FINS command
FINS command
Unit version 1.2 or later supports the 1:1 Host Link protocol for C200H, C1000H, and C2000H CPU Units, which enables the use of host programs for 1:1 Host Links created for these PLCs. A Host Link-compatible device selection function is also provided for complete compatibility with the C-series Host Link and CVM1/CV-series Host Link.
12
Protocol Overview
Section 1-3
1-3-2
Protocol Macros
Data transfer procedures (protocols) with general-purpose external devices are created using the CX-Protocol to match the communications specifications (half-duplex or full-duplex, and start-stop synchronization) of the external device. These protocols are stored in the Serial Communications Boards or the Serial Communications Unit, and enable data to be exchanged with general-purpose external devices simply by executing the PMCR(260) instruction in the CPU Unit. Standard system protocols for exchanging data with OMRON devices (such as Temperature Controllers, Intelligent Signal Processors, Bar Code Readers, and Modems) are provided as a standard feature in the Serial Communications Boards, the Serial Communications Unit, and the CX-Protocol. The CXProtocol can also be used to change the standard system protocols according to user requirements.
PMCR(260)
The following functions are supported for unit version 1.2 or later. Serial Gateway can be executed during protocol macro execution. An new I/O refresh method is provided for constant data conversion of link words. The contents of the reception buffer can be held while the PMCR(260) instruction is executing. A baud rate of 57,600 bps is possible (115,200 bps is not possible). Note A baud rate of 115,200 bps is not possible for the CS1W-SCB@1-V1, CS1W-SCU@1-V1, or CJ1W-SCU@1-V1. However, with the CJ1WSCU@2, a baud rate of 115,200 or 230,400 bps is possible.
1-3-3
1:N NT Links
A PLC can be connected to one or more Programmable Terminals (PTs) using an RS-232C or RS-422A/485 port. The I/O memory of the PLC is allocated to the Status Control Areas and the Status Notification Areas used by the PTs, as well as to display objects, such as touch switches, lamps, and memory tables. This enables the status of the I/O memory in the PLC to be controlled and monitored by operations from the PTs, without the use of a ladder diagram programming in the PLC. Up to eight PTs can be connected to a PLC. Note The user does not need to be aware of NT Link commands. The user only has to allocate the PLC memory to the PTs.
13
Protocol Overview
Section 1-3
1:N NT Link
PT
PT
Note
1. The serial port on the PT must be set to a 1:N NT Link. 2. The Serial Communications Boards and Units do not support 1:1 NT Links. The NT Link must be set to 1:N even if only one PT is connected. Connection is not possible to PTs that do not support 1:N NT Links. 3. The NT20S, NT600S, NT30, NT30C, NT620, NT620C, and NT625C cannot be used if the cycle time of the CPU Unit is 800 ms or longer (even if only one of these PTs is used in a 1:N NT Link). 4. The Programming Console functions of the PT (Expansion Mode) cannot be used when connected to Serial Communications Board or Unit ports. They can be used only by connecting to the peripheral port or RS-232C port on the CPU Unit. 5. Set a unique unit number for each PT connected to the same PLC. If the same unit number is set for more than one PT, malfunctions will occur. 6. NT Link serial communications are unique and are not compatible with other serial communications modes.
1-3-4
Loopback Test
A connector with a loopback connection is attached to the specified serial port to perform loopback tests. Data is sent to this port, and the communications circuit is tested by comparing the transmitted data and the data returned by loopback. Note This loopback test is performed inside the specified serial port. It is not a loopback test using the RS-232C or RS-422A/485 communications path.
Loopback test
14
Protocol Overview
Section 1-3
1-3-5
CMND
Serial Gateway
FINS
Note: Or Modbus-RTU commands or Modbus ASCII commands CompoWay-compatible OMRON component, Modbus-RTU-, or Modbus ASCII-compatible device
Network
CMND
Serial Gateway
FINS FINS
FINS
1-3-6
No-protocol Mode
No-protocol mode enables receiving or sending data using data receive or send commands (see note). No-protocol mode, however, can be used only with CS1/CJ1 CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later in which a Serial Communications Board or Unit with unit version 1.2 or later is installed or CJ2 CPU Units in which a Serial Communications Unit with unit version 1.2 or later is installed. Use the no-protocol mode when the data send and receive protocols are to be created by the user, or when connecting to devices that only receive or send data, such as bar code readers, or printers. Note Serial Communications Boards send/receive data using TXD(236)/RXD(235) instructions. Serial Communications Units send/receive data using TXDU(256)/RXDU(255) or DTXDU(262)/DRXDU(261) instructions.
E.g., Execute data transmission Serial Communications Unit E.g., TXDU
ST
Text
CR+LF
No-protocol Note: Start code and end code can be specified. General-purpose external device
15
Features
Section 1-4
Note The DTXDU(262) and DRXDU(261) instructions can be used only when a CJ1W-SCU@2 Serial Communications Unit is connected to a CJ2 CPU Unit. These instructions enable faster data communications than the previous TXDU(256) and RXDU(255) instructions. Also, with the CJ1W-SCU@2, an interrupt can be generated in the CPU Unit when data is received to execute an external interrupt task.
1-3-7
1-4
1-4-1
Features
This section describes the features of the Serial Communications Boards, the Serial Communications Unit, and the protocols.
A total of up to 16 CPU Bus Units can be mounted on the CPU Rack or an Expansion Rack. The total of 16 must include all Serial Communications Units and all other CPU Bus Units. The PLC can thus be expanded to provide additional serial ports as required by the system.
1-4-2
Protocols
Host Link communications are supported by all CS/CJ-series CPU Units. Serial Communications Boards and Units can be used to connect a single PLC to more than one host computer for Host Link communications, including slave-initiated communications. Host Link communications provide the following features.
Connect One Computer to Multiple PLCs Computer Monitoring and Control of PLCs FINS Commands for Complete Control Redundant Error Checking
An RS-422A/485 port can be used to connect one host computer to up to 32 CS/CJ-series PLCs. Host Link communications enable the host computer to monitor or control PLC operations and to read and write I/O memory in the PLCs. In addition to C-series (Host Link) commands, FINS commands are also supported. FINS commands give you the power to control CS/CJ-series PLC functionality. Both vertical and horizontal (FCS) parity checks are performed on communications data to achieve essentially error-free communications. Combining
16
Features
Section 1-4
error checking and retry processing goes one step further to eliminate nearly all the effects of communications problems.
Each Serial Communications Board and Unit provides two serial ports that can be used simultaneously to connect to two different host computers. A total of up to 16 CPU Bus Units, including the Serial Communications Units, can be mounted to one PLC. If all 16 CPU Bus Units are Serial Communications Units, then up to 32 ports can be added. Communications can be performed either by sending a command from a host computer and having the PLC return a response, or by sending a command from a PLC and having the computer send a response. Starting communications from a slave is called unsolicited communications, and is made possible through the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions. These can be used to send FINS commands to a host computer connected locally or to a host computer connected to a remote network up to three networks away (counting the local network). A FINS command contained within a Host Link header and terminator can be sent using Host Link communications to PLCs connected not only on Host Link networks, but also other interconnected remote networks up to three networks away (counting the local network). Various types of networks can exist between the source of the command and the destination of the command.
Slave-initiated Communications
Host Link
Bridge
Ethernet Network
A FINS command contained within a Host Link header and terminator can be sent using Host Link communications to a host computer connected to a PLC on a remote network up to three networks away (counting the local network, but not counting the final Host Link connection). Various types of networks can exist between the PLC sending the command and the destination of the command.
Host Link
Bridge
Ethernet Network
Protocol Macros
The main features of the protocol macro functions are described below. For details, refer to the CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344). Wide Range of Communications Protocols Communications are possible with virtually any general-purpose external device, provided it has an RS-232C or RS-422A/485 port, supports half-
17
Features
Section 1-4
duplex or full-duplex communications, and supports start-stop synchronization.
Send Frames and Receive Frames Matching Specifications Communications-related Functions Send/Receive Monitoring
Send frames (command + data and other send frames) and receive frames (response and other frames) can be created and registered according to the communications frame specifications of the external device. Error check code calculations, frame length calculations during sending, and ASCIIHexadecimal conversion of numeric data are supported. Receive wait monitoring, receive completion monitoring, and send completion monitoring are supported. If monitoring times are exceeded, send/receive can either be terminated, or retry processing can be performed. Send/receive retry processing can be automatically executed when an error occurs, simply by setting the number of retries. Variables for reading PLC memory can be included in the actual send frames. These can be used as destination addresses or data when reading PLC data while sending. Variables for writing to PLC memory can be also included in the actual receive frames. These can be used to write the contents of destination addresses or data to the PLC during reception. Repeat processing (repeat counters) for send/receive processing can be specified in communications sequences. This enables the same data to be sent by switching destination addresses during communications 1:N (N = 32 max. due to restrictions in the physical layer) or by switching the PLC memory write destination addresses during data reception. An interrupt can be created in the PLCs CPU Unit during data reception, and an interrupt program can be executed in the CPU Unit. (The PLC interrupt function is supported only for the Serial Communications Boards. This function cannot be used with the CJ1W-SCU@1, CJ1W-SCU@@-V1, and CJ1WSCU@2 Serial Communications Units.) The contents of up to 15 set of expected receive data can be compared with the receive data to determine the next process. LRC2 (twos complement of LRC), and SUM1 (ones complement of SUM) have been added to the error check codes. At any step of the communications sequence, the next process can be made to wait until a sync signal from the PLCs CPU Unit has been input. This enables processing, such as data manipulations, to be performed in the CPU Unit during the communications sequence. With the conventional protocol macro functions, only half-duplex transmissions were possible. With half-duplex mode, the reception buffer is cleared immediately after the send operation is completed. Therefore, if there was a rapid response from the remote device, for example, the data received between data sending and the completion of the send operation could not be accessed as receive data by the next receive operation. Support for the full-duplex transmissions enables all the data received in a sequence to be accessed. Data can also be received from a remote device while sending.
Retry Processing PLC Read/Write Variables in Send Frames and Receive Frames
Switch 1:N Communications or the Data Write Destinations Using Repeat Processing PLC Interrupts During Data Reception
Next Process Switching According to Receive Data New Error Check Codes Step Queuing for Sync Signal from the PLC
Note
Full-duplex transmissions can be used with either RS-232C or RS-422A/485 as long as 1:1, 4-wire connections are used. Full-duplex transmissions cannot be used with 1:N connections or 2-wire connections. With full-duplex mode, the reception buffer is cleared only immediately before a communications sequence is executed. When a reception or other fault occurs, the receive data can be cleared at any time using the reception buffer clear (FLUSH) command.
18
System Configurations
Control ER Signal at Any Time
Section 1-5
With a connection to a modem, the ER signal is used to show the communications enabled status of a Serial Communications Board or Unit (Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)). In conventional operations, the ER signal could be turned ON only while a communications sequence was being executed. Improving this function has enabled the ER signal to be turned ON or OFF at any time during a communications sequence. This enables modem connections and disconnections to be performed by a protocol macro. The ER signal can also be kept ON, even after a communications sequence has been completed. In this case, the ER signal remains ON, even after it has been switched to a different serial communications mode (for example, Host Link). This function enables remote programming and monitoring to be performed using remote Programming Devices, by switching to the Host Link mode with the STUP(237) instruction once the connection has been made with the modem.
1-5
System Configurations
This section explains the system configuration supported by each serial communications mode.
Note 3. Note 2.
NT-AL001-E Resistance ON, 5-V power
Note 3.
NT-AL001-E Resistance ON
Note 3. Note 2.
NT-AL001-E Resistance ON, 5-V power
Note 3.
NT-AL001-E Resistance ON
CS1W-SCU21V1 CJ1W-SCU21V1/CJ1WSCU22 CJ1W-SCU41V1/CJ1WSCU42 NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapter 5-V power supply
Port 1 or 2 Port 1 or 2
Port 2
19
System Configurations
PLC: Computer 1:1 Port: RS-422A/ 485 Connection configuration Required devices Connected serial port/Remarks
Section 1-5
Possible command flow Host computer to PLC (4-wire only): C-mode or FINS commands PLC to Host computer (4-wire only): FINS commands only
CS1W-SCB41- Port 2 V1 NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapter 5-V power supply CS1W-SCU31V1 CJ1W-SCU31V1/CJ1WSCU32 CJ1W-SCU41V1/CJ1WSCU42 NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapter 5-V power supply RS-232C RS422A/485 For NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Port 1 or 2 Port 1 or 2
Port 1
RS-232C RS422A/485 For NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Host computer to PLC (RS-422A/485 section: 4-wire): C-mode or FINS commands PLC to Host computer: Commands cannot be sent.
Converts between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 5-V power For NT-AL001-E supply Link Adapter CS1W-SCU21- Port 1 or 2 V1 CJ1W-SCU21- Port 1 or 2 V1/CJ1WSCU22 CJ1W-SCU41- Port 2 V1/CJ1WSCU42 NT-AL001-E Converts Converting between Link Adapter RS-232C and RS-422A/485 5-V power For NT-AL001-E supply Link Adapter
20
System Configurations
PLC: Computer 1:N Port: RS-422A/ 485
Note 3.
Section 1-5
Required devices Connected serial port/Remarks Possible command flow Host computer to PLC (4-wire only): C-mode or FINS commands PLC to Host computer: Commands cannot be sent.
Connection configuration
Note 4.
CS1W-SCB41- Port 2 V1 NT-AL001-E RS-232C Converting RS422A/485 Link Adapter 5-V power supply For NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Port 1 or 2 Port 1 or 2 Port 1 RS-232C RS422A/485 For NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Port 1 or 2 Port 1 RS-232C RS422A/485 For NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Port 1 or 2
Note 2.
Resistance ON
Note 4.
Note 2.
Resistance ON
CS1W-SCU31V1 CJ1W-SCU31V1/ CJ1W-SCU41V1 NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapter 5-V power supply CJ1W-SCU32
Note 3.
RS-232C RS-422A /485 RS-422 /485
Resistance ON, 5-V power
Note 2.
Connection to Serial Communications Board or Serial Any Serial Communications Unit Communications Board or Unit Communications Unit: Controller Link Unit or Ethernet Unit
Controller Link or Ethernet network
or
Host computer to PLC: FINS commands only PLC to Host computer: FINS commands only (RS-422A/485: 4-wire only)
Communications can be sent across three different networks (counting the local network, but not including a Host Link connection). Routing tables must be set in the PLCs.
Host Link
21
System Configurations
Note
Section 1-5
1. The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m. The RS-232C standard, however, does not cover baud rates above 19.2 Kbps. Refer to the manual for the device being connected to confirm support. 2. The total cable length for RS-422A/485 systems, including branch cables, is 500 m max. when NT-AL001-E Link Adapters are used. 3. Here, the maximum cable length is limited to 2 m when an NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is connected. 4. Branch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long. 5. Four-wire connections must be used for RS-422A/485 connections with Host Link communications. 6. Resistance ON indicates that the terminating resistance must be turned ON. 7. 5-V power indicates that a 5-V power supply is required for the Link Adapter. Refer to the Link Adapter manual for details. Be sure that the power supply has sufficient capacity and accuracy and wire it away from highpower lines and another sources of noise. A 5-V power supply is not required for a Link Adapter connected to a Serial Communications Board or Unit because power is supplied from pin 6 of the connector. 8. The maximum baud rate of the NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is 64 Kbps. Do not use 115.2 Kbps or 230.4 Kbps when a Link Adapter is connected.
22
System Configurations
Protocol Macros, Serial Gateway, No-protocol, or Modbus-RTU Slave
PLC: External device 1:1 Port: RS-232C Connection configuration Required devices CS1W-SCB21V1 CS1W-SCB41V1 NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapter 5-V power supply
Section 1-5
Connected serial port/Remarks Port 1 or 2 Port 1 Converts between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 For NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
RS-232C interface Note 3. NT-AL001-E RS-232C RS-422A/485 Resistance ON Note 3. NT-AL001-E RS-232C RS-422A/485 Resistance ON Note 2. Note 2. NT-AL001-E Resistance ON 5-V power RS-232C interface
CS1W-SCU21V1 CJ1W-SCU21V1/CJ1WSCU22 CJ1W-SCU41V1/CJ1WSCU44 NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapter 5-V power supply
Port 1 or 2 Port 1 or 2
Port 2
23
System Configurations
PLC: External device 1:1 Port: RS422A/485 Connection configuration Required devices CS1W-SCU31V1 CJ1W-SCU31V1/CJ1WSCU32 CJ1W-SCU41V1/CJ1WSCU42 NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapter 5-V power supply CS1W-SCB41V1 NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapter 5-V power supply
Section 1-5
Connected serial port/Remarks Port 1 or 2 Port 1 or 2
Port 1
Convert between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 For NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Port 2 Convert between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 For NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
Resistance ON
24
System Configurations
PLC: External device 1:N Port: RS232C Connection configuration Required devices CS1W-SCB21V1 CS1W-SCB41V1 NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapter B500-AL001 Link Adapter 5-V power supply
Section 1-5
Connected serial port/Remarks Port 1 or 2 Port 1 Converts between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 For RS-422A/485 branching For NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
RS-422A/485
Note 2.
Note 4. Resistance ON Note 3. NT-AL001-E RS-232C
Resistance ON
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C interface
Note 2.
RS-422A/485
RS-422A/485
CS1W-SCU21V1 CJ1W-SCU21V1/CJ1WSCU22 CJ1W-SCU41V1/CJ1WSCU42 NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapter B500-AL001 Link Adapter 5-V power supply
Port 1 or 2 Port 1 or 2
Port 2
Converts between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 For RS-422A/485 branching For NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
Resistance ON
RS-232C interface
Note 2.
RS-422A/485
25
System Configurations
PLC: External device 1:N Port: RS422A/485 Connection configuration Required devices CS1W-SCB41V1 NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapter B500-AL001 Link Adapter 5-V power supply
Section 1-5
Connected serial port/Remarks Port 2 Converts between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 For RS-422A/485 branching For NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
Resistance ON
RS-422A/485 Note 2.
Resistance ON
RS-232C interface
Resistance ON
RS-422A/485 Note 2.
Resistance ON
CS1W-SCU31V1 CJ1W-SCU31V1/CJ1WSCU32 CJ1W-SCU41V1/CJ1WSCU42 NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapter B500-AL001 Link Adapter 5-V power supply
Port 1 or 2 Port 1 or 2
Port 1
Converts between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 For RS-422A/485 branching For NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
RS-232C interface
Note
1. The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m. The RS-232C standard, however, does not cover baud rates above 19.2 Kbps. Refer to the manual for the device being connected to confirm support. 2. The total cable length for RS-422A/485 systems, including branch cables, is 500 m max. for the CS1W-SCB@1-V1, CS1W-SCU@1-V1, and CJ1W-
26
Specifications
Section 1-6
SCU@1-V1 and 1,200 m max. for the CJ1W-SCU@2. The total cable length for RS-422A/485 systems, including branch cables, is 500 m max. when NT-AL001-E Link Adapters are used. The baud rate and the communications distance sometimes depend on the remote device. Confirm the baud rates and communications distance supported by connected devices. 3. Here, the maximum cable length is limited to 2 m when an NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is connected. 4. Branch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.
NT Link Communications
NT Link communications are used to connect an OMRON Programmable Controller (PLC) and Programmable Terminal (PT). Up to 8 PTs can be connected to one PLC. For details on the system configuration, refer to the users manual for the PT.
1-6
1-6-1
Specifications
Serial Communications Boards and Unit
Serial Communications Boards Serial Communications Unit Inner Board CPU Bus Unit CS1W-SCB21-V1 CS1W-SCB41-V1 CS1W-SCU21-V1 CS1W-SCU31-V1 RS-232C RS-232C RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-232C RS-422A/485 Host Link, protocol macro, NT Link, or loopback test can be selected for each port. Unit Ver. 1.2 or later also supports Serial Gateway, no-protocol, and 1:1 Host Link modes. (Note: The Serial Gateway can also be executed in protocol macro mode.) Unit Ver. 1.3 or later also supports Modbus-RTU slave mode. One Board per Inner Board slot None None A total of up to 16 Units, including all other CPU Bus Units. No restrictions on the None mounting location. Allocated 25 words of the 100 words in Allocated 25 words of the 25 words in the the Inner Board CIO Area (constant CPU Bus Unit CIO Area (constant data data exchange with the CPU Unit) exchange with the CPU Unit)
CS Series
Device name Classification Model number Serial ports Port 1 Port 2 Protocol Port 1 Port 2
Data exchange Ordinary with the CPU refreshing of Unit software switches and status Transfer from the Of the 768 words in the Inner Board DM CPU Unit set by Area, each serial port is allocated 10 the system words (total 20 words). Data is transferred from the CPU Unit at the following times: Startup or restart Ladder instruction: STUP(237)
Of the CPU Bus Unit DM Area, each serial port is allocated 10 words (total 20 words). Data is transferred from the CPU Unit at the following times: Startup or restart Ladder instruction: STUP(237)
Port Settings Changing Flag turns ON Port Settings Changing Flag turns ON (Auxiliary Area) (Auxiliary Area) CS1 CPU Units High-speed: CS1H-CPU67-V1/CPU66-V1/CPU65-V1/CPU64-V1/CPU63-V1 Standard: CS1G-CPU45-V1/CPU44-V1/CPU43-V1/CPU42-V1 CS1-H CPU Units High-speed: CS1H-CPU67H/CPU66H/CPU65H/CPU64H/CPU63H Standard: CS1G-CPU45H/CPU44H/CPU43H/CPU42H Note A CS1-H CPU Unit with Unit Ver. 3.0 or later is required to use the no-protocol mode.
27
Specifications
Device name Simple Backup Function
Section 1-6
Serial Communications Boards Serial Communications Unit The CPU Units Simple Backup Function can be used to backup the Protocol Macro data in the Serial Communications Board/Unit to the CPU Units Memory Card. The backed-up data can be restored or compared. (The Simple Backup Function can be used with CS1-H CPU Units only.) None CPU Backplanes: CS1WBC103/BC083/BC053/BC033/BC023 CS Expansion Backplanes: CS1W-BI103/BI083/BI053/BI033 280 mA + x 360 mA + x 290 mA + x 400 mA 100 g max. 110 g max. 200 g max. 250 g max.
Applicable Backplanes
Note
The current consumption is for one Serial Communications Board or Unit. When an NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is connected to the Serial Communications Board or Unit, power is supplied to the Link Adapter from the Board or Unit. A current consumption of 150 mA must be added for each Link Adapter that is connected. In the above specifications, x indicates that 150 mA must be added for each port to which an NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is connected to provide the required 5-V power supply.
28
Specifications CJ Series
Device name Classification Model number Serial ports Protocol
Section 1-6
Number of mount- CPU Unit able Units CPU Rack Expansion Rack Data exchange Ordinary with the CPU Unit refreshing of software switches and status Transfer from the CPU Unit set by the system
Serial Communications Unit CPU Bus Unit CJ1W-SCU21-V1 CJ1W-SCU31-V1 CJ1W-SCU41-V1 RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-422A/485 RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-232C Host Link, protocol macro, NT Link, or loopback test can be selected for each port. Unit Ver. 1.2 or later also supports Serial Gateway, no-protocol, and 1:1 Host Link modes. (Note: The Serial Gateway can also be executed in protocol macro mode.) Unit Ver. 1.3 or later also supports Modbus-RTU slave mode. None A total of up to 16 Units, including all other CPU Bus Units. No restrictions on the mounting location. Allocated 25 words of the 25 words in the CPU Bus Unit CIO Area (constant data exchange with the CPU Unit) Of the CPU Bus Unit DM Area, each serial port is allocated 10 words (total 20 words). Data is transferred from the CPU Unit at the following times: Startup or restart Ladder instruction: STUP(237) Port Settings Changing Flag turns ON (Auxiliary Area) CJ2 CPU Units CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP/CPU@@ CJ1 CPU Units CJ1G-CPU@@ CS1-H CPU Units High-speed: CJ1H-CPU@@H-R/CPU@@H Standard: CJ1G-CPU@@H CJ1M CPU Units CJ1M-CPU@@ Note A CJ1 CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later or a CJ2 CPU Unit is required to use the No-protocol Mode. The CPU Units Simple Backup Function can be used to backup the Protocol Macro data in the Serial Communications Board/Unit to the CPU Units Memory Card. The backed-up data can be restored or compared. (The Simple Backup Function can be used with the CJ2, CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units only.) 280 mA + x 380 mA 380 mA + x 110 g max. 110 g max. 110 g max.
Note
The current consumption is for one Serial Communications Unit. When an NTAL001-E Link Adapter is connected to the Serial Communications Board or Unit, power is supplied to the Link Adapter from the Board or Unit. A current consumption of 150 mA must be added for each Link Adapter that is connected. In the above specifications, x indicates that 150 mA must be added for each port to which an NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is connected to provide the required 5-V power supply.
29
Specifications
Section 1-6
Serial Communications Unit CPU Bus Unit CJ1W-SCU22 CJ1W-SCU32 CJ1W-SCU42 RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-422A/485 RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-232C Host Link, protocol macro, Serial Gateway (see note 1), No-protocol (see note 2), NT Link, Modbus-RTU Slave, loopback test, or 1:1 Host Link can be selected for each port.
Note
1. The Serial Gateway can also be executed in protocol macro mode. 2. An external interrupt task can be executed when data is received in Noprotocol Mode. If a CJ2 CPU Unit with unit version 1.1 or later is used, the high-speed communications instructions (DRXDU(261) and DTXDU(262)) can also be used. None A total of up to 16 Units, including all other CPU Bus Units. No restrictions on the mounting location. When using an external interrupt, mount the Serial Communications Unit in one of the following slots on the CPU Rack. External interrupt tasks will not be started if the Serial Communications Unit is in any other slot. With a CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP CPU Unit: Slots 0 to 3 With a CJ2H-CPU6@ or CJ1G/H-CPU@@H CPU Unit: Slots 0 to 4 With a CJ1M-CPU@@ CPU Unit: Slots 0 to 2 Allocated 25 words of the 25 words in the CPU Bus Unit CIO Area (constant data exchange with the CPU Unit) Of the CPU Bus Unit DM Area, each serial port is allocated 10 words (total 20 words). Data is transferred from the CPU Unit at the following times: Startup or restart Ladder instruction: STUP(237) Supporting CPU Units Port Settings Changing Flag turns ON (Auxiliary Area) CJ2 CPU Units CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP/CPU@@ CJ1 CPU Units CJ1G-CPU@@ CS1-H CPU Units High-speed: CJ1H-CPU@@H-R/CPU@@H Standard: CJ1G-CPU@@H CJ1M CPU Units CJ1M-CPU@@ Note A CS1-H CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later or a CJ2 CPU Unit is required to use the no-protocol mode. The CPU Units Simple Backup Function can be used to backup the Protocol Macro data in the Serial Communications Board/Unit to the CPU Units Memory Card. The backed-up data can be restored or compared. (The Simple Backup Function can be used with CJ2, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units only.) 280 mA + x 400 mA 360 mA + x 160 g max. 120 g max. 140 g max.
Number of mount- CPU Unit able Units CPU Rack Expansion Rack
Data exchange Ordinary with the CPU Unit refreshing of software switches and status Transfer from the CPU Unit set by the system
Note
The current consumption is for one Serial Communications Unit. When an NTAL001-E Link Adapter is connected to the Serial Communications Board or Unit, power is supplied to the Link Adapter from the Board or Unit. A current consumption of 150 mA must be added for each Link Adapter that is con-
30
Specifications
Section 1-6
nected. In the above specifications, x indicates that 150 mA must be added for each port to which an NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is connected to provide the required 5-V power supply.
1-6-2
General Specifications
The general specifications of the CS-series Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Unit conform to the general specifications of the CS-series CPU Unit. The general specifications of the CJ-series Serial Communications Unit conform to the general specifications of the CJ-series CPU Unit.
1-6-3
Protocol Specifications
Note
1. The baud rate and the communications distance sometimes depend on the remote device. Confirm the baud rates and communications distance supported by connected devices.
31
Specifications
Section 1-6
2. The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m. The RS-232C standard, however, does not cover baud rates above 19.2 Kbps. Refer to the manual for the device being connected to confirm support.
Connection configuration
Number of connected Units Maximum number of data exchange words between PLC and protocol macro function Operand setting Link word setting Direct setting
32
Specifications
Item Sequence contents (step common parameters) Number of steps per sequence Transmission control parameters Response notification method (operand) 16 max. Description
Section 1-6
X-on/X-off flow, RS/CS flow, delimiter control, or contention control, and modem control can be selected. Scan notification or interrupt notification (i.e., writing the receive data in the I/O memory area specified in the 4th operand of the PMCR(260) instruction) can be selected. Scan notification: Writes the receive data to I/O memory during CPU Unit scanning. Interrupt notification: Writes the receive data to I/O memory as soon as it is received, and at the same time specifies the execution of the interrupt program for the CPU Unit. Note The interrupt notification method can be executed only by a Serial Communications Board. It cannot be used for a Serial Communications Unit. Scan method (fixed) Board and Unit Interrupt notification Board only (see note 2) Interrupt notification Board only (see note 2) for reception case number Receive wait, receive completion, or send completion can be monitored. Setting range: 0.01 to 0.99 s, 0.1 to 9.9 s, 1 to 99 s, or 1 to 99 minutes Area in which data is exchanged between the CPU Unit and the Serial Communications Board or Unit during Communications Board or Unit refreshing. Two areas are possible for each device: An area for storing receive data and an area for storing send data. Note Unit Ver. 1.2 or later supports continuous I/O refreshing in addition to the previous on-request I/O refreshing. (The refreshing method is selected in the allocated DM Area words.)
33
Specifications
Item Step contents Commands Description
Section 1-6
Repeat counter Retry count Send wait time With or without response write (operand) Next processing
Receive message
Reception matrix
Send only (SEND), receive only (RECV), send and receive (SEND&RECV), wait (WAIT), reception buffer clear (FLUSH), ER-ON (OPEN), or ER-OFF (CLOSE) 1 to 255 times 0 to 9 (Only when the command is SEND&RECV) 0.01 to 0.99 s, 0.1 to 9.9 s, 1 to 99 s, or 1 to 99 minutes (Only when the command is SEND or SEND&RECV) When receive processing is completed (when the receive data is stored in the area specified in the 4th operand of the PMCR(260) instruction), whether or not to store the received messages can be selected. When a step has ended normally, End (sequence completed), Next (proceed to the next step No.), Goto (go to the specified step No.), or Abort (interrupt the step and terminate that sequence) can be selected. When a step has ended abnormally, End, Next, Goto, or Abort can be selected. Data sent to the Consists of a header (*1), address (*2), length, data (*2), error check code (*3), and terminator specified address when the command (*1). is SEND or For an explanation of *1, *2, and *3, see the next SEND&RECV. page. Data sent from the specified address when the command is RECV or SEND&RECV. When the command Specifies the receive messages and the next processing for each of cases No. 00 to No. 15. Of the is RECV or SEND&RECV, sets maximum 16 cases, one case must be set as Other in the receive messages (in addition to the the expected set receive messages). receive messages (15 max.), and switches to the next processing according to the message received.
Note
1. The baud rate and the communications distance sometimes depend on the remote device. Confirm the baud rates and communications distance supported by connected devices. 2. A macro syntax error will occur if the interrupt notification method is executed for a Serial Communications Unit. 3. When using 2-wire RS-422A/485 communications in Protocol Macro Mode, set only modem controls for the send control parameters, and do not use RS/CS flow controls.
34
Specifications
Item *1: Header and terminator data attributes *2: Data attributes of addresses and data in send/receive messages Description ASCII data, hexadecimal data, or control code
Section 1-6
Constant
Constant Variable
ASCII data, hexadecimal data, or control code (with an address, no control code is possible) No conversion, conversion to ASCII data, or conversion to hexadecimal data (the read/write direction can be specified) Designa- (X, Y) tion X: Effective address (where read from, or where written to) method Y: Data size (1 to 1,000) Note The data size is the number of bytes on the transmission path. Set leading Word designa- Word read (I/O Specify using address + n the 3rd opertion memory to (The linear and of the send data) expression aN PMCR(260) + b, including instruction. Specify using a repeat counter N, is also poslink word. sible for n.) I/O memory direct designation Word write Specify using (receive data to the 4th operI/O memory) and of the PMCR(260) instruction. Specify using a link word. I/O memory direct designation Wild card * Any data or address can be received (only in receive messages) Repeat counter N
35
Specifications
Item Message unit contents *2: Data attributes of addresses and data in send/receive messages Variables Y Linear expression including repeat counter Wild card Description aN + b
Section 1-6
*3: Error check codes Maximum length of send/receive messages Maximum number of 96 attributes (see note 1) data attributes registered in one message Maximum number of 30 attributes (see note 2) write data attributes registered in one message Trace function
Can be received regardless of the length (only in receive messages) Set leading Word designa- Word read (I/O Specify using address + n the 3rd opertion memory to (The linear and of the send data) expression aN PMCR(260) + b, including instruction. Specify using a repeat counter N, is also poslink word. sible for n.) I/O memory direct designation LRC, LRC2, CRC-CCITT, CRC-16, SUM, SUM1, and SUM2 can be calculated. 1,000 bytes. (A maximum length between 200 and 1,000 bytes can be set in the Setup Area.)
A total of up to 1,700 bytes (characters) of time-series data can be traced in send and receive messages. Changes to the step No. and control signals such as RS and CS can also be traced.
Note
1. The CX-Protocol can be used to register up to 96 attributes per message. 2. A macro syntax error will occur when the protocol macro is executed if more than 31 write attributes are registered in one message.
36
Specifications
Item Converted format Description CompoWay/F commands Modbus-RTU commands Modbus-ASCII commands Host Link FINS commands Serial Gateway mode or protocol macro mode
Section 1-6
Enabled serial communications mode Queuing functions Protocol macro execution processing
Up to five FINS commands can be converted and then queued for processing. When a FINS command is received during protocol macro execution, the Serial Gateway is executed using an interrupt between steps in the communications sequence. If the next step is a RECEIVE command, the Serial Gateway will not be executed until the next step. For other conditions, the interrupt is executed immediately. Note The reception buffer is cleared during Serial Gateway execution. Note The Serial Gateway can be prohibited in protocol macro mode by turning ON the Serial Gateway Prohibit Switch in the CIO Area. The time is monitored from when the message is converted into the specified protocol using the Serial Gateway until the response is received (in Serial Gateway mode or protocol macro mode). Default: 5 s (setting range: 0.1 to 25.5 s) Note When a timeout occurs, the FINS end code (0205 hex: Response timeout) is returned to the source of the FINS command and a response is received after a timeout occurs. The time is monitored from when the FINS command is received until it is converted into the specified protocol and starts to be sent (in protocol macro mode only). Default: 5 s (setting range: 0.1 to 25.5 s) Note When a timeout occurs, the FINS end code (0204 hex: Remote node busy) is returned to the source of the FINS command. The send processing will not be executed and the received FINS command will be discarded. The time can be set from when the message is converted into another protocol using Serial Gateway conversion until the data is actually sent. (Serial Gateway or protocol macro mode) Default: 0 s (setting range: 0.01 to 300.00 s)
Send delay
37
Specifications
No-protocol Specifications
Item Communications mode Baud rate (See note 1.) Description Full-duplex
Section 1-6
RS-232C port and RS-422A/485 ports: 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200/230, 400 bps Default setting: 9,600 bps
Note The CJ1W-SCU@2 is required for communications at 115,200 or 230,400 bps. Communications dis- RS-232C port: 15 m max. tance (See note 1.) RS-422A/485 port: CS1W-SCB@1-V1, CS1W-SCU@1-V1, or CJ1W-SCU@1-V1 500 m max. (total cable length: 500 m max., T-branch branch lines: 10 m max.) CJ1W-SCU@2 1,200 m max. (total cable length: 1,200 m max., Multidrop connections are possible. However, maximum cable length is 500 m if the NT-AL001 is used for RS-422A-485 connections.) Messages (commu- Set either of the following types in the Setup Area in the allocation DM Area. nications frame structure) 1. Data only (without start code and end code) 2. Start code + data 3. Data + end code 4. Start code + data + end code 5. Data + CR + LF 6. Start code + data +CR + LF Set in allocated DM Area (The start code can be included by setting it to between 00 and FF hex, and the end code can be included by setting it to between 00 and FF hex. To exclude the end code, set the number of receive data bytes.) Start code None or 00 to FF hex End code None, 00 to FF hex, or CR + LF Number of receive Set the number of receive data bytes data bytes during between 1 and 256 bytes (according to reception the DM Area settings) when frame structure 1 or 2 above is used. Sending messages Serial Communications Board: TXD(236) instruction Serial Communications Unit: TXDU(256) and DTXDU(262) instructions (See note 2.) Receiving messages Serial Communications Board: RXD(235) instruction Serial Communications Unit: RXDU(255) and DRXDU(261) instructions (See note 2.) Maximum message Sending and receiving: Up to 259 bytes including the start length code and end code (up to 256 bytes excluding start/end codes) Data conversion No conversion Communications None protocol Message delay time When the TXD(236), TXDU(256), or DTXDU(262) instruction (see note 2) is executed, after the send delay time, the data is sent from the port. 0 to 300 s (0 to 300,000 ms) (Can be set in 10-ms units depending on the DM Area settings)
38
Specifications
Item Receive counter Reception buffer clear timing
Section 1-6
Description The number of data bytes (0 to 256) received at the port can be counted. CS1W-SCB@1-V1, CS1W-SCU@1-V1, or CJ1W-SCU@1-V1 The reception buffer is cleared immediately after executing the RXD(235)/RXDU(255) instruction CJ1W-SCU@2 With the DRXDU(261) instruction (see note 2), you can specify whether the reception buffers will be cleared or not in a setting in the DM Area words allocated to the Unit.
Note
(1) The baud rate and the communications distance sometimes depend on the remote device. (2) The DTXDU(262) and DRXDU(261) instructions can be used only when a CJ1W-SCU@2 Serial Communications Unit is connected to a CJ2 CPU Unit.
Modbus-RTU Specifications
Item Mode Baud rate Description Modbus-RTU slave mode (See note.) 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200/ 230,400 bps Default: 19,200 bps Note The CJ1W-SCU@2 is required for communications at 230,400 bps. 8 bits Odd, even, or none Default: Even Odd or even parity:1 bit No parity: 2 bits 1 to 247 (broadcasting: 0) Slave address: 1 byte Function code: 1 byte Data: 0 to 252 bytes CRC code: 2 bytes
Data length Parity Stop bits Address setting range Frame format
Note
39
Specifications
Function code Function (hexadecimal) 0F Writes multiple bits in I/O memory. 10 Writes multiple words in the DM or EM Area of I/O memory.
Section 1-6
Modbus name Write Multiple Coils Write Multiple Registers
40
Section 1-7
1-7
Units
Communications ports
Boards
2 RS-232C ports or 1 RS-232C and 1 RS422A/485 port or 1 CPU bus I/F and 1 RS232C port or 1 RS-232C port or 1 RS-422A/485 port 1 RS-232C port or 1 RS-422A port or 1 optical fiber port 1 Board 2 Units (CPU Rack or Expansion I/O Rack, but not two slots next to CPU Unit) Up to 4 ports maximum, 6 ports including those on CPU Unit.
Units
1 Board
NA 16 Units (CPU Rack or CJ 16 Units (CPU Rack or CS Expansion Rack, but total of Expansion Rack, but total of all CPU Bus Units must be all CPU Bus Units must be 16 or less) 16 or less) Up to 32 ports maximum, 34 Up to 32 ports maximum, 34 ports including those on CPU ports including those on CPU Unit. Unit.
41
Section 1-7
CS CJ Supported. (1:1 Host Link communications can be selected when using Unit Ver. 1.2 or later, which enables reuse of host programs created using the C200H, C1000H, or C2000H Series.) A compatible device selection function has also been added. (See note 1.) This enables Host Link functionality that is fully compatible with C-series Host Links and CVM1/CV-series Host Links. Supported. Supported (unified with 1:N NT Links).
Supported.
Pre-Ver. 1.2: Not supported. Unit Ver. 1.2 or later: Supported. Not supported (supported by Controller Link Units or PLC Link Units). Supported. Pre-Ver. 1.2: Not supported. Unit Ver. 1.2 or later: Supported. Pre-Ver. 1.2: Not supported. Unit Ver. 1.2: Not supported. Unit Ver. 1.3 or later: Supported. Supported. (1:1 Host Link communications can be selected when using Unit Ver. 1.2 or later, which enables reuse of host programs created using the C200H, C1000H, or C2000H Series.) A compatible device selection function has also been added. (See note 1.) This enables Host Link functionality that is fully compatible with C-series Host Links and CVM1/CV-series Host Links. Supported. Supported (unified with 1:N NT Links).
Supported.
Loopback Not supported. tests Serial Gate- Not supported. way ModbusRTU slave Units Not supported.
Not supported.
Pre-Ver. 1.2: Not supported. Unit Ver. 1.2 or later: Supported. Not supported (supported by Controller Link Units or PLC Link Units). Supported. Pre-Ver. 1.2: Not supported. Unit Ver. 1.2 or later: Supported. Pre-Ver. 1.2: Not supported. Unit Ver. 1.2: Not supported. Unit Ver. 1.3 or later: Supported.
Not supported.
Loopback Not supported. tests Serial Gate- Not supported. way ModbusRTU slave Not supported.
42
Section 1-7
CJ
CJ1W-SCU21-V1/31-V1/41-V1: 115,200 bps max. CJ1W-SCU22/32/42: 230,400 bps max. CJ1W-SCU21-V1/31-V1/41-V1: 38,400 bps max. Note Unit version 1.2 or later: 57,600 bps max. CJ1W-SCU22/32/42: 230,400 bps max. Standard NT Link, high-speed NT Link (See note 2.) CJ1W-SCU21-V1/31-V1/41-V1: 57,600 bps max. CJ1W-SCU22/32/42: 230,400 bps max. CJ1W-SCU21-V1/31-V1/41-V1: 115,200 bps max. CJ1W-SCU22/32/42: 230,400 bps max. CJ1W-SCU21-V1/31-V1/41-V1: 115,200 bps max. CJ1W-SCU22/32/42: 230,400 bps max. Supported.
NT Link Standard NT Link (1:N mode) No-protocol 19,200 bps max. communications Serial Gate- Not supported. way ModbusRTU slave Host Link communications
Supported commands Cmode (Host Link) commands FINS commands
Not supported.
Supported. Boards and Units: FINS commands can be sent using SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490).
Slave-initiBoards: Data can be sent ated comwith TXD(236) instruction. munications Units: Not supported.
Note
1. For pre-Ver. 1.2 Units, the number of words that can be read and written per frame (i.e., the text lengths) when using C-mode commands is different for C-series Host Link Units and CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards or Serial Communications Units. A host computer program previously used for C-series Host Link Units may not function correctly if it is used in CS/CJ-series PLCs. When using Serial Communications Boards/Units with Unit Ver. 1.2 or later, these programs can be reused by setting the Host Link compatible device mode to mode C (C500/120) or mode D (D200H). (Alternatively, check the host computer program before using it and make any corrections required to handle different frame text lengths. Refer to the CS/CJ-series Communications Commands Reference Manual (W342) for details.) 2. For CS-series PLCs, a high-speed NT Link is available only with Serial Communications Boards/Units manufactured on or after December 20, 1999. With earlier models, only the standard NT Link is available.
Lot No: 20Z9 Manufactured on December 20th, 1999 The year is indicated with the last digit. In this case, "9" indicates "1999." Month of manufacture. October, November, and December are indicated with X, Y, and Z respectively. In this case, the month is "December." Day of manufacture. In this example, the day is "20."
NT31/631(C)-V2 are the only PTs for which high-speed NT link is supported.
The following tables shows the improvements made in the protocol macro function.
43
Section 1-7
Reception buffer (per port) Reception buffer flow con- Start (CTS signal OFF to trol at Board/Unit (RS/CS request canceling send or Xon/Xoff) from remote device) Clear (CTS signal ON to request restarting send from remote device) Send/receive message Bytes per send length Bytes per For RS/CS receive flow, Xon/Xoff flow, or delimiter control Other
CS/CJ Half or full-duplex Send only: SEND, receive only: RECV, send and receive: SEND and RECEIVE, wait: WAIT, clear reception buffer: FLUSH, ER-ON: OPEN, and ER-OFF: CLOSE WAIT: Progressing to next process controlled by signal from CPU Unit. FLUSH: Clears contents of reception buffer. OPEN: Used for modem control. Keeps ER signal ON even after end of sequence. CLOSE: Used for modem control. Turns OFF ER signal. 2.5 Kbytes 2 Kbytes
At step transition
0.5 Kbytes
1,000 bytes max. Default: 200 bytes. Setting range: 200 to 1,000 bytes. Reception data is removed from the reception buffer in increments of the size set here.
Reception message length when using wildcard (*) for data length Operand Send/ specification receive data storage locations and data capacity Link word specification
For RS/CS flow, Xon/Xoff 200 bytes max. flow, or delimiter control
As set above. Default: 200 bytes Setting range: 200 to 1,000 Other 256 bytes max. bytes. Maximum send data size 127 words max. (not including 250 words max. (including word word specifying the number of specifying the number of send send words) words) 250 words max. (including word Maximum receive data 127 words max. (not including specifying the number of size word specifying the number of receive words) receive words) Area 1 IN 128 words max. total 500 words max. total (Unit Ver. 1.2 or later supports a OUT continuous I/O refreshing Area 2 IN (selected in DM Area settings) OUT in addition to the on-request I/O refreshing available in earlier models).) Max. send or receive 128 words max. (no conversion) 500 words max. (no conversion) data size
44
Section 1-7
CS/CJ Before executing sequences. After executing SEND processing. Upon FLUSH command execution. Before executing sequences. Upon FLUSH command execution. (Unit Ver. 1.2 or later: Either clear or hold before executing sequences.) Except when executing SEND processing. During sequence execution (reception processing not performed except during sequence execution). During sequence execution (even during SEND processing) RTS/CTS flow control: RTS signal turned ON when reception buffer reaches approximately 2 Kbytes. Modem control: RTS signal turned ON when data is sent and turned OFF when send is completed. RTS/CTS flow control: Data send is on standby when CTS signal turns ON; data can be sent when CTS signal turns OFF.
Full-duplex
None
Half-duplex Full-duplex
Recorded except during SEND processing. None RTS/CTS flow control: RTS signal turned ON when reception buffer reaches 200 bytes. Modem control: RTS signal turned ON when data is sent and turned OFF when send is completed. RTS/CTS flow control: Data send is on standby when CTS signal turns ON; data can be sent when CTS signal turns OFF. Modem control: ON when sequence execution is started, OFF when completed. Turns ON only for modem controls.
CTS signal
Modem control: ON when sequence execution is started, OFF when completed. Also can be turned ON or OFF as required during modem control by executing OPEN to turn ON the ER signal or by executing CLOSE to turn OFF the ER signal in sequence steps. The ER signal can also be controlled across multiple steps. During RTS/CTS flow control and modem control, the ER signal will be controlled according to modem control operations, the RTS signal will turn ON when sending, and the RTS/CTS flow control operations will be used for the RTS and CTS signals for receptions. Synchronization with CPU Unit after start of sequence None The WAIT command can be execution used to stop transitions between steps to allow transitions from the CPU Unit. This is useful, for example, to perform processing in the CPU Unit after a specific step but before executing the next step.
ER signal
45
Section 1-7
CS/CJ The length of data set in the expected reception message will be fetched from the reception buffer as the message. LRC2 and SUM1 supported. Boards: Supported. Units: Not supported. The CPU Units Simple Backup Function can be used to backup the Protocol Macro data in the Serial Communications Board/Unit to the CPU Units Memory Card. The backed-up data can be restored or compared. The following combinations are possible. CS1W-SCB21-V1/41V1/SCU21-V1/SCU31-V1 with CS1-H CPU Unit CJ1W-SCU21(-V1)/31-V1/41(V1), CJ1W-SCU@2 with CJ1H/CJ1M/CJ2 CPU Unit
46
Section 1-8
1-8
PLC
Command sent to host computer Creating communications frame for a host computer protocol OMRON component Standard system protocol User-created protocol Protocol macro Modbus-RTU Slave Protocol macro
Modbus-RTU commands sent from host Use a standard system protocol. Use the CX-Protocol to change a standard system protocol.
Protocol macro
Section 5 Using Protocol Macros CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344) Section 9 Using ModbusRTU Slave Mode (Unit Version 1.3 or later) Section 5 Using Protocol Macros Appendices B to O Section 5 Using Protocol Macros CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344) Serial Gateway Serial Gateway Serial Gateway
OMRON component
CompoWay/ F-compatible
Execute using PMCR instruction. Execute using CMND instruction. Through network Execute using CMND instruction.
Modbus-compatible device (including OMRON components) Modbus-compatible device (including OMRON components) OMRON PLC
Modbus-RTUcompatible
Through network CS/CJ Series or CVM1/CV Series Execute using CMND/SEND/RECV instruction. Through network Serial Gateway Serial Gateway 1:1 Host Link Used with Host Link compatible device selection function (Select C mode or D mode) Host Link compatible device selection function (Select B mode) Section 5 Using Protocol Macros CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344) No-protocol
Reusing host computer programs for 1:1 Host Link created using C200H/C1000H/C2000H PLCs Reusing host computer programs for Host Link created using CVM1-series PLCs
Protocol (including no-protocol) used mainly for stop-start synchronous data sending and reception Sending/receiving data in a single direction from/to a device such as a bar code reader or printer User-created protocol using ladder program
Protocol macro
47
Section 1-9
Section 4 Using Host Link Communications Communications Commands Reference Manual (W342)
1:N NT Link Note The PT must also be set for a 1:N NT Link. Communications will not be possible if the PT is set for a 1:1 NT Link. Host Link
1-9
1-9-1
48
Section 1-9
Restart the Board by turning ON the Inner Board Restart Bit (A60800) or restart the Unit turning ON one of the CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits (A50100 to A50115, where the bit number corresponds to the unit number). Restart the port on the Serial Communications Board by turning ON one of the Communications Board Port Settings Change Bits (A63601 for port 1 and A63602 for port 2) or restart the port on the Serial Communications Unit by tuning ON one of the Communications Unit Port Settings Change Bits (A620 to A635: The word will be A620 + unit number and the bit will be bit 01 for port 1 and bit 02 for port 2). Execute the STUP(237) instruction. The STUP(237) instruction is executed in the ladder program to change the serial communications mode of a serial port. See Appendix O Changing Port Settings Using STUP(237). 9. Execute communications. Use the software switches or the allocated flags and words allocated in the CIO Area in the ladder program to control communications. The following words are allocated in the CIO Area: Board: 25 words from CIO1900 Unit: 25 words from CIO 1500 + 25 unit number
1-9-2
Explanation of Procedure
Check that the PLC power has been turned OFF. If the power is ON, turn it OFF. When a Serial Communications Unit is used, set the unit number switch at the top of the front panel of the Unit to between 0 and F. The number that is set will determine which words are allocated as the Setup Area in the DM Area and which words are allocated in the CIO Area.
CS-series Units
SCU21-V1
RUN ERC SD1 RD1 RDY ERH SD2 RD2
Turning OFF the Power Setting the Unit Number for Serial Communications Units
CJ-series Units
SCU41
RDY TERM OFF WIRE 2 RUN ERC ERH SD1 SD2 RD1 TER1 RD2
01 EF 2
ON 4
3456
BCD
UNIT NO.
789A
A987
UNIT No.
6543
210F
EDCB
49
Section 1-9
Words CIO 1500 to CIO 1524 CIO 1525 to CIO 1549 CIO 1550 to CIO 1574 CIO 1575 to CIO 1599 CIO 1600 to CIO 1624 CIO 1625 to CIO 1649 CIO 1650 to CIO 1674 CIO 1675 to CIO 1699 CIO 1700 to CIO 1724 CIO 1725 to CIO 1749 CIO 1750 to CIO 1774 CIO 1775 to CIO 1799 CIO 1800 to CIO 1824 CIO 1825 to CIO 1849 CIO 1850 to CIO 1874 CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
With a Serial Communications Board, the following words are always allocated.
Setup Area in the DM Area: D32000 to D32767 D32000 to D32009 Port 1 Setup Area D32010 to D32019 Port 2 Setup Area D32020 to D32767 Reserved for the system Words allocated in the CIO Area: CIO 1900 to CIO 1999 CIO 1900 Software switch CIO 1901 to CIO 1904 Board status CIO 1905 to CIO 1914 Port 1 status CIO 1915 to CIO 1924 Port 2 status CIO 1925 to CIO 1999 Reserved for the system
Serial Communications Board (CS Series Only) 1. Press in the lever on the Inner Board installation cover, first on the top and then on the bottom, and remove the cover.
50
Section 1-9
CS-series Serial Communications Unit 1,2,3... 1. Catch the hook on the top of the back of the Unit on the Backplane, and then rotate the Unit downward to mount it.
Hook
Backplane
2. Insert the Unit firmly into the Backplane connector. 3. Tighten the screw at the bottom of the Unit with a Phillips screwdriver to a torque of 0.4 Nm. For this operation, the Phillips screwdriver must be placed at a slight angle. Therefore, leave sufficient space at the bottom of the Unit.
Duct At least 20 mm CPU Unit I/O Power Supply Unit Remote I/O Unit Duct Backplane
At least 20 mm
Phillips screwdriver
51
Section 1-9
1. Align the connectors properly and then press in on the Unit to connect it.
Connector
PA205R
POWER
SYSMAC CJ1G-CPU44
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
SCU41
RUN RDY
TERM OFF
ERC
SD1 SD2
RD1 RD2
TER1
ERH
ON
OPEN
WIRE 2
01 EF 2
3456
UNIT NO.
789A
L1
MCPWR BUSY
AC100-240V INPUT
L2/N
PERIPHERAL
PORT
2. Slide the sliders on the top and bottom of the Unit until they lock the Units together.
Slider
PA205R
POWER
SYSMAC CJ1G-CPU44
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
SCU41
RUN RDY
TERM OFF
ERC
SD1 SD2
RD1 RD2
TER1
ERH
ON
OPEN
WIRE 2 4
01 EF 2
3456
UNIT NO.
Release
L1
MCPWR BUSY
AC100-240V INPUT
L2/N
PERIPHERAL PORT2
PORT
Note
If the sliders are not locked properly, the Serial Communications Units may not function correctly.
!Caution When using an external interrupt, mount the Serial Communications Unit in one of the following slots on the CPU Rack. External interrupt tasks will not be started if the Serial Communications Unit is in any other slot. With a CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP CPU Unit: Slots 0 to 3 With a CJ2H-CPU6@ or CJ1G/H-CPU@@H CPU Unit: Slots 0 to 4 With a CJ1M-CPU@@ CPU Unit: Slots 0 to 2 Connections Connect the external devices using RS-232C or RS-422A cables. For details on the connector pin layout and the connection methods, see Section 3 Installation and Wiring, and refer to the relevant manuals for the external devices to be connected.
52
BCD
PORT2
Lock
789A
BCD
Section 1-9
The types of port for the different models of Serial Communication Boards and Units are shown in the following table.
PLC Series Type of Unit CS Series Serial Communications Board Model CS1WSCB21-V1 CS1WSCB41-V1 CS1WSCU21-V1 CS1WSCU31-V1 CJ1W-SCU21V1/CJ1WSCU22 CJ1W-SCU31V1/CJ1WSCU32 CJ1W-SCU41V1/CJ1WSCU42 Port 1 RS-232C RS-232C RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-232C Port 2 RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-232C
CJ Series
RS-422A/485
RS-422A/485
RS-422A/485
RS-232C
When an RS-422A/485 port is used, the following setting is required. TERM: Terminating resistance ON/OFF switch OFF: Terminating resistance OFF ON: Terminating resistance ON WIRE: 2-wire or 4-wire selector switch 2: 2-wire; 4: 4-wire
OFF 2 ON 4
TERM WIRE
Connection Example for Host Link Communications The host computer can be connected to a PLC 1:1, or NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapters can be used to convert from RS-232C to RS-422A/485 to connect the host computer to PLCs 1:N.
Serial Communications Board Serial Communications Unit
Terminating resistance ON
Also perform other required processing, such as setting switches on the external device(s).
53
Section 1-9
Connection Example for Protocol Macros, Serial Gateway, No-protocol Mode, and Modbus-RTU Slave
Serial Communications Board RS-232C RS-422A/485 Terminating resistance ON
General-purpose external device
Terminating resistance ON
General-purpose external device
Also perform other required processing, such as setting switches on the external device(s). Connection Example for 1:N NT Links Refer to the manual for the PT. Connecting Programming Devices Connect the Programming Console, CX-Programmer, or CX-Protocol to the CPU Unit as required. Turning ON Power Creating I/O Tables for Serial Communications Units Setting the Setup Area in the DM Area Turn ON the PLC power supply to the PLC. I/O tables must be created for Serial Communications Units. Create the I/O table using a Programming Device, such as a Programming Console or CXProgrammer. Set the serial communications mode and the communications specifications for the Board or Unit. Use a Programming Device, such as a Programming Console or CX-Programmer, or the CX-Protocol to set the Setup Area. Host Link Communications The following table shows the default (standard) settings for Host Link communications. m = D30000 + 100 unit number
Board (CS Series only) Port 1 Port 2 D32000 D32010 Unit (CS/CJ Series) Port 1 Port 2 m m+10 Bit Setting Meaning
15
08 to 11 00 to 03 15 15 00 to 07
5 0 0 0 00
Start bit: 1 bit Data length: 7 bits Parity: Even Stop bits: 2 bits Baud rate: 9,600 bps Host Link mode The baud rate setting is disabled when the default settings are used. Send delay: 0 ms CTS control: No Host Link unit number: 0
1:1 Host Link Mode Example: When using a Serial Communications Board/Unit with Unit Ver. 1.2 or later, host computer programs that were created using the earlier models
54
Section 1-9
C500-LK101, C500-LK201, C500-LK103, or C500-LK203 can be executed using 1:1 Host Link protocol. m = D30000 + 100 unit number
Board (CS Series only) Port 1 Port 2 D32003 D32013 D32003 D32013
Bit
Setting
Meaning
14 10-08
1 3 hex
1:N/1:1 Host Link setting: 1:1 Host Link Host Link compatible device mode: C mode (C500/120)
Protocol Macros The following table shows the default (standard) settings for protocol macros. m = D30000 + 100 unit number
Board (CS Series only) Port 1 Port 2 D32000 D32010 Unit (CS/CJ Series) Port 1 Port 2 m m + 10 Bit Setting Meaning
15
m + 11 m + 18 m + 19
11 to 08 03 to 00 15 15 to 00
6 0 0 00C8 hex
Start bit: 1 bit Data length: 7 bits Parity: Even Stop bits: 2 bits Baud rate: 9,600 bps Protocol Macro mode 9,600 bps when the default settings are used. Half-duplex Maximum number of bytes in protocol macro send/receive data: 200 bytes
NT Link Mode The following table shows the default (standard) settings for NT link when the maximum PT unit number is 5. m = D30000 + 100 unit number
Board (CS Series only) Port 1 Port 2 D32000 D32010 D32001 D32011 D32006 D32016 Unit (CS/CJ Series) Port 1 Port 2 m m + 10 m+1 m + 11 m+6 m + 16 Bit Setting Meaning
11 to 08 03 to 00 02 to 00
2 0 5
1:N NT Link The baud rate is set to the standard NT link setting when the default settings are used. 1:N NT Link maximum unit number (example)
55
Section 1-9
15
11 to 08 D32002 D32003 D32007 D32012 D32013 D32017 m+2 m+3 m+7 m+12 m+13 m+17 15 15 15 to 08
9 hex 0 0 00 hex
Start bits: 1 bit Data length: 7 bits Parity: Even Stop bits: 2 Baud rate: 9,600 bps Serial communications mode: Serial Gateway Send delay: 0 ms CTS control: No Response timeout monitoring time: 5 s
2. Set the local network table in the routing tables as required (using CX-Integrator). Using Serial Gateway During Protocol Macro Execution 1. Make the settings in the Setup Area. m = D30000 + 100 unit number
Board (CS Series only) Port 1 Port 2 D32000 D32010 D32002 D32003 D32007 D32012 D32013 D32017 Unit (CS/CJ Series) Port 1 Port 2 m m+10 m+2 m+3 m+7 m+12 m+13 m+17 Bit Setting Meaning
11 to 08 15 15 15 to 08 07 to 00
Serial communications mode: Protocol macro Send delay: 0 ms CTS control: No Response timeout monitoring time: 5 s Serial Gateway send start timeout monitoring time: 5 s
04
Port 1
56
Section 1-9
The enable/disable status for the Serial Gateway is automatically indicated by the following flag.
Bit
Meaning
08
Serial Gateway Prohibited Flag 1: Serial Gateway prohibited 1: Serial Gateway not prohibited
3. Set the local network table in the routing tables as required (using CX-Net). No-protocol Mode The following example is for the default (standard) communications conditions, with the send delay set to 100 ms, start code included (e.g., @), end code included (CR + LF), and number of receive bytes set to 100 bytes.
Board (CS Series only) Port 1 Port 2 D32000 D32010 m Unit (CS/CJ Series) Port 1 Port 2 m+10 15 Bit Setting Meaning
D32001 D32002
D32011 D32012
m+1 m+2
m+11 m+12
11 to 08 03 to 00 15 11 to 00 15 15 to 08 12 09 to 08 07 to 00 15 to 08 04 00
---
---
m+25
m+35
Start bits: 1 bit Data length: 7 bits Parity: Even Stop bits: 2 bits Baud rate: 9,600 bps No-protocol The baud rate is 9,600 bps when the default settings are used. Send delay: User-specified Send delay setting range: 10 decimal (000A hex), Unit: 10 ms CTS control 1: Yes Start code: @ (40 hex) Start code: Yes End code: CR + LF Number of receive data bytes: 100 bytes Number of interrupt task to be executed for interrupt notification Notification of CPU Unit when data is received: Do not notify Clearing reception buffers for DRXDU(261) instruction: Do not clear
57
Section 1-9
The following example is for the default (standard) communications conditions, with the Modbus slave address set to 1 and the default allocation areas for Coils, Input Registers, and Holding Registers. m = D30000 + 100 unit number
Board (CS Series only) Port 1 Port 2 D32000 D32010 Unit (CS/CJ Series) Port 1 Port 2 m m+10 Bit Setting Meaning
15
11 to 08 03 to 00 15 to 08 07 to 00 15 to 08 07 to 00
Defaults Parity: Even Stop bits: 1 bit Baud rate: 19,200 bps (Start bits: 1 bit, Data length: 8 bits) Modbus-RTU slave Disabled for default communications conditions (baud rate: 19,200 bps) Modbus slave address: 1 Coils allocation area: CIO Area Input Registers allocation area: CIO Area Holding Registers allocation area: DM Area
Make the new settings in the Setup Area valid by performing one of the following. Turn the power OFF and then ON again. The Setup Area allocated in the DM Area will be read when the power is turned ON. Restart the Board by turning ON the Inner Board Restart Bit (A60800) or restart the Unit turning ON one of the CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits (A50100 to A50115, where the bit number corresponds to the unit number). (See following table.) Restart the port on the Serial Communications Board by turning ON one of the Communications Board Port Settings Change Bits (A63601 for port 1 and A63602 for port 2) or restart the port on the Serial Communications Unit by tuning ON one of the Communications Unit Port Settings Change Bits (A620 to A635: The word will be A620 + unit number and the bit will be bit 01 for port 1 and bit 02 for port 2).
58
Section 1-9
Inner Board Restart Bit and CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits
Board Units A60800 A50100 (Unit No. 0) A50101 (Unit No. 1) A50102 (Unit No. 2) A50103 (Unit No. 3) A50104 (Unit No. 4) A50105 (Unit No. 5) A50106 (Unit No. 6) A50107 (Unit No. 7) A50108 (Unit No. 8) A50109 (Unit No. 9) A50110 (Unit No. A) A50111 (Unit No. B) A50112 (Unit No. C) A50113 (Unit No. D) A50114 (Unit No. E) A50115 (Unit No. F)
Execute the STUP(237) instruction. The Board or Unit Setup Area can be changed while the PLC power supply is ON. The STUP(237) instruction can be used, for example, when a communications sequence for a modem connection is executed in Protocol Macro Mode to switch the operating mode to Host Link Mode when a certain condition is established. This enables monitoring or programming of the CPU Unit to be carried out from a host computer. See Appendix O Changing Port Settings Using STUP(237). Executing Communications The required data and ladder program are created to perform communications in the serial communications mode that has been set. Host Link Communications Sending C-mode and FINS Commands from Host Computers to PLCs To send C-mode commands or FINS commands, programs must be created on the host computer to send commands to PLCs and to receive responses back from the PLCs. Refer to the CS/CJ-series Communications Commands Reference Manual (W342) for details.
Programming to send commands and receive responses.
Command
Sending FINS Commands from PLCs to Host Computers SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), SEND2(491), RECV2(492), and CMND2(493) (see note) can be used to execute slave-initiated communica-
59
Section 1-9
tions. Also, programming is required at the host computer to received data and return responses. An example is provided below for SEND(090). Note A CJ2 CPU Unit is required to use SEND2(491), RECV2(492), and CMND2(493).
Programming to return responses.
Host computer
Command
CPU Unit
SEND(090) can be used to send data from the PLC to a host computer. If the input condition turns ON when the Communications Port Enabled Flag is ON, 10 words of data from CIO 0100 to CIO 0109 will be sent to the host computer connected to port 1 on the Serial Communications Unit with network address 0, node address 0, and unit address 10 Hex.
Input condition Communications Port Enabled Flag for Port 0 A20200 @SEND (90) 0100 0000 D00200
First send word: CIO 0100 "0000" used to send to a host computer. First control data word: D00200
The control data for the above instruction is shown in the following table.
Word D00200 D00201 D00202 D00203 Contents 000A 0100 0010 0000 Meaning Number of send words: 10 Bits 00 to 07: Destination network address 0 Bits 08 to 10: Serial Communications Unit port 1 Bits 00 to 07: Destination unit address 10 Hex Bits 08 to 15: Destination node address 0 Bits 00 to 04: Number of retries is 0 Bits 08 to 11: Communications port 0 Bit 15: Response required Response monitoring time: 2 s (default value for 0000)
D00204
0000
A program would be required at the host computer to receive the above data and return a response. Protocol Macros When a standard system protocol (provided in the Serial Communications Board, Serial Communications Unit, and CX-Protocol) is executed. Using Standard System Protocols
Uses standard system protocol No. 600 Board or Unit
Executed with PMCR(260) (237)
CPU Unit
1,2,3...
60
Section 1-9
Refer to information on the 3rd operand of PMCR(260) in Appendix B CompoWay/F Master Protocol and set the number of send data words in S, and set the send data starting in S+1. 2. Coding PMCR(260) Example: The following example shows how to use a Serial Communications Board to read the present value for a K3N-series Digital Panel Meter using the CompoWay/F Master standard system protocol sequence No. 600: Send/receive with ASCII conversion and response.
Input condition
C1 C2 S D
ER FAL (006) 01
Communications port 7 and serial port 2 Destination unit address E1: Serial Communications Board Sequence No. 600 First word of send data First storage word for receive data
If the input condition turns ON when the Protocol Macro Executing Flag (CIO 191915 for Port 2) is OFF and the Communications Port Enabled Flag (A20207: Internal logic port, communications port 7) is ON, communications sequence No. 600 of the standard system protocol in the Serial Communications Board is called, and data is sent and received via port 2 of the Serial Communications Board. Send Data
S:D00000 D00001 D00002 D00003 D00004 D00005 D00006 0007 0000 0101 000C C000 0000 0001 7 words from D00000 to D00006 K3N node No. : 00 CompoWay/F command "0101" (reads the K3N present value) Number of send bytes CompoWay/F command send data (Variable type, read start address, 00, number of elements)
Receive Data
D:D00010 D00011 D00012 D00013 0004 4 words from D00010 to D00013 Response code is stored. The read data (in this case, the present value of K3N) is stored.
3. Executing the PMCR(260) Instruction 4. For details on confirming operation, see Section 12 Tracing and I/O Memory Monitoring in the CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344). Transmission Line Tracing The data in the send/receive messages flowing over the transmission line (RS-232C or RS-422A/485) and the control codes are traced. I/O Memory Monitoring Monitors send/receive data and the status of the various flags.
61
Section 1-9
Section references in the following procedure refer to the CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344). 1,2,3... 1. For details on designing protocols, see Section 4 and Section 5. a. Create a communications sequence status transition chart. b. c. From the status transition chart, divide the processing contents into sequence steps. Determine the communications sequence message contents.
2. Use the CX-Protocol to create and send a project (protocol data). See 1-10 for the outline flow. a. Creating a new project: See 6-1 Creating a New Project or Protocol. b. c. Creating a new communications sequence: See 7-1 Creating a New Sequence or 7-2 Setting a Sequence. Creating steps: See 7-1 Creating a New Sequence and 8-2 Setting a Step.
d. Creating messages: See 9-2 Setting a Message. Note After creating messages, steps can also be created by specifying message names. e. Transferring the created project to a Board or Unit: See 11-1 Transferring and Reading Protocol Data between Personal Computers and Serial Communications Boards. 3. Create the ladder program. a. Setting Send Data Specifying Operands Set the send data in the I/O memory after the S+1 operand of the PMCR(260) instruction. Set the number of send data words (including S itself) in S. Direct Designations Set the send data in the I/O memory specified by the read variables in the send message. Specifying Link Words Set the send data in the O1 or O2 area of the Link Word Area. b. Coding PMCR(260) Example for a Serial Communications Board
62
Section 1-9
C1 C2 S D
ER
Communications port 7 and serial port 2 Destination unit address E1: Serial Communications Board Sequence No. 100 First word of send data First storage word for receive data
FAL (006) 01
If the input condition turns ON when the Protocol Macro Executing Flag (CIO 191915 for port 2) is OFF and the Communications Port Enabled Flag (A20207 for internal logic port, communications port 7) is ON, communications sequence No. 100 registered in the Serial Communications Board is called, and data is sent and received via port 2 of the Serial Communications Board. The amount of send data depends on the number of words specified in D00000 (the number of words after D00001 plus 1 for D00000 itself), and is sent from the next word after D00001.
S:D00000 Number of words D00001 Send data Number of send words plus 1 for D00000 Number of words
The receive data is stored in consecutive words beginning with D00011, and the number of words actually stored in D00010 (the number of words after D00011 plus 1 for D00010 itself) is stored.
S:D00000 D00011 Number of words Receive data Number of send words plus 1 for D00010 Number of words
c.
Execute PMCR(260)
4. For details on the confirming operation, see Section 12 Tracing and I/O Memory Monitoring. Transmission Line Tracing The data in the send/receive messages flowing over the transmission line (RS-232C or RS-422A/485) and the control codes are traced. I/O Memory Monitoring Monitors send/receive data and the status of the various flags. 1:N NT Links Refer to the users manual for the PT. Serial Gateway Mode Sending FINS commands from the PLC Send FINS commands using the CMND(490) instruction. For details, refer to 6-8-5 Sending Commands Using the CMND(490) Instruction. Sending FINS commands from the PT Execute the PTs SAP (Smart Active Parts) library. Sending FINS commands from a Programming Device that uses CXServer as the communications driver, such as the CX-Programmer.
63
Section 1-9
CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or later Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit Ver. 1.2 or later (Select SCU (Unit 0 to 15) in the UNIT field.) Set the relay PLC. (Select in the Change PLC Dialog Box.) Serial Gateway function PLC name: PLC2 port (Select port 1/2 in the PORT field according to the calculated address.)
Serial Gateway
Select the Use SYSWAY with the port option in the Host Link (SYSWAY) settings. PLC name: PLC1 Target PLC Host Link unit number Enter the Host Link unit number in the Host Link Unit Number field for the target PLC in the Host Link (SYSWAY) settings.
1. Register the PLC to be connected serially (using Host Link FINS) in the project gateway (e.g., PLC2). 2. In the Change PLC Dialog Box of the target PLC (e.g., PLC1), select the relay PLC (gateway PLC) in the Network Type pull-down menu (e.g., [PLC2] (See note.)) and click the Settings Button to the right of the Network Type pull-down menu. Note The PLC name enclosed in square brackets (e.g., [PLC2]) indicates the gateway PLC.
Select the PLC to be used as the relay PLC (e.g., [PLC2]) in the Network Type pull-down menu.
3. The Network Settings Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the Guide for Serial Gateway Button. The Serial Gateway Guide Dialog Box will be displayed. 4. The Serial Gateway Guide Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the unit and the port number under the Calculate Address Area, the serial port number address is automatically calculated in the Calculated Address Field. Select the Use SYSWAY with the port option, and enter the actual Host Link unit number for the target (communications partner) PLC in the Host Link Unit Number field (see note). Finally, click the Apply Button.
64
Section 1-9
The Serial Communications port address is automatically calculated.
Enter the unit number for the actual Host Link (values are incremented by 1 automatically).
Note
When using the CX-Programmer, enter the actual Host Link unit number. Do not add 1 to the value. The CX-Programmer will automatically add 1 internally. No-protocol Mode Use the following procedure when creating ladder programs. a) Sending to Serial Communications Boards Execute the TXD(236) instruction to send the program to the external device from the PLC. Note For the TXD(236) instruction, include a NO condition of the Send Ready Flag (bit A35605/A35613) in an AND in the input condition. Execute the RXD(235) instruction to receive the program at the PLC from the external device. Note For the RXD(235) instruction, include a NO condition of the Reception Completed Flag (bit A35606/A35614) in an AND in the input condition. b) Sending to Serial Communications Units Execute the TXDU(256) or DTXDU(262) instruction to send the program to the external device from the PLC. Note (a) For the TXDU(256) instruction, include a NO condition of the Communications Port Enabled Flag (bits A20200 to A20207) and a NC condition of the TXDU(256) Executing Flag (word n+9/n+19, bit 05) in an AND in the input condition. (b) Use a NO condition of the Send Ready Flag (n+9/n+19 bit 04) in the input conditions of the DTXDU(262) instruction. Execute the RXDU(255) or DRXDU(261) instruction to receive the program at the PLC from the external device. When using the DRXDU(261) instruction in an external interrupt task, be sure to set the task type in the program properties to an interrupt task. The number of the interrupt task is specified in the DM Area. Note (a) For the RXDU(255) instruction, include NO conditions of the Reception Completed Flag (word n+9/n+19, bit 06) and the Communications Port Enabled Flags (bits A20200 to A20207) in an AND in the input condition. (b) Use an NO condition of the Reception Completed Flag (n+9/n+19 bit 06) in the input conditions of the DTXDU(262) instruction.
65
Section 1-9
Modbus-RTU commands are sent from the host computer to the PLC.
Programming to send commands and receive responses.
The host computer must be programmed to send the Modbus-RTU commands and receive responses.
66
67
Section 2-1
2-1
2-1-1
CS1W-SCB41-V1
Indicators
RDY COMM1 COMM2
PORT1
Port 1 RS-232C
PORT1
PORT2
Port 2 RS-232C
Port 2 RS-422A/485
SCB21-V1
Indicators
Indicator RDY Color Green Status Lit Flashing Not lit Meaning Operating normally, and protocol macro preparations have been completed. Operating normally, and protocol macros are being prepared. () An error has occurred in the Serial Communications Board. Board/Unit error, CPU Unit watchdog timer error, Board watchdog timer error Port 1 is being used for sending or receiving. Port 1 is not being used for sending or receiving. Port 2 is being used for sending or receiving. Port 2 is not being used for sending or receiving.
COMM1 COMM2
Yellow Yellow
Note Depending on the interval of flashing, the meaning is as follows: Protocol data being initialized: 0.3 s Protocol data being overwritten: 1.0 s Protocol data error: 1.0 s and CPU Unit ERR/ALM indicator is flashing CPU Unit Indicators A Serial Communications Board is mounted as an Inner Board in the CPU Unit and thus affect the CPU Unit ERR/ALM indicator.
Indicator Color ERR/ALM Red Status Lit Fatal error Meaning If a fatal error occurs, the CPU Unit will stop operation in either RUN or MONITOR mode. If a non-fatal error occurs, the CPU Unit will continue operation in either RUN or MONITOR mode. The CPU Unit is operating normally.
Flashing
Non-fatal error
Not lit
Normal operation
If an error in the Inner Board is the cause of the error indicated on the ERR/ ALM indicator, information on the error will be stored in A424: Inner Board
68
Section 2-1
Error Information. Refer to Inner Board Error Information under 2-3-3 Related Auxiliary Area Bits. For actions required when an error occurs, refer to Section 12 Troubleshooting and Maintenance. RS-232C Ports
Protocol Communications method Synchronization Baud rate Protocol macro 1:N NT Links Full-duplex or half- Half-duplex duplex Start-stop synchronization (asynchronous) 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/ Standard NT link or 57,600/115,200/230,400 bps (see note 1) high-speed NT link (see note 2) 1:1 (1:N is possible using Link Adapters) 15 m max. (See note 3.) Complies with EIA RS-232C No-protocol Full-duplex --Serial Gateway --Modbus-RTU --Host Link Full-duplex
Connections Transmission distance Interface Protocol Communications method Synchronization Baud rate Connections Transmission distance Interface
---
---
1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200/ 230,400 bps (See note 1.) 1:1 (1:N is possible using Link Adapters) 15 m max. (See note 3.) Complies with EIA RS-232C
Note
1. The CJ1W-SCU@2 is required for communications at 230,400 bps. The CJ1W-SCU@2 is also required for communications at 115,200 bps in Protocol Macro or No-protocol Mode. 2. High-speed NT link is only available with Serial Communications Boards/ Units manufactured on or after December 20th, 1999. With earlier models, only standard NT link is available. 3. The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m. The RS-232C standard, however, does not cover baud rates above 19.2 Kbps. Refer to the manual for the device being connected to confirm support.
69
Section 2-1
Note
1. Pin No. 1 and the shell are connected to the ground terminal (GR) of the Power Supply Unit inside of the Serial Communications Board. Therefore, the cable shield can be grounded by grounding the GR of the Power Supply Unit. 2. The status of the RTS (RS), CTS (CS), DSR (DR), and DTR (ER) signals can be monitored in the words allocated in the CIO Area. For details, refer to 2-3 I/O Memory Allocations. 3. Pin 6 (5 V) is required when the NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is connected. For details on connection methods, refer to 3-3 Wiring. 4. The DSR signal is used to monitor the signal cable. It can also be used as a CD (carrier detect) signal. (The DSR signal does not affect system operation, and is available for use by the user.)
!Caution Do not connect the 5-V power supply on pin 6 of the RS-232C port on the Unit to any external device other than an NT-AL001-E Link Adapter. Otherwise, the external device and the Serial Communications Unit may be damaged. Use the OMRON Cables specified in this manual or make your own cables. Do not use commercially available RS-232C cables sold for personal computers. Otherwise, the external device and the Serial Communications Unit may be damaged. The following cables are provided for connection to NT-AL001-E Link Adapters. We recommend that these cables be used. NT-AL001-E connecting cables: XW2Z-070T-1 (0.7 m) XW2Z-200T-1 (2 m) Applicable Connectors Plug: XM2A-0901 (manufactured by OMRON) or equivalent Hood: XM2S-0911-E (manufactured by OMRON) or equivalent One plug and one hood are provided for each port. Recommended Cables UL2426 AWG28 5P IFS-RVV-SB (UL-approved, Fujikura Ltd.) AWG28 5P IFVV-SB (not UL-approved, Fujikura Ltd.) UL2426-SB (MA) 5P 28AWG (7/0.127) (UL-approved, Hitachi Cable, Ltd.) CO-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG (7/0.127) (not UL-approved, Hitachi Cable, Ltd.) Cable length: 15 m max.
70
Section 2-1
Connections Transmission distance Interface Protocol Communications method Synchronization Baud rate Connections Transmission distance Interface
Start-stop synchronous (asynchronous) 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/ 57,600/115,200/230,400 bps (See note 1.) 1:N (N: 32 Units max.)
Standard NT link or high-speed NT link (See note 2.) 1:N (N: 8 Units max.) 500 m max. (The total combined cable length is 500 m max. Tbranch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.) Complies with EIA RS-485 No-protocol Full-duplex --Serial Gateway --Modbus-RTU ---
---
---
1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200/ 230,400 bps (See note 1.) 1:N (N: 32 Units max.) 500 m max. (The total combined cable length is 500 m max. Tbranch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.) Complies with EIA RS-485
Note
1. The CJ1W-SCU@2 is required for communications at 230,400 bps. The CJ1W-SCU@2 is also required for communications at 115,200 bps in Protocol Macro or No-protocol Mode. 2. High-speed NT link is only available with Serial Communications Boards/ Units manufactured on or after December 20th, 1999. With earlier models, only standard NT link is available. Connector Pin Layout
Pin No. 1 (see note 1) 2 (see note 1) 3 4 5 6 (see note 1) 7 8 (see note 1) 9 Shell (see note 2) Abbreviation SDA SDB NC NC NC RDA NC RDB NC FG Signal name Send data Send data + Not used Not used Not used Receive data Not used Receive data + Not used Shield I/O Output Output ------Input --Input -----
Note
1. When 2-wire connections are used, use Pins 1 and 2, or Pins 6 and 8. 2. The shell is connected to the ground terminal (GR) of the Power Supply Unit inside of the Serial Communications Board. Therefore, the cable shield can be grounded by grounding the GR of the Power Supply Unit. 3. With SDA/B or RDA/B, the signal polarity may be reversed by the remote device. Be sure to check the polarity before wiring. Applicable Connectors Plug: XM2A-0901 (OMRON) or equivalent
71
Section 2-1
Recommended Cables CO-HC-ESV-3P 7/0.2 (manufactured by Hirakawa Hewtech Corp.) Cable length: 500 m max. (The total combined cable length is 500 m max. Tbranch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.) Terminating Resistance Switch: TERM The terminating resistance switch is provided on the CS1W-SCB41-V1 only. When an RS-422/485 port is used, set the switch to ON if the Serial Communications Board is on the end of the transmission line. Refer to Section 3 Installation and Wiring for the ON/OFF settings.
Label TERM Name Terminating resistance switch Settings Factory setting ON: Terminating OFF: Terminating resistance ON resistance OFF OFF: Terminating resistance OFF
Note The status of terminating resistance setting can be monitored in the words allocated in the CIO Area. For details, refer to 2-3 I/O Memory Allocations. 2-Wire or 4-Wire Switch: WIRE The 2-wire or 4-wire switch is provided on the CS1W-SCB41-V1 only. When an RS-422/485 port is used, set the switch to 2 when 2-wire connections are used, and set the switch to 4 when 4-wire connections are used. For details, refer to Section 3 Installation and Wiring.
Label WIRE Name 2-wire or 4-wire switch Settings 2: 2-wire 4: 4-wire Factory setting 2: 2-wire
External Dimensions
CS1W-SCB21-V1 CS1W-SCB41-V1 Mounted in the CPU Unit
130
SCB21-V1
SCB41-V1
72
Section 2-1
2-1-2
CS1W-SCU31-V1
SCU31-V1
TERM OFF
PORT1
Port 1 RS-232C
PORT2
Port 2 RS-232C
Indicators
Indicator RUN RDY Color Green Green Status Lit Not lit Lit Flashing Not lit Lit Meaning Operating normally Unit hardware error. Protocol macro preparations have been completed. Protocol macros are being prepared. (see note 1) Hardware error in Serial Communications Unit. CPU Unit error, or this Unit has not been registered in the I/O table. Routing tables incorrectly registered in the Unit. System Setup error (see note 2) CPU Unit is operating normally and the Setup Area settings are normal. Unit hardware error, or loopback test error Protocol data syntax error or protocol data error (SUM error). Unit is operating normally. Port 1 is being used for sending. Port 1 is not being used for sending. Port 1 is being used for receiving. Port 1 is not being used for receiving. Terminating resistance is connected internally for port 1. Terminating resistance is not connected internally for port 1. Port 2 is being used for sending. Port 2 is not being used for sending. Port 2 is being used for sending. Port 2 is not being used for sending. Terminating resistance is connected internally for port 2. Terminating resistance is not connected internally for port 2.
ERH
Red
Flashing Not lit ERC Red Lit Flashing Not lit Lit Not lit Lit Not lit Lit Not lit SD2 RD2 Yellow Yellow Lit Not lit Lit Not lit Lit Not lit
SD1 RD1
Yellow Yellow
A987
A987
UNIT No.
65432
10F
UNIT No.
6543
210F
EDCB
EDCB
ON 4
Terminating resistance switch (for port 2) 2-wire or 4-wire switch (for port 2) Port 2 RS-422A/485
73
Section 2-1
1. Depending on the interval of flashing, the meaning is as follows: Protocol data being initialized: 0.3 s Protocol data initialized, or being overwritten: 1.0 s Protocol data error: 1.0 s and CPU Unit ERC indicator is flashing 2. The Setup Area is allocated in the DM Area according to the unit number setting. For details, refer to 2-3 I/O Memory Allocations. 3. Only the CS1W-SCU31-V1 is equipped with the TER1 and TER2 indicators. For the action required when an error occurs, refer to Section 12 Troubleshooting and Maintenance.
Set the CPU Bus Unit unit number for the Unit. The CIO Area and DM Area are allocated according to the unit number setting. The words that are allocated are used for the software switches, Status Area, and the System Setup. Set the unit number between 0 and F. The factory setting is for unit number 0. The specifications of the RS-232C are the same as those for the RS-232C port on the Serial Communications Board. See RS-232C Ports on page 69. The specifications of the RS-422A/485 port are the same as those for the RS422A/485 port on the Serial Communications Board. See RS-422A/485 Port on page 71.
CS1W-SCU31-V1
SCU31-V1
RUN ERC SD1 RD1 TER1 RDY ERH SD2 RD2 TER2
130
PORT1
130
PORT2
35
100
35
74
A987
A987
65432
UNIT No.
6543
210F
UNIT No.
10 F
EDCB
EDCB
ON 4
ON 4
100
Section 2-1
2-1-3
CJ1W-SCU21-V1 CJ1W-SCU22
SCU21-V1
RDY RUN ERC ERH SD1 SD2 RD1 RD2
CJ1W-SCU42
SCU42
SD1 SD2
Indicators
UNIT NO.
Indicators Terminating resistance switch Unit number switch 2-wire/4-wire switch Port 1: RS-422A/485
SD1 SD2
Indicators Terminating resistance switch Unit number switch 2-wire/4-wire switch Port 1: RS-422A/485 terminal-block connector
01 EF 2
01 EF 2
01 EF 2
3456
TERM OFF
ON 4
3456
PORT1
WIRE 2
WIRE 2
RDARDA+ SDASDA+ FG
PORT2
PORT2
Port 2: RS-232C
Port 2: RS-232C
CJ1W-SCU31-V1
SCU31-V1
RDY TERM OFF WIRE 2 RUN ERC ERH SD1 SD2 RD1 TER1 RD2 TER2
CJ1W-SCU32
SCU32
Indicators Terminating resistance switch (for port 1) Unit number switch 2-wire/4-wire switch (for port 1) Port 1: RS-422A/485
SD1 SD2
Indicators Terminating resistance switch (for port 1) Unit number switch 2-wire/4-wire switch (for port 1) Port 1: RS-422A/485 terminal-block connector Port 2: RS-422A/485 terminal-block connector Magnified view of bottom-right corner
01 EF 2
01 EF 2
ON 4
3456
WIRE 2
RDARDA+ SDASDA+ FG
Port 2: RS-422A/485
TERM OFF WIRE 2 ON 4
Indicators
Indicator RUN RDY Color Green Green Status Lit Not lit Lit Flashing Not lit Meaning Operating normally Unit hardware error. Protocol macro preparations have been completed. Protocol macros are being prepared (see note 1). Hardware error in Serial Communications Unit.
BCD
UNIT NO.
TERM OFF
ON
3456
UNIT NO.
BCD
UNIT NO.
TERM OFF
ON
3456
UNIT NO.
BCD
789A
789A
789A
BCD
PORT2
Port 2: RS-232C
789A
789A
BCD
75
Section 2-1
Flashing Not lit ERC Red Lit Flashing Not lit Lit Not lit Lit Not lit Lit Not lit Yellow Yellow Yellow Lit Not lit Lit Not lit Lit Not lit
SD1 RD1 TER1 (see note 3) SD2 RD2 TER2 (see note 4)
CPU Unit error, or this Unit has not been registered in the I/O table. Routing tables incorrectly registered in the Unit. System Setup error (see note 1) CPU Unit is operating normally and the Setup Area settings are normal. Unit hardware error Protocol data syntax error or protocol data error (SUM error). Unit is operating normally. Port 1 is being used for sending. Port 1 is not being used for sending. Port 1 is being used for receiving. Port 1 is not being used for receiving. Terminating resistance is connected internally for port 1. Terminating resistance is not connected internally for port 1. Port 2 is being used for sending. Port 2 is not being used for sending. Port 2 is being used for receiving. Port 2 is not being used for receiving. Terminating resistance is connected internally for port 2. Terminating resistance is not connected internally for port 2.
Note
1. Depending on the interval of flashing, the meaning is as follows: Protocol data being initialized: 0.3 s Protocol data initialized, or being overwritten: 1.0 s Protocol data error: 1.0 s and CPU Unit ERC indicator is flashing 2. The Setup Area is allocated in the DM Area according to the unit number setting. For details, refer to 2-3 I/O Memory Allocations. 3. Only the CJ1W-SCU31-V1/41-V1/SCU32/SCU42 are equipped with a TER1 indicator. 4. Only the CJ1W-SCU31-V1/SCU32 are equipped with a TER2 indicator. For the action required when an error occurs, refer to Section 12 Troubleshooting and Maintenance.
Set the CPU Bus Unit unit number for the Unit. The CIO Area and DM Area are allocated according to the unit number setting. The words that are allocated are used for the software switches, Status Area, and the System Setup. Set the unit number between 0 and F. The factory setting is for unit number 0. The specifications of the RS-232C are the same as those for the RS-232C port on the Serial Communications Board. See RS-232C Ports on page 69. With the CJ1W-SCU31-V1/41-V1, the specifications of the RS-422A/485 port are the same as those for the RS-422A/485 port on the Serial Communications Board. See RS-422A/485 Port on page 71. The CJ1W-SCU32/42 have an RS-422A/485 terminal-block connector. Connector details are given below.
76
Section 2-1
1 2 3 4 5
Note
1. For 2-wire connections, use either pins 1 and 2 or pins 3 and 4. 2. Pin 5 (the shield) is connected to the GR terminal on the Power Supply Unit though the Serial Communications Unit. The cable shield can thus be grounded by grounding the GR terminal of the Power Supply Unit. 3. The signal names SDA/B and RDA/B do not always have the same polarity as that shown above. Check the polarity of the external device before making connections. Applicable Connectors Plug: FMC 1.5/5-STF-3.5AU (screwless model by Phoenix Contact) MC1.5/5-STF-3.5AU (model with screw terminals by Phoenix Contact) or equivalent Recommended Cable CO-HC-ESV-3P7/0.2 (by Hirakawa Hewtech) Cable length: 1,200 m max. (multidrop connections)
CJ1W-SCU21-V1 CJ1W-SCU22
31
SCU21-V1
RDY RUN ERC ERH SD1 SD2 RD1 RD2
65
01 EF 2
3456
UNIT NO.
PORT1
789A
90
BCD
PORT2
77
Section 2-1
65
01 EF 2
ON 4
3456
BCD
789A
UNIT NO.
789A
90
ON 4
CJ1W-SCU41-V1
31
SCU41-V1
RDY TERM OFF WIRE 2 RUN ERC ERH SD1 SD2 RD1 TER1 RD2
65
01 EF 2
ON 4
3456
BCD
UNIT NO.
789A
90
PORT2
CJ1W-SCU32
81.9 31
SCU32
RDY TERM OFF WIRE 2 RUN ERC ERH SD1 SD2 RD1 TER1 RD2 TER2
65
RDARDA+
90
SDASDA+ FG
78
BCD
01 EF 2
ON
3456
UNIT NO.
Section 2-1
65
01 EF 2
ON 4
3456
UNIT NO.
RDARDB+ SDASDB+ FG
789A
90
BCD
PORT2
79
Section 2-2
2-2
2-2-1
Local memory
25 words
20 words
D32099
Error information
Note
1. Set the Serial Communications Board mode and the communications settings (System Setup) in the words allocated in the DM Area. Use a Programming Device, such as a Programming Console or the CXProgrammer, to make these settings. The System Setup is transferred to the Serial Communications Board at the following times: When the power to the CPU Unit is turned ON, when the Serial Communications Board is restarted (A60800 is turned ON), or when the STUP(237) instruction is executed. When the Port 1 Port Settings Change Bit (A63601) or Port 2 Port Settings Change Bit (A63602) is turned ON. 2. When STUP(237) is executed, the CPU Unit automatically turns ON the Port 1 or Port 2 Port Settings Change Bit and updates the System Setup. For details on the STUP(237) instruction, see Appendix O Changing Communications Port Settings Using STUP(237).
80
Section 2-2
2-2-2
Status
CIO 1875 Unit No. 15 CIO 1899 CPU Bus Unit Area in DM Area D30000 D30001 Unit No. 0 D30099 D30100 D30101 Unit No. 1 D30199
100 words 100 words 25 words
20 words
D31500 Unit No. 15 D31599 Auxiliary Area Unit No. 0 Unit No. 1 Unit No. 15 A620 A621 A635 Restart Bits A501 Unit 15 Unit 0
Port Settings Change Bits (see note 2)
100 words
Note
1. Set the Serial Communications Unit mode and the communications settings (System Setup) in the words allocated in the DM Area. Use a Programming Device, such as a Programming Console or the CXProgrammer, to make these settings. The System Setup is transferred to the Serial Communications Unit at the following times: When the power to the CPU Unit is turned ON, when the Serial Communications Unit is restarted (a bit between A50100 to A50115 is turned ON), or when the STUP(237) instruction is executed.
81
Section 2-3
When the Port 1 Port Settings Change Bit (a bit between A62001 to A63501 (see note a)) or Port 2 Port Settings Change Bit (a bit between A62002 to A63502 (see note b)) is turned ON. Note a) Bits are allocated in the following order: Unit number 0: A62001, unit number 1: A62101, unit number 2: A62201, and so on through unit number F: A63501. b) Bits are allocated in the following order: Unit number 0: A62002, unit number 1: A62102, unit number 2: A62202 and so on through unit number F: A63502. 2. When STUP(237) is executed, the CPU Unit automatically turns ON the Port 1 or Port 2 Port Settings Change Bit and updates the System Setup. For details on the STUP(237) instruction, see Appendix O Changing Communications Port Settings Using STUP(237).
2-3
2-3-1
DM Area
The Setup Area allocated in the DM Area consists of 20 words between D32000 and D32767, except for the Modbus-RTU slave mode, which uses 40 words for the Setup Area. These words are used to set the serial communications mode, communications specifications, and other settings for the Serial Communications Board. The 20 words from D32000 to D32009 and D32020 to D32029 are used for port 1, and the 20 words from D32010 to D32019 and D32030 to D32039 are used for port 2. The remaining words are reserved for the system. Setup Area Allocated in the DM Area D32000 to D32767
Words D32000 to D32009 D32010 to D32019 D32020 to D32029 D32030 to D32039 D32040 to D32767 Usage Port 1 Settings Port 2 Settings Port 1 Settings for Modbus-RTU slave mode Port 2 Settings for Modbus-RTU slave mode Reserved for the system
82
Section 2-3
The Setup Area allocated in the DM Area is used to set the serial communications mode, communications specifications, and other settings for the Serial Communications Units. The words from D30000 to D31599 (100 words per Unit 16 Units) are allocated according to the unit number settings. m = D30000 + 100 unit number
Unit No. Unit No. 0 Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8 Unit No. 9 Unit No. A Unit No. B Unit No. C Unit No. D Unit No. E Unit No. F Words D30000 to D30099 D30100 to D30199 D30200 to D30299 D30300 to D30399 D30400 to D30499 D30500 to D30599 D30600 to D30699 D30700 to D30799 D30800 to D30899 D30900 to D30999 D31000 to D31099 D31100 to D31199 D31200 to D31299 D31300 to D31399 D31400 to D31499 D31500 to D31599
m to m + 9: Port 1 Settings m + 10 to m + 19: Port 2 Settings m + 20 to m + 29: Port 1 Settings m + 30 to m + 39: Port 2 Settings m + 40 to m + 99: Reserved for the system
The following methods can be used to set the Unit settings in the Setup Areas. Use a Programming Device, such as a Programming Console (see note a), CX-Protocol, or CX-Programmer. Use the STUP(237) instruction (see note b) in the ladder diagram program. If it is necessary to change the System Setup while the ladder diagram program is being executed, use this method to change the System Setup. Note a) If settings are changed from a Programming Device, cycle the power to the CPU Unit, use a Restart Bit to restart the Unit or Board, or use the Port Settings Change Bits to restart the port. Refer to 2-2 Data Exchange with the CPU Unit for the specific addresses to use. b) For the procedure used to change the System Setup using the STUP(237) instruction, refer to Appendix R Changing Communications Port Settings Using STUP(237). The usage of the System Setup differs according to the serial communications mode. For details, refer to the following sections. Host Link communications: Protocol macros: Serial Gateway: No-protocol Mode: 1:N NT Links: Modbus-RTU Mode: Loopback test: Section 4 Using Host Link Communications. Section 5 Using Protocol Macros. Section 6 Serial Gateway Section 7 No-protocol Mode Section 8 Using 1:N NT Links. Section 9 Using Modbus-RTU Slave Mode Section 11 Loopback Test.
83
Section 2-3
Note When making settings in the allocated DM Area words by editing the CPU Bus Unit in the I/O table from the CX-Programmer, always enable user settings for the port whenever the default settings (Host Link and 9,600 bps) are not used. If using user settings is not enabled, the setting of the serial communications mode will be ignored even if it is changed, e.g., to No-protocol mode.
If you do not specify user settings, all settings for the serial communications mode will be ignored.
84
Section 2-3
15 12 to 14 08 to 11
05 to 07 04 03 02 01 00 04 to 15 00 to 03
D32001
D32011 m + 1
m + 11
Port settings (see note 1) 0: Defaults; 1: User settings Reserved Serial communications mode (see note 2) 0 hex: Default (Host Link); 2 hex: 1:N NT Links (see note 3); 3 hex: No-protocol; 5 hex: Host Link; 6 hex: Protocol macro; 9 hex: Serial Gateway; A hex: Modbus-RTU slave; F hex: Loopback test Reserved Start bits 0: 1 bit; 1: 1 bit (1 start bit is always used regardless of this setting) Data length 0: 7 bits; 1: 8 bits Stop bits 0: 2 bits; 1: 1 bit Parity 0: Yes; 1: No Parity 0: Even; 1: Odd Reserved Baud rate (Unit: bps) (see note 4) 0 hex: Default (9,600); 3 hex: 1,200; 4 hex: 2,400; 5 hex: 4,800; 6 hex: 9,600; 7 hex: 19,200; 8 hex: 38,400; 9 hex: 57,600; A hex: 115,200; B hex: 230,400 Note: The maximum baud rate depends on the unit version. For details, refer to SECTION 10 Communications Performance.
Host Link, Serial Gateway, Protocol macro, Noprotocol
D32002
D32012 m+ 2
m + 12
15 00 to 14
D32003
D32013 m + 3
m + 13
15 14
11 to 13 08 to 10
00 to 07
Host Link
Send delay 0: Default (0 ms); 1: User-specified Send delay (user-specified): 0 to 300 s (0 to 300,000 ms) (0000 to 7530 hex; 0 to 30,000 decimal) (Unit: 10 ms) CTS control (see note 5) 0: No; 1:Yes 1:N/1:1 protocol setting (Unit Ver. 1.2 or later only) 1: 1:1 protocol; 0: 1:N protocol If the Host Link compatible device mode is set to 0 to 2 hex (mode A or B), the setting in this bit is invalid (fixed to 1:N Host Links) Reserved Host Link compatible device mode (Unit Ver. 1.2 or later only) 0 hex: Default (mode A) 1 hex: Mode A (CS/CJ/C) 2 hex: Mode B (CVM1/CV) 3 hex: Mode C (C200H) 4 hex: Mode D (C500/120) Host Link unit number (00 to 1F hex)
85
Section 2-3
08 to 15 00 to 07 13 to 15 12 10 to 11 08 to 09
00 to 07
D32006
D32016 m + 6
m + 16
08 to 15
D32007
D32017 m + 7
m + 17
00 to 02 08 to 15
Start code (00 to FF hex) Noproto- End code (00 to FF hex) col Reserved Start code inclusion setting 0: No; 1: Yes Reserved End code inclusion setting 00: No (specify number of receive data bytes) 01: Yes 10: CR + LF specified Number of receive data bytes 00 hex (default): 256 bytes 01 to FF hex: 1 to 255 bytes Mod- Modbus-RTU slave address bus- 01 to F7 hex: 1 to 247 RTU slave 1:N NT Links maximum unit number (0 to 7)
Serial Gateway/ Protocol macro
Response timeout monitoring time (Unit Ver. 1.2 or later only) 00 hex: 5 s (default) 01 to FF hex (1 to 255 decimal): 0.1 to 25.5 s (Unit: 100 ms)
00 to 07
Proto- Serial Gateway send start timeout monitoring time (Unit Ver. col 1.2 or later only) macro 00 hex: 5 s (default)
01 to FF hex (1 to 255 decimal): 0.1 to 25.5 s (Unit: 100 ms) D32008 D32018 m + 8 m + 18 15 04 to 14 03
Proto- Transmission method col macro 0: Half-duplex; 1:Full-duplex
02
D32009
D32019 m + 9
m + 19
00 to 01 00 to 15
Reserved Clearing/holding the contents of the reception buffer in fullduplex mode (Unit Ver. 1.2 or later only) 0: Clear; 1: Hold Link word specification data exchange timing (Unit Ver. 1.2 or later only) 0: On-request I/O refreshing 1: Continuos I/O refreshing Reserved Maximum number of bytes in protocol macro send/receive data (00C8 to 03E8 hex: 200 to 1,000 bytes)
86
Section 2-3
08 to 15 00 to 07
D32021
D32031 m + 21
m + 31
08 to 15
00 to 07
Reserved Coils allocation area 00 hex: CIO Area, B0 hex: CIO Area, B1 hex: Work Area, B2 hex: Holding Area, B3 hex: Auxiliary Area Input registers allocation area 00 hex: CIO Area, B0 hex: CIO Area, B1 hex: Work Area, B2 hex: Holding Area, B3 hex: Auxiliary Area Holding registers allocation area 00 hex: DM Area, 82 hex: DM Area, 50 to 5C hex: EM bank 0 to C, A0 to AC hex: EM bank 0 to C, 98 hex: Current bank Reserved
Number of external interrupt to execute for interrupt notification, 00 to FF hex: 0 to 255 Reserved Notification of CPU Unit when data is received 0: Do not notify, 1: Notify Reserved Clearing reception buffers after DRXDU(261) instruction execution 0: Do not clear, 1: Clear Reserved
D32026 to D32029
---
Note
1. The default settings used for Host Link, protocol macro, and loopback test modes areas follows: Baud rate: 9,600 bps, start bits: 1 bit, data length: 7 bits, parity: even, and stop bits: 2 bits. The default settings used for Modbus-RTU slave mode are as follows: Baud rate: 19,200 bps, data length: 8 bits, parity: even, and stop bits: 1 bits. The default for NT Link Mode is Standard NT Links. 2. A System Setup error will occur if 1, 3, 4, or 7 to E is set, and the Unit will operate with the default Host Link settings (9,600 bps, unit number 00). 3. The PTs connected to the port must also be set for a 1:N NT Link. Communications will not be possible if a PT is set for a 1:1 NT Link. 4. Do not set undefined settings and baud rates that are not supported by the serial communications mode. A System Setup error will result. Settings of 1 and 2 are reserved for the system and should not be used. 5. With CTS control, turn ON the request to send (RTS) signal before stating to send, and be sure the clear to send (CTS) signal is ON before sending data. When there is no CTS control, turn ON the request to send (RTS) signal before sending, and then send data without checking the request to send (RTS) signal. 6. For settings below 00C8, use 00C8 Hex; for settings above 03E8, use 03E8 Hex.
87
Section 2-3
2-3-2
CIO Area
Words in the CIO Area are allocated as Software Switches, which are manipulated from the CPU Unit to control the operation of the Serial Communications Board or Unit, and for a Status Area, which contains status and error information for the Serial Communications Board or Unit.
Words CIO 1900 to CIO 1999 in the Inner Board Area are used for the Software Switches and Status Area. CIO 1900 contains software switches, and the 24 words from CIO 1901 to CIO 1924 are used for the Status Area. Inner Board CIO Area CIO 1900 to CIO 1999
Words CIO 1900 CIO 1901 to CIO 1904 CIO 1905 to CIO 1914 CIO 1915 to CIO 1924 CIO 1925 to CIO 1999 Usage Software switch Board status Port 1 status Port 2 status Reserved for the system
Words are allocated in the CIO Area for Software Switches and Status Area. Words CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the CIO Area are allocated according to the unit number setting. Each Unit is allocated 25 words. The first word is used for Software Switches, and the remaining 24 words are used for the Status Area. CPU Bus Unit Area CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 n = CIO 1500 + 25 unit number
Unit No. Unit No. 0 Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8 Unit No. 9 Unit No. A Unit No. B Unit No. C Unit No. D Unit No. E Unit No. F Words CIO 1500 to CIO 1524 CIO 1525 to CIO 1549 CIO 1550 to CIO 1574 CIO 1575 to CIO 1599 CIO 1600 to CIO 1624 CIO 1625 to CIO 1649 CIO 1650 to CIO 1674 CIO 1675 to CIO 1699 CIO 1700 to CIO 1724 CIO 1725 to CIO 1749 CIO 1750 to CIO 1774 CIO 1775 to CIO 1799 CIO 1800 to CIO 1824 CIO 1825 to CIO 1849 CIO 1850 to CIO 1874 CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
n: Software switches (Ports 1 and 2) n + 1 to n + 4: Unit status n + 5 to n + 14: Port 1 status n + 15 to n + 24: Port 2 status
88
Section 2-3
Software Switches are used to output control signals from the CPU Unit to the Serial Communications Board or Unit. The software switches are used for loopback tests and to abort, release wait status, and control other functions for protocol macros. For details on the software switch functions, refer to Section 5 Using Protocol Macros and Section 11 Loopback Test. n = CIO 1500 + 25 unit number
Words Unit Board (CS/ (CS CJ) only) CIO n 1900 Bit Function
15 14 13 12
Port 2
11 10
09
08 07 06 05 04 Port 1
03 02
01
00
Reserved Loopback Test Switch (loopback tests) 1: Start, 0: Stop Reserved Serial Gateway Prohibited Switch (protocol macros) 1: Prohibited, 0: Not prohibited Abort Switch (protocol macros) 1: Abort, 0: Aborted One-shot Trace Switch (protocol macros, see note) 1: Start, 0: Stop Continuous Trace Switch (protocol macros, see note) 1: Start, 0: Stop Wait Release Switch (protocol macros) 1: Release wait, 0: Wait released Reserved Loopback Test Switch (loopback tests) 1: Start, 0: Stop Reserved Serial Gateway Prohibited Switch (protocol macros) 1: Prohibited, 0: Not prohibited Abort Switch (protocol macros) 1: Abort, 0: Aborted One-shot Trace Switch (protocol macros, see note) 1: Start, 0: Stop Continuous Trace Switch (protocol macros, see note) 1: Start, 0: Stop Wait Release Switch (protocol macros) 1: Release wait, 0: Wait released
Note The One-shot Trace Switch and Continuous Trace Switch are used for the Serial Communications Board/Unit only when executing traces from the CXProtocol in protocol macro mode. Do not manipulate these switches from a ladder diagram. Status Area The Status Area is used for status information input from Serial Communications Board or Unit to the CPU Unit. The Status Area is where the Serial Communications Board or Unit sets communications status, the transmission control signal status, the transmission error status, and the protocol status.
89
Section 2-3
n = CIO 1500 + 25 unit number
Words
Bit
Contents
Board Unit (CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series) Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 CIO 1901 n+1 02 to 15 01 00 CIO 1902 n+2 00 to 15 CIO 1903 n+3 00 to 15 CIO 1904 n+4 00 to 15 CIO CIO n+5 n + 15 12 to 15 1905 1915 08 to 11 05 to 07 04 03 02 01 00 CIO CIO n+6 n + 16 15 1906 1916 14 13 02 to 12 01 00 11 to 15 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 00 to 02
Reserved 1: Error log EEPROM error 0: Error log EEPROM normal 1: Protocol data error 0: Protocol data normal Reserved Reserved Reserved Serial communications mode Port set- Serial ting sta- commu- Baud rate nicatus Reserved tions mode Start bits: Always 1 (see Data length: 7 or 8 bits note 1) Stop bits: 1 or 2 bits Parity: Yes/No Parity: Even/Odd Hard0 No 0 RS-232C 1 RS-422A/485 1 Reserved ware set0 1 0 1 tings (see 0: Terminating resistance OFF note 2) 1: Terminating resistance ON Reserved 1: System Setup error; 0: System Setup normal 1: Port operating; 0: Port stopped Commu- Reserved nica1: Remote Unit busy receiving (Flow control) tions 0: Remote Unit ready to receive status Reserved 1: Local Unit busy receiving (Flow control) 0: Local Unit ready to receive DTR (ER) signal Transmission DSR (DR) signal control Reserved signal status CTS (CS) signal RTS (RS) signal Reserved
CIO 1907
CIO 1917
n+7
n + 17
90
Section 2-3
Trans1: Transmission error (see note 3); 0: No transmission error mission 1: Tfs (send finished monitoring time) exceeded (see note 4); error sta- 0: Normal tus 1: Tfr (receive finished monitoring time) exceeded (see note 4); 0: Normal 1: Tr (receive wait monitoring time) exceeded (see note 4) 0: Normal Number of retries (see note 4) 1: FCS check error (see note 5); 0: FCS check normal 1: Command error (see note 4); 0: No command error 1: Timeout (protocol macros: Tfs, Tfr, or Tr) error or Serial Gateway send/response timeout (see note 6); 0: Normal 1: Overrun error (see note 7); 0: Normal 1: Framing error (see note 8); 0: Normal 1: Parity error (see note 8); 0: Normal Reserved Protocol status (See Protocol Status on page 91.)
Note
1. The current settings for the port are read. For details on the contents that are read, see 2-3-1 DM Area. If a System Setup error occurs, the default settings will be read. 2. The port types for the Serial Communications Board or Unit and the terminating resistance switch setting are read. 3. Turned ON if an overrun error (bit 04), a framing error (bit 03), or a parity error (bit 02) occurs with the Host Link mode. If any of the error bits 00 to 14 turns ON in the protocol macro mode but then communications are recovered within the specified number of retries, the bit will turn OFF. The bit will remain ON if recovery is not possible within the specified number of retries. 4. Used only with protocol macros. Not used with any other serial communications mode. 5. Used with protocol macros or Serial Gateway. This bit turns ON (is set to 1) if an error occurs in the transmission path while using the Serial Gateway. With Modbus-RTU slave mode, this bit turns ON if there is a CRC error. 6. Used with protocol macros or Serial Gateway. This bit turns ON (is set to 1) if a send start timeout or response timeout occurs while using the Serial Gateway. 7. Not used with NT Links or loopback tests. This bit also turns ON (is set to 1) if 260 bytes or more are stored in the reception buffer during no-protocol communications. 8. Not used with NT Links or loopback tests.
Protocol Status
The protocol status is used in all modes except for Host Link and Serial Gateway Modes. It is also used for loopback tests. The contents depend on the serial communications mode, as shown in the following tables.
91
Section 2-3
Protocol Macro Executing Flag Step Troubleshooting Flag Aborted Flag Tracing Flag Sequence End Completion Flag Sequence Abort Completion Flag Sequence Waiting Flag Serial Gateway Prohibited Flag 1: Prohibited; 0: Not prohibited Reserved Error codes 0: No error 2: Sequence number error 3: Data read/write area exceeded error 4: Protocol data syntax error
n + 10
n + 20
12 to 15 00 to 11 12 to 15 08 to 11 04 to 07 00 to 03
n + 11
n + 21
n + 12 n + 13 n + 14
n + 22 n + 23 n + 24
00 to 15 00 to 15 08 to 15 00 to 07
Reserved Communications Sequence Number 000 to 999 (000 to 3E7 hex) Reserved Executed Step Number (code) 0 to 15 (0 to F hex) Reserved Executed Reception Case Number (code) 0 to 15 (0 to F hex) Executed Reception Case Number Storage Flag 0 to 15: Correspond to bits 00 to 15 Executed Step Number Storage Flag 0 to 15: Correspond to bits 00 to 15 Repeat Counter Setting Value 0 to 255 (00 to FF hex) Repeat Counter Present Value 0 to 255 (00 to FF hex)
08 to 15 00 to 07
n + 10 to n + 20 to 00 to 15 n + 14 n + 24
92
Section 2-3
15 09 to 14 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01
Test status
1: Error; 0: Normal Reserved 1: DSR (DR) signal check error; 0: Normal 1: CTS (CS) signal check error; 0: Normal Reserved 1: Timeout error; 0: Normal 1: Parity error; 0: Normal 1: Overrun error; 0: Normal 1: Framing error; 0: Normal Reserved
n + 10 n+11
n + 20 n+21
00 00 to 15 00 to 15
1: Conveyor error; 0: Normal Number of tests executed Number of test errors Reserved
n + 12 to n + 22 to 00 to 15 n + 14 n + 24
15 to 08 07
06
05 04 03 to 00 15 to 00
---
---
n + 10
n + 20
Reserved Reception Overflow Flag 1: Board/Unit has received the specified number of bytes or more 0: Board/Unit has not received the specified number of bytes or more Reception Completed Flag 1: Reception completed; 0: No reception or reception in progress TXDU(256) Executing Flag 1: Executing; 0: Not executing DTXDU(262) Send Ready Flag 1: Send enabled; 0: Send disabled Reserved Receive counter (number of receive data bytes) The number of bytes of received data between 0 and 256 bytes is indicated using 0000 to 0100 hex.
93
Section 2-3
15 to 00 15 to 00 15 to 00 15 to 00 15 to 00 15 to 00
Number of normally received commands Number of normally sent responses Number of overrun errors, framing errors, and parity errors (transmission errors) Number of CRC errors (transmission errors) Number of command format errors (illegal function codes and illegal addresses) Reserved.
2-3-3
94
Section 2-3
Contents Reserved 1 Error log EEPROM error; 0: Normal 1: Protocol macro execution error; 0: Normal This bit will be turned ON when code 3, 4, or 5 is stored in the error code for bits 00 to 03 of CIO 1909 or CIO 1919 in the CIO Area, 1: Protocol data error (SUM error); 0: Normal 1: System Setup error; 0: Normal 1: Routing table error; 0: Normal Reserved 1: Cyclic monitoring error; 0: Normal 1: Inner Board service disabled (See note 3.); Normal Reserved Reserved 1: Inner Bus error; 0: Normal 1: Inner Board watchdog timer error; 0: Normal
Note
1. When any one of bits 04 to 11 is ON, A40208 (Inner Board Error Flag) (non-fatal error) will be ON. 2. When bit 00 or 01 is ON, A40112 (Inner Board Fatal Error Flag) will be ON. 3. This bit turns ON if a TXD(236)/RXD(235) instruction is sent during no-protocol communications to an Inner Board that does not support no-protocol mode (no Unit Ver. indicated). For details on each type of error, refer to Section 12 Troubleshooting and Maintenance. Restart Bit: A60800 The Restart Bit can be turned ON and then OFF to restart the Serial Communications Board without turning OFF the PLC power supply.
Bit A60800 Function Inner Board Restart Bit
95
Section 2-3
06
14
05 00 to 04 00 to 15
13 08 to 12 00 to 15
A357
A358
Reception Overflow Flag 1: Board/Unit has received the specified number of bytes or more 0: Board/Unit has not received the specified number of bytes or more Reception Completed Flag 1: Reception completed; 0: No reception or reception in progress Send Ready Flag 1: Send enabled; 0: Send disabled Reserved Receive counter (number of receive data bytes) The number of bytes of received data between 0 and 256 bytes is indicated using 0000 to 0100 hex.
Port 1 and Port 2 Port Settings Change Bits These bits can be turned ON from the program using the OUT or other instructions to change communications settings and restart the Serial Communications Unit ports. When changing the settings and restarting the port have been completed, the bit will automatically be turned OFF. The port 1 or port 2 Port Settings Change Bits and Restart Bits are allocated in the Auxiliary Area according to the unit number as shown below. Note These bits are used both to change the port settings and to restart the port at the same time. One of these bits can be turned ON to restart a port without changing the port settings in the Setup Area allocated in the DM Area. The STUP(237) instruction can also be used to just restart a communications port by executing STUP(237) with the same port settings as the ones already being used. n = A620 + unit number
Words n Bit 03 to 15 02 01 00 Contents Reserved 1: Port 2 Settings Change Bit 1: Port 1 Settings Change Bit Reserved
Unit Unit No. 0 Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8 Unit No. 9
Port 1 Settings Change Bit A62001 A62101 A62201 A62301 A62401 A62501 A62601 A62701 A62801 A62901
Port 2 Settings Change Bit A62002 A62102 A62202 A62302 A62402 A62502 A62602 A62702 A62802 A62902
96
Section 2-3
Port 2 Settings Change Bit A63002 A63102 A63202 A63302 A63402 A63502
Restart Bit A Restart Bit can be turned ON and then OFF to restart the Serial Communications Board without turning OFF the PLC power supply.
Unit A50100 A50101 A50102 A50103 A50104 A50105 A50106 A50107 A50108 A50109 A50110 A50111 A50112 A50113 A50114 A50115 Function Unit No. 0 Restart Bit Unit No. 1 Restart Bit Unit No. 2 Restart Bit Unit No. 3 Restart Bit Unit No. 4 Restart Bit Unit No. 5 Restart Bit Unit No. 6 Restart Bit Unit No. 7 Restart Bit Unit No. 8 Restart Bit Unit No. 9 Restart Bit Unit No. A Restart Bit Unit No. B Restart Bit Unit No. C Restart Bit Unit No. D Restart Bit Unit No. E Restart Bit Unit No. F Restart Bit
Note Do not restart a Serial Communications Unit if an external interrupt is being used. Doing so may make the system unstable
A203 to A210
A219
97
Section 2-3
98
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-10 Connections for Protocol Macros, Serial Gateway, No-protocol Mode, and Modbus-RTU Slave Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 3-3-11 1:N NT Link Connections with Programmable Terminals. . . . . . . . 3-3-12 Connections in Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4-1 3-4-2 3-4-3 3-4-4 3-4-5 3-4-6 3-4-7 Recommended RS-232C Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended RS-422A/485 Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 132 132 132 133
Wiring Connectors for the CS1W-SCB@1-V1, CS1W-SCU@1-V1, CJ1W-SCU@1-V1, or CJ1W-SCU22/42 (RS-232C Connector Only) 136 Soldering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembling Connector Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring RS-422A/485 Terminal-block Connectors on the CJ1W-SCU32/42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 139 139 140
99
Section 3-1
3-1
Installation Procedure
Note
100
Section 3-2
3-1-1
-V1
Port cover
3-2
3-2-1
101
Section 3-2
3-2-2
Backplane
2. Make sure that the connector on the back of the Unit is properly inserted into the connector in the Backplane. 3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screw on the bottom of the Unit. The screwdriver must be held at a slight angle, so be sure to leave enough space below the Rack.
Duct 20 mm min. CPU Unit I/O Power Supply Unit Remote I/O Rack 20 mm min. Duct Backplane
Phillips screwdriver
Note Tighten the screw to a torque of 0.4 Nm. To remove the Unit, loosen the screw with a Phillips screwdriver, rotate the Unit upwards, and then remove it.
102
Section 3-2
3-2-3
SYSMAC CJ1G-CPU44
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
SCU41
RUN RDY
TERM OFF
ERC
SD1 SD2
RD1 RD2
TER1
ERH
ON
OPEN
WIRE 2
01 EF 2
3456
UNIT NO.
789A
L1
MCPWR BUSY
AC100-240V INPUT
L2/N
PERIPHERAL
PORT
2. Slide the sliders on the top and bottom of the Unit until they lock the Units together.
Slider
PA205R
POWER
SYSMAC CJ1G-CPU44
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
SCU41
RUN RDY
TERM OFF
ERC
SD1 SD2
RD1 RD2
TER1
ERH
ON
OPEN
WIRE 2 4
01 EF 2
3456
UNIT NO.
Release
L1
MCPWR BUSY
AC100-240V INPUT
L2/N
PERIPHERAL PORT2
PORT
Note If the sliders are not locked properly, the Serial Communications Units may not function correctly. To remove the Unit, move the sliders to the release position and then pull the Units gently apart.
BCD
PORT2
Lock
789A
BCD
103
Section 3-2
3-2-4
Port cover
CJ-series Unit
Remove label after wiring.
SCU41
RUN RDY
TERM OFF
ERC
SD1 SD2
RD1 RD2
TER1
ERH
ON
01 EF 2
3456
BCD
UNIT NO.
789A
WIRE 2
PORT2
Port cover
104
Wiring
Section 3-3
3-3
3-3-1
Wiring
Wiring Precautions
Before connecting or disconnecting the communications cables, always make sure that the PLC is turned OFF. Tighten the communications connector screws firmly with your fingers. Serial Communications Boards and Units can be connected to various devices. For compatibility, refer to the operation manuals for the devices to which they are to be connected.
3-3-2
Port Types
The following port types are provided on the Serial Communications Boards and Units.
PLC Series CS Series Unit type Serial Communications Board Model CS1WSCB21-V1 CS1WSCB41-V1 CS1WSCU21-V1 CS1WSCU31-V1 CJ1WSCU21-V1/ CJ1W-SCU22 CJ1WSCU31-V1/ CJ1W-SCU32 CJ1WSCU41-V1/ CJ1W-SCU42 Port 1 RS-232C RS-232C RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-232C Port 2 RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-232C
CJ Series
RS-422A/485
RS-422A/485
RS-422A/485
RS-232C
The following sections describe the connection methods used for each serial communications mode of the Serial Communications Board and Unit ports.
3-3-3
Communications mode 1:1 Host Link 1:1 Host Link Protocol macros (see note 3) Serial Gateway No-protocol NT Link Modbus-RTU slave Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
RS-232C 1:N (see note 1) Yes (see note 2) Yes (see note 2) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1:1 4-wire Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
RS-422A/485 1:N 4-wire 1:1 2-wire Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes
105
Wiring
Note
Section 3-3
1. The NT-AL001-E Link Adapter can be used to convert between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 to enable 1:N communications. 2. Use 4-wire connections between Link Adapters. 3. When using C-mode commands (Host Link commands) from Serial Communications Boards/Units in Protocol Macro Mode to access Serial Communications Boards/Units operating in Host Link Mode, the specifications for Host Link Mode take priority in determining the range of support for each port. If these conditions apply, refer to the row for Host Link Mode in the above table.
3-3-4
RS-232C Ports
Refer to 2-1 Component Names and Functions for signal precautions. RS-422A/485 Ports This layout applies to the following ports: port 2 of the CS1W-SCB41-V1, ports 1 and 2 of the CS1W-SCU31-V1, ports 1 and 2 of the CJ1W-SCU31-V1, and port 1 of the CJ1W-SCU41-V1.
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Hood Abbreviation SDA SDB NC NC NC RDA NC RDB NC FG Signal name Send data Send data + Unused Unused Unused Receive data Unused Receive data + Unused Shield I/O Output Output ------Input --Input -----
Note When the 2-wire connections are used, use either pins 1 and 2, or pins 6 and 8. Refer to 2-1 Component Names and Functions for signal precautions. The internal circuits are shown in the following diagram.
106
Wiring
51 K 4.7 K Receiver 4.7 K 51 K
Terminating resistance: 220 Terminating resistance switch
Section 3-3
Port 2 Pin 8
Pin 6
Note Terminating Resistance Turn OFF the terminating resistance switch or externally attach terminating resistance as required by the specifications of the remote device.
1 2 3 4 5
Note When the 2-wire connections are used, use either pins 1 and 2, or pins 6 and 8. Refer to 2-1 Component Names and Functions for signal precautions. The internal circuits are shown below.
Receiver Pin 2 RDB(+)
Terminating resistance: 120 (See note.) Terminating resistance switch
Pin 1 RDA()
Note Terminating Resistance Turn OFF the terminating resistance switch or externally attach terminating resistance as required by the specifications of the remote device. Note The signal names SDA/B and RDA/B do not always have the same polarity as that shown above. Check the polarity of the external device before making connections.
107
Wiring
Section 3-3
Note The RS-422A/485 port on the CJ1W-SCU32/42 has a failsafe function built into the receiver to prevent reading incorrect signals when the RDA and RDB pins are open or shorted.
3-3-5
Cable connector Backplane connector 123 223 CJ1W-SCU21-V1/31-V1/41-V1/SCU22 Serial Communications Unit 65 150
123 223
Note The mounting heights shown above are applicable when the attached connectors, connector covers, and recommended cables are used. The mounting height may differ when other connectors, connector covers, and cables are used. Determine the mounting height, taking into account the connectors, connector covers, and the minimum bending radius of the cables.
108
Backplane connector
Cable connector
Wiring
CJ1W-SCU32 Serial Communications Unit CJ1W-SCU42 Serial Communications Unit
Section 3-3
Cable connector
65 125 150
65
3-3-6
Communications cables
Control cables
300 mm min.
PLC power supply and general control circuit wiring Power lines
Power cables
300 mm min.
If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct, they must be shielded from each other using grounded steel sheet metal.
PLC power supply and general control circuit wiring Power lines Steel sheet metal 200 mm min.
Communications cables
3-3-7
109
Wiring
Example of 4-Wire Connections Example of 2-Wire Connections
Section 3-3
Other Unit
Note
1. Use the same transmission circuit (2-wire or 4-wire) for all nodes. 2. Do not use 4-wire connections when the 2/4-wire switch on the Board is set to 2-wire. 3. In protocol macro mode, do not use full-duplex transmissions when the 2/ 4-wire switch on the Unit is set to 2-wire. Otherwise, the data sent from the Serial Communications Board or Unit will be directly returned as receive data. In this case, the Board or Unit cannot determine whether the data in the reception buffer is its own send data or the data received from a remote node, and thus cannot perform receive processing properly. To avoid this problem, always use half-duplex transmissions with a 2-wire setting. Either half-duplex or full-duplex transmissions can be used with a 4-wire setting.
3-3-8
3 4 5
OFF OFF ON
OFF
Note When connecting to a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit, turn OFF pin 5 and turn ON pin 6.
110
Wiring
Section 3-3
3-3-9
Port RS-232C Computer to PLC: C-mode or FINS commands PLC to computer: FINS commands
Configuration 1:1
RS-232C
RS-232C
RS-422A/485 Resistance ON
NT-AL001-E
5-V power
RS-422A/485
NT-AL001-E RS-232C
Resistance ON
RS-232C Resistance ON
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
B500-AL001
Resistance ON
RS-232C
RS-232C
RS-422A /485
Resistance ON
Multi-drop Connections
RS-232C
NT-AL001-E Resistance ON 5-V power Resistance ON
RS-422A/485
Note
1. Resistance ON indicates the terminating resistance must be turned ON. 2. 5-V power indicates that a 5-V power supply is required for the Link Adapter. Refer to the Link Adapter manual for details. A 5-V power supply is not required for a Link Adapter connected to a Serial Communications Board or Unit because power is supplied from pin 6 of the connector. 3. The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m. The RS-232C standard, however, does not cover baud rates above 19.2 Kbps. Refer to the manual for the device being connected to confirm support. 4. Four-wire connections must be used for RS-422A/485 connections with Host Link communications.
Connection Examples
The connection examples in the remainder of this section show only the basic connection diagrams. We recommend that appropriate noise countermeasures be taken in actual applications, including the use of shielded twistedpair cables. Refer to 3-4 RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Wiring for actual wiring methods.
111
Wiring
Host Computer Connections 1:1 Connections Using RS-232C Ports IBM PC/AT or Compatible Computers
Serial Communications Board or Unit
Signal Pin FG SD RD RTS CTS 5V DSR DTR SG
Section 3-3
Computer
Pin Signal CD RD SD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS CI
RS-232C interface
RS-232C interface
Computer Shield
Signal FG SD RD RS-232C RTS Interface CTS DSR DTR SG
RS-232C
Pin Signal
NC SD RD RTS CTS 5V DSR DTR SG
Signal Pin
Pin
Signal
FG SD RD RTS CTS 5V DSR DTR SG
RS-232C Interface
D-sub, 9-pin Terminal block connector (male) D-sub, 9-pin connector (male) DIP Switch Settings Pin 1: ON Pin 2: ON (terminating resistance) Pin 3: OFF Pin 4: OFF Pin 5: OFF Pin 6: OFF
DIP Switch Settings Pin 1: ON Pin 2: ON (terminating resistance) Pin 3: OFF Pin 4: OFF Pin 5: OFF Pin 6: ON
Note We recommend using the following NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Connecting Cables to connect to NT-AL001-E Link Adapters. XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m Note Do not connect the 5-V power supply on pin 6 of the RS-232C port on the Serial Communications Board/Unit to any external device other than an NTAL001-E Link Adapter. Otherwise, the external device and the Serial Communications Board/Unit may be damaged.
112
Wiring
1:N Connections Using RS-232C Ports
Section 3-3
Computer
Signal Shield FG SD RD RS-232C Interface RTS CTS DSR DTR SG
DIP Switch Settings Pin 1: ON Pin 2: ON (terminating resistance) Pin 3: OFF Pin 4: OFF Pin 5: OFF Pin 6: OFF
DIP Switch Settings Pin 1: ON Pin 2: OFF Pin 3: OFF Pin 4: OFF Pin 5: OFF Pin 6: ON NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Pin Signal
Signal Pin NC SD RD RTS CTS 5V DSR DTR SG RS-232C (See note)
DIP Switch Settings Pin 1: ON Pin 2: ON (terminating resistance) Pin 3: OFF Pin 4: OFF Pin 5: OFF Pin 6: ON
Note We recommend using the following NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Connecting Cables to connect to NT-AL001-E Link Adapters. XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
113
Wiring
1:1 Connections Using RS-422A/485 Ports CS1W-SCB41-V1, CS1W-SCU31-V1, CJ1W-SCU31-V1/41-V1
Computer
Signal FG SD RS-232C RD Interface RTS CTS DSR DTR SG
Section 3-3
Pin Signal
Hood
DIP Switch Settings Pin 1: ON Pin 2: ON (terminating resistance) Pin 3: OFF Pin 4: OFF Pin 5: OFF Pin 6: OFF
CJ1W-SCU32/42
Serial Communications Unit Computer
Signal
RS-232C interface
FG SD RD RS CS DR ER SG
GRD 1 NC 1 SG SD 2 2 RD SDB 3 3 RS SDA 4 4 CS RDB 5 5 5V RDA 6 6 DR CSB 7 7 ER CSA 8 8 SG 9 RS-232 RS-422 D-sub, 9-pin Terminal block connector (male)
1 RDA interface 2 RDB terminal 3 SDA block 4 SDB connector FG 5 4-wire Terminating resistance ON
/485
DIP Switch Settings SW1-1: ON SW1-2: ON (terminating resistance) SW1-3: OFF SW1-4: OFF SW1-5: OFF SW1-6: OFF
114
Wiring
1:N Connections Using RS-422A/485 Ports CS1W-SCB41-V1, CS1W-SCU31-V1, CJ1W-SCU31-V1/41-V1
Section 3-3
Computer
Signal FG SD
B500-AL001 Link Adapter NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Pin Signal Shield Pin Signal
NC SD RD RTS CTS 5V DSR DTR SG Signal Pin RS-422A/ 485 Interface Signal Pin
Signal Pin
DIP Switch Settings Pin 1: ON Pin 2: ON (terminating resistance) Pin 3: OFF Pin 4: OFF Pin 5: OFF Pin 6: OFF
Shield
CJ1W-SCU32/42
Serial Communications Unit Computer
Signal
NT-AL001 Shield RS-232C Pin Signal NC 1 SD 2 RD 3 RS 4 CS 5 5V 6 DR 7 ER 8 SG 9 RS-232 D-sub, 9-pin connector (male)
Signal Pin
FG SD RS-232C RD interface RS CS DR ER SG
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RS-422A Pin Signal 1 RDA RS-422A 2 RDB /485 In3 SDA terface 4 SDB FG 5 4-wire Terminating resistance ON
DIP Switch Settings SW1-1: ON SW1-2: ON (terminating resistance) SW1-3: OFF SW1-4: OFF SW1-5: OFF SW1-6: OFF
1 RDA RS-422A 2 RDB /485 In3 SDA terface 4 SDB FG 5 4-wire Terminating resistance ON
115
Wiring
Programmable Terminal (PT) Connections Direct Connections from RS-232C to RS-232C Ports
Serial Communications Board or Unit Signal Pin FG Hood FG SD RS-232C RD Interface RTS CTS 5V DSR DTR SG D-sub, 9-pin connector (male) Pin Signal PT
Section 3-3
Hood FG -SD RD RS-232C RTS Interface CTS 5V --SG D-sub, 9-pin connector (male)
Communications Mode: Host Link (unit number 0 only for Host Link) NT Link (1:N, N = 1 Unit only) OMRON Cables with Connectors: XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m 1:1 Connections from RS-422A/485 to RS-422A/485 Ports CS1W-SCB41-V1, CS1W-SCU31-V1, CJ1W-SCU31-V1/41-V1
Serial Communications Board/Unit Signal Pin
RS-422A /485 Interface
Hood
D-sub, 9-pin connector (male) FG Terminal block or D-sub connector
CJ1W-SCU32/42
(See note 2.) PT Signal
Short bar
1 2 3 4 5
Communications Mode: Host Link (unit number 0 only for Host Link) NT Link (1:N, N = 1 Unit only) Note 1. Serial Communications Board/Unit settings: Terminating resistance ON, 4-wire. 2. The terminating resistant setting shown above is an example for the NT631/NT631C. The setting method varies with the PT. Refer to the manual for you PT for details.
116
Wiring
Section 3-3
1:N, 4-wire Connections from RS-422A/485 to RS-422A/485 Ports CS1W-SCB41-V1, CS1W-SCU31-V1, CJ1W-SCU31-V1/41-V1
Serial Communications Board/Unit Signal
RS-422A /485 Interface
Signal Pin
RS-422A /485 Interface
Hood D-sub, 9-pin connector (male) FG Terminal block or D-sub connector (See note 2.) Short bar Signal
RS-422A /485 Interface
CJ1W-SCU32/42
Serial Communications Unit Signal Signal Pin
FG Terminal block or D-sub connector (See note 2.) Short bar Signal
PT
Communications Mode: 1:N NT Link Note 1. Serial Communications Board/Unit settings: Terminating resistance ON, 4-wire. 2. The terminating resistant setting shown above is an example for the NT631/NT631C. The setting method varies with the PT. Refer to the manual for you PT for details.
117
Wiring
Section 3-3
1:N, 2-wire Connections from RS-422A/485 to RS-422A/485 Ports CS1W-SCB41-V1, CS1W-SCU31-V1, CJ1W-SCU31-V1/41-V1
Serial Communications Board/Unit Signal Pin
RS-422A /485 Interface
PT
Signal
SDA SDB
1 2 6 8
FG Terminal block or D-sub connector (See note 2.) Short bar Signal
PT
CJ1W-SCU32/42
Serial Communications Unit Signal Pin Signal
PT
Communications Mode: 1:N NT Link Note 1. Serial Communications Board/Unit settings: Terminating resistance ON, 2-wire. 2. The terminating resistant setting shown above is an example for the NT631/NT631C. The setting method varies with the PT. Refer to the manual for you PT for details.
118
Wiring
Section 3-3
3-3-10 Connections for Protocol Macros, Serial Gateway, No-protocol Mode, and Modbus-RTU Slave Mode
This section describes the connections for protocol macros, Serial Gateway, and no-protocol communications. Up to 32 Boards or Units can be used for 1:N connections.
Port RS-232C Configuration 1:1 Schematic diagram
RS-232C RS-232C interface
RS-232C
1:N
NT-AL001-E Resistance ON RS-232C RS-422A/485
119
Wiring
Port RS-422A/ 485 Configuration 1:1 Schematic diagram
RS-422A/485 interface
Section 3-3
RS-422A/485
NT-AL001-E RS-422A/485
RS-422A/ 485
1:N
RS-422A/485
RS-422A/485 interface
Resistance ON
Note
1. The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m. The RS-232C standard, however, does not cover baud rates above 19.2 Kbps. Refer to the manual for the device being connected to confirm support. 2. The total cable length for RS-422A/485 systems, including branch cables, is 500 m max. for the CS1W-SCB@1-V1, CS1W-SCU@1-V1, and CJ1WSCU@1-V1 and 1,200 m max. for the CJ1W-SCU@2. The total cable length for RS-422A/485 systems, including branch cables, is 500 m max. when NT-AL001-E Link Adapters are used. The baud rate and the communications distance sometimes depend on the remote device. Confirm the baud rates and communications distance supported by connected devices. 3. The maximum cable length is limited to 2 m when an NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is connected. 4. Branch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.
120
Section 3-3
The connection examples in the remainder of this section show only the basic connection diagrams. We recommend that appropriate noise countermeasures be taken in actual applications, including the use of shielded twistedpair cables. Refer to 3-4 RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Wiring for actual wiring methods. Connecting RS-232C Ports 1:1 Connections to E5CK Controller
Serial Communications Unit or Board Signal Pin FG SD RD RTS CTS DSR DTR SG D-sub, 9-pin connector (male) RS-232C Shield OMRON E5CK Controller RS-232C: Terminal Block Terminal Signal SD RD SG
RS-232C port
FG SD RD RTS CTS 5V DSR DTR SG
Computer
Signal FG SD RD RS-232C RTS Interface CTS DSR DTR SG
Signal Pin
RS-232C Interface
Terminal block D-sub, 9-pin connector (male) DIP Switch Settings Pin 1: ON Pin 2: ON (terminating resistance) Pin 3: OFF (4-wire) Pin 4: OFF Pin 5: OFF Pin 6: ON DIP Switch Settings Pin 1: ON Pin 2: ON (terminating resistance) Pin 3: OFF (4-wire) Pin 4: OFF Pin 5: OFF Pin 6: OFF 5-V (+) power (-)
121
Wiring
Section 3-3
Note We recommend using the following NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Connecting Cables to connect to NT-AL001-E Link Adapters. XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m Connections to a Modem
Serial Communications Board or Unit RS-232C port
FG SD RD RTS CTS 5V DSR DTR SG
Modem
FG SD RD RTS CTS DSR SG CD
ST2 RT
DTR CI ST1
122
Wiring
1:N Connections Using RS-232C Ports
Device supporting RS-422A/485 communications (4-wire) NT-AL001-E
Signal Pin
Section 3-3
RS-422A Shield
Signal
RS-422A /485 interface
D-sub, 9-pin Terminal block connector (male) DIP SW Pin 1: ON Pin 2: ON Terminating resistance Pin 3: OFF 4-wire Pin 4: OFF Pin 5: OFF Pin 6: ON
RS-232C Shield
(See note)
D-sub, 9-pin Terminal block connector (male) DIP SW Pin 1: ON Pin 2: ON Terminating resistance Pin 3: ON 2-wire Pin 4: ON Pin 5: OFF Pin 6: ON
Note We recommend using the following NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Connecting Cables to connect to NT-AL001-E Link Adapters. XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
123
Wiring
1:1 Connections Using RS-422A/485 Ports CS1W-SCB41-V1, CS1W-SCU31-V1, CJ1W-SCU31-V1/41-V1
Device supporting RS-422A/485 communications (2-wire) Signal RS-422A
/485 interface RS-422A /485 interface Hood
Section 3-3
Device supporting RS-422A/485 communications (4-wire) Serial Communications Board/Unit Signal Pin Shield Signal
RS-422A /485 interface
Shield
D-sub, 9-pin connector (male) Serial Communications Board/Unit RS-422A Signal Pin Shield
RS-422A /485 interface Hood
Computer
Signal
FG SD RD RS-232C Interface RTS CTS DSR DTR SG
D-sub, 9-pin connector (male) DIP Switch Settings Pin 1: ON Pin 2: ON (terminating resistance) Pin 3: OFF Pin 4: OFF Pin 5: OFF Pin 6: OFF
124
Wiring
CJ1W-SCU32/42
Device supporting RS-422A/485 communications (2-wire) Signal RS-422A A() /485 interface B(+)
Section 3-3
Serial Communications Unit Signal Pin RDA RS-422A /485 in- RDB SDA terface SDB FG 1 2 3 4 5 Shield
Serial Communications Unit Signal Pin RDA RS-422A RDB /485 inSDA terface SDB FG 1 2 3 4 5 Shield
Device supporting RS-422A/485 communications (4-wire) Signal SDA RS-422A inSDB /485 terface RDA RDB
Terminal block connector Serial Communications Unit RS-422A Signal Pin Shield 1 2 3 SDB 4 FG 5 Terminal block connector
RS-422A RDB /485 interface SDA
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal GRD SG SDB SDA RDB RDA CSB CSA Signal Pin RS-232C
Computer
Signal RS-232C
RDA
FG SD RD RS CS DR ER SG
Interface
5-V (+) power (-) DIP Switch Settings SW1-1: ON SW1-2: ON (terminating resistance) SW1-3: OFF SW1-4: OFF SW1-5: OFF SW1-6: OFF
125
Wiring
1:N Connections Using RS-422A/485 Ports CS1W-SCB41-V1, CS1W-SCU31-V1, CJ1W-SCU31-V1/41-V1
Serial Communications Board/Unit
Signal Pin RS-422A/ 485 interface Hood
Section 3-3
Pin
Pin
Signal
Signal Pin
126
Wiring
Serial Communications Board/Unit NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
Signal RS-422A/ 485 Interface Hood D-sub, 9-pin con4-wire Terminating nector (male) resistance ON Pin Pin Signal Signal NC SD RD RTS CTS 5V DSR DTR SG DIP Switch D-sub, 9-pin conPin 2: OFF, nector (male) otherwise same as below. Pin
Section 3-3
Shield
RS-232C Interface
Shield
Shield Signal
FG SD RD RTS CTS DSR DTR SG
RS-232C Interface
DIP Switch Pin 1: ON Pin 2: ON (terminating resistance) Pin 3: OFF Pin 4: OFF Pin 5: OFF Pin 6: ON
Shield
Terminal block
CJ1W-SCU32/42
Device supporting RS-422A/485 communications (2-wire)
Signal RS-422A/ 485 InterA() face
RDA
SDB FG
1 2 3 4 5
B(+)
127
Wiring
Device supporting RS-422A/485 communications (4-wire) RS-422A
Signal
Section 3-3
1 2 3 4 5
SDA RS-422A/ InterSDB 485 face RDA RDB Shield Device supporting RS-422A/485 communications (4-wire)
Signal
RS-422A
SDA RS-422A/ InterSDB 485 face RDA RDB Serial Communications Unit Signal Pin 1 2 3 SDB 4 FG 5 4-wire Terminal Terminating block resistance: ON connector Shield
RS-422A RDA RDB /485 interface SDA
NT-AL001 RS-422A Pin Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GRD SG SDB SDA RDB RDA CSB CSA Signal Pin NC 1 SD 2 RD 3 RS 4 CS 5 5V 6 DR 7 ER 8 SG 9 RS-232 Shield Signal RS-232C FG SD RD RS-232C RS Interface CS DR ER SG 5-V (+) power (-)
RS-422
Terminal block D-sub, 9-pin connector (male) DIP switch pin 1-2: OFF (terminating resistance) Other pins as given below.
NT-AL001 Pin Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GRD SG SDB SDA RDB RDA CSB CSA Signal Pin NC 1 SD 2 RD 3 RS 4 CS 5 5V 6 DR 7 ER 8 SG 9 RS-232 Shield Signal RS-232C FG SD RD RS-232C RS Interface CS DR ER SG 5-V (+) power (-)
DIP Switch Settings SW1-1: ON SW1-2: ON (terminating resistance) SW1-3: OFF SW1-4: OFF SW1-5: OFF SW1-6: ON
128
Wiring
Section 3-3
Hood FG -SD RD RS-232C RTS Interface CTS 5V --SG D-sub, 9-pin connector (male)
Communications Mode: Host Link (unit number 0 only for Host Link) NT Link (1:N, N = 1 Unit only) OMRON Cables with Connectors: XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m 1:N, 4-wire Connections from RS-422A/485 to RS-422A/485 Ports CS1W-SCB41-V1, CS1W-SCU31-V1, CJ1W-SCU31-V1/41-V1
Serial Communications Board/Unit Signal Pin
RS-422A/ 485 Interface
PT Signal
Hood D-sub, 9-pin connector (male) FG Terminal block or D-sub connector Short bar Signal (See note 2.) PT
129
Wiring
CJ1W-SCU32/42
Section 3-3
PT
Signal
1 2 3 4 5
FG Terminal block or D-sub connector (See note 2.) Short bar PT Signal
Communications Mode: 1:N NT Link Note 1. Serial Communications Board/Unit settings: Terminating resistance ON, 4-wire. 2. The terminating resistant setting shown above is an example for the NT631/NT631C. The setting method varies with the PT. Refer to the manual for you PT for details.
130
Wiring
1:N, 2-wire Connections from RS-422A/485 to RS-422A/485 Ports CS1W-SCB41-V1, CS1W-SCU31-V1, CJ1W-SCU31-V1/41-V1
Serial Communications Board/Unit Signal
RS-422A/ 485 Interface
Section 3-3
PT Signal
Pin
Hood D-sub, 9-pin connector (male) FG Terminal block Short bar Signal (See note 2.) PT
FG Terminal block
CJ1W-SCU32/42
Serial Communications Unit Signal
RS-422A/ 485 Interface
PT
Signal
Pin
1 2 3 4 5
FG Terminal block or D-sub connector (See note 2.) Short bar Signal
PT
Communications Mode: 1:N NT Link Note 1. Serial Communications Board/Unit settings: Terminating resistance ON, 2-wire. 2. The terminating resistant setting shown above is an example for the NT631/NT631C. The setting method varies with the PT. Refer to the manual for you PT for details.
131
Section 3-4
RS-422A/485 port
CS1W-SCB41-V1, CS1W-SCU31-V1, CJ1W-SCU31-V1/41-V1 Pin Signal 1 SDA 2 SDB 6 RDA 8 RDB CJ1W-SCU32/42 Pin Signal 1 RDA 2 RDB 3 SDA 4 SDB 5 FG
3-4
3-4-1
2. Combine signal wires and SG (signal ground) wires in a twisted-pair cable. At the same time, bundle the SG wires to the connectors on the Serial Communications Board/Unit and the remote device. 3. Connect the shield of the communications cable to the Hood (FG) terminal of the RS-232C connector on the Serial Communications Board/Unit. At the same time, ground the ground (GR) terminal of the Power Supply Unit on the CPU Rack or CS Expansion Rack to 100 or less. 4. A connection example is shown below. Example: Twisted-pair Cable Connecting SD-SG, RD-SG, RTS-SG, and CTS-SG Terminals
132
Section 3-4
Twist the shaded lines to make SG signal wires them thinner and connect to Pin No. 1 (FG). Cover this section with heat-shrink tube to avoid contact with other sections. Bundle the SG wires. Aluminum foil
Remote device
Signal
RD SD CTS RTS SG FG
Shield XM2S-0911-E
Note The Hood (FG) is internally connected to the ground terminal (GR) on the Power Supply Unit via the CPU Rack or Expansion Rack. Therefore, FG is grounded by grounding the ground terminal (GR) on the Power Supply Unit. Although there is conductivity between the Hood (FG) and pin 1 (FG), connect the Hood (FG) to the shield because the Hood (FG) has smaller contact resistance with the shield than pin 1 (FG), and thus provides better noise resistance.
CS-series PLC CJ-series PLC Serial Communications Unit
SCU41
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER RUN ERR/ALM INH PRPHL COMM
RUN ERC RDY TERM OFF ERH SD1 SD2 RD1 TER1 RD2
POWER
PA204S
PA205R
POWER SYSMAC CJ1G-CPU44
01 EF
ON 4
4 23 56
BCD
SYSMAC
F0 12
CS1G
OPEN
WIRE 2
UNIT NO.
789A
PORT1
PORT2
PORT (RS-232C)
MCPWR
OPEN
L1
L1
BUSY
AC100-240V INPUT
L2/N
MCPWR
OPEN
GR
GR
RUN OUTPUT AC240V DC24V
PERIFHERAL
PORT2
PERIPHERAL
DC24V/0.8A OUTPUT
PORT
Hood and GR are internally connected. Grounding the GR terminal grounds the Hood (FG).
3-4-2
Recommended RS-422A/ 485 Cable 1,2,3... 1. Always use shielded twisted-pair cables as communications cables.
Model CO-HC-ESV-3Px7/0.2 Manufacturer Hirakawa Hewtech Corp.
2. Connect the shield of the communications cable to the Hood (FG) of the RS-422A/485 connector on the Serial Communications Board or Unit. At the same time, ground the ground (GR) terminal of the Power Supply Unit on the CPU Rack or CS Expansion Rack to 100 or less. 3. Always turn ON the terminating resistance at the end node of the RS422A/485 line.
133
Section 3-4
Note Always ground the shield only at the Board/Unit end. Grounding both ends of the shield may damage the device due to the potential difference between the ground terminals. Connection examples are shown below. CS1W-SCB41-V1, CS1W-SCU31-V1, CJ1W-SCU31-V1/41-V1 2-Wire Connections
Serial Communications Board/Unit
Pin Signal
Remote device
Signal
Hood
Shield
4-Wire Connections
Serial Communications Board/Unit
Pin Signal
Remote device
Signal
Hood
Shield
B500-AL001
Pin Signal RS-422 interface Signal Pin
Remote device
Signal
Remote device
Signal
134
Section 3-4
NT-AL001-E
Pin 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 Hood Signal RD SD RS CS 5V DR ER SG FG Signal SDA SDB RDA RDB GRD Pin 4 3 6 5 1
Remote device
RS-422
Signal RDA RDB SDA SDB
RS-232C
Remote device
Signal RDA RDB SDA SDB
(See note.)
Shield
FG
Note
It is recommended that one of these cables be used to connect the RS232C port on the Serial Communications Board or Unit to the NT-AL001-E RS-232C/RS-422 Link Adapter. The recommended wiring for these cables is shown below.
SYSMAC PLC NT-AL001-E (internal)
Signal
Not used.
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Hood
Signal FG SD RD RS CS 5V DR ER SG FG
Pin 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 Hood
RD SD RS CS 5V DR ER SG FG
Loopback
Loopback
Shield
Note The XW2Z-@@0T-1 Connecting Cable for the NT-AL001-E Link Adapter uses special wiring for the DS and RS signals. Do not use these Cables with other devices. If these Cables are connected to other devices, the devices may be damaged. Two-wire Connections CJ1W-SCU32/42
Serial Communications Unit
Pin Signal
Remote device
Signal
1 2 3 4 5
A() B(+) FG
Shield
135
Section 3-4
Remote device
Signal
1 2 3 4 5
Remote device
Signal
RS-422
1 2 3 4 5
Remote device
RS-422
Signal
Note The Hood (FG) is internally connected to the ground terminal (GR) on the Power Supply Unit via the CPU Rack or Expansion Rack. Therefore, FG is grounded by grounding the ground terminal (GR) on the Power Supply Unit.
CS-series PLC CJ-series PLC
POWER
PA204S
PA205R
POWER SYSMAC CJ1G-CPU44
RUN ERR/ALM INH PRPHL COMM
01 EF
ON 4
4 23 56
BCD
SYSMAC
F0 12
CS1G
OPEN
WIRE 2
UNIT NO.
789A
PORT1
PORT2
PORT (RS-232C)
3-4-3
Wiring Connectors for the CS1W-SCB@1-V1, CS1W-SCU@1-V1, CJ1W-SCU@1-V1, or CJ1W-SCU22/42 (RS-232C Connector Only)
Use the following steps to wire connectors.
Cable Preparation
See the following diagrams for the length of the cable portion to be cut in each step. Shield Connected to Hood (FG) 1,2,3... 1. Cut the cable to the required length.
MCPWR
OPEN
L1
L1
BUSY
AC100-240V INPUT
L2/N
MCPWR
OPEN
GR
GR
RUN OUTPUT AC240V DC24V
PERIFHERAL
PORT2
PERIPHERAL
DC24V/0.8A OUTPUT
PORT
Hood and GR are internally connected. Grounding the GR terminal grounds the Hood (FG).
136
Section 3-4
2. Remove the specified length of the sheath from the cable using a knife. Be careful not to scratch the braided shield.
25 mm (RS-422A) 40 mm (RS-232C)
3. Trim off the braided shield using scissors so that the remaining shield length is 10 mm.
10 mm
4. Remove the insulation from each conductor using a stripper so that the exposed conductor length is 5 mm.
5 mm
Shield Not Connected to Hood (FG) 1,2,3... 1. Cut the cable to the required length.
2. Remove the specified length of the sheath from the cable using a knife. Be careful not to scratch the braided shield.
25 mm (RS-422A) 40 mm (RS-232C)
4. Remove the insulation from each conductor using a stripper so that the exposed conductor length is 5 mm.
137
Section 3-4
5 mm
5. Wrap adhesive tape around the conductor from which the braided shield was removed.
Adhesive tape
3-4-4
Soldering
1,2,3... 1. Thread a heat-shrinking tube through each conductor. 2. Temporarily solder each conductor to the corresponding connector terminals. 3. Completely solder each conductor.
1 mm
Soldering iron
4. Return the heat-shrinking tube to the soldered portion, then heat the tube to shrink it in place.
Heat-shrinking tube
138
Section 3-4
3-4-5
End connected to FG
Grounding plate
3-4-6
Applicable Connectors
Note To connect two wires to one terminal, use the terminal-block connector with screw terminals and connect the two wires to one terminal with or without ferrules designed for two wires.
30 to 50 mm
Carefully trim away any unnecessary cable packing and conductors. 3. Strip the signal lines to the correct length for the ferrules. Cover the exposed signal wires with electrician's tape or heat-shrinking tube.
139
Section 3-4
4. Connect the ferrules to the ends of the signal lines, and shield and crimp them with a crimping tool.
Recommended Ferrules AI Series made by Phoenix Contact Signal wires: AI0.25-8BU (product number 3201364) FG wire: AI0.75-10GY (product number 3201288) CRIMPFOX Crimping Pliers XUD6 made by Phoenix Contact (product number 1204436) 5. Connect the signal lines and shield to the terminal block on the RS-422A/ 485. Press each line all the way to the back of its hole as shown below. When inserting wires without ferrules, holding down the orange knob with a small flat-blade screw driver or similar object.
6. Connect the connector with the communications cable attached to it to the connector on the Unit. Then tighten the screws to secure the connector to the Unit. Recommended tightening torque: 0.2 to 0.3 Nm
3-4-7
Connecting to Unit
CS-series Unit
140
Section 3-4
CJ1W-SCU32/42
CJ1W-SCU32 Serial Communications Unit CJ1W-SCU42 Serial Communications Unit
Cable connector
65 125 150
65
141
Section 3-4
142
Communications Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
Section 4-1
4-1
Host-initiated Communications
Communications in a Host Link System are normally started by the host computer.
Command Host computer Response CS/CJ-series PLC
The host computer sends a command to the PLC. The PLC processes the command and returns a response to the host computer. This process is repeated, allowing the host computer to monitor and control PLC operation. Both C-mode and FINS commands can be used in host-initiated communications. PLC-initiated Communications The PLC can also initiate communications with the host computer, as may be necessary when errors occur on the line controlled by the PLC or to confirm the operating status of the host computer.
Command Host computer Response CS/CJ-series PLC
The PLC sends a command to the host computer through a Serial Communications Unit or Board. The host computer processes the command and, when necessary, returns a response to the PLC. Using PLC-initiated communications requires that a program be prepared on the host computer to process commands received from a PLC and return the required responses. Only FINS commands can be used in PLC-initiated communications. Note Always transfer uppercase letters when using Host Link communications. Lowercase letters cannot be processed.
4-2
4-2-1
144
Section 4-2
Usage Port 1 Settings Port 2 Settings Not used in Host Link Communications Reserved for the system
Setup Area Allocated in the DM Area: D30000 to D31599 First Word in Setup Area Allocated in the DM Area: m = D30000 + 100 unit number
Unit No. Unit No. 0 Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8 Unit No. 9 Unit No. A Unit No. B Unit No. C Unit No. D Unit No. E Unit No. F Words D30000 to D30099 D30100 to D30199 D30200 to D30299 D30300 to D30399 D30400 to D30499 D30500 to D30599 D30600 to D30699 D30700 to D30799 D30800 to D30899 D30900 to D30999 D31000 to D31099 D31100 to D31199 D31200 to D31299 D31300 to D31399 D31400 to D31499 D31500 to D31599
m to m + 3: Port 1 Settings m + 10 to m + 13: Port 2 Settings m + 14 to m + 9 and m + 14 to m + 19: Not used in Host Link communications m + 20 to m + 99: Reserved for the system
145
Section 4-2
4-2-2
Words Board Unit (CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series) Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 D32000 D32010 m m + 10
15 12 to 14 08 to 11
Port settings 0: Defaults; 1: User settings Reserved Serial communications mode 0: Default (Host Link) 5: Host Link Reserved Start bits 0: 1 bit; 1: 1 bit (1 start bit is always used regardless of this setting) Data length 0: 7 bits; 1: 8 bits Stop bits 0: 2 bits; 1: 1 bit Parity 0: Yes; 1: No Parity 0: Even; 1: Odd Reserved Baud rate (bps) 0: Default (9,600); 3: 1,200; 4: 2,400; 5: 4,800; 6: 9,600; 7: 19,200; 8: 38,400; 9: 57,600; A: 115,200; B: 230,400 (See note.) Send delay time 0: Default (0 ms); 1: Setting in bits 00 to 14 Send delay (0000 to 7530 hex) (Unit: 10 ms) CTS control 0: No; 1:Yes 1:N/1:1 protocol setting (Unit Ver. 1.2 or later only) 1: 1:1 protocol; 0: 1:N protocol If the Host Link compatible device mode is set between 0 and 2 hex (mode A or B), the setting in this bit is invalid (always 1:N Host Links) Reserved Host Link compatible device mode 0 hex: Default (mode A) 1 hex: Mode A (CS/CJ/C) 2 hex: Mode B (CVM1/CV) 3 hex: Mode C (C200H) 4 hex: Mode D (C500/120) Host Link unit number (00 to 1F hex)
D32002 D32003
D32012 D32013
m+ 2 m+3
m + 12 m + 13
15 00 to 14 15 14
11 to 13 08 to 10
00 to 07
Note Supported only by CJ1W-SCU@2 Units with unit version 2.0. Port Settings The setting for the port settings determine if the default settings or user settings will be used for port 1 and port 2. Be sure to use the same settings as the RS-232C port on the host computer connected via the Host Link System. If the default port settings are specified, then the setting of bits 00 to 04 and the baud rate in D32001 will be ignored. The default settings used are as follows: Baud rate: 9,600 bps, start bits: 1 bit, data length: 7 bits, parity: even, and stop bits: 2 bits. If user port settings are specified, set bits 00 to 04 and set the baud rate in D32001. Setting Example: 0100 Hex = Host link mode with default port settings.
146
Section 4-2
Set the serial communications mode to 5 Hex to use Host Link communications. The default setting of 0 Hex can also be used to operate in Host Link mode with unit number 00. If user settings are specified for the port settings, the number of start bits, data length, number of stop bits, parity, and baud rate must be set. The start bits setting, however, will be ignored and 1 start bit will always be used. Do not set the baud rate setting to between B and F. A setup error will occur if these settings are used, and the default setting of 9,600 bps will be used. Do not use setting 1 and 2, which are reserved for the system.
Send Delay
If response frames cannot be completely received regardless of the communications processing used at the host computer, a send delay can be set for the response. Any setting higher than 7530 Hex will be treated as 7530 Hex.
Case 1 Serial Communications Board or Unit Host computer Command sent Send delay
Response sent
Case 2 Serial Communications Board or Unit Host computer First command frame Delimiter Second command frame
Send delay
Case 3 Serial Communications Board or Unit Host computer Command sent Send delay Response sent SEND(090), RECV(098) or CMND(490)
CTS Control
If CTS control is enabled, the RTS signal is turned ON before starting to transfer and then the send is started after confirming that the CTS signal is ON. If CTS control is not enabled, the RTS signal is turned ON before starting to transfer and then the send is started without checking the status of the CTS signal.
147
Section 4-3
Set the setting to 00 to 1F Hex to set Host Link unit numbers 0 to 31.
4-3
4-3-1
148
Section 4-3
09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Note
1. When any one of bits 05 to 11 is ON, A40208 (Inner Board Error Flag) (non-fatal error) will be ON. 2. When bit 00 or 01 is ON, A40112 (Inner Board Fatal Error Flag) will be ON. For details on errors, refer to Section 12 Troubleshooting and Maintenance.
4-3-2
Words CIO 1900 to CIO 1999 in the Inner Board Area are used for a Status Area. Only the words shown in the following table are used for the Status Area with Host Link communications. Inner Board CIO Area CIO 1900 to CIO 1999
Words CIO 1901 to CIO 1904 CIO 1905 to CIO 1908 CIO 1915 to CIO 1918 Board status Port 1 status Port 2 status Usage
Words CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the CIO Area are allocated according to the unit number setting. Each Unit is allocated 25 words. Only the words shown in the following table are used for the Status Area with Host Link communications.
149
Section 4-3
Status Area
The Status Area is used for status information input from Serial Communications Board or Unit to the CPU Unit. The Status Area is where the Serial Communications Board or Unit set communications status, the transmission control signal status, and the transmission error status. n = CIO 1500 + 25 unit number
Contents
Words Bit Boards Units (CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series) Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 CIO 1901 n+1 02 to 15 01 00 CIO 1902 n+2 00 to 15 CIO 1903 n+3 00 to 15 CIO 1904 n+4 00 to 15
Reserved 1: Error log EEPROM error 1: Protocol data error Reserved Reserved Reserved
150
Section 4-3
CIO 1906
CIO 1916
n+6
n + 16
12 to 15 08 to 11 05 to 07 04 03 02 01 00 15 14 13 02 to 12 01 00 11 to 15 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 00 to 02 15 05 to 14 04 03 02 00, 01
Setup Serial communications mode settings Baud rate (See note.) Reserved Start bits: Always 0 Data length: 7 or 8 bits (See note.) Stop bits: 1 or 2 bits (See note.) Parity: Yes/No (Note) Parity: Even/Odd (Note) Hard0 No 0 RS-232C 1 RS-422A/485 1 Reserved ware 0 1 0 1 settings 0: Terminating resistance OFF 1: Terminating resistance ON Reserved 1: Setup error; 0: Setup normal 1: Port operating; 0: Port stopped
CIO 1907
CIO 1917
n+7
n + 17
CIO 1908
CIO 1918
n+8
n + 18
Commu- Reserved nicaUndetermined tions Reserved status Always 0 ER signal Transmission DTR signal control Reserved signal status CTS signal RTS signal Reserved Trans1: Transmission error; 0: No transmission error mission Not used. error sta1: Overrun error; 0: Normal tus 1: Framing error; 0: Normal 1: Parity error; 0: Normal Reserved
The settings in the Setup Area are reflected here. The default settings will be used and will be stored here if a setup error occurs. This bit will be set to 1 if an error occurs in reading or writing the error log stored in EEPROM on the assumption that the EEPROM has reached its useful life. If a Serial Communications Unit is being used, the ERC indicator will also light. If a Serial Communications Board is being used, A42411 will turn ON and the ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash, indicating a nonfatal error. This bit will be turned ON if a checksum error is detected in the protocol data at startup. The checksum is checked for all serial communications modes. If a Serial Communications Unit is being used, the ERC indicator will also flash. If a Serial Communications Board is being used, A42409 will turn ON, the ERR/ ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash, and the RDY indicator will flash at 1second intervals, indicating a non-fatal error.
151
Communications Timing
Section 4-4
The operation of Host Link communications is not affected by a protocol data error.
The settings in the Setup Area for the following items will be stored: Serial communications mode, baud rate, start bits, data length, stop bits, parity, ports, terminating resistance, setup error, and port operating/stopped status. The port operating/stopped status will always be 1 for Host Link mode. The flow control and buffer status is stored. These bits are cleared at startup or when a port is restarted using STUP(237) or a Port Settings Change Bit (Auxiliary Area). The status of the following transmission control signals is stored: ER signal, DTR signal, CTS signal, and RTS signal. 1: High, 0: Low The Transmission Error Flag (bit 15) will turn ON if any of the following flags turn ON: Overrun Error (bit 04), Framing Error (bit 03), or Parity Error (bit 02).
Communications Status
4-4
Communications Timing
This section describes the timing of sending commands and controlling communications in the Host Link mode.
4-4-1
Note
1. If more than eight communications instructions are being used, then exclusive control must be performed to make sure that not more than eight are executed at the same time. Refer to descriptions of network communications instructions in the CS/CJ-series Communications Commands Reference Manual (W342). 2. The same communications port numbers are used by both the communications instructions (SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490)) and the
152
Communications Timing
Section 4-4
PROTOCOL MACRO instruction (PMCR(260)). The same port number cannot be used by more than one of these instructions at the same time.
4-4-2
4-4-3
A Communications Port Enabled Flag turns ON when SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) can be executed. The flag will turn OFF during execution of these commands and turn ON again when the command execution is completed. When creating the ladder diagram, use these flags as input conditions when executing these instructions.
Word A202 Bit 08 to 15 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Content Reserved Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 7 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 6 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 5 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 4 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 3 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 2 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 1 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 0
A Communications Port Error Flag will turn ON in the following cases. When an error is generated during execution of SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490). When an error response or retry error has been generated for the port. These Flags will turn OFF when the corresponding Communications Port Enabled Flag is turned OFF at the start of operation or at the start of executing the SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490).
Word A219 Bit 08 to 15 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Content Reserved Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 7 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 6 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 5 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 4 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 3 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 2 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 1 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 0
153
Communications Timing
Communications Port Completion Codes
Section 4-4
The Communications Port Completion Code words will contain the FINS end code after SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490) has been executed. If the Communications Port Enabled Flag turns OFF when operation is started or SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490) are executed, the contents of these words will be cleared.
Word A203 A204 A205 A206 A207 A208 A209 A210 A211 to A218 Content Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 0 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 1 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 2 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 3 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 4 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 5 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 6 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 7 Reserved
Flag Transitions
Communications Port Enabled Flag Network communications instructions (PMCR(260)/SEND(090)/ RECV(098)/CMND(490)) Communications Port Error Flag Communications Port Completion Code (Normal end) End of previous processing (No unit corresponding to unit address) (Normal end) Instruction 1 being executed Instruction 2 being executed Instruction 3 being executed
4-4-4
154
Communications Timing
Host Computer Sending Data
Response Required Host computer Serial Communications Board/Unit Command (1) Command Response (2)
Section 4-4
Response
No Response Required Host computer Serial Communications Board/Unit Command (1) Command (2) Response
Command transmission to the host computer can start even when the port is receiving a command from the host computer (1). The transmission of a response to the command from the host computer is postponed until the transmission of the command to the host computer is completed (2). When a response is not required from the host computer, the Communications Port Enabled Flag will turn ON when the command to the host computer has passed from the CPU Unit to the port. Host Computer Receiving Data
Response Required Host computer Serial Communications Board/Unit Communications Port Enabled Flag Command acknowledged Command completed Command (1) Response (2) Command Response
No Response Required Host computer Serial Communications Board/Unit Communications Port Enabled Flag Command acknowledged Command completed Command (1) Response (2) Command
At (1) in the diagram, the response to a command sent from the host computer is being transmitted from the port. In this case, the command transmission to the host computer is postponed until the response transmission is completed (2).
155
Communications Timing
Section 4-4
When a response is not required from the host computer, the Communications Port Enabled Flag will turn ON when the command to the host computer has passed from the CPU Unit to the port.
No Response Required Host computer Serial Communications Board/Unit Communications Port Enabled Flag Command acknowledged Command completed Command (1) Command Response wait time Response (2)
When response wait time has been set in the command format from the host computer, commands to the host computer will not be transmitted until the response time has elapsed (1). Transmission of responses to commands from the host computer will be postponed until the command transmission to the host computer has been completed (2). When a response is not required from the host computer, the Communications Port Enabled Flag will turn ON when the command to the host computer has passed from the CPU Unit to the port.
4-4-5
Reception Buffers
In Host Link mode, each port has a reception buffer of 1,200 bytes. This is sufficient to hold the maximum Host Link frame length for an FA command response frame (1,115 bytes) + 85 bytes. If a frame larger than 1,200 bytes is sent from the host computer (from @ to the carriage return), the frame will be discarded and no response will be returned.
4-4-6
Error Responses
When Host Link FA commands are used for FINS commands, an error code will returned as the end code in the FINS response whenever there is a mistake in the FINS command settings or an FINS response is required that is too long for the legal response frame. An end code of 110B Hex is returned when the response exceeds the maximum response length. The Host Link response frame will contain the requested read data after the end code through the end of the maximum legal response frame length. Note We recommend programming retry processing at any device sending commands in case noise or other factors result in transmission errors.
156
Section 4-5
4-5
4-5-1
RS-232C Ports
Take the following differences into consideration when changing from an existing Host Link System to one using an RS-232C port on a CS-series CPU Unit, Serial Communications Boards, or Serial Communications Unit (CS1H/GCPU@@ RS-232C port, CS1W-SCU21-V1 ports, CS1W-SCB21-V1 ports, or CS1W-SCB41-V1 port 1) or a CJ-series Serial Communications Unit (CJ1WSCU21-V1, CJ1W-SCU41-V1 port 2, CJ1W-SCU22, or CJ1W-SCU42 port 2).
C200H-LK201
Changes required for CS/CJ-series product Wiring Other The connector has been The following changes are necessary for changed from a 25-pin to a systems that sync with ST1, ST2, and RT. 9-pin connector. Synchronized transfers will no longer be possiThe CS/CJ-series products ble. do not support the ST1, ST2, Full-duplex transmissions will be possible with and RT signals and wiring the CS/CJ-series product, but the host comthem is not required. puters communications program, hardware, or both will need to be altered. The following changes are necessary for systems that did not sync with ST1, ST2, and RT. It may be possible to use the host computer programs without alteration as long as the same communications settings (e.g., baud rate) are used. It may be necessary, however, to change programs to allow for different text lengths in frames or different CS/CJ command specifications. (See note.) The connector has been It may be possible to use the host computer changed from a 25-pin to a programs without alteration as long as the 9-pin connector. same communications settings (e.g., baud rate) are used. It may be necessary, however, to change programs to allow for different text lengths in frames or different CS/CJ command specifications. (See note.) No changes have been made It may be possible to use the host computer in wiring. programs without alteration as long as the same communications settings (e.g., baud rate) are used. It may be necessary, however, to change programs to allow for different CS/CJ command specifications.
157
Section 4-5
No changes have been made It may be possible to use the host computer in wiring. programs without alteration as long as the same communications settings (e.g., baud rate) are used. It may be necessary, however, to change programs to allow for different CS/CJ command specifications. Port 1: The following changes are necessary for The connector has been half-duplex transmissions that use CD. changed from a 25-pin to a Check the system for timing problems when 9-pin connector. using SEND, RECV, or CMND to initiate communications from the PLC or timing problems in Port 2 set for RS-232C: sending commands from the host computer. If The SG signal has been changed from pin 7 to pin 9. necessary, switch to full-duplex transmissions. The following changes are necessary for full-duplex transmissions that do not use CD. Half-duplex It may be possible to use the host computer programs without alteration as long as the same communications settings (e.g., baud rate) are used. It may be necessary, however, to change programs to allow for different CS/CJ command specifications.
Note The number of words that can be read and written per frame (i.e., the text lengths) when using C-mode commands is different for C-series Host Link Units and CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards/Units. A host computer program previously used for C-series Host Link Units may not function correctly if used for CS/CJ-series PLCs. Check the host computer program before using it and make any corrections required to handle different frame text lengths. Refer to the CS/CJ-series Communications Commands Reference Manual (W342) for details.
158
Section 4-5
4-5-2
RS-422A/485 Ports
Take the following differences into consideration when changing from an existing Host Link System to one using an RS-422A/485 port on a CS-series Serial Communications Board or Unit (CS1W-SCB41-V1 port 2 or CS1WSCU31-V1 port 1 or 2) or a CJ-series Serial Communications Unit (CJ1WSCU41-V1 port 1, CJ1W-SCU31-V1 port 1 or 2, CJ1W-SCU32 port 1 or 2, or CJ1W-SCU42 port 1).
Previous products
Model number
C200HW-COM@@-E
CVM1/CV-CPU@@ CV500-LK201
Changes required for CS/CJ-series product Wiring Other Wiring pins have been It may be possible to use the host computer changed as shown below. programs without alteration as long as the same communications settings (e.g., baud SCB@1-V1 or SCU@1-V1: rate) are used. It may be necessary, how SDA: Pin 9 to pin 1 ever, to change programs to allow for differ SDB: Pin 5 to pin 2 ent text lengths in frames or different CS/CJ command specifications. (See note.) RDA: Pin 6 to pin 6 RDB: Pin 1 to pin 8 SG: Pin 3 to Not connected FG: Pin 7 to pin Connector hood SCU32/42: SDA: Pin 9 to pin 3 SDB: Pin 5 to pin 4 RDA: Pin 6 to pin 1 RDB: Pin 1 to pin 2 FG: Pin 7 to pin 5 It may be possible to use the host computer SCB@1-V1 or SCU@1-V1: No changes have been made programs without alteration as long as the same communications settings (e.g., baud in wiring. rate) are used. It may be necessary, howSCU32/42: ever, to change programs to allow for differ SDA: Pin 1 to pin 3 ent CS/CJ command specifications. SDB: Pin 2 to pin 4 RDA: Pin 6 to pin 1 RDB: Pin 8 to pin 2 FG: Connector hood to pin 5 It may be possible to use the host computer SCB@1-V1 or SCU@1-V1: No changes have been made programs without alteration as long as the same communications settings (e.g., baud in wiring. rate) are used. It may be necessary, howSCU32/42: ever, to change programs to allow for differ SDA: Pin 1 to pin 3 ent CS/CJ command specifications. SDB: Pin 2 to pin 4 RDB: Pin 6 to pin 1 RDB: Pin 8 to pin 2 FG: Connector hood to pin 5
Note For pre-Ver. 1.2 Units, the number of words that can be read and written per frame (i.e., the text lengths) when using C-mode commands is different for Cseries Host Link Units and CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards/ Units. A host computer program previously used for C-series Host Link Units may not function correctly if it is used in CS/CJ-series PLCs. When using Serial Communications Boards/Units with Unit Ver. 1.2 or later, these programs can be reused by setting the Host Link compatible device mode to mode C (C500/120) or mode D (D200H). (Alternatively, check the host computer program before using it and make any corrections required to handle dif-
159
Section 4-6
ferent frame text lengths. Refer to the CS/CJ-series Communications Commands Reference Manual (W342) for details.)
4-6
4-6-1
The earlier Serial Communications Units/Boards support only 1:N Host Links.
1:1 protocol
A Host Link protocol that enables a single host to be connected to a single PLC only.
C Series C500-LK101/201/103/203, C120-LK101/201/202 C Series C200H-LK101/201/202 C Series C500-LK101/201/103/203, C120-LK101/201/202 C Series C200H-LK101/201/202
The CVM1/CV Series supports only 1:N Host Links for the CPU Units built-in port and Host Link Unit/Serial Communications Unit/Board. The C-series Host Link Units shown here support both 1:1 protocol and 1:N protocol.
160
Section 4-6
Note The differences between the command and response frames for 1:N Host Links and 1:1 Host Links is as follows:
Response Format
@ 0 0 R D 0 0 * CR Host Link Header Unit No. code End code FCS Terminator
Response Format
R D 0 0 * CR Header End code code Terminator
4-6-2
161
Section 4-6
When the command for reading the status of the CPU Unit (MS) is received, the response format that is returned to the host according to the FAL/FALS instruction execution status is different.
Command MS Name PROCESSOR STATUS READ
Mode A (CS/ C Series CJ/C) SRM1 (built-in port) CPM1 (built-in port) CPM1A (built-in port) CQM1-CPU@@ (built-in port) C200HS-CPU@@ (built-in port) C200HE/HG/HX-CPU@@ (built-in port) C200HW-COM@@ (built-in port) CS/CJ Series CS1G/H-CPU@@H (built-in port) CS1G/H-CPU@@-V1 (built-in port) CS1D-CPU@@H (built-in port) CJ1G/H-CPU@@H (built-in port) CJ1G/M-CPU@@ (built-in port) Earlier models (pre-Ver. 1.2): CS1W-SCB21(-V1)/41(-V1) CS1W-SCU21(-V1)/31-V1 CJ1W-SCU21(-V1)/31-V1/41(-V1) Mode B CVM1/CV Series (CVM1/CV) CVM1/CV-CPU@@ CVM1 (built-in port), CV500-LK201 Mode C C Series (C200H) 29 words (C200H) C200H-LK101/201/202 Mode D C Series (C500/120) (C500/120) C500-LK101/201/103/203, C120LK101/201/202
Fixed length
30 words
89 words 89 words
89 words 60 words
Variable length
Note
1. The response data formats for MS commands when FAL/FALS is not executed are as follows: Types for which a space (20 hex) is added to the FAL/FALS message in the response data (indicated as fixed length in the above table). Types for which a FAL/FALS message is not added to the response data (indicated as variable length in the above table). (A FAL/FALS message is added to the response data for both types if FAL/ FALS is executed.) 2. The following condition is an exception: When reusing the RG command created using a CVM1/CV-series PLC with mode B selected, the host computer program cannot be reused without being changed. The difference in the response returned when the RG command is reused and the Timer/Counter Flag for 121 words (maximum text area) is read is as follows:
162
Section 4-6
D32003
D32013
m+3
m+13
08 to 10
Setting Examples when Replacing PLCs A host computer program that has been created using a C500-LK101/201/ 103/203 Host Link Unit can be reused in a Serial Communications Board/Unit with Unit Ver. 1.2 or later by making the following settings to enable the 1:1 Host Link protocol. 1:N/1:1 Host Link protocol setting: 1 (ON = 1:1 Host Link) Host Link compatible device mode setting: 3 hex (mode C (C500/120))
163
Section 4-6
164
Simple Backup Function (Backup of Protocol Macro Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced Protocol Macro Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6-1 5-6-2 5-6-3 Data Exchange Timing for Link Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearing/Holding Contents of Reception Buffer in Full-duplex Mode High-speed Baud Rate for Protocol Macro Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
165
Section 5-1
5-1
5-1-1
5-1-2
When connecting OMRON devices, data is sent and received between the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit and these devices by specifying the sequence number of the standard system protocol provided in the Serial Communications Board, Serial Communications Unit, and CX-Protocol, and executing the sequence using the PROTOCOL MACRO instruction (PMCR(260)).
Serial Communications Board or Unit
Standard system protocol Sequence No. 001
CPU Unit
Sequence number
Step 0 Step 1
* Send/receive messages are stored in the area one or more words after the send data address or the receive data address specified in the PMCR(260) instruction.
Note The devices for which standard system protocols are provided are listed below. For details, refer to 5-4 Using Protocol Macros. Digital Controllers (E5@K, ES100@), Temperature Controllers (E5ZE, E5@J), Intelligent Signal Processors (K3T@), Bar Code Readers (V500/ V520), Laser Micrometers (3Z4L), Visual Inspection Units (F200/F300/ F350), ID Controllers (V600/V620), Hayes Modem AT Command, and devices supporting the CompoWay/F protocol. Modifying Standard System Protocols When connecting OMRON devices, if there is no standard system protocol or you wish to modify part of the protocol, use the CX-Protocol to modify the standard system protocol, transfer this as a separate communications
166
Section 5-1
sequence to the Serial Communications Board or Unit, and execute the PMCR(260) instruction.
Modifying and transferring standard system protocols CPU Unit Serial Communications Board or Unit Modified standard system protocol Step 0 Step 1 Step 2
RS-232C or RS-422A/485
I/O memory
I/O refreshing
Shared memory
When connecting a general-purpose external device that has an RS-232C or RS-422A/485 port, use the CX-Protocol to create a new protocol containing the communications specifications for the general-purpose external device, transfer these specifications to the Serial Communications Board or Unit, and execute the PMCR(260) instruction.
Creating and transferring a new protocol Serial Communications Board or Unit CPU Unit Newly created protocol Step 0 Step 1
RS232C or RS-422A/485
Sequence number
I/O memory
I/O refreshing
Shared memory
In this manual, the protocol structure is explained in simple terms, and examples are given of the use of the PMCR(260) instruction when controlling
167
Section 5-1
OMRON devices using standard system protocols. For details on the protocols, the method of modifying the standard system protocols, and the method of creating new sequences, refer to the CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344).
5-1-3
Protocol Structure
Protocols consist of communications sequences. A sequence consists of steps. These steps can be repeated, or they can be branched or ended depending on the responses received. A step consists of a command, send/ receive messages, processing results, and the next process (which depends on the processing results).
Protocol Communications sequence Step 0 Step 1 Example: Reading the process values for a Temperature Controller Transmission of process value reading message and reception of response message
Messages
A protocol consists of processing sequences (such as reading the process value for a Temperature Controller) for a general-purpose external device. A sequence consists of a group of steps, each of which consists of a send/ receive/control command, send/receive message, processing result, and a next step that depends on the processing results. For example, with a sequence that reads the process value for a Temperature Controller, the sequence sends the send message for the connected Temperature Controller (a character string in which the Process Value Read command is inserted between the header + address and the check code + terminator) and receives the receive message (a character string in which the Process Value Read command response is inserted between the header + address and the check code + terminator).
Serial Communications Unit (CS/CJ Series) CPU Unit
Send message (Example: PROCESS VALUE READ command)
Command
SEND (send)
RX00
Header Address Send data Check code Terminator
RS-232C or RS-422A/485
RX01
Header Address Send data Check code Terminator
168
Section 5-1
Depending on the response received, the user can either choose to resend the same send message (retry processing), or to perform the next process (for example, read the process value for a Temperature Controller with a different address).
One protocol Sequence No. 000 to 999 (60 sequences max./protocol)
Transmission control parameter Link word setting Send/receive processing monitoring time Response notification method
One-step structure With the SEND, RECV, or SEND&RECV command Command (see Note 1) Messages (see note 2)
With the WAIT, FLUSH, OPEN, or CLOSE command Command (see note 1)
Step 0 Step 1
Step 0 Step 1
15 steps max.
15 steps max.
Repeated N (no)
Next process
Normal end
N (error)
Next process Error processing Next step To specified step Sequence end Sequence interrupt
Header Address Data Check Terminator Reception matrix list (see note 2) Reception matrix Case No. 15 Case No. 00 Receive message Next process
Note
1. The SEND, RECV, SEND&RECV, WAIT, FLUSH (reception buffer clear), OPEN (ER-ON), or CLOSE (ER-OFF) commands can be used. 2. Three types of reception matrix are available for switching the processing, depending on whether the messages are send messages, receive (wait) messages, or multiple receive (wait) messages. Unlike sequences, these matrixes are managed as lists.
Sequence Parameters
Parameter Transmission control parameters Link words Monitoring time Response notification method Meaning Control methods, such as flow control Settings for shared words between the PLC and the Serial Communications Board. Monitoring time for send/receive processing Timing for writing received data to I/O memory in the PLC
169
Section 5-1
Messages
Repeat counter
Retry count Send wait time Response write enable (for operand specification) Next process Error processing
A group of expected messages that can be used to switch to different next processes when RECV or SEND&RECV is used. The number of times to repeat the step (0 to 255). The repeat counter can be used to change send/receive messages. Used for SEND&RECV to retry the command for errors (0 to 9). Used for SEND or SEND&RECV to create a wait time before sending data. Specification of whether or not to write the received data to memory. Specifies the next step or to end the sequence when the current step is completed normally. Specifies the next step or to end the sequence when the current step ends in an error.
Send message Receive message Send message and receive message Reception matrix
Meaning One of the following: SEND, RECV, SEND&RECV, WAIT, FLUSH, OPEN, or CLOSE The message sent for SEND. The expected message for RECV. The message sent and the expected message for SEND&RECV.
Note We recommend programming retry processing at any device sending commands in case noise or other factors result in transmission errors.
170
Section 5-1
Steps
Header <h> Terminator <t> Error check code <c> Length <l> Address <a> Message edited
@ [2A0D] LRC (horizontal parity) (0) (2 bytes of ASCII) --& (R (1) ) ,2)
<h> + <a> + "00" + "00" + & (W (1) ,4) + <c> + <t> Data
The following data is set in the Setup Area in the DM Area for a standard system protocol. m = D30000 + 100 unit number
Contents Setting for a standard system protocol
Bits 00 to 04: Communications Set to match the parameters of the external parameters device. Bits 08 to 11: Serial communica- Set to 6 Hex to specify Protocol Macro Mode. tions mode
171
Section 5-1
Setting for a standard system protocol
Bits 00 to 03: Baud rate Bit 15: Transmission method Bits 00 to 15: Max. No. of send/ receive bytes
Set to match the baud rate of the external device. Set to 0 Hex to specify half-duplex. Set to 03E8 Hex to specify 1,000 bytes.
The CS/CJ-series PLCs provide standard system protocols to enable communications with OMRON components without having to create communications sequences. The sequences in the standard system protocols can be executed merely by setting operands for the PMCR(260) instruction. Processing for communications line problems during communications for the standard system protocols are set to normal settings, as shown in the following table. If these settings are not suitable to the application or if improvements are desired, use the CX-Protocol to modify the following settings in the required sequences. For details on the use of the CX-Protocol, refer to the CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344). Refer to the appendices for the settings in the standard system protocols.
Level Sequence parameters Item Link words Transmission control parameters Response notification method Reception wait time Tr Reception finished wait time Tfr Send finished wait time Tfs Repeat counter Command Retry count Possible changes in settings No reason to change.
The monitoring times are set to 3 seconds for most sequences. The settings are different for send-only and receive-only sequences, as well as for sequences that require time for responses. No reason to change. The retry count is general set to 3 retries (4 tries total) for sequences that use the SEND&RECV command. Different settings are used for sequences that have other commands. No reason to change.
Step parameters
Send wait time Send message Receive message Response write enable Next process Error process
172
Section 5-2
5-2
5-2-1
Setup Area Allocated in the DM Area: D30000 to D31599 First Word in Setup Area Allocated in the DM Area: m = D30000 + 100 unit number
DM Area D30000 to D30099 D30100 to D30199 D30200 to D30299 D30300 to D30399 D30400 to D30499 D30500 to D30599 D30600 to D30699 D30700 to D30799 D30800 to D30899 D30900 to D30999 D31000 to D31099 D31100 to D31199 D31200 to D31299 D31300 to D31399 D31400 to D31499 D31500 to D31599
Unit No. Unit No. 0 Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8 Unit No. 9 Unit No. A Unit No. B Unit No. C Unit No. D Unit No. E Unit No. F
m to m + 1, m + 7 to m + 9: Port 1 Settings m + 10 to m + 11, m + 17 to m + 19: Port 2 Settings m + 2 to m + 6, m + 12 to m + 16: Not used m + 20 to m + 99: Not used
173
Section 5-2
5-2-2
Units (CS/CJ Series) Port 1 m Port 2 m + 10 15 12 to 14 08 to 11 05 to 07 04 03 02 01 00 00 to 03 Port settings 0: Defaults, 1: User settings Reserved Serial communications mode 6: Protocol macro Reserved Start bits 0: 1 bit; 1: 1 bit (1 start bit is always used regardless of this setting) Data length 0: 7 bits; 1: 8 bits Stop bits 0: 2 bits; 1: 1 bit Parity 0: Yes; 1: No Parity 0: Even; 1: Odd Baud rate (Unit: bps) 0: Default (9,600) 3: 1,200 4: 2,400 5: 4,800 6: 9,600 7: 19,200 8: 38,400 (The following settings can be selected even if protocol macro is set as the serial communications mode, unit version 1.2 or later only) 9: 57,600 (see note 1), A: 115,200 (see note 2), B: 230,400 (see note 2) Serial Gateway response timeout monitoring time (Unit Ver. 1.2 or later only) 0 hex: 5 s (default) 01 to FF hex (1 to 255 decimal): 0.1 to 25.5 s Unit: 100 ms Serial Gateway send start timeout monitoring time (Unit Ver. 1.2 or later only) 0 hex: 5 s (default) 01 to FF hex (1 to 255 decimal): 0.1 to 25.5 s Unit: 100 ms Transmission method 0: Half-duplex; 1: Full-duplex Reserved Clearing/holding the contents of the reception buffer in full-duplex mode (Unit Ver. 1.2 or later only) 0: Clear; 1: Hold Link word specification data exchange timing (Unit Ver. 1.2 or later only) 0: On-request I/O refreshing 1: Continuos I/O refreshing Reserved Maximum number of bytes in send/receive data: 00C8 to 03E8 Hex
D32001
D32011
m+1
m + 11
D32007
D32017
m+7
m + 17
08 to 15
00 to 07
D32008
D32018
m+8
m + 18
15 00 to 14 03
02
D32009
D32019
m+9
m + 19
00 to 01 00 to 15
Note
1. Supported only by CS1W-SCB@1, CS1W-SCU@1-V1, or CJ1W-SCU@1V1 Units with unit version 1.2 or later. 2. Supported only by CJ1W-SCU@2 Units with unit version 2.0.
Port Settings
The setting for the port settings determines if the default settings or user settings will be used for port 1 and port 2. Be sure to use the same settings as the RS-232C port on the host computer connected via the Host Link System.
174
Section 5-2
If the default port settings are specified, then the settings of bits 00 to 04 and the baud rate in D32001 will be ignored. The default settings used are as follows: Baud rate: 9,600 bps, start bits: 1 bit, data length: 7 bits, parity: even, and stop bits: 2 bits. If user port settings are specified, set bits 00 to 04 and set the baud rate in D32001. Setting Example: 0600 Hex = Protocol macro mode with default port settings and baud rate.
Start Bits, Data Length, Stop Bits, Parity, and Baud Rate If user settings are specified for the port settings, the number of start bits, data length, number of stop bits, parity, and baud rate must be set. The start bits setting, however, will be ignored and 1 start bit will always be used. Set the baud rate to between A and F for the SCU-@1-V1 and to between C and F for the SCU@2. A setup error will occur if these settings are used, and the default setting of 9,600 bps will be used. Do not use settings 1 and 2, which are reserved for the system.
Serial Gateway Response Timeout Monitoring Time (Unit Ver. 1.2 or Later Only)
The response timeout condition is monitored when a FINS command is converted to the specified protocol and sent. 0: 5 s (default); Setting range: 01 to FF hex (1 to 255 decimal): 0.1 to 25.5 s The response monitoring time is 5 s when set to the default (0), or can be user-specified in the range 0.1 to 25.5 s by setting between 01 and FF hex.
Serial Gateway Send Start Timeout Monitoring Time (Unit Ver. 1.2 or Later Only)
When converting FINS commands to the specified protocol and sending them during execution of protocol macros, the timeout condition is monitored from when the FINS command is received until the command starts to be sent in the specified protocol. 0: 5 s (default); Setting range: 01 to FF hex (1 to 255 decimal): 0.1 to 25.5 s The response monitoring time is 5 s when set to the default (0), or can be user-specified in between 0.1 and 25.5 s by setting the time to between 01 to FF hex. Transmission Method Set half-duplex (0) or full-duplex (1) as the transmission mode for the external device. Note Half-duplex: Allows data to be sent between two Units in one direction only at any one time.
A B or A B
Full-duplex: Allows data to be exchanged both ways between two Units at the same time.
A B
With half-duplex transmissions, the reception buffer is cleared immediately before the sequence is executed and immediately following SEND completion (SEND or SEND&RECV command). Therefore, the data received before and during SEND execution cannot be accessed as receive data by the next RECV command.
175
Section 5-2
Note When using SEND with half-duplex transmission, there is a time lag, t1, between data send processing completion and SEND completion. Therefore, if there is a rapid response from the remote device and a response is returned for SEND after data is sent (communications or other command) and before SEND is completed, the response during that time cannot be received using half-duplex transmissions. If this problem occurs, use the full-duplex transmissions. Also, if the external device is connected using 2-wire connections from an RS422A/485 port, send and receive data cannot both be on the same transmission line at the same time. This will create an additional lag time, t2, or 150 s. If responses are being received quickly from the external device, i.e., faster than t1 +t2, create a send delay at the external device or take other measures to allow for the lag times.
SEND operation Data send processing t1 t2 = 150 s Rapid response Data reception Time lags (see following table) Data cannot be received during this time. Reception buffer cleared
SCU@2
Baud rate (bps) 1,200 2,400 4,800 9,600 19,200 38,400 57,600 115,200 230,400 Time lag (s) 1,116 578 288 144 73 36 24 12 6
With full-duplex mode, the reception buffer is cleared immediately before the sequence is executed. While both the SEND&RECV commands are being
176
Section 5-2
executed, data is input into the reception buffer and is used as the macro data.
Time reception buffer cleared Immediately before communications sequence execution and immediately following SEND completion by the SEND or SEND&RECV command Immediately before communications sequence execution (See note 2)
Data reception Character trace From SEND completion to RECV completion, or following SEND completion to immediately before SEND execution All during communications sequence execution All during trace execution
RECV
SEND
RECV
Character trace
Note
1. With full-duplex, RS-232C or RS-422A/485 (1:1 and 4-wire connections) can be used. RS-422A/485 1:N or 2-wire transmissions cannot be used. 2. The FLUSH command is used to clear the reception buffer, and can be used at any time. 3. Although the received data is discarded until completion of SEND execution, it is reflected in the character trace.
Clearing/Holding the Contents of the Reception Buffer in Full-duplex Mode (Unit Ver. 1.2 or Later Only)
Set to either clear (OFF) or hold (ON) the contents of the reception buffer when the protocol macro starts. OFF: Clear When set to clear (OFF), the contents of the reception buffer will be cleared when the protocol macro is executed. ON: Hold When set to hold (ON), the contents of the reception buffer will not be lost if data acquisition fails after execution of the protocol macro. This function prevents loss of data during full-duplex communications.
Data Conversion Timing for Link Word Specifications (Unit Ver. 1.2 or Later Only)
Set to perform I/O refresh upon request or continuously, as follows: OFF: On-request I/O refresh (Immediate refresh mode) Data exchange is performed during I/O refresh when a refresh request is sent to the CPU Unit for each send/receive command that is executed. A time delay will occur after the send command is executed until the actual message is sent when this method is used. ON: Continuous I/O refresh (Cyclic refresh mode) During protocol macro execution, I/O refreshing is continuously performed with the CPU Unit, the data in the link word area is refreshed from the CPU Unit, and the data in the Board/Unit is accessed during SEND/RECEIVE command execution. When the send command is executed with this method, the actual message can be sent immediately.
From 200 bytes up to a maximum of 1,000 bytes can be set in hexadecimal, i.e., between 00C8 Hex and 03E8 Hex. Any setting below 00C8 Hex, will be treated as 00C8 Hex; any setting above 03E8 Hex, will be treated as 03E8 Hex.
177
Section 5-2
There is a 2.5-Kbyte reception buffer for each serial port in a Serial Communications Board or Unit. When using flow control, initiate flow control after receiving about 2 Kbytes, and then release control after processing all but 0.5 Kbytes of receive data. Up to 1,000 bytes (500 words) of data can be stored for each RECV command if 2 Kbytes of receive data is first stored in the buffer and 1,000 bytes (03E8 Hex) is set as the maximum number of send/ receive data bytes.
RD signal
RS signal
Data received while the PMCR(260) instruction is not being executed is discarded (controlled by turning OFF the RS signal). The OFF status of the RS signal is maintained after execution of the PMCR(260) instruction.
1,2,3...
1. With protocol communications in half-duplex mode, the RS signal is ON only while the RECV command is being executed. 2. The receive data (RD signal) from the communications partner is initially stored in the reception buffer. 3. The data in the reception buffer is analyzed, and a search is performed for data matching an expected message registered with the RECV command. 4. When matching data is found, the RS signal is turned OFF. The search starts after the final data has been received. It takes between 100 s and 4 ms from starting the search until the RS signal turns OFF. 5. While the SEND command is being executed, and while the PMCR(260) instruction is not being executed, the RS signal stays OFF and receive data is discarded.
178
Section 5-2
Note RS/CS flow control in half-duplex mode is supported only by CS-series Serial Communications Boards/Units manufactured on or after December 20th, 1999. With earlier models, half-duplex mode will operate in the same way as full-duplex mode.
Lot No: 20Z9 Manufactured on December 20th, 1999 The year is indicated with the last digit. In this case, "9" indicates "1999." Month of manufacture. October, November, and December are indicated with X, Y, and Z respectively. In this case, the month is "December." Day of manufacture. In this example, the day is "20."
Full-duplex Mode
There is a 2.5-Kbyte reception buffer for each serial port in a CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Board or Unit. When using flow control, initiate flow control after receiving about 2 Kbytes, and then release control after processing all but 0.5 Kbytes of receive data. Up to 1,000 bytes (500 words) of data can be stored for each RECV command if 2 Kbytes of receive data is first stored in the buffer and 1,000 bytes (03E8 Hex) is set as the maximum number of send/receive data bytes. The timing of this operation is shown below. (Signal names used below are those at the Serial Communications Board.)
PMCR(260) instruction PMCR(260) instruction Send Receive
Command SD signal
Receive
Send
Receive
RD signal
RS signal
Data received from the end of the last RECV command until the next PMCR(260) execution is discarded. The RS signal does not operate.
1,2,3...
1. With full-duplex protocol communications, the RS signal is turned OFF when 2 Kbytes of data has been stored in the reception buffer (i.e., with 0.5 Kbytes remaining). 2. The receive data (RD signal) from the communications partner is initially stored in the reception buffer. 3. The data in the reception buffer is analyzed, and a search is performed for data matching an expected message registered with the RECV command. 4. When matching data is found, all the previous data is deleted from the reception buffer. 5. If this results in the amount of data stored in the reception buffer dropping to less than 0.5 Kbytes (i.e., more than 2 Kbytes remaining), the RS signal is turned ON. 6. Data that is received while the PMCR(260) instruction is not being executed is discarded. 7. In full-duplex mode, the data left over after the analysis performed with the last RECV command and any subsequent data received before the next PMCR(260) execution is discarded. During this interval, RS flow control cannot be used.
179
Section 5-3
5-3
5-3-1
09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
180
Section 5-3
1. When any one of bits 05 to 11 is ON, A40208 (Inner Board Error Flag) (non-fatal error) will be ON. 2. When bit 00 or 01 is ON, A40112 (Inner Board Fatal Error Flag) will be ON. For details on errors, refer to SECTION 12 Troubleshooting and Maintenance.
Board: A42410 Protocol Macro Execu- (No flags are tion Error Flag provided for Units.) Port 1/2 Port Settings Change Bits Board: A63601 and A63602 Units: A620 + unit number, bits 01 and 02
The flag will turn ON when an error Startup occurs in the Inner bus. If the problem persists even when the Board is remounted or used with another CPU Unit, replace the Board. The flag will turn ON when and attempt Startup was made to read or write data at an illegal address (error code 3) or a protocol macro syntax error occurred (error code 4). The communications port setting can be Startup changed and the port restarted by turning on the corresponding bit.
At error
Startup
At error
Start of Sequence
After port settings have been changed and the port has been restarted
Note The flags will also be initialized at the following times: When the operating mode is changed between PROGRAM and RUN or MONITOR modes and when the Board or Unit is restarted. If an error flag turns ON, remove the cause of the error and then reset the error indication from the Programming Console or other Programming Device.
5-3-2
Words CIO 1900 to CIO 1999 in the Inner Board Area are used for Software Switches and Status Area. Only the words shown in the following table are used for Protocol Macros. Inner Board CIO Area CIO 1900 to CIO 1999
Words CIO 1900 CIO 1901 to CIO 1904 CIO 1905 to CIO 1914 CIO 1915 to CIO 1924 CIO 1925 to CIO 1999 Usage Software switches Board status Port 1 status Port 2 status Reserved for the system
181
Section 5-3
Words CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 of the CPU Bus Unit Area in the CIO Area are allocated according to the unit number setting. Each unit number is allocated 25 words. With the protocol macro mode, the words shown in the following table are used for the Software Switches and Status Area. CPU Bus Unit Area CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 n = CIO 1500 + 25 unit number
Unit No. Unit No. 0 Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8 Unit No. 9 Unit No. A Unit No. B Unit No. C Unit No. D Unit No. E Unit No. F Words CIO 1500 to CIO 1524 CIO 1525 to CIO 1549 CIO 1550 to CIO 1574 CIO 1575 to CIO 1599 CIO 1600 to CIO 1624 CIO 1625 to CIO 1649 CIO 1650 to CIO 1674 CIO 1675 to CIO 1694 CIO 1700 to CIO 1724 CIO 1725 to CIO 1749 CIO 1750 to CIO 1774 CIO 1775 to CIO 1799 CIO 1800 to CIO 1824 CIO 1825 to CIO 1849 CIO 1850 to CIO 1874 CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
n: Software switches (port 1/Port 2) n + 1 to n + 4: Unit status n + 5 to n + 14: Port 1 status n + 15 to n + 24: Port 2 status
5-3-3
Software Switches
The Software Switches are used from the CPU Unit to control the Serial Communications Board and Serial Communications Unit. Software Switches are used to output control signals from the CPU Unit to the Serial Communications Board or Unit.
182
Section 5-3
n = CIO 1500 + 25 unit number
Words Unit Boards (CS/CJ (CS Series Series) Only) CIO 1900 n
Bit
Contents
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Port 2
Port 1
Reserved Used for loopback tests Reserved Serial Gateway Prohibit Switch (protocol macros) 0: Serial Gateway not prohibited; 1: Serial Gateway prohibited Abort Switch One-shot Trace Switch Continuous Trace Switch Wait Release Switch Reserved Used for loopback tests Reserved Serial Gateway Prohibit Switch (protocol macros) 0: Serial Gateway not prohibited; 1: Serial Gateway prohibited Abort Switch One-shot Trace Switch Continuous Trace Switch Wait Release Switch
Software Switches
Bit CIO 1900 CIO n 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 0 0 0 0 Port 1 Wait Release Switch Port 1 Continuous Trace Switch Port 1 One-shot Trace Switch Port 1 Abort Switch Port 1 Serial Gateway Prohibit Switch (protocol macro) Port 1 Loopback Test Switch
Port 2 Wait Release Switch Port 2 Continuous Trace Switch Port 2 One-shot Trace Switch Port 2 Abort Switch Port 2 Serial Gateway Prohibit Switch (protocol macro) Port 2 Loopback Test Switch
183
Section 5-3
Abort Switch
Bits 03 and 11
Manipulated by user
Manipulated by system
The CX-Protocol will start a one-shot trace when the Switch turns ON. The trace is ended when the Switch is turned OFF. The Board or Unit will be cleared when the trace buffer becomes full. The CPU Unit will manipulate the Oneshot Trace Switch and Continuous Trace Switch when trace operations are performed from the CX-Protocol. Do not manipulate these switches directly from a ladder diagram. Continuous Bits 01 and 09 The CX-Protocol will start a continuous Trace Switch trace when the Switch turns ON. The (Note 2) trace is ended when the Switch is turned OFF. Wait Release Bits 00 and 08 Standby status for the WAIT command Switch (Not supported by will be released when the switch is C200HX/HG/HE) turned ON.
Bits 02 and 10
Manipulated by CX-Protocol
Note
1. The Software Switches will also be initialized at the following times: When the operating mode is changed between PROGRAM and RUN or MONITOR modes, when STUP(237) is executed, when the Board or Unit is restarted, or when the communications port is reset. 2. The first switch of the One-shot Trace Switch and Continuous Trace Switch to turn ON will determine the trace operation. If a Trace Switch turns ON when a trace operation is already in progress, the switch will not be effective even when the current trace operation is completed unless the switch is first turned OFF. If the One-shot Trace Switch and Continuous Trace Switch turn ON simultaneously, the Continuous Trace Switch will take priority.
184
Section 5-3
5-3-4
Status Area
The Status Area is used to input status information from Serial Communications Board or Unit to the CPU Unit. The Status Area is where the Serial Communications Board or Unit set communications status, the transmission control signal status, and the transmission error status.
n = CIO 1500 + 25 unit number
Words Bit Units Boards (CS/CJ Series) (CS Series Only) Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 CIO 1901 n+1 02 to 15 01 00 CIO 1902 n+2 00 to 15 CIO 1903 n+3 00 to 15 CIO 1904 n+4 00 to 15 CIO CIO n+5 n + 15 12 to 15 1905 1915 08 to 11 05 to 07 04 03 02 01 00 CIO CIO n+6 n + 16 15 1906 1916 14 13 12 to 02 01 00 15 to 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03
Contents
CIO 1907
CIO 1917
n+7
n + 17
Reserved 1: Error log EEPROM error 0: Error log EEPROM normal 1: Protocol data error 0: Protocol data normal Reserved Reserved Reserved Port Setup Serial communications mode: Always 6 Hex setting settings (See note.) status Baud rate (Note 1) Reserved: Always 0 Start bits: Always 1 Data length: 7 or 8 bits (Note 1) Stop bits: 1 or 2 bits (Note 1) Parity: Yes/No (Note 1) Parity: Even/Odd (Note 1) Port Hard0 No 0 RS-232C 1 RS-422A/485 1 Reserved setting ware set0 1 0 1 status tings (See 0: Terminating resistance OFF note 2) 1: Terminating resistance ON Reserved 1: System Setup error; 0: System Setup normal 1: Port operating; 0: Port stopped Commu- Reserved nica1: Remote Unit busy receiving (Flow control) tions 0: Remote Unit ready to receive status Reserved 1: Local Unit busy receiving (Flow control) 0: Local Unit ready to receive DTR (ER) signal 1: High, 0: Low Transmission DSR (DR) signal 1: High, 0: Low control Reserved signal status CTS (CS) signal 1: High, 0: Low RTS (RS) signal 1: High, 0: Low
185
Section 5-3
Number of retries Trans1: FCS check error or Serial Gateway transmission path error; mission 0: FCS check normal error 1: Command error; 0: No command error status 1: Timeout (Tfs, Tfr, or Tr) error or Serial Gateway transmission timeout or Serial Gateway response timeout; 0: Normal 1: Overrun error; 0: Normal 1: Framing error; 0: Normal 1: Parity error; 0: Normal Reserved Protocol status (See Protocol Status on page 91.)
1: Transmission error 0: No transmission error 1: Tfs (send finished monitoring time) exceeded 0: Normal 1: Tfr (receive finished monitoring time) exceeded 0: Normal 1: Tr (receive wait monitoring time) exceeded 0: Normal Number of retries: 0 to 9: 0 to 9 hex
Note
1. The settings in the Setup Area are reflected here. The default settings will be used and will be stored here if a setup error occurs. 2. With a Board, the same bit is used as for A42409 (protocol data error) of the Auxiliary Area.
186
Section 5-3
Timing ON At error
OFF Startup
Setup error
Board: CIO 190601 (port 1) CIO 191601 (port 2) Unit: n + 6 bit 01 (port 1) n + 16 bit 01 (port 2) Board only: A42408 (not available for Unit) Board: CIO 190600 (port 1) CIO 191600 (port 2) Unit: n + 6 bit 00 (port 1) n + 16 bit 00 (port 2)
Port operating
ON when the port can operate correctly. OFF when protocol macro data is being transferred.
Remote Unit Board: receive CIO 190710 (port 1) busy/receive CIO 191710 (port 2) wait Unit: n + 7 bit 10 (port 1) n + 17 bit 10 (port 2)
This flag indicates the receive status of a remote Unit during SEND when Xon/Xoff flow control or RS/CS flow control is set in the transmission control parameters. When Xon/Xoff flow control is set, the reception buffer is cleared when the sequence starts, so the status area is set to remote Unit receive wait (0). 1: Remote Unit receive busy (Reception is disabled because the reception buffer is full.) 0: Remote Unit receive wait (Reception is enabled.)
Startup When sta- After busy (See note.) tus is read status has been released
187
Section 5-3
Timing ON
OFF
When sta- After busy tus is read status has been released
When sta- After busy tus is read status has been released
188
Section 5-3
Timing ON At error
Board: CIO 1906 bits 00 to 15 (port 1) CIO 1916 bits 00 to 15 (port 2) Unit: n + 6 bits 00 to 15 (port 1) n + 16 bits 00 to 15 (port 2)
When sta- When protus is read tocol data has been successfully transferred
Note The flags will also be initialized at the following times: When the operating mode is changed between PROGRAM and RUN or MONITOR modes and when the Board or Unit is restarted. If an error flag turns ON, remove the cause of the error and then reset the error indication from the Programming Console or other Programming Device. Protocol Macro Function With the protocol macro function, each port is provided with a reception buffer that will hold 2.5 Kbytes max. The reception buffer can be used to hold a large quantity of data when it is being received at once, or when the communications sequence is waiting due to the WAIT command. If the protocol macro function is used and receive operations are performed when the reception buffer is full, the receive data will overwrite the 2.5 Kbytes of previously received data in the buffer. Therefore, always set flow control when performing these operations. Overrun Errors, Framing Errors, Parity Errors and Error Flags If an overrun error, framing error, or parity error is detected when the protocol macro function is being used, the receive data will be stored in the buffer with the error status included. The corresponding error flags will turn ON or OFF according to the following conditions.
189
Section 5-3
Error Data In Data Agreeing with Expected Receive Message When RECV is executed, an expected receive message is searched for in the reception buffer. If the data that has been received agrees with an expected receive message, it is processed as receive data. If error details are included in the receive data, the corresponding error flags will turn ON. The following example shows when 100 bytes of data is received that agrees with an expected receive message.
(P) 100 bytes (P) Error Flag ON
P: Parity error
Data Not Agreeing with Expected Receive Message If error details are included in data that do not agree with an expected receive message, the data will simply be discarded and the error flag status will remain unchanged. For trace information, all error details in the reception buffer will be stored within capacity for the trace data. The following example shows when a parity error occurs for data that does not agree with an expected receive message.
(P) Data discarded (P) <h> <t> Error flags remain unchanged
Protocol Status
The information shown in the following table is input from the Board or Unit to the Protocol Status Words in the CPU Unit.
n = CIO 1500 + 25 unit number Bit Setting contents
Words Boards (CS Series Only) Port 1 Port 2 CIO CIO 1909 1919 Unit (CS/CJ Series) Port 1 Port 2 n+9 n + 19
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 04 to 07 03 to 00 15 to 12 11 to 00
Protocol Macro Executing Flag Step Error Processing Flag Abort Flag Tracing Flag Sequence End Completion Flag Sequence Abort Completion Flag Sequence Wait Flag Serial Gateway Prohibited Flag (protocol macros) 1: Prohibited; 0: Not prohibited Reserved Error codes
CIO 1910
CIO 1920
n + 10
n + 20
190
Section 5-3
15 to 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
n + 12 n + 13 n + 14
n + 22 n + 23 n + 24
15 to 00 15 to 00 15 to 08 07 to 00
Reserved Executed Step No. (code) 0 to 15 (0 to F hex) Reserved Executed Reception Case No. (code) 0 to 15 (0 to F hex) Executed Reception Case No. Flag No. 0 to 15: Correspond to bits 00 to 15 Executed Step No. Flag No. 0 to 15: Correspond to bits 00 to 15 Repeat Counter Setting Value 1 to 255 (01 to FF hex) (See note.) Repeat Counter Present Value 1 to 255 (01 to FF hex) (See note.)
Note When the repeat counter is used to read words and 0 is read, 0 will be stored and the step will be skipped.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 CIO 1909 (port 1) or 0 0 0 0 CIO 1919 (port 2) n + 9 (port 1) or n + 19 (port 2) Error code Serial Gateway Prohibit Flag (protocol macro) Sequence Wait Flag Sequence Abort Completion Flag 1: Prohibited 0: Not prohibited 1: Sequence wait status 0: Other than above 1: Sequence aborted 0: Other than above 1: Sequence ended 0: Other than above 1: Trace executing 0: Other than above 1: Protocol macro processing aborted 0: Other than above 1: Step processing error 0: Step processing normal 1: Protocol macro executing 0: Protocol macro executed
Tracing Flag
Abort Flag
191
Section 5-3
Board: CIO 190914 (port 1) CIO 191914 (port 2) Unit: n + 9 bit 14 (port 1) n + 19 bit 14 (port 2) Board: CIO 190913 (port 1) CIO 191913 (port 2)
This flag is turned ON when a PMCR(260) instruction (sequence) is executed. The flag remains OFF when execution fails. When the sequence is completed and receive data is written, the flag is turned OFF after all the receive data has been written to I/O memory. This flag is turned OFF when the sequence is completed (either when it is ended by End, or when it is ended by Abort). When the scan response notification method is set for the sequence, first a check is made to see if the received data has been written to I/O memory before the Protocol Macro Executing Flag is turned OFF. Startup This flag is turned ON when a step has (See note.) ended abnormally. It is turned OFF if the step ends normally as a result of a retry. 1: Step ended abnormally 0: Step ended normally
When veri- When fication sequence starts error occurs after receiving When sequence starts
Abort Flag
Unit: n + 9 bit 13 (port 1) n + 19 bit 13 (port 2) Tracing Flag Board: CIO 190912 (port 1) CIO 191912 (port 2) Unit: n + 9 bit 12 (port 1) n + 19 bit 12 (port 2) Board: CIO 190911 (port 1) CIO 191911 (port 2) Unit: n + 9 bit 11 (port 1) n + 19 bit 11 (port 2)
This flag is turned ON when processing is ended using the Abort Switch from the user program. When the Abort Switch is turned ON at the end of a sequence, the sequence may end with either End or Abort status.
Depending on the instruction from the CXProtocol, this flag is turned ON while timeseries data for send and receive messages is being traced.
Board: CIO 190910 (port 1) CIO 191910 (port 2) Unit: n + 9 bit 10 (port 1) n + 19 bit 10 (port 2)
This flag is turned ON when a sequence is completed for the next process or for an error process with an END command. When a sequence has ended normally, setting END (ABORT when the sequence has ended abnormally) enables this flag to be used to determine whether or not the sequence execution has ended normally. 1: Sequence ended 0: Sequence not ended This flag is turned ON when a sequence is Startup ended for the next process or for an error (See note.) processing with an ABORT command. 1: Sequence aborted 0: Sequence not aborted
192
Section 5-3
Timing ON
OFF When Wait Release Switch is ON, and when sequence starts
CIO 190908 CIO 191908 n + 9 bit 08 n + 19 bit 08 Board: CIO 1909 bits 00 to 03 (port 1) CIO 1919 bits 00 to 03 (port 2) Unit: n + 9 bits 00 to 03 (port 1) n + 19 bits 00 to 03 (port 2)
Startup
Board: CIO 1910 bits 00 to 11 (port 1) CIO 1920 bits 00 to 11 (port 2) Unit: n + 10 bits 00 to 11 (port 1) n + 20 bits 00 to 11 (port 2)
None
193
Section 5-3
Timing ON
OFF
Step numbers 0 to 15 (0 to F hex) are stored Startup When step When for the steps for which execution has been (See note.) is exesequence completed. cuted starts
Board: CIO 1913 bits 00 to 15 (port 1) CIO 1923 bits 00 to 15 (port 2) Unit: n + 13 bits 00 to 15 (port 1) n + 23 bits 00 to 15 (port 2)
Reception matrix case numbers 0 to 15 (0 to F hex) are stored for which reception has been completed. The number is cleared when the sequence execution starts, when the STUP(237) instruction is executed, and at restarts. The Executed Reception Case No. is stored only when the reception matrix is set using the RECV or SEND&RECV command. If a reception matrix is not set, the case number will be set to 0 (cleared) when another command is executed. Reception matrix case numbers 0 to 15 for which reception has been completed correspond to individual bits (00 to 15), and are turned ON to indicate execution. The numbers are cleared when the sequence execution starts, when the STUP(237) instruction is executed, at restarts, and when the execution of each step starts. The reception matrix case number can be checked from the ladder program when the WAIT command is executed or when the sequence is ended after the reception matrix RECV command is executed. The Executed Reception Case No. Flag in the bit corresponding to the stored case number will be turned ON only when the reception matrix is set for the RECV or SEND&RECV command. If a reception matrix is not set, the case number will be set to 0 (cleared) when another command is executed. Case numbers 0 to 15 for the steps for which execution has been completed correspond to individual bits (00 to 15), and are turned ON in ascending order. Once a bit has been executed, the bit corresponding to the executed step is turned ON in ascending order to hold the bit ON during the sequence (and after completion).
194
Section 5-3
Timing ON
OFF
The number of times a step is repeated is set Startup When step When in these bits. (See note.) starts sequence starts
Startup The repeat counter variable N is set. The value is cleared when the sequence execu- (See note.) tion starts, when the STUP(237) instruction is executed, and at restarts. The present value N varies according to the method used to initialize the value. For resets, the variable N is set to 0 when the step is started, and the step is executed according to the set number of times. For holds, the variable N for the present value is held when the step is started, and the step is executed according to the set number of times. If the Repeat Counter Setting Value is set to read word R (see note), and 0 is read, then 0 will be stored and this step will be skipped (the next process setting will be ignored), and the sequence will move to the next step (+ 1). For details, refer to the CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344).
Note A data read/write area exceeded error will occur and be recorded in the Protocol Status if an EM bank that does not exist is specified in Protocol Macro Mode or if EM banks 0D to 18 are accessed from any Unit other than the CJ1W-SCU@2 (even if these backs exist in the CPU Unit). Note The flags will also be initialized at the following times: When the operating mode is changed between PROGRAM and RUN or MONITOR modes and when the Board or Unit is restarted. If an error flag turns ON, remove the cause of the error and then reset the error indication from the Programming Console or other Programming Device. Error Codes The contents of the error codes are shown in the following table.
Code 0 2 Error contents Protocol macro execution Executed Not executed
No error Sequence No. Error The sequence number specified by the PMCR(260) instruction does not exist in the Board or Unit. Data Read/Write Area Exceeded Error Execution stops after the error occurs. When data is written or read to the CPU Unit, the specified area range was exceeded. Protocol Data Syntax Error A code that cannot be executed occurs while the protocol macro was executed. (Example: A header occurs after a terminator.)
195
Section 5-4
5-4
5-4-1
Control data 1 (communications port No., serial port No., destination unit address) Control data 2 (communications sequence No.) First send word First receive data storage word
The following items are specified in C1. Communications Port No. (Internal Logical Port Number) Specify internal logical port 0 to 7 Hex for executing the PMCR(260) instruction. Note A CS/CJ-series CPU Unit has eight internal logical ports for executing FINS commands. Specify the logical port number to be used for execution. These ports are also used by the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions used for Host Link communications. Refer to 4-4-1 Simultaneous Commands and Communications Ports for details. Serial Port No. (Physical Port) Set the physical port number of the Serial Communications Board or Unit connected to the remote device. Port 1: 1 Hex, Port 2: 2 Hex Destination Unit Address Specify the Unit address of the Serial Communications Board or Unit to execute the protocol macro. Serial Communications Board: E1 Hex Serial Communications Unit: Unit number (See note.) + 10 Hex Setting range: 10 to 1F Hex Note This is the unit number (0 to F) for the CPU Bus Unit set on the rotary switch on the front panel of the Unit. Control Data 2 (C2) C2 specifies the communications sequence number in hexadecimal (000 to 999). Setting range: 0000 to 03E7 Hex S specifies the first word of the area in which the data required for sending is stored.
196
Section 5-4
The number of send words in S+1 and the following words is stored in the rightmost 8 bits of S. The setting range is 01 to FA Hex (250 words or less). S is also included in the number of words. The data to be sent is stored in S+1 and the following words. Note When there is no send data, set S to #0000. First Receive Data Storage Word (R)
Word R R+1 Receive data R+n 15 0
R specifies the first word of the area used to initialize the reception buffer or the first word of the area used to store the receive data.
12 11 0 08 07 Number of receive words 00 Number of words including R
Before Execution of PMCR(260) The contents of R+1 and following words are set in the reception buffer. The number of words of data from R through the end of the receive data is specified in the rightmost 8 bits of R. The range that can be set is 02 to FA Hex (2 to 250 words). If 00 Hex or 01 Hex is set, the reception buffer will remain cleared after PMCR(260) execution and before executing the communications sequence. After Execution of PMCR(260) The number of words of receive data in R+1 and the following words is stored in the rightmost 8 bits of R. The range is 01 to FA Hex (250 words or less). R is also included in the number of words. The receive data is stored in R+1 and the following words. For details, refer to Receive Data Storage Area Function on page 205. Note 1. The function of the receive data storage words (start from R for the number of words specified in R) differs before and after execution of PMCR(260). a) Before Execution of PMCR(260) The contents of the receive data storage words is used as initialization data for the reception buffer before the communications sequence is executed. b) After Execution of PMCR(260) Data received for the RECV command is stored in the receive data storage words if there is response data to be written. 2. When there is no receive data, set R to #0000. PMCR(260) Operation When PMCR(260) is executed, the communications sequence specified in C2 is executed for the communications port specified in bits 12 to 15 of C1 (internal logical port 0 to 7) from the serial port specified in bits 08 to 11 (physical port) of C1 of the device with the unit address specified in bits 00 to 07 of C1. If an operand is specified as a variable in the send message, data starting in S+1 for the number of words specified in S is used as the send data. If an operand is specified as a variable in the receive message, data will be
197
Section 5-4
received in words starting from R+1 and the number of words of received data will be automatically stored in R. If reception processing fails, the data that was stored started at R+1 (i.e., the number of words specified in R) is again read from the reception buffer and stored again beginning at R+1. This ensures that the current data will not be cleared and that the previous receive data will be maintained when receptions fail.
Flags
Name Error Flag Label ER ON OFF The Communications Port Enabled All other cases Flag for the specified communications port (internal logical port) was OFF when the instruction was executed. The specified serial port (physical port) is not set to protocol macro mode. The data setting in C1 is not within the allowed range. The number of words specified in S or D exceeds 249 (when a word address was specified for S or D). All other cases A read/write-protected area was specified for send data or receive data. A write-protected area was specified for receive data.
198
Section 5-4
Indirect DM/EM address, Binary Indirect DM/EM address, BCD Constant Area Data Registers Index Registers, direct Index Registers, indirect
(See note.)
Note The EM Area cannot be specified for the receive data when the interrupt notification function is being used for a Serial Communications Board. If the EM Area is specified, a protocol macro syntax error will occur and A42410 will turn ON.
199
Section 5-4
The following table shows the Auxiliary Area flags that are used when the PMCR(260) instruction is executed. Communications Port Enabled Flags These flags turn ON when execution of the PMCR(260) instruction is enabled. Depending on the PMCR(260) instruction, they turn OFF at execution, and turn ON when the port enters an enabled status.
Word A202 Bit 08 to 15 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Contents Reserved Communications Port No. 7 Enabled Flag Communications Port No. 6 Enabled Flag Communications Port No. 5 Enabled Flag Communications Port No. 4 Enabled Flag Communications Port No. 3 Enabled Flag Communications Port No. 2 Enabled Flag Communications Port No. 1 Enabled Flag Communications Port No. 0 Enabled Flag
These flags turn ON in the following cases: When an error occurs while the PMCR(260) instruction is being executed When an error response corresponding to each communications port occurs, or a resend error occurs When operations start or when the PMCR(260) instruction is executed, if the Communications Port Enabled Flag turns OFF, then the corresponding Error Flag also turns OFF.
Word A219 Bit 08 to 15 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Contents Reserved Communications Port No. 7 Error Flag Communications Port No. 6 Error Flag Communications Port No. 5 Error Flag Communications Port No. 4 Error Flag Communications Port No. 3 Error Flag Communications Port No. 2 Error Flag Communications Port No. 1 Error Flag Communications Port No. 0 Error Flag
The response codes (FINS completion codes) are set when the PMCR(260) instruction is executed. The contents of these words are also cleared when the Communications Port Enabled Flag turns OFF at the start of operations or when the PMCR(260) instruction is executed.
Word A203 A204 A205 A206 A207 A208 A209 A210 A211 to A218 Contents Communications Port No. 0 Completion Code Communications Port No. 1 Completion Code Communications Port No. 2 Completion Code Communications Port No. 3 Completion Code Communications Port No. 4 Completion Code Communications Port No. 5 Completion Code Communications Port No. 6 Completion Code Communications Port No. 7 Completion Code Reserved
200
Section 5-4
(Normal end)
(Normal end)
Note Before executing a PMCR(260) instruction, be sure that the communications port is set to the Protocol Macro serial communications mode. If a PMCR(260) instruction is executed for a communications port set in Host Link mode, a meaningless message may be sent from the port. The current serial communications mode can be checked in bits 12 to 15 (Protocol Macro = 6 Hex) of the following words. Boards: CIO 1905 for port 1 and CIO 1915 for port 2. Units: CIO n + 5 for port 1 and CIO n + 15 for port 2. Refer to 2-3-1 DM Area for DM Area allocations and settings.
5-4-2
Programming Example
Input condition Communications Port Enabled Flags Protocol Macro Executing Flag
Note When executing the PMCR(260) instruction, be sure to check that the serial communications mode for the port used for communications is set to protocol macro. If the PMCR(260) instruction is executed with the serial communications mode set to Host Link (SYSWAY), messages that cannot be used for the application will be output from the serial port. The serial communications mode settings can be confirmed in bits 12 to 15 of the following words in the CIO Area: Serial Communications Board, port 1: 1905, port 2: 1915; Serial Communications Unit, port 1 = n+5, port 2 = n+15. The setting for protocol macro is 6 Hex. For details of DM Area allocations, refer to 2-3-1 DM Area.
201
Section 5-4
5-4-3
Connections
Serial Communications Board
Port 2 Specifies the Temperature Controller Unit No., sends the PRESENT VALUE READ command send data, and receives the present value set in the response in the specified word.
Send data
Receive data Temperature Controller E5#K Unit No. 00 Temperature Controller E5#K Unit No. 01 Temperature Controller E5#K Unit No. 31
32 Units max.
Send Word Allocation for Sequence No. 000 (Present Value Read)
First word of send data S S+1 Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No. S Word Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4-digit BCD) Unit No. (2-digit BCD) Data 0002 (fixed)
S+1
00 to 31
Receive Word Allocation for Sequence No. 000 (Present Value Read)
Receive data storage words R R+1 Number of receive data words Present value R Word Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4-digit BCD) Present value (4-digit BCD) 0002 Data
R+1
202
Section 5-4
Reading the present value of E5@K Unit No. 03 and storing it in DM00201
C1: Control data
0000: Sequence No. 000 S: First send data word Number of send data words = 2 Unit No. = 03
Present value
203
Section 5-4
The following diagram shows an example in which sequence number 000 (PRESENT VALUE READ) of a Temperature Controller (E5@K Read System) is executed using the PMCR(260) instruction. If the sequence has been completed normally, the present value that has been read is transferred to another word.
Protocol Macro Executing Flag 191915 PMCR #02E1 #0000 D00100
If input condition CIO 000000 is ON, Communications Port No. 0 Enabled Flag A20200 is ON, and Protocol Macro Executing Flag CIO 191915 is OFF, then sequence No. 000 is executed for Serial Communications Board port 2 and the present value is stored in DM00201.
D00200
DIFD (14) 000100 Protocol Macro Executing Flag 191915 Step Error Processing Flag 191914 MOV (21) D00201 Step Error Processing Flag 191914 D00300
If Protocol Macro Executing Flag CIO 191915 turns OFF, CIO 000100 turns ON (and remains ON for one cycle).
000100
If Protocol Macro Executing Flag CIO 191915 is OFF and Step Error Processing Flag CIO 191914 is OFF when CIO 000100 turns ON, then the received present value in DM00201 is moved to DM00300. If CIO 000100 is ON (sequence end) and Step Error Processing Flag CIO 191914 is ON, the sequence ends abnormally and a FAL(06) instruction (Non-Fatal Diagnostic Instruction) is executed. If the Communications Port Error Flag for port 0 turns ON, a FAL(06) instruction (Non-Fatal Diagnostic Instruction) is executed.
FAL (06) 01 Communications Port No. 0 Error Flag A21900 FAL (06) 02
Protocol Macro Executing Flag CIO 191915 Sequence executed 00100 One cycle Present value in DM00201 moved to DM00300 Sequence completed Sequence re-executed
When sequence ended normally: Step Error Processing Flag CIO 191914
FAL instruction executed When sequence ended abnormally: Step Error Processing Flag CIO 191914
204
Section 5-4
Receive Data Storage Area before Executing PMCR(260) When the PMCR(260) instruction is executed, the reception buffer is cleared to 0 once immediately before the communications sequence is executed. If a ladder program is used that regularly reads the present value data, as shown in the following diagram, the present value data would normally be cleared to 0 if the data is not retrieved due to an error, such as a reception error. If reception processing fails, however, the data that was stored started at R+1 (i.e., the number of words specified in R) is again read from the reception buffer and stored again beginning at R+1. This ensures that the current data will not be cleared and that the previous receive data will be maintained when receptions fail. Make sure to set the number of words m for the data that is to be held. If the data is set to 0 or 1, the most recent receive data will not be held. Instead, it will be cleared to 0. Example: The following protocol can be used to regularly execute the PMCR(260) instruction to retrieve receive data by performing the send/receive operation once only.
Always ON Flag
Reception buffer
m words Not holding the receive area. Communications sequence RECV Reception buffer Clear Failed Stores cleared values
Receive area R + 1 onwards Holding the receive area. Communications sequence Set Reception buffer Clear Receive area R + 1 onwards
Receive Data Storage Area Function The receive data storage area is used according to the following procedure. 1,2,3... 1. When the PMCR(260) instruction is executed, 250 words of the reception buffer in the Serial Communications Board or Serial Communications Unit are cleared. 2. Before executing the communications sequence, the contents of one less than the number of words specified in R starting from word R + 1 are used to overwrite the contents of the reception buffer (excluding the first word). This becomes the initial value of the reception buffer, and the results of the RECV command execution are waited for. If the contents of the reception buffer exceeds the contents of the number of words specified in R (or the
205
Section 5-4
whole area if the number of words is specified as 00), then the initial value will be set to 0000 Hex. 3. The data that has been received as the result of executing the RECV command will be stored in the reception buffer (except for the first word) from the specified first word (offset) and will be verified against the expected receive messages. If writing the response data is not specified, the receive data will be saved in the reception buffer and will not be stored in the CPU Unit. 4. If writing the response data is specified, the data in the reception buffer up to the most recent data (except for the first word), will be stored in from words R+1 onwards. The data stored for the number of words (including R) up to the last word will be saved. Whenever the number of data words stored exceeds the maximum, the number of words in R will be updated. 5. Steps 3 and 4 are repeated until the protocol macro operation is completed.
I/O memory No. of words specified here I/O memory Changed No. of words is stored and updated. Set
Note Processing When a Sequence Ends Abnormally As shown in the following examples, if END is set when a sequence ends normally and ABORT is set when a sequence ends abnormally, it is possible to determine whether each sequence has ended normally or abnormally by using the Sequence End Completion Flag and the Sequence Abort Completion Flag.
206
Section 5-4
Error
Step No. 01
Step No. 02
When the sequence ends normally Protocol Macro Executing Flag Sequence executed Sequence End Completion Flag Sequence completed Sequence re-executed
When the sequence ends normally Protocol Macro Executing Flag Sequence executed Sequence End Completion Flag Error processing for step No. 00 Sequence completed Sequence re-executed
When the sequence ends abnormally Protocol Macro Executing Flag Sequence executed Sequence Abort Completion Flag Sequence completed Sequence re-executed
When the sequence ends abnormally Protocol Macro Executing Flag Sequence executed Sequence Abort Completion Flag Error processing for step No. 00 Sequence completed Sequence re-executed
Note The Step Error Processing Flag is used to see whether error processing has been executed for an individual step in a sequence, and not for the overall steps. Therefore, as shown in Example 2 above, after executing error processing during a sequence (step No. 00), the flag will remain ON, even if the next step ends normally. Care is therefore required because it is not always possible to use this flag to determine whether the overall sequence has ended abnormally.
207
Section 5-5
Note Abort Switch Precaution The Abort Switch can be used to abort the sequence that is being executed. The Abort Switch can be turned ON from a ladder diagram or from a Programming Device. It will be turned OFF automatically by the system when abort processing has been completed. Do not attempt to force the Abort Switch to stay ON from a ladder diagram or from a Programming Device.
5-5
Overview
Protocol data
Memory Card
Note The following table shows the combinations of CPU Units and Serial Communications Board/Unit that support the Simple Backup Function.
208
Section 5-5
Serial Communications Board/Unit CS1W-SCB21-V1, CS1W-SCB21, CS1W-SCB41-V1, CS1W-SCB41, or CS1W-SCU21-V1, or CS1W-SCU21 CS1W-SCU31-V1 Supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Serial Communications Board/Unit CJ1W-SCU21(-V1)/31-V1/41(-V1) CJ1W-SCU22/32/42 Supported Not supported Supported Supported
CJ1-H CPU Unit CJ1 CPU Unit CJ1M CPU Unit CJ2 CPU Unit
When using the Simple Backup Function in CS1H/G-CPU@@H products of Lot No. 011101 or earlier* combined with the Serial Communications Board (CS1W-SCB@@-V1), proper backup will not be possible if the backup file
(BACKUPE1.PRM) remains in the Memory Card.
Production day (in this example: 1) Production month (in this example: 11) Production year (in this example: 2001) In order to use the Simple Backup Function in this combination, delete the
backup file (BACKUPE1.PRM) inside the Memory Card, then execute the backup.
If backup is executed without deleting this backup file, the RDY LED and the CPU Units ERR/ARM LED will both flash, and the Protocol Data Error Flag (bit A42409) will turn ON with the restore operation. The Serial Communications Board will also automatically delete the backup file (BACKUPE1.PRM). Applications Use the Simple Backup Function when replacing all Units or creating backup files of all of the PLCs data, including the data in the CPU Unit and Serial Communications Boards or Units. Use the following procedures to create a Protocol Data File on the Memory Card, restore the Protocol Data File, and compare the protocol data with the Memory Cards Protocol Data File. Backing Up the Protocol Data to the Memory Card Follow these steps to back up the Serial Communications Board/Units protocol data to the Memory Card: 1. Make the following settings to pins 7 and 8 in the DIP Switch on the front of the CPU Unit.
Pin 7 8 ON OFF Setting
Operation
2. Press and hold the Memory Card power supply switch for 3 seconds.
209
Section 5-5
Memory Card
This procedure creates the Protocol Data File and writes it to the Memory Card along with the other backup files. When the Memory Card power supply switch is pressed, the MCPWR Indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash once and then remain lit while the data is being written. The Indicator will go OFF after the data has been written properly. Restoring the Protocol Data from the Memory Card Follow these steps to restore the Protocol Data File, i.e., read the protocol data from the Memory Card and set it in the Serial Communications Board/ Unit. 1. Make the following settings to pins 7 and 8 in the DIP Switch on the front of the CPU Unit.
Pin 7 8 ON OFF Setting
Memory Card
This procedure reads the Serial Communications Board/Units Protocol Data File from the Memory Card and sets that data in the Serial Communications Board/Unit. When the PLCs power is turned ON, the MCPWR Indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light and flash once. The MCPWR Indicator will remain lit while the data is being read. The Indicator will go OFF after the data has been read properly. Serial Communications Board Operation The Serial Communications Boards RDY Indicator will flash during the restore operation and it will be lit when the restore operation is completed normally.
210
Section 5-6
If the restore operation fails, the RDY Indicator will continue to flash. The CPU Units ERR/ALM Indicator will flash and bit A42409 (the Protocol Data Error Flag) will be turned ON. Serial Communications Unit Operation The Serial Communications Units RDY Indicator will flash during the restore operation. Both the RDY Indicator and RUN Indicator will be lit when the restore operation is completed normally. If the restore operation fails, the RDY Indicator will continue to flash and the ERC Indicator will be lit. Comparing the Protocol Data with the Memory Cards Protocol Data File Follow these steps to compare the Serial Communications Board/Units protocol data with the Protocol Data File in the Memory Card: 1. Make the following settings to pins 7 and 8 in the DIP Switch on the front of the CPU Unit.
Pin 7 8 OFF OFF Setting
2. Press and hold the Memory Card power supply switch for 3 seconds.
Serial Communications Board/Unit Memory Card power supply switch CPU Unit All data
Memory Card
This procedure compares the protocol data in the Serial Communications Board/Unit with the data in the Protocol Data File in the CPU Units Memory Card. When the Memory Card power supply switch is pressed, the MCPWR Indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash once and then remain lit while the data is being compared. If the data matches, the Indicator will go OFF after the data has been compared.
5-6
211
Section 5-6
5-6-1
(1) to (4) are performed in order for the processing within this dotted line. Send message according to send command (4) Send R (O1, 2)
Link word 1 I/O memory (2) Receive data IN I1 Receive data O1 OUT Send data Send data
Earlier models refresh I/O when a request is received (using send/receive commands in the communications sequence).
Therefore, when a send command is executed ((1) in the above diagram), the read processing of data using variables from the I/O memory addresses in the CPU Unit specified in the link words is performed at the start of I/O refreshing (2). The send message is compiled based on this data (3), after which the actual message is sent (4). As a result, the actual message send timing is not when the send command is executed, but waits until the next I/O refresh with the CPU Unit.
212
Section 5-6
(1) to (4) are performed in order for the processing within this dotted line. Send message according to send command (3) Send R (O1, 2)
Link word 1 I/O memory (2) Receive data IN OUT Send data Send data I1 Receive data O1
The refresh timing continuously refreshes I/O regardless of the any request from the Board/Unit (using send/receive commands in the communications sequence).
Therefore, when a send command is executed in a step, the send message is compiled immediately based on data read from the Board/Unit, and the actual message is sent. Therefore, the actual message transmission is performed immediately when the send command is executed (there is no need to wait until the next I/O refresh with the CPU Unit). The receive command operation is similar. When the receive data is stored in the Board/Unit, receive command execution is completed. The actual received data is stored in I/O memory at the next I/O refresh with the CPU Unit. Setup Area Allocated in the DM Area m = D30000 + 100 unit number
Words Board Unit Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 D32008 D32018 m+8 m+18 Bit Setting
02
Link word specification data exchange timing 0: On-request I/O refreshing 1: Continuous I/O refreshing
Note When continuous I/O refreshing is specified for the link word specification data exchange timing, the normal I/O refresh will be executed with the CPU Unit while protocol macros are being executed without syncing with execution of the send and receive commands. You must therefore be careful of the data exchange timing at the start and end of protocol macros. 1. The new data may not be sent by the send command in a protocol macro that is executed immediately after the send data in memory in the CPU Unit is updated. The send data must be read to the SCU/SCB in the I/O refresh period before it will be sent by the send command. 2. Data received by a receive command in a protocol macro may not be refreshed in the CPU Unit if execution of the protocol macro is completed immediately after the receive command. If the protocol macro is still being executed during the I/O refresh period after the data is received by the receive command, the receive data will be refreshed in memory in the CPU Unit. The continuous I/O refreshing setting is suitable for applications in which send/receive commands are executed repeatedly in the same protocol macro (i.e., the same PMCR). If data in the CPU Unit is to be sent with a send command in the next protocol macro or receive data for a receive command is to be refreshed in the CPU Unit and then the protocol macro ended, use the onrequest I/O refreshing setting.
213
Section 5-6
5-6-2
03
5-6-3
00 to 03
Baud Rate (unit: bps) (This setting is available even when protocol macros are used for serial communications) 9: 57,600
214
Section 5-6
The baud rate can be set to 115,200 or 230,400 bps even in Protocol Macro Mode. (The setting is in the words allocated in the DM Area.) Setup Area Allocated in the DM Area m = D30000 + 100 unit number
Words Board Port 1 Port 2 D32001 D32011 Unit Port 1 m+1 Port 2 m+11 00 to 03 Baud Rate (unit: bps) (This setting is available even when protocol macros are used for serial communications) 9: 57,600 A: 115,200 B: 230,400 Bit Setting
215
Section 5-6
216
DM Area Allocations (Using Serial Gateway Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Area and CIO Area in Serial Gateway Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Serial Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protocol Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5-1 6-5-2 6-5-3 6-5-4 6-5-5 6-5-6 Types of Protocol Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting FINS to CompoWay/F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CompoWay/F Connection Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting FINS to Modbus-RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting from FINS to Modbus-ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting from FINS to Host Link FINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Gateway Execution Timing for Protocol Macros. . . . . . . . . . Serial Gateway Timeout Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Treating Serial Communications Paths as Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a PLC as the Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a non-PLC Component as the Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CompoWay/F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modbus-RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modbus-ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Host Link FINS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Commands Using the CMND(490) Instruction . . . . . . . . .
6-6
6-7
6-8
217
Section 6-1
6-1
6-1-1
6-1-2
Operating Conditions
The Serial Gateway is enabled under the following conditions. When Serial Gateway mode is set as the serial communications mode. When protocol macro mode is set as the serial communications mode, and the Serial Gateway Prohibit Switch is OFF. (The serial gateway is also enabled during execution of PMCR(260) or PMCR2(264) instructions.)
FINS message (via network or CPU bus) FINS header
2803
CompoWay/F command
RS-232C or RS-422A/485
CompoWay/F command
FINS header
2804
Modbus-RTU command
Modbus-RTU command
FINS header
2805
Modbus-ASCII command
Modbus-ASCII command
Terminator
The Serial Gateway is enabled under the following conditions. In Serial Gateway mode In protocol macro mode with the Serial Gateway Prohibit Switch turned OFF
6-1-3
Features
218
Section 6-1
Unit Ver. 1.2 or Later The Boards/Units Serial Gateway enables flexible access to OMRON CompoWay/F-compatible components from a device on the network (PT or PLCs CPU Unit). This enables unification of OMRON CompoWay/F-compatible components with FINS networks.
FINS Network System
Serial
Network
FINS
Network
CompoWay/F
Access to CompoWay/Fcompatible Components from personal computers, PTs, PLCs, and other devices via the network is possible.
Serial
CompoWay/F-compatible components
Pre-Ver. 1.2 Units Access to Modbus Slave-compatible devices (e.g., OMRON Inverters) from the PLC using any Modbus command requires execution of the PMCR(260) instruction in the ladder program of the CPU Unit on the same PLC, incorporating a communications sequence using the Board/Units protocol macro function. Furthermore, using the protocol macro function prevents access through the network.
Unit Ver. 1.2 or Later The Board/Units Serial Gateway enables flexible access to Modbus Slavecompatible devices from devices on the network (PLCs CPU Unit and personal computer). This enables unification of Modbus Slave-compatible devices with FINS networks.
219
Section 6-1
Serial
Network
FINS
Network
Modbus command
Access to Modbus Slavecompatible devices from personal computers, PTs, PLCs, and other devices via the network is possible.
Serial
Pre-Ver. 1.2 Units Access to PLCs used as Host Link slaves from the PLC used as the Host Link master by executing user-specified FINS commands is not supported. (The PLC cannot be used as a Host Link master. Therefore, incorporation of a communications sequence in the protocol macro is required.)
Unit Ver. 1.2 or Later The Board/Units Serial Gateway enables access to PLCs used as Host Link slaves from devices on the network (personal computer, PT, and PLCs CPU Unit) using user-specified FINS commands. This enables use of the PLC as a Host Link master while maintaining transparency on the network.
220
Section 6-1
Serial
Network
FINS
Network
Access to PLCs used as Host Link Slaves from personal computers, PTs, PLCs, and other devices by using userspecified FINS commands is possible.
Serial
Host Link
FINS
Pre-Ver. 1.2 Units Programming or monitoring of a serially connected PLC from the CX-Programmer during execution of a protocol macro (e.g., Host Link Master Protocol) requires the CX-Programmer to be directly connected to the serially connected PLC. This configuration is not possible, however, if the serially connected PLC is on a moving body connected through a serial wireless modem.
Unit Ver. 1.2 or Later The Serial Gateway can also be used in protocol macro mode. When protocol macros are used for serial communications, the Serial Gateway is prohibited by turning ON the Serial Gateway Prohibit Switch in the CIO Area and enabled by turning OFF this switch. This option enables, for example, programming or monitoring of a serially connected PLC from a CX-Programmer that is connected to the PLC during execution of protocol macros (e.g., Host Link Master). This function also enables continuous programming/monitoring from the CX-Programmer when the serially connected PLC is on a moving body connected through a serial wireless modem, making it particularly effective.
CX-Programmer The remote PLC is on a moving body. Therefore, direct serial connection for programming/monitoring the PLC is not possible. Access is possible, however, by using the Serial Gateway during execution of the protocol macro. Serial Communications Unit/Board
PMCR(260) instruction
Serial RS-232C Host Link master protocol macro executing WM30-S-V2 Wireless Modem PLC
RS-232C
Serial Gateway WM30-S-V2 Wireless Modem Connecting the CX-Programmer is possible when the WM30-S-V2 is in mode 2. Connection is not possible in mode 1.
Access from CX-Programmer to remote PLC executing protocol macro is possible.
221
Section 6-1
If the Serial Gateway Prohibit Switch allocated in the CIO Area is OFF, the Serial Gateway is enabled whether protocol macros are being executed or not. During execution of protocol macros, however, the Serial Gateway is processed using interrupts between steps in the communications sequence.
6-1-4
222
Section 6-2
The time is monitored after a FINS command is received and converted into another protocol until transmission starts (protocol macro mode only). Default: 5 s; Setting range: 0 to 25.5 s Note If a timeout occurs, the FINS end code is returned to the source of the FINS command (0204 hex: Remote node busy). Send processing is not executed and the received FINS command is discarded. The time after protocol conversion using the Serial Gateway until actual data is sent can be set (Serial Gateway mode or protocol macro mode only). Default: 0 s; Setting range: 0 to 300 s
Send delay
Note
The following operations will result if the Serial Gateway is executed either using a pre-Ver. 1.2 Board/Unit or using a Ver. 1.2 or later Unit/Board without Serial Gateway or protocol macro mode set for serial communications at the serial port. If either NT Link or loopback test mode is used for serial communications, or if protocol macro mode is used with a pre-Ver. 1.2 Board/Unit, an undefined command response will be returned (end code: 0401 hex). If Host Link mode is used for serial communications, the message will be converted into a FINS command using Host Link slave-initiated communications and transferred (this will mainly result in a response timeout being returned, depending on the remote device (end code: 0205 hex))
6-2
223
Section 6-2
Words are allocated in the DM Area from D30000 to D31599 as the Setup Area for the Serial Communications Units as follows: m = D30000 + 100 unit number
Unit number Unit No. 0 Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8 Unit No. 9 Unit No. A Unit No. B Unit No. C Unit No. D Unit No. E Unit No. F Word D30000 to D30099 D30100 to D30199 D30200 to D30299 D30300 to D30399 D30400 to D30499 D30500 to D30599 D30600 to D30699 D30700 to D30799 D30800 to D30899 D30900 to D30999 D31000 to D31099 D31100 to D31199 D31200 to D31299 D31300 to D31399 D31400 to D31499 D31500 to D31599
m to m+3, m+7: Port 1 Settings m+10 to m+13, m+17: Port 2 Settings m+4 to m+6, m+8 to m+9, m+14 to m+16, m+18 to m+19: Not used. m+20 to m+99: Not used.
Setup Area
Allocations m = D30000 + 100 unit number
DM Area Board (CS Series Unit (CS/CJ only) Series) Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 D32000 D32010 m m+10 Bit Setting
15 Port settings: 0 (default) or 1 (user-specified) 12 to 14 Reserved 08 to 11 Serial communications mode (9 hex: Serial Gateway mode) 05 to 07 Reserved 04 Start bits 0: 1 bit; 1: 1 bit (Always 1 bit regardless of which bit is set) 03 Data length 0: 7 bits 1: 8 bits 02 Stop bits 0: 2 bits 1: 1 bit 01 Parity 0: Yes 1: No 00 Parity 0: Even 1: Odd
224
Section 6-2
D32002
D32012
m+2
m+12
D32003 D32007
D32013 D32017
m+3 m+7
m+13 m+17
04 to 15 Reserved 00 to 03 Baud rate (unit: bps) 0 hex: 9,600 (default); 3 hex: 1,200; 4 hex: 2,400; 5 hex: 4,800; 6 hex: 9,600; 7 hex: 19,200; 8 hex: 38,400; 9 hex: 57,600; A hex: 115,200; B hex: 230,400 (See note.) 15 Send delay 0: default (0 ms); 1: User-specified 00 to 14 Send delay setting range: 0 to 399 s (0 to 300,000 ms) 0000 to 7530 hex (0 to 30,000 decimal) (Unit: 10 ms) 15 CTS control 0: No; 1: Yes 08 to 15 Serial Gateway response timeout monitoring time 00 hex: 5 s (default) 01 to FF hex (1 to 255 decimal): 0.1 to 25.5 s (Unit: 100 ms) 00 to 07 Serial Gateway send start timeout monitoring time (only protocol macro mode) 00 hex: 5 s (default) 01 to FF hex (1 to 255 decimal): 0.1 to 25.5 s (Unit: 100 ms)
Note
Port Settings
Set whether to make the user-specified settings for port 1 or port 1. These settings are the same as for the RS-232C port of general-purpose external devices connected using a protocol macro. 0: Default; 1: User-specified setting When the default (0) is set, the following details are set for the port and bits 00 to 04 do not need to be set separately. Baud rate: 9,600 bps; Start bits: 1 bit; Data length: 7 bits; Parity: Even; Stop bits: 2 bits When user-specified settings (1) are specified, set bits 00 to 04 and the baud rate (in the following word). Setting example: 0900 hex: Serial Gateway mode, using default settings for port setting and baud rate.
225
Section 6-3
When CTS control is enabled, transmission starts when the request to send signal (RS) turns ON after checking that the send enabled signal (CS) is ON. When CTS control is disabled, transmission starts when the request to send signal (RS) turns ON, without checking whether the send enabled signal (CS) is ON.
6-3
Auxiliary Area
Port 1 and Port 2 Port Settings Change Bits
These bits can be turned ON from the program using the OUT or other instructions to change communications settings and restart the serial ports. When changing the communications settings and restarting the communications port have been completed, the bit will be automatically turned OFF. Note These bits are used both to change the communications port settings and to restart the communications port. Therefore, one of these bits can be turned ON using an OUT instruction to restart a communications port without changing the settings in the DM Area. The STUP(237) instruction can also be used to simply restart a communications port by executing the STUP(237) instruction with the same port settings as those already being used.
226
Section 6-3
Note
(1) If any of bits 05 to 11 turn ON (1), A40208 (Inner Board Error Flag) (nonfatal error) will turn ON (1). (2) If either bit 00 or 01 turns ON (1), A40112 (Inner Board Fatal Error Flag) will turn ON (1). For details on errors, refer to Section 12 Troubleshooting and Maintenance.
CIO Area
Words in the CIO Area are allocated as Software Switches, which are manipulated from the CPU Unit to control the operation of the Serial Communications Board or Unit, and for a Status Area, which contains status and error information for the Serial Communications Board or Unit.
227
Section 6-3
Status Area
The Status Area is used to read the Serial Communications Boards or Units setting status, communications status, transmission control signal status, and transmission error status.
Allocations
Direction: Board/Unit to CPU Unit (input) n = CIO 1500 + 25 unit number
Words Board Unit (CS Series (CS/CJ Series) only) Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 1901 n+1 Bit Contents
02 to 15 01 00 00 to 15 00 to 15 00 to 15
Reserved 1: Error log EEPROM error 0: Error log EEPROM normal 1: Protocol data error (SUM value error) 0: Protocol data normal Reserved Reserved Reserved
228
Section 6-3
12 to 15 08 to 11 05 to 07 04 03 02 01 00
System settings
Serial communications mode: Always 9 hex (See note.) Baud rate (See note.) Reserved Start bits: Always 0 Data length (See note.) Stop bits (See note.) Parity: Yes/No (See note.) Parity: Even/Odd (See note.)
Note
The port settings in the Setup Area allocated in the DM Area are stored. If the Board/Unit is operating on default settings due to a System Setup error the default settings will be stored.
Bit Contents
Words Board Unit (CS Series (CS/CJ Series) only) Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 CIO CIO n+6 n+16 15 1906 1916 14 13
CIO 1907
CIO 1917
n+7
n+17
02 to 12 01 00 11 to 15 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 00 to 02
1 0 No 0 RS1 RSHardware set- 0 1 232C 0 422A/ 1 485 tings 0: Terminating resistance OFF 1: Terminating resistance ON Reserved 1: System Setup error; 0: System Setup normal 1: Port operating Commu- Reserved nications 1: Remote Unit busy receiving (Flow control) status 0: Remote Unit ready to receive Reserved 1: Local Unit busy receiving (flow control) 0: Local Unit ready to receive Transmis- DTR (ER) signal sion con- DSR (DR) signal trol signal Reserved status CTS (CS) signal RTS (RS) signal Reserved Port setting status
Reserved
229
Section 6-4
04 03 02 00, 01
Transmis- 1: Transmission error; 0: No transmission error sion error Not used status 1: FCS check error (transmission path error); 0: FCS check normal Not used 1: Serial Gateway send start timeout or Serial Gateway response timeout 0: Normal 1: Overrun error (see note 7); 0: Normal 1: Framing error (see note 8); 0: Normal 1: Parity error (see note 8); 0: Normal Reserved
6-4
D32002
D32012
m+2
m+12
15
00 to 14
D32003 D32007
D32013 D32017
m+3 m+7
m+13 m+17
15 08 to 15
230
Section 6-4
00 to 14
D32003 D32007
D32013 D32017
m+3 m+7
m+13 m+17
15 08 to 15
00 to 07
04
Port 1
Use the following flag to check whether the Serial Gateway is currently prohibited or not.
Word Board Unit Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 1909 1919 n+9 n+19 Bit Contents
08
231
Section 6-4
Use the following flag to check whether a Serial Gateway response timeout or send start timeout has occurred.
Word Board Unit Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 1908 1918 n+8 n+18 Bit Contents
05
Serial Gateway response timeout, Serial Gateway send start timeout, or other timeout (protocol macro Tfs, Tfr, or Tr) 1: Timeout; 0: Normal
Step 2: Set the Local Network Table in the Routing Tables Using the Routing Table Setting Tool.
This step is necessary only when routing table settings are required. 1,2,3... 1. Start the Routing Table Setup Tool using one of the following methods. Starting from the CX-Integrator: Select Routing Table Setting Tool from the Tool Menu. Select either FINS Local or FINS Network and click the OK Button. Starting from the CX-Net: Select Setup from the Routing Table Menu. Select either the FINS Local or FINS Network Option Button and click the OK Button. The Routing Table Setup Tool will be displayed showing the PLC routing tables. 2. Click the Table View Tab, and create the local network table at the left of the table. 3. Set the unit address (see note 1) of the serial port to be treated as a network in the SIOU column as a decimal value. Set the network address to be allocated to the serial port in the Local Network column on the right. Local Network Table Example: The following diagram shows the local network table for used to allocated network address 3 to serial port 1 of a Serial Communications Unit with unit number 1.
Enter the serial port number as a decimal in the SIOU column. Example: For serial port 1 of the Serial Communications Unit with unit number 1, 80 hex + 04 hex x 1 = 84 hex = 132 decimal. Local network table SIOU Local Network To treat the serial port indicated on the left as a network, enter the network address to be assigned in the Local Network column. Example: To assign network address 3, enter the decimal value 3 in the Local Network column.
132
232
Section 6-4
Serial port number 80 hex + 04 hex unit number 81 hex + 04 hex unit number
Example for unit number 1 80 hex + 04 hex 1 = 84 hex (132 decimal) 81 hex + 04 hex 1 = 85 hex (133 decimal)
128 132 136 140 144 148 152 156 160 164 168 172 176 180 184 188
129 133 137 141 145 149 153 157 161 165 169 173 177 181 185 189
CPU Unit
CPU Unit Peripheral port RS-232C port
Note
The following ladder program example shows how to return the Serial Gateway to the not prohibited status when the PMCR(260) instruction has been executed and the sequence is completed. (This example uses port number 1 of a Serial Communications Unit with unit number 0.)
SET 1500.04
W000.00
Execution condition
When execution condition W00000 is ON, the Serial Gateway Prohibited Flag (port 1: Word n, bit 04: CIO 1500, bit 04) turns ON and the Serial Gateway is prohibited. At the same time, bit 00 of W000 is shifted one bit to the left.
PMCR C1 C2 S D
When W00001 is ON, the Communications Enabled Flag for port No. 0 (internal logic port) is ON, and the Protocol Macro Executing Flag (port 1: Word n+9, bit 15: CIO 150915) is OFF, the PMCR(260) instruction executes.
At the same time, bit 00 of W000 is shifted one bit to the left.
RSET 1500.04
When W00002 is ON, the sequence ends, and the Protocol Macro Executing Flag (port 1: Word n+9, bit 15: CIO 150915) turns from ON to OFF, the Serial Gateway Prohibited Flag (port 1: Word n, bit 04: CIO 150004) is reset to 0, and the Serial Gateway is no longer prohibited.
233
Protocol Conversion
Section 6-5
6-5
6-5-1
Protocol Conversion
Types of Protocol Conversion
Frame before conversion Destination FINS FINS data address command Serial port number on Board/Unit 2803 hex CompoWay/F command Protocol after Target (commuconversion nications part(using serial ner) communications) CompoWay/F OMRON CompoCompoWay/F command nent (e.g., Temcommand with perature FINS header Controller, Digital removed sent to Panel Meter, or serial port. Smart Sensor) Modbus-RTU Modbus-RTU Modbus-RTU command with command Slave-compatible FINS header device (including removed sent to OMRON 3G3JV, serial port. 3G3MV, and 3G3RV Inverters) Modbus-ASCII Modbus-ASCII Modbus-ASCII command Slave-compatible command with device (e.g., temFINS header perature controlremoved sent to ler, indicator, or serial port. power monitor) OMRON PLC FINS comTransfers FINS command inside mand for Host (CS/CJ Series, or Host Link header Link communi- CVM1/CV cations Series) and terminator. Processing at Board/Unit
Converting to CompoWay/F
Converting to Modbus-RTU
2804 hex
Modbus-RTU command
Converting to Modbus-ASCII
2805 hex
Modbus-ASCII command
User-specified
User-specified
Note
For details on FINS response end codes, refer to Troubleshooting Using FINS End Codes in 12-3-2 Serial Gateway (Serial Gateway or Protocol Macro Mode).
6-5-2
CompoWay/F command encapsulated using FINS command 2803 hex (Via network or CPU bus)
(RS-232C or RS-422A/485)
234
Protocol Conversion
CompoWay/F Slave-compatible Components
Temperature Controllers Component Thermac NEO
Section 6-5
Thermac R Plug-in Temperature Controllers Digital Controller Boards Digital Controllers Timer/Counters Digital Panel Meters Timers/Counters Digital Panel Meters Digital Load Cell Meters Digital Rotary/Pulse Meters Digital Incrementing Panel Meters Digital Time Interval Meters Digital Temperature/Process Meters ZX Communications Interface Units -----
Model series E5GN (G components) E5CN E5EN E5AN E5AR E5ER E5ZN E5ZM ES100X H8GN (G components) K3GN (G components) K3NX K3NV K3NR K3NP K3NC K3NH ZX-SF11 3F88L-160, 3F88L-162 F3SX
CompoWay/F command
RS-485 (CompoWay/F)
235
Protocol Conversion
Access from CPU Unit (PLC on the Network)
FINS message-to-Serial Details
Section 6-5
CMND(490)
FINS message
FINS header
OMRON components connected serially to the Serial Communications Board/Unit using CompoWay/F can be accessed from a CPU Unit in a PLC connected to the network.
RS-485 (CompoWay/F)
236
Protocol Conversion
Section 6-5
Executing Smart Active Parts Using an NS-series PT (Sending Internal FINS Messages)
The Board/Unit converts the FINS messages to CompoWay/F protocol for sending in this operation.
Access from PT on Ethernet or serial NT Link Details Routing tables to treat serial communication s path as network Optional
NS-series PT
Access via serial communications using CompoWay/F is possible from a PT connected to the network by executing a Smart Active Part that is connected serially, which automatically sends an internal FINS command.
Protocol conversion
CompoWay/F command
RS-485 (CompoWay/F)
Note When the NS-series PT is connected serially to the PLC using serial communications mode (1:N NT Links), and the NS-series PT sends FINS commands encapsulated in NT Link commands using Smart Active Parts, the CPU Unit removes the NT Link header, etc. from the received command, converting it to a FINS command, and transfers the command to the Serial Communications Board/ Unit. The Serial Communications Board/Unit uses the Serial Gateway to convert the command into the specified protocol. This operation enables serially connected devices to access the Serial Communications Board/Unit from Smart Active Parts using an NS-series PT.
Note
(1) The FINS header contains the following information. Remote destination network address (DNA) With routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network: Network address corresponding to serial port in the routing tables. Without routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network: Network address for specifying actual remote PLC. Remote destination node address (DA1) With routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network: 00 hex (local PLCs internal communications) (For serial-to-serial-toserial conversion, increment the Host Link unit number by 1.) Without routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network: Node address for specifying actual remote PLC (For serial-toserial-to-serial conversion, increment the Host Link unit number by 1.) Remote destination unit address (DA2) Unit address of serial port
237
Protocol Conversion
Section 6-5
(2) The contents of the CompoWay/F command enclosed in the FINS message that is sent is as follows: Node number + subaddress + SID + command text (ASCII must be used.) STX, ETX+BCC are not required when sending FINS. They are added automatically for serial communications.
6-5-3
Pin No.
RS-422A/485 interface
CJ1W-SCU32/42
Component with RS422A/485 communications function (2-wire method) Signal RSname 422A/485 A() interface B(+)
Signal Pin name No. Shield wire RDA 1 RS422A/485 RDB 2 interface SDA 3 SDB 4 FG 5 Terminal block connector
Note
Be sure to connect terminating resistance of between 100 and 125 (1/2 W) to the terminals of the remote devices at either end of the RS-422A/485 transmission path. (Set the terminating resistance on the Board/Unit by turning ON/OFF the Terminating Resistance Switch.)
238
Section 6-5
RS-422A/485 interface
Component with RS-422A/485 communications function (2-wire method) Signal name RS-422A/485 interface
CJ1W-SCU32/42
Device supporting RS-422A/485 communications (2-wire)
Signal RS-422A/ 485 InterA() face
1 2 3 4 5
B(+)
Note
Be sure to connect terminating resistance of between 100 and 125 (1/2 W) to the terminals of the remote devices at either end of the RS-422A/485 transmission path. (Set the terminating resistance on the Board/Unit by turning ON/OFF the Terminating Resistance Switch.)
6-5-4
Modbus-RTU command
(RS-232C or RS-422A/485)
239
Protocol Conversion
Modbus-RTU Slave-compatible OMRON Devices
Type Inverters Model series 3G3JV 3G3MV 3G3RV E5CN (New version)
Section 6-5
Temperature Controllers
OMRON Inverters connected serially to the Serial Communications Board/Unit using Modbus-RTU can be accessed from a CPU Unit in the same PLC.
FINS message
Protocol conversion
Modbus-RTU command
Modbus-RTU command
RS-485 (Modbus-RTU)
Modbus-RTU Slave device (e.g, OMRON Inverter)
CMND(490)
FINS message
FINS header
OMRON Inverters connected serially to the Serial Communications Board/Unit using Modbus-RTU can be accessed from a CPU Unit in a PLC connected to the network.
2804
Modbus-RTU command
Protocol conversion
Modbus-RTU command
RS-485 (Modbus-RTU)
240
Protocol Conversion
Section 6-5
Executing Smart Active Parts Using an NS-series PT (Sending Internal FINS Messages)
The Board/Unit converts the FINS messages to Modbus-RTU protocol for sending in this operation.
Access from PT on Ethernet or serial NT Link Details Routing tables to treat serial communications path as network Optional
NS-series PT
Ethernet
Modbus-RTU command
Access via serial communications using Modbus-RTU is possible from a PT connected to the network by executing a Smart Active Part that is connected serially, which automatically sends an internal FINS command.
Protocol conversion
Modbus-RTU command
Note When the NS-series PT is connected serially to the PLC using serial communications mode (1:N NT Links), and the NS-series PT sends FINS commands encapsulated in NT Link commands using Smart Active Parts, the CPU Unit removes the NT Link header, etc. from the received command, converting it to a FINS command, and transfers the command to the Serial Communications Board/ Unit. The Serial Communications Board/Unit uses the Serial Gateway to convert the command into the specified protocol. This operation enables serially connected devices to access the Serial Communications Board/Unit from Smart Active Parts using an NS-series PT.
Note
(1) The FINS header contains the following information. Remote destination network address (DNA): Same as for CompoWay/F. Remote destination node address (DA1): Same as for CompoWay/F. Remote unit address (DA2): Same as for CompoWay/F. (2) The contents of the Modbus-RTU command enclosed in the FINS message that is sent is as follows: Slave address (binary) + FUNCTION code (binary) + Communications data (binary) Start and CRC+End are not required when sending FINS. They are added automatically for serial communications.
241
Protocol Conversion
Section 6-5
6-5-5
2805
Modbus-ASCII command encapsulated using FINS command 2805 hex (Via network or CPU bus)
Modbus-ASCII command
(RS-232C or RS-422A/485)
Slaves connected serially to the Serial Communications Board/Unit using Modbus-ASCII can be accessed from a CPU Unit in the same PLC.
FINS message
Protocol conversion
Modbus-ASCII command
Modbus-ASCII command
CMND(490)
Slaves connected serially to the Serial Communications Board/Unit using Modbus-ASCII can be accessed from a CPU Unit in a PLC on the network.
FINS message
FINS header
2805
Modbus-ASCII command
Protocol conversion
Modbus-ASCII command
RS-485 (Modbus-ASCII)
242
Protocol Conversion
Note (1) The FINS header contains the following information.
Section 6-5
Remote destination network address (DNA): Same as for CompoWay/F. Remote destination node address (DA1): Same as for CompoWay/F. Remote unit address (DA2): Same as for CompoWay/F. (2) The contents of the Modbus-ASCII command enclosed in the FINS message that is sent is as follows: Slave address (ASCII) + FUNCTION code (ASCII) + Communications data (ASCII) The header : (3A hex) and LRC+CR/LF are not required when sending FINS. They are added automatically for serial communications.
6-5-6
Terminator
FINS command
Terminator
243
Protocol Conversion
Section 6-5
Use the following method to access the serially (serial-to-serial) connected PLC from the CX-Programmer.
System Configuration Example CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or later
Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit Ver. 1.2 or later (Select SCU (Unit 0 to 15) in the UNIT field.) Set the relay PLC. (Select in the Change PLC Dialog Box.) Serial Gateway function port (Select port 1/2 in the PLC name: PLC2 PORT field according to the calculated address.)
Serial Gateway
Select the Use SYSWAY with the port option in the Host Link (SYSWAY) settings. PLC name: PLC1 Target PLC Host Link unit number Enter the Host Link unit number in the Host Link Unit Number field for the target PLC in the Host Link (SYSWAY) settings.
1,2,3...
1. Register the PLC to be connected serially (using Host Link FINS) in the project gateway (e.g., PLC2). 2. In the Change PLC Dialog Box of the target PLC (e.g., PLC1), select the relay PLC (gateway PLC) in the Network Type pull-down menu (e.g., [PLC2] (See note.)) and click the Settings Button to the right of the Network Type pull-down menu. Note The PLC name enclosed in square brackets (e.g., [PLC2]) indicates the gateway PLC.
Select the PLC to be used as the relay PLC (e.g., [PLC2]) in the Network Type pull-down menu.
3. The Network Settings Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the Guide for Serial Gateway Button. 4. The Serial Gateway Guide Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the unit and the port number under the Calculate Address Area, the serial port number address is automatically calculated in the Calculated Address Field. Select the Use SYSWAY with the port option, and enter the actual Host Link unit number for the target (communications partner) PLC in the Host Link Unit Number field (see note). Finally, click the Apply Button.
244
Protocol Conversion
Section 6-5
The Serial Communications port address is automatically calculated.
Enter the unit number for the actual Host Link (values are incremented by 1 automatically).
Note
When using the CX-Programmer, enter the actual Host Link unit number. Do not add 1 to the value. The CX-Programmer will automatically add 1 internally. Access from CX-Programmer Connected to Network
Network-to-Serial
CX-Programmer, etc.
FINS message
User-specified FINS command
Routing tables to treat serial communications path as network Personal computers (e.g., CX-Pro- Required grammer) connected through the network to the PLC master can access a PLC slave that is connected serially to the PLC master via Host Link.
Details
Protocol conversion
Terminator
245
Protocol Conversion
Section 6-5
Note This configuration can be connected to other networks, as shown below.
Network-to-Serial-to-Network
CX-Programmer, etc.
FINS message
User-specified FINS command
Routing tables to treat serial communications path as network Personal computers (e.g., CX-Pro- Required grammer) connected through the network to the PLC master can access a PLC on another network via a PLC slave that is connected serially to the PLC master via Host Link.
Details
Protocol conversion
Terminator
Sending FINS Messages or Sending/Receiving Data Using CMND(490), RECV(098), SEND(090), SEND2(491), RECV2(492), or CMND2(493) in the CPU Units Ladder Program
The Board/Unit converts the FINS messages to Host Link FINS in this operation. Access from CPU Unit (on the Same PLC)
CPU bus-to-Serial Details Routing tables to treat serial communications path as network Optional
Slave PLCs connected serially to the Serial Communications Board/ Unit using Host Link can be accessed from the CPU Unit in the same PLC.
Terminator
246
Protocol Conversion
Access from CPU Unit (on Network PLC)
Network-to-Serial Details
Section 6-5
CMND(490) or SEND(090)/RECV(098)
Slave PLCs connected serially to the Serial Communications Board/ Unit using Host Link can be accessed from a CPU Unit in a PLC connected to the network.
FINS message
User-specified FINS command
Protocol conversion
Terminator
FINS message
User-specified FINS command
CPU Units in PLCs connected to the network can access a PLC on another network via a PLC slave that is connected serially to the Serial Communications Board/Unit via Host Link.
Protocol conversion
Terminator
Note
(1) The FINS header contains the following information. Remote destination network address (DNA) With routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network: Network address corresponding to serial port in the routing tables.
247
Serial Gateway
Section 6-6
Without routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network: Unit address of serial port. Remote destination node address (DA1) With routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network: Unit number for Host Link incremented by 1 (1 to 32) Without routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network: Unit number for Host Link incremented by 1 (1 to 32) Remote destination unit address (DA2) Any unit address except that for the serial port (The destination for the FINS message must not be the serial port of the Board/Unit.) FINS command code: Any (2) When creating Host Link FINS command frames using the CMND(490) or CMND2(493) instruction, always set the unit number for Host Link incremented by one (1 to 32) for the remote destination (send destination) node address (word C+3, bits 08 to 15 of the CMND(490) instruction). Do not set the unit number of the actual Host Link slave (0 to 31). Using the Host Link unit number without incrementing by one will access the PLC with the entered Host Link unit number less one. For example, specify the remote PLC with Host Link unit number 2 by entering 3 for the remote destination node address. If 2 is entered, the PLC with Host Link unit number 1 will be accessed. To access a PLC on a Host Link FINS network using the Serial Gateway from CX-Programmer, however, enter the actual Host Link unit number, without incrementing by one. (Select Change PLC, click the Display Serial Gateway Guide Button, and set unit number in the Host Link SYSWAY Settings field of the Serial Gateway Guide Dialog Box. (3) The contents of the FINS command enclosed by the Host Link header and terminator is as follows: @ + Host Link unit number + Host Link header FA + FINS header + FINS command + Text + FCS + * + CR
6-6
6-6-1
Serial Gateway
Serial Gateway Execution Timing for Protocol Macros
The execution timing for the Serial Gateway during execution of protocol macros is described here. The operation when the FINS command is received with the Serial Gateway enabled during protocol macro mode is as follows: Next step contains the RECEIVE command: Priority is given to the RECEIVE command, and the Serial Gateway is executed in the next step. (See note 1). Next step contains any command except the RECEIVE command (SEND, SEND&RECV, WAIT, FLUSH, OPEN, or CLOSE): Priority is given to the Serial Gateway, for which conversion, transmission, and response reception processing is executed using interrupts between steps (see note 2). Note (1) The reception buffer is cleared during transfer processing using the Serial Gateway. Therefore, when the FINS command is received, and the command in the following step is the RECEIVE command, the RECEIVE command takes priority over the Serial Gateway. (2) The Serial Gateway is executed using interrupts between steps. The interrupts are not executed within a step. (Therefore, the Serial Gateway is never executed after the SEND command in a SEND&RECV command.)
248
Serial Gateway
The processing flowchart is as follows:
Serial Gateway enabled, FINS command received
Section 6-6
RECEIVE command
RECEIVE command takes priority, and the next step is executed. Serial Gateway takes priority and conversion, transmission, and response reception processing is executed on an interrupt between steps.
The details of the processing flow are as follows: Protocol Macro Priority over Serial Gateway When the Serial Gateway is enabled during protocol macro mode and a FINS command is received and if the command in the next step is a RECEIVE command, this next step will be executed without executing conversion, transmission, and response reception processing for the Serial Gateway. After the step containing the RECEIVE command is completed, if the next step contains any command except the RECEIVE command (SEND, SEND&RECV, WAIT, FLUSH, OPEN, or CLOSE), the protocol macro communications sequence is temporarily suspended before the next step is executed, and the FINS command conversion and transmission is executed on an interrupt between steps using the Serial Gateway. Until the response is received, the command in the step is not executed. After the response is received, the protocol macro is resumed, starting execution from the communications sequence step that was suspended. The step that is executing when a FINS command is received is not interrupted. Therefore, if the WAIT command is executing, the Serial Gateway will not be executed. Immediate Execution of Serial Gateway When the Serial Gateway is enabled during protocol macro mode and a FINS command is received and if the command in the next step is any command except the RECEIVE command (SEND, SEND&RECV, WAIT, FLUSH, OPEN, or CLOSE), the protocol macro communications sequence is temporarily suspended before the next step is executed, and the FINS command conversion and transmission is executed on an interrupt between steps using the Serial Gateway. Until the response is received, the command within the next step is not executed. After the response is received, the protocol macro is resumed, starting execution from the communications sequence step that was suspended.
249
Serial Gateway
Step n
SEND&RECV
Section 6-6
Reception
FINS command
Step n+1
(The next step is a RECEIVE command, so the RECEIVE command is executed and the Serial Gateway waits.)
RECEIVE
(The next step is a SEND command (not RECEIVE) so the Serial Gateway is executed.) Step n+2
Sequence resumes
SEND
Note
If a multiple-frame command (see note) protocol macro is sent during protocol macro execution, set the Serial Gateway mode status to prohibited (in the CIO Area). Otherwise, a FINS message converted using Serial Gateway will interrupt between steps of the executing protocol macro, and may occur in between frames of the multiple-frame command. Note A multiple-frame command is a command in which the protocol macro command text is divided into multiple frames that are sent in sequence.
6-6-2
Note
If a Serial Gateway response timeout occurs, CIO word n+8/n+18, bit 05 (Serial Gateway Send Start Timeout or Serial Gateway Response Timeout)
250
Serial Gateway
Section 6-6
will turn ON (1). Therefore, if the end code 0205 hex is returned to the source of the FINS command and CIO word n+8/n+18, bit 05 is ON, a Serial Gateway response timeout has occurred.
Time Step n+1 Any command except RECEIVE Protocol macro sequence resumes
Receive processing
Response received
(1) If a Serial Gateway send start timeout occurs, CIO word n+8/n+18, bit 05 (Serial Gateway Send Start Timeout or Serial Gateway Response Timeout) will turn ON (1). (2) When the Serial Gateway is executed during protocol macro execution, the communications sequence contents and the FINS command reception timing may suspend step transition of the communications sequence (when the next step does not contain the RECEIVE command, the Serial Gateway will be executed by interrupting the sequence before the next step, and the step transition will be suspended). Use the Serial Gateway send start timeout function to monitor at the source of the FINS command whether step transition in the communications sequence has been suspended due to execution of the Serial Gateway. If the converted command does not start to be sent within the set time, either retry executing the FINS command or change the communications sequence.
251
Section 6-7
6-6-3
Other Functions
The send delay function is used to prevent immediate transfer to the serial port of a FINS command after it has been received by the Serial Communications Unit/Board and converted into the specified protocol. With this function, the converted command is sent to the serial port after a set time. (The default is 0 s, and the setting range for user-specified value is 0 to 300 s. Set this function in the DM Area.) For example, use the send delay function to prevent loss of send frames when receive processing at the connected device does not provide sufficient speed.
FINS command received FINS transmission source: FINS command
Conversion
6-7
6-7-1
Routing FINS network including serial communications path (for Serial Gateway) Serial communications path connection only
Optional
252
Section 6-7
Routing tables for treating serial communications path as network Optional
OMRON Compo- CompoWay/ Routing FINS network including F serial communications path (for nent Serial Gateway) Serial communications path conModbusModbus-RTU nection only RTU Slave (including OMRON Inverter) Modbus-ASCII ModbusSlave ASCII
Optional
OMRON Component
Note
To access from a CX-Programmer, Select Change PLC - Serial Gateway Guide, and enter the actual Host Link unit number, The CX-Programmer will automatically increment the value by one.
6-7-2
Network-to-Serial Conversion
253
Section 6-7
CPU Unit
PLC
Routing tables for treating serial communications path as a network Network Unit number address 80 hex (128 decimal) A Calculated from unit number: 0, port 1
CPU Unit
Target: PLC (2) Node address: Unit numbers for Host Link (0 to 31) + 1 (3) Unit address: E.g., 00 hex for CPU Unit
Serial-to-Serial Conversion
Routing tables to enable the serial communications path to be treated as a network are optional.
Example
80 hex (128 decimal) Calculated from Unit No. 0, port 1
Serial Communications Unit/Board E.g., Unit number 0, port 1 CPU Unit No routing tables required to treat serial communications path as a network
(1) Network address: To serial communications path unit address (e.g., 80 hex)
CPU Unit
Target: PLC (2) Node address: Unit numbers for Host Link (0 to 31) + 1 (3) Unit address: E.g., 00 hex for CPU Unit
254
Section 6-7
(1) Serial communications path unit address (2) Unit No. for Host Link incremented by 1. (3) Actual remote unit address for FINS command
Serial Communications Unit/Board E.g., Unit number 0, port 1 PLC Routing tables for treating serial communications path as a network Network Unit number address 80 hex (128 decimal) A Calculated from Unit No. 0, port 1
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
Target: PLC (2) Node address: Unit numbers for Host Link (0 to 31) + 1 (3) Unit address: E.g., 00 hex for CPU Unit
6-7-3
Network-to-Serial Conversion
Example N
FINS network: Network address N Serial Communications Unit/Board E.g., Unit number 0, port 1 PLC CPU Unit No routing tables required to treat serial communications path as a network
Address to distinguish standard PLC (1) Network address: To N (2) Node address: To m
Serial communications path (CompoWay/F, Modbus) Target: OMRON Component or Modbus Slave
255
Section 6-7
Example A 00 hex
80 hex (128 decimal) Calculated from Unit No. 0, port 1
FINS network Serial Communications Unit/Board E.g., Unit number 0, port 1 CPU Unit Node address: Local PLC internal communications To 00 hex Unit address: To serial port unit address (e.g., 80 hex) PLC Routing tables for treating serial communications path as a network Network Unit number address 80 hex (128 decimal) A Calculated from Unit No. 0, port 1 (1) Network address: To serial communications path network address A Target: OMRON Component or Modbus Slave
Serial-to-Serial Conversion
Routing tables to enable the serial communications path to be treated as a network are optional.
Example
serial conAddress for Direct 00 hex (See note.) nection (See note.) standard direct serial Local PLC in- 00 hex Remote node address connection ternal communications 80 hex (128 decimal) Serial port unit Calculated from unit Remote unit address address number 0, port 1
CPU Unit
Serial Communications Unit/Board E.g., Unit number 0, port 1 CPU Unit PLC Routing tables for treating serial communications path as a network Network Unit number address 80 hex (128 decimal) A Calculated from Unit No. 0, port 1 (1) Network address: To serial communications path network address A
256
Section 6-7
Routing tables to enable the serial communications path to be treated as a network are optional.
Example
89 hex (137 decimal) Calculated from PLC_1 unit number 2, port 2
PLC_2 unit number for s+1 Host Link + 1 80 hex (128 decimal) Remote unit PLC_2 serial port Calculated from unit number address unit address 0, port 1 Serial Communications Unit/Board E.g., Unit number 2, port 2
(1) Network address: To PLC_1 serial port unit address (e.g., 89 hex) Serial communications path (Host Link FINS)
CPU Unit
PLC_1 No routing tables required to treat serial communications path as a network Serial Communications Unit/Board E.g., Unit number 0, port 1 CPU Unit PLC_2 No routing tables required to treat serial communications path as a network Serial communications path (CompoWay/F, Modbus) Target: OMRON Component or Modbus Slave
(2) Node address: PLC_2 unit numbers for Host Link (0 to 31) + 1 (3) Unit address: To PLC_2 serial port unit address (e.g., 80 hex)
Example
A s+1
80 hex (128 decimal) Calculated from unit number 0, port 1
PLC_1 Routing tables for treating serial communications path as a network Unit number
89 hex (137 decimal) Calculated from unit number 2, port 2
Network address
A
CPU Unit
(2) Node address: PLC_2 unit numbers for Host Link (0 to 31) + 1
(1) Network address: To PLC_1 serial communications path network address A Serial Communications Unit/Board E.g., Unit number 0, port 1 PLC_2 No routing tables required to treat serial communications path as a network
(3) Unit address: To PLC_2 serial port unit address (e.g., 80 hex)
257
Section 6-7
6-7-4
Explanation
To treat the serial communications path as a network, the serial port itself is recognized as a Communications Unit and is allocated a network address.
Serial Communications Unit/Board Serial port Communications Unit
Set correspondence Network Note: The unit number is set as a CPU Bus Unit for Communications Units, but the unit address (80 hex/81 hex + unit number 4 hex, as a decimal) is set for the serial port.
The Routing Table Setting Tool in the CX-Integrator or CX-Net is used to set the relationship between the serial ports unit address and the allocated network address in the local network tables of the routing tables. These settings are then transferred to the CPU Unit to which the Serial Communications Unit/ Board is mounted.
CX-Net in CXProgrammer Local network table in routing tables Unit number U n Network address
PLC
Serial communications path Unit address U (80 hex/81 hex + unit number 4 hex) Network address n
128 132 136 140 144 148 152 156 160 164 168 172 176 180 184 188
129 133 137 141 145 149 153 157 161 165 169 173 177 181 185 189
These settings enable the serial communications path to be treated as a single FINS network. Further, the network address allocated to the serial port can be specified in the destination network address part of the FINS message. This enables messages to passed on to serial ports in a system comprised of multiple networks connected to a single PLC (including the serial communications path).
258
Section 6-7
Routing enabled
259
Communications Frames
Section 6-8
6-8
6-8-1
Communications Frames
CompoWay/F
Frame before Conversion FINS header Remote network address (DNA) Serial port allocated address or local network address Remote node address (DA1) 00 hex Remote unit address (DA2) Serial port unit address Etc. FINS command MRC SRC CompoWay/F (See note.)
Command Frame
28
03
Frame after Conversion CompoWay/F STX (02 hex) Node No. ( 101) ( 102) (ASCII code 2 bytes) Subaddress "00" (ASCII code 3030 hex) etc. SID "0" (ASCII code 30 hex) Command (MRC, SRC) (ASCII code 4 bytes) Text (ASCII code) ETX (03 hex) BCC
Note
CompoWay/F commands use ASCII as the transmission code. Therefore, be sure to use ASCII for the CompoWay/F command after the FINS command code 2803 hex (from node number to text) using CMND(490) or other instruction. Example: If the CompoWay/F command MRC SRC is 01 02 (where the quotation marks ( ) indicate ASCII characters), 0, 1, 0, 2 must be treated as ASCII characters. Therefore, set 01 as 3031 hex (not 01 hex), and 02 as 3032 hex (not 02 hex). Further, to write the CompoWay/F command to the command storage area using CMND(490) in frame order (without creating empty bytes), the SID component of the CompoWay/F command requires 1 byte of ASCII as 30 hex, so the subsequent components (s+3 and afterwards) must be set in one byte each.
Response Frame
Frame before Conversion
CompoWay/F STX Node1No. (02 hex) ( 102) ( 10 ) (ASCII code 4 bytes) Subaddress "00" (ASCII code 3030 hex) etc. End code (ASCII code 8 bytes) Command Response Text (MRC, (MRES, (ASCII SRC) SRES) code) (ASCII (ASCII code code 8 bytes) 8 bytes) ETX BCC (03 hex)
03
Userspecified
Userspecified
SubEnd code Command address (MRC, (ASCII "00" SRC) (ASCII code code (ASCII 3030 hex) 2 bytes) code etc. 4 bytes)
260
Communications Frames
Section 6-8
6-8-2
Modbus-RTU
Frame before Conversion FINS header Remote network address (DNA) Remote node address (DA1) Remote Etc. unit address (DA2) Serial port unit address FINS command MRC SRC Modbus-RTU (command section only)
Command Frame
Serial port 00 hex allocated address or local network address or local network node address
28
04
Note
The silent interval in the Modbus-RTU frame is automatically generated by the Serial Communications Board/Unit.
Response Frame
Frame before Conversion Modbus-RTU frame Start (silent interval of 3.5 characters) (See note.) Slave address (1 byte) FUNCTION code (1 byte) Communications data (n bytes) Error check CRC (1 byte) End (silent interval of 3.5 characters) (See note.)
Frame after Conversion FINS header Remote network address (DNA) Serial port allocated address or local network address Remote node address (DA1) Remote unit address (DA2) Etc. FINS command FINS end code MRC SRC MRES SRES Modbus-RTU (command section only)
28
04
Userspecified
Userspecified
261
Communications Frames
Section 6-8
6-8-3
Modbus-ASCII
Frame before Conversion FINS header Remote network address (DNA) Serial port allocated address or local network address Remote node address (DA1) 00 hex Remote unit address (DA2) Serial port unit address Etc. FINS command MRC SRC Modbus-ASCII (command section only)
Command Frame
28
05
Response Frame
Frame before Conversion Modbus-ASCII frame Header ":" (ASCII code 3A hex) Slave address (ASCII code 2 characters: 2 bytes) FUNCTION code (ASCII code 2 characters: 2 bytes) Communications data (ASCII code n characters) or error code LRC CR (2 ASCII (0D hex) characters: 2 bytes) LF (0A hex)
28
05
Userspecified
Userspecified
262
Communications Frames
Section 6-8
6-8-4
Command Frame
User-specified
FINS header
FINS command
Response Frame
Frame before Conversion
Host Link header @ Unit No. for Host Link (0 to 31) Host Link header code FA Etc. Text Error check code FINS text FCS Terminator *+CR
FINS header
FINS command
End code
User-specified
6-8-5
263
Communications Frames
C Operand
C+2 bits 00 to 07 (Send destination network address)
Section 6-8
With routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network: Network address corresponding to serial port in the routing tables. Without routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network: CompoWay/F, Modbus: Depends on the system configuration. Host Link FINS: Always set the unit address of the serial port. C+3 bits 08 to 15 (Remote destination node address) CompoWay/F, Modbus With routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network: 00 hex (indicates local PLC communications) Without routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network: Node address for specifying the actual remote PLC Host Link FINS Host Link unit number incremented by one (1 to 32) C+3 bits 00 to 07 (Send destination unit address) CompoWay/F, Modbus Always set the unit address of the serial port Note Use either of the following methods to specify the serial port using the CMND(490) instruction. Set 80/81 hex + 4 unit number directly as the serial port unit address in the send destination unit address bits 00 to 07 of C+3. (With this method, set the serial port number (physical port) to 0 hex (not used) in bits 08 to 11 of C+2) Set the unit address of the Serial Communications Board/Unit itself (Board: E1 hex; Unit: 10 hex + unit number) in the send destination unit address bits 00 to 07 of C+3, and set the serial port numbers (Port number 1: 1 hex; Port number 2: 2 hex) in the serial port number (physical port) bits 08 to 11 of C+2. Host Link FINS Always set the unit address of the actual destination unit.
264
Communications Frames
Section 6-8
quency reference value 10.0 Hz (set as 100 decimal in units of 0.1 Hz) is written. The Modbus-RTU command is configured from the following elements. Modbus-RTU slave address: 02 FUNCTION code: 10 hex (DATA WRITE) Write start register No.: 0002 hex (frequency reference) Write data: 0064 hex (100 decimal)
CMND instruction
FINS message
FINS header
Example: Write data for frequency reference value (FUNCTION code 10 hex, register No. 0002 hex) RS-485 (Modbus-RTU) 3G3MV OMRON Inverter
Modbus-RTU command
Use to calculate the following unit address for the serial port 80 hex + 4 hex unit number 3 = 8C hex Set 8C hex in the control data C+3 bits 00 to 07 (send destination unit address) of CMND(490). (Alternatively, set 13 hex in the control data C+3 bits 00 to 07 (send destination unit address) and set 1 hex in C+2 bits 08 to 11 (serial port number).)
Modbus-RTU Settings
265
Communications Frames
Command Frame
Item FINS command code: Converting to Modbus-RTU = 2804 hex Modbus slave address (e.g., 02 hex) FUNCTION code: DATA WRITE = 10 hex Write data register No. (e.g., frequency reference = 0002 hex) Number of write data registers (e.g, 1 register) Number of attached data registers Note: Set 02 hex of this value in the leftmost byte of S+4. Set 00 hex as the leftmost register No. in the rightmost byte of S+4. Register No. 0002 hex data (e.g., 0064 hex) Note: Set 64 hex as the rightmost register No. in the leftmost byte of S+5. Set value 2804 hex 02 hex 10 hex 0002 hex 0001 hex 0200 hex
Section 6-8
Setting location Set 2804 hex in controller data s of the CMND(490) instruction. Set 0210 hex in controller data s+1 of the CMND(490) instruction.
Set 0002 hex in controller data s+2 of CMND(490). Set 0001 hex in controller data s+3 of CMND(490). Set 0200 hex in controller data s+4 of CMND(490).
6400 hex
Response Frame
Item Modbus Slave address (e.g., 02 hex) FUNCTION code: Write data (= 10 hex) Write data register No. (e.g., frequency reference = 0002 hex) Write data registers (e.g., 1 register) Setting 02 hex 10 hex 0002 hex 0001 hex Setting location Stored in D+2 of CMND(490) Stored in D+3 of CMND(490) Stored in D+4 of CMND(490)
[CMND
C]
Command Details
Operand Offset S: +0: D01000 +1: +2: +3: +4: +5: D: D02000 C: D00000 Value 2804 hex 0210 hex 0002 hex 0001 hex 0200 hex 6400 hex Meaning Conversion to Modbus-RTU (FINS command code: 2804 hex) Modbus-RTU slave address: 02 hex, FUNCTION code: 10 hex (DATA WRITE) Write data register No.: 0002 hex (frequency reference) Number of write data registers: 0001 hex (1 register) Number of attached data bytes: 02 hex (2 bytes); Leftmost register No.: 00 hex Rightmost register No.: 64 hex (Frequency reference value: 10.0 Hz when unit is 0.1 Hz), blank = 00 hex First response storage word Number of command data bytes: 000C hex (12 bytes decimal) Number of response data bytes: 000A hex (10 bytes decimal) Send destination network address: 02 hex; Serial port number: 0 hex (direct serial port unit address specification) Send destination node address: 05 hex; Send destination unit address: 8C hex Response required; Communications port number: 0; Resends: 0 hex Response monitoring time: 2 s
00 0C hex 00 0A hex 0002 hex 058C hex 0000 hex 0000 hex
266
Communications Frames
Response
Operand Offset D: +0: D02000 +1: +2: +3: +4: Value 2804 hex 0000 hex 0210 hex 0002 hex 0001 hex
Section 6-8
Meaning Conversion to Modbus-RTU (FINS command code: 2804 hex) FINS end code: 0000 hex (normal) Modbus-RTU slave address: 02 hex, FUNCTION code: 10 hex (DATA WRITE) Write data register No.: 0002 hex (frequency reference) Number of write data registers: 0001 hex (1 register)
Network (Ethernet)
FINS command
FINS message
Unit No.
Serial port unit address: 153 Protocol conversion
FINS command
Terminator
Unit No. for Host Link = 1
Port 2 unit address: 81 hex + 4 hex unit No. 6 = 99 hex (153 decimal), which corresponds to network address 5.
267
Communications Frames
Settings FINS Network Settings
Item Send destination network address (network address allocated to target serial port in routing tables)
Section 6-8
Value (example) Setting location Network address for Set 05 hex in bits 00 to 07 (network address) of control data serial communicaC+2 in the CMND(490) instructions path allocated tion. in local network table settings is 5 Note Set 0 hex in bits 08 to 11 (serial port number) of control data C+2 in the CMND(490) instruction Send destination node Remote PLC unit Set 02 hex in bits 08 to 15 address number for Host (send destination node (unit number for Host Link of Link: 1 address) of control data C+3 in PLC connected to target Therefore, set 1+1 the CMND(490) instruction. serial port + 1) =2 CPU Unit: 00 hex Set 00 hex in bits 00 to 07 of Send destination unit control data C+3 in the address CMND(490) instruction. (unit address of remote unit on PLC connected to target serial port) Serial Communications Unit 6 Use the following equation to unit number calculate the unit address of the serial port. 81 hex + 4 hex unit number 6 = 99 hex (153 decimal) Use CX-Net to set the local network tables in the routing tables.
Unit number Network address Serial port network address: 5 (decimal)
Port 2
FFFF hex
Response Frame
Item Setting FINS command code (E.g., change 0402 hex operating mode (stop operation)) FINS command end code (normal end: 0000 hex 0000 hex) Setting location Stored in D of CMND(490) instruction Stored in D+1 of CMND(490) instruction
[CMND
C]
268
Communications Frames
Command Details
Operand Offset S: +0: D01000 +1: D: D02000 C: +0: D00000 +1: +2: +3: +4: +5: Value 0402 hex FFFF hex
Section 6-8
Meaning Change operating mode (stop operation) (FINS command code: 0402 hex) Change operating mode (stop operation): Always FFFF hex First response storage word Command data bytes: 0004 hex (4 bytes decimal) Response data bytes: 0004 hex (4 bytes decimal) Send destination network address: 05 hex; Serial port number: 0 hex (not used) Send destination node address: 02 hex (set the unit number for Host Link + 1); Send destination unit address: 00 hex Response required; Communications port number: 0; Resends: 0 hex Response monitoring time: 2 s
000C hex 000A hex 0005 hex 0200 hex 0000 hex 0000 hex
Response
Operand Offset Value D: +0: 0402 hex D02000 +1: FFFF hex Meaning Change operating mode (stop operation) (FINS command code: 0402 hex) FINS end code: FFFF hex (normal end)
Note
1. The method used to set the remote destination network address, node address, and unit address for sending data to or receiving data from the PLC connected serially via Host Link to another PLC on the network (to which the Serial Communications Board/Unit is mounted) using the SEND(090)/ RECV(098) instructions is the same as for the CMND(490) instruction. 2. When creating Host Link FINS command frames using the CMND(490) or CMND2(493) instruction, always set the unit number for Host Link incremented by one (1 to 32) for the remote destination (send destination) node address (word C+3, bits 08 to 15 of the CMND(490) or CMND2(493) instruction). Do not set the unit number of the actual Host Link slave (0 to 31). Using the Host Link unit number without incrementing by one will access the PLC with the entered Host Link unit number less one. For example, specify remote PLC with Host Link unit number 2 by entering 3 for the remote destination node address. If the 2 is entered, the PLC with Host Link unit number 1 will be accessed. To access a PLC on a Host Link FINS network using the Serial Gateway from CX-Programmer, however, enter the actual Host Link unit number, without incrementing by one. (Select Change PLC, click the Display Serial Gateway Guide Button, and set unit number in the Host Link SYSWAY Settings field of the Serial Gateway Guide dialog box.
269
Communications Frames
ASCII) + text (2 using ASCII. Note
Set the contents of S+3 when using CompoWay/F commands as follows: Set the SID 0 as ASCII 30 hex (1 byte) in the leftmost byte, and the leftmost digit of the CompoWay/F command code MRC as ASCII (1 byte) in the rightmost byte. Next, set the bits of S+4 as follows: Set the rightmost digits of the CompoWay/F command code MRC as ASCII in the leftmost byte, and the leftmost digit of the CompoWay/F command code SRC as ASCII (1 byte) in the rightmost byte. Be sure to set one byte each for the subsequent data without any blank bytes.
270
Allocation DM Area for No-protocol Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Data Communications Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4-1 7-4-2 System Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instruction Execution Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
271
Overview
Section 7-1
7-1
7-1-1
Overview
Definition
No-protocol mode is a function used to send and receive data using communications port I/O instructions (TXD(236)/RXD(235), TXDU(256)/RXDU(255), or DTXDU(262)/DRXDU(261)) without conversion or protocol. Therefore, in noprotocol mode communications procedures such as retry processing, data format conversion processing, and processing branching according to the receive data are not performed. Note No-protocol mode is supported only when using a Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit version 1.2 or later in combination with a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later. Therefore, be sure to use a CS/CJseries CPU Unit with unit version. 3.0 or later if the no-protocol mode is required. The no-protocol mode enables single-directional data exchange with a general-purpose external device with an RS-232C port or RS-422A/485 port using the TXD(236)/RXD(235), TXDU(256)/RXDU(255), or DTXDU(262)/ DRXDU(261) instructions. For example, data can be sent to and received easily (with no protocol) such as data input from a bar code reader or data output to a printer. Note (1) Use the TXD(236)/RXD(235) instructions for Serial Communications Boards and the TXDU(256)/RXDU(255) or DTXDU(262)/DRXDU(261) instructions for Serial Communications Units. (2) The DTXDU(262) and DRXDU(261) instructions can be used when a CJ1W-SCU22/32/42 Serial Communications Unit is connected to a CJ2 CPU Unit with unit version 1.1 or later.
Serial Communications Board with unit version 1.2 or later CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later
TXDU/RXDU
Serial Communications Unit with unit version 1.2 or later CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later
TXDU/RXDU
General-purpose external device with serial port (e.g, bar code reader or printer)
General-purpose external device with serial port (e.g, bar code reader or printer)
RS-232C or RS-422A/485
RS-232C or RS-422A/485
Serial Communications Unit with unit version 2.0 or later CJ2 CPU Unit with unit version 1.1 or later
TXDU RXDU DTXDU DRXDU
General-purpose external device with serial port (e.g, bar code reader or printer)
RS-232C or RS-422A/485
Addition of a start code at the beginning of the data, and end code at the end of the data (or specifying the number of receive data bytes) is possible before sending/receiving. The RS and CS control signals can also be controlled. Note No-protocol mode is only supported for RS-422A/485 if the four-wire method is used.
272
Overview
Section 7-1
7-1-2
Specifications
Item Communications mode Messages (communications frame structure) Description Full-duplex
Set either of the following types in the Setup Area in the allocation DM Area. 1. Data only (without start code and end code) 2. Start code + data 3. Data + end code 4. Start code + data + end code 5. Data + CR + LF 6. Start code + data +CR + LF Set in allocated DM Area (The start code can be included by setting to between 00 and FF hex, and the end code can be included by setting to between 00 and FF hex. To exclude the end code, set the number of receive data bytes.) Start code None, or 00 to FF hex End code None, 00 to FF hex, or CR + LF Set the number of receive data bytes between Number of receive data 1 and 256 bytes (according to the DM Area bytes during settings) when frame structure 1 or 2 above is used. reception Sending messages Serial Communications Board: TXD(236) instruction Serial Communications Unit: TXDU(256) or DTXDU(262) instruction Receiving messages Serial Communications Board: RXD(235) instruction Serial Communications Unit: RXDU(255) or DRXDU(261) instruction Maximum message Sending and receiving: Up to 259 bytes including the start length code and end code (up to 256 bytes excluding start/end codes) Data conversion No conversion Communications None protocol Message delay time When the TXD(236), TXDU(256), or DTXDU(262) instruction is executed, after the send delay time, the data is sent from the port. 0 to 300 s (0 to 300,000 ms) (Can be set in 10-ms units, depending on the DM Area settings) Receive counter The number of data bytes (0 to 256) received at the port can be counted. Reception buffer The reception buffer is cleared immediately after executing the clear timing RXD(235)/RXDU(255) instruction. If the DRXDU(261) instruction is used, a setting can be made in the allocated DM Area words to clear or hold the reception buffers. If clearing the reception buffers is specified, the buffers are cleared immediately after executing the instruction.
273
Section 7-1
CR+LF
Data 256 bytes max. Data 256 bytes max.
Yes
Note
1. For multiple start codes, the first start code is enabled. 2. For multiple end codes, the first end code is enabled. 3. If the end code will overlap with the send/receive data and cause data reception to be interrupted, use CR+LF as the end code. 4. If the send delay is set in the allocation DM Area when sending TXD(236), TXDU(256), or DTXDU(262) (no-protocol mode), data will be sent when the send delay time has lapsed after execution of TXD(236), TXDU(256), or DTXDU(262), as shown below.
Send delay Send Time TXD(236)
For details on the TXD(236), RXD(235), TXDU(256), RXDU(255), DTXDU(262), and DRXDU(261) instructions, refer to the CS/CJ-series Instructions Reference Manual (W474). 5. Whether the reception buffers are cleared or held after executing the reception instruction depends on the Board, Unit, or port as shown below.
Serial Communications Board Cleared Built-in RS-232C port on CPU Unit Held ----Serial Communications Unit --Cleared Clearing or holding can be set in the allocated DM Area words
6. If a no-protocol instruction is sent to a pre-Ver. 1.2 Board/Unit or the serial port of a Board/Unit with unit version 1.2 or later using a serial communications mode other than no-protocol mode, the following operations will occur. If TXD(236)/RXD(235) is sent to the Board, Auxiliary Area bit A424204 (Inner Board Service Failure Flag) will turn ON. If TXDU(256)/RXDU(255) is sent to the Unit and the serial communications mode is set to protocol macro, NT Link, loopback test, or Serial Gateway mode, an undefined command error (end code: 0401 hex) will be returned. If the serial communications mode is set to Host Link mode and the instruction will be converted to a slave-initiated function FINS command and transferred. (Depending on the remote device, a response timeout (end code: 0205 hex) is likely to be returned.)
274
Overview
Note
Section 7-1
Do not program TXD(236)/RXD(235) instructions addressed to the serial port (port 1/2) of the Serial Communication Board in both cyclic tasks and interrupt tasks. If an interrupt task occurs during execution of a TXD(236)/RXD(235) instruction addressed to the serial port (port 1/2) of the Serial Communications Board within a cyclic task, the TXD(236)/RXD(235) instruction addressed to the serial port (port 1/2) of the Serial Communications Board within the interrupt task will not be executed. An error will occur and the ER Flag will turn ON. (This operation is also not possible in both cyclic tasks and interrupt tasks for any combination of the TXD(236)/RXD(235) instruction and ports 1/2.) An instruction error will occur if the DTXDU(262) or DRXDU(261) instruction is executed under the following conditions. Be sure to check that an applicable Unit and serial communications mode are being used before executing these instructions. Executing DTXDU(262) or DRXDU(261) for a Serial Communications Unit other than the CJ1W-SCU22/32/42: An instruction error will occur 1 ms after the instruction is executed and the Error Flag will turn ON. The cycle time will be extended by 1 ms. The Error Flag will not turn ON immediately after the instruction is executed, possibly delaying detection of the instruction error. Executing DTXDU(262) or DRXDU(261) for a serial communications port that is not set for No-protocol Mode (even if the CJ1W-SCU22/32/42 is used): An instruction error will occur immediately and the Error Flag will turn ON. The cycle time will not be affected.
Note
7-1-3
100 VAC
275
Section 7-2
7-1-4
Sensor, barcode reader, or other general-purpose external device RS-232C or RS-422A/485 An interrupt is generated for the CPU Unit when data is received.
!Caution When using an external interrupt, mount the Serial Communications Unit in one of the following slots on the CPU Rack. External interrupt tasks will not be started if the Serial Communications Unit is in any other slot. With a CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP CPU Unit: Slots 0 to 3 With a CJ2H-CPU6@ or CJ1G/H-CPU@@H CPU Unit: Slots 0 to 4 With a CJ1M-CPU@@ CPU Unit: Slots 0 to 2
7-2
276
Section 7-2
are different from those allocated to the Serial Communications Units (which are allocated words according to the unit numbers). Serial Communications Boards (CS Series only) Setup Area Allocated in the DM Area: D32000 to D32099
Words D32000 to D32005 D32010 to D32015 D32006 to D32009 D32016 to D32019 D32020 to D32767 Usage Port 1 Settings Port 2 Settings Not used in no-protocol mode Reserved for the system
Serial Communications Units (CS/CJ Series) Setup Area Allocated in the DM Area: D30000 to D31599 First Word in Setup Area Allocated in the DM Area: m = D30000 + 100 unit number
Unit No. Unit No. 0 Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8 Unit No. 9 Unit No. A Unit No. B Unit No. C Unit No. D Unit No. E Unit No. F Words D30000 to D30099 D30100 to D30199 D30200 to D30299 D30300 to D30399 D30400 to D30499 D30500 to D30599 D30600 to D30699 D30700 to D30799 D30800 to D30899 D30900 to D30999 D31000 to D31099 D31100 to D31199 D31200 to D31299 D31300 to D31399 D31400 to D31499 D31500 to D31599
m to m+5, m+25: Port 1 Settings m+10 to m+15, m+35: Port 2 Settings m+6 to m+9, m+16 to m+24, m+26 to m+34: Not used. m+36 to m+99: Not used.
15 Port settings 0: Defaults; 1: User settings 12 to 14 Reserved 08 to 11 Serial communications mode 3: No-protocol 05 to 07 Reserved 04 Start bits 0: 1 bit; 1: 1 bit (1 start bit is always used regardless of this setting) 03 Data length 0: 7 bits; 1: 8 bits 02 Stop bits 0: 2 bits; 1: 1 bit 01 Parity 0: Yes; 1: No 00 Parity 0: Even; 1: Odd
277
Section 7-3
D32002
D32012
m+2
m+12
---
---
m+25
m+35
04 to 15 Reserved 00 to 03 Baud rate (bps) 0: Default (9,600); 3: 1,200; 4: 2,400; 5: 4,800; 6: 9,600; 7: 19,200; 8: 38,400; 9: 57,600; A: 115,200 (See note.); B: 230,400 (See note.) 15 Send delay time 0: Default (0 ms); 1: Setting in bits 00 to 14 00 to 14 Send delay setting range: 0 to 300 s (0 to 300,000 ms): 0000 to 7530 hex (0 to 30,000 decimal) (Unit: 10 ms) 15 CTS control 0: No; 1: Yes 08 to 15 Start code: 00 to FF hex 00 to 07 End code: 00 to FF hex 12 Start code 0: No; 1: Yes 08 to 09 End code 00: No (Specify number of receive data bytes) 01: Yes 10: CR + LF specification 00 to 07 Number of receive data bytes 01 to FF hex: 1 to 255 bytes 00 hex (default): 256 bytes 08 to 15 Number of external interrupt to execute for interrupt notification, 00 to FF hex: 0 to 255 05 to 07 Reserved 04 Notification of CPU Unit when data is received 0: Do not notify, 1: Notify 01 to 03 Reserved 00 Clearing reception buffers after DRXDU(261) instruction execution 0: Do not notify, 1: Notify
Note
7-3
278
Section 7-3
Inner Board Error Information (CS-series Serial Communications Board Only) A424 contains error information for the Serial Communications Board
Word A424 Bit 12 to 15 11 10 Type Non-fatal errors (Note 1) Contents Reserved 1 Error log EEPROM error; 0: Normal 1: Protocol macro execution error; 0: Normal This bit will be turned ON when code 3, 4, or 5 is stored in the error code for bits 00 to 03 of CIO 1909 or CIO 1919 in the CIO Area, 1: Protocol data error (SUM error); 0: Normal 1: System setting error; 0: Normal 1: Routing table error; 0: Normal Reserved 1: Cyclic monitoring error; 0: Normal 1: Inner Board service failure (TXD(236)/RXD(235) sent to a pre-Ver. 1.2 Board that does not support no-protocol mode); Normal Reserved Reserved 1: Inner Bus error; 0: Normal 1: Inner Board WDT error; 0: Normal
09 08 07 06 05 04
03 02 01 00
Note
1. When any one of bits 05 to 11 is ON, A40208 (Inner Board Error Flag) (non-fatal error) will be ON. 2. When bit 00 or 01 is ON, A40112 (Inner Board Fatal Error Flag) will be ON. For details on errors, refer to Section 12 Troubleshooting and Maintenance.
279
Section 7-3
Words CIO 1900 to CIO 1999 in the Inner Board Area are used for the Software Switches and Status Area. CIO 1900 contains software switches, and the 24 words from CIO 1901 to CIO 1924 are used for the Status Area. In Noprotocol mode, only these words are used as the CIO Area. No other words are used.
CIO 1900 CIO 1901 to CIO 1904 CIO 1905 to CIO 1914 CIO 1915 to CIO 1924 CIO 1925 to CIO 1999 Software switch Board status Port 1 status Port 2 status Reserved for the system
Status Area
The Status Area is used to read the Serial Communications Boards or Units setting status, communications status, transmission control signal status, and transmission error status. Direction: Board/Unit to CPU Unit (input)
280
Section 7-3
n = CIO 1500 + 25 unit number
Words
Bit
Contents
Board Unit (CS Series (CS/CJ Series) only) Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 1901 n+1 02 to 15 01 00 1902 n+2 00 to 15 1903 n+3 00 to 15 1904 n+4 00 to 15 1905 1915 n+5 n+15 12 to 15 08 to 11 05 to 07 04 03 02 01 00 15 14 13 02 to 12 01 00 11 to 15 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 00 to 02 15 05 to 14 04 03 02 00, 01
Reserved 1: Error log data error Not used Reserved Reserved Reserved System Port setting status settings
1906
1916
n+6
n+16
Serial communications mode: Always 3 hex (See note.) Baud rate (See note.) Reserved Start bits: Always 0 Data length (See note.) Stop bits (See note.) Parity: Yes/No (See note.) Parity: Even/Odd (See note.) Port Hard- 0 No 0 RS1 RS1 Reserved 232C 422A/ setting ware 0 1 0 1 485 status settings 0: Terminating resistance OFF 1: Terminating resistance ON Reserved 1: System Setup error; 0: System Setup normal 1: Port operating
ComReserved munica1: Remote Unit busy receiving (Flow control) tions status 0: Remote Unit ready to receive
1907
1917
n+7
n+17
1908
1918
n+8
n+18
Reserved 1: Local Unit busy receiving (Flow control) 0: Local Unit ready to receive Trans- DTR (ER) signal misDSR (DR) signal sion Reserved control CTS (CS) signal signal RTS RS) signal status Reserved 1: Transfer error; 0: Normal Not used Trans- 1: Overrun error; 0: Normal mis1: Framing error; 0: Normal sion 1: Parity error; 0: Normal error status Reserved
Note
The present port setting status is stored. If the Board/Unit is operating on default settings due to a System Setup error, the default settings will be stored.
281
Section 7-3
---
---
---
---
Send Ready Flag 1: Send enabled; 0: Send disabled (includes sending in progress) This flag turns OFF when TXD(236) is executing at CPU Unit. The flag turns ON when data transmission from Board to external device is completed. TXDU(256) Executing Flag 1: Executing; 0: Not executing DTXDU(262) Send Ready Flag 1: Send enabled, 0: Send disabled Communications Port Enabled Flags Turns ON (1) if execution of the network communications instructions (SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), PMCR(260)) including TXDU(256) and RXDU(255), is possible for the communications port. Communications Port Completed Codes Stores the response code when network communications instructions (SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), PMCR(260)) including TXDU(256) and RXDU(255) are executed. Communications Port Error Flags Turns ON (1) if an error occurs during execution of the network communications instructions (SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), PMCR(260)) including TXDU(256) and RXDU(255).
---
---
---
---
A20200 to A20207
---
---
A203 to A210
---
---
---
---
A21900 to A21907
---
---
282
Section 7-3
Reception Completed Flag 1: Reception completed; 0: No reception or reception in progress This flag turns ON when the specified number of bytes are received at the Board/Unit. The flag turns OFF immediately after the CPU Unit has completed writing to I/O memory the data received using the RXD(235), RXDU(255), or DRXDU(261) instruction. Reception Overflow Flag 1: The specified number of bytes or higher has been received at the Board/Unit (data continued to be received after the Reception Completed Flag turned ON). 0: The number of bytes received at the Board/Unit has not exceeded the specified number (data did reception did not continue after the Reception Completed Flag turned ON). This flag turns ON if the Board/Unit continues to receive data after completing data reception. The flag turns OFF immediately after the CPU Unit has completed writing to I/O memory the data received using the RXD(235), RXDU(255), or DRXDU(261) instruction. Reception Counter (specified number of receive data bytes) Counts in hexadecimal the number of data bytes received from 0 to 256 bytes (0000 to 0100 hex) Inner Board Service Failure Flag (non-fatal error) This flag turns ON when TXD(236)/RXD(235) is sent to a preVer. 1.2 Serial Communications Board that does not support no-protocol mode. Communications Port Enabled Flags Turns ON (1) if execution of the network communications instructions (SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), PMCR(260)) including TXDU(256) and RXDU(255), is possible for the communications port. Communications Port Completed Codes Stores the response code when network communications instructions (SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), PMCR(260)) including TXDU(256) and RXDU(255) are executed.
---
---
A20200 to A20207
---
---
---
---
A203 to A210
---
---
283
Section 7-4
Communications Port Error Flags Turns ON (1) if an error occurs during execution of the network communications instructions (SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), PMCR(260)) including TXDU(256) and RXDU(255). Overrun Error Flag 1: 260 bytes or higher received in the reception buffer before execution of RXD(235)/RXDU(255)/DRXDU(261) during noprotocol mode) 0: Normal (Data received in reception buffer is less than 260 bytes) Note: If an overrun error occurs, the Overrun Error Flag can be turned OFF by cycling the power or restarting the Board.
Note
Reception Buffer Timing in No-protocol Mode: If the RXD(235) instruction is sent to the CPU Units built-in serial port, the reception buffer is not cleared after RXD(235) execution. Therefore, multiple RXD(235) instructions can be received over several steps. If the RXD(235)/ RXDU(255) instruction is sent to the serial port of a Serial Communications Board/Unit, the reception buffer is cleared after RXD(235)/RXDU(255) execution. Therefore, multiple RXD(235)/RXDU(255) instructions cannot be received over several steps. With the DRXDU(261), a setting is provided in the DM Area words allocated to the Unit to specify whether to hold or clear the reception buffers after DRXDU(261) execution.
7-4
7-4-1
7-4-2
CS1W-SCB@1-V1 Serial Communications Board Serial Communications Unit with unit version 1.2 TXDU(256), RXDU(255) or later: CS1W-SCU@1-V1, CJ1W-SCU@1-V1 Serial Communications Unit with unit version 2.0 TXDU(256), RXDU(255), or later: CJ1W-SCU@2 DTXDU(262), DRXDU(261)
Programming Examples are given below for the applicable Boards and Units. Use the following formula to calculate the value of address n in these examples. n = CIO 1500 + 25 unit number
284
Section 7-4
Refer to 7-3 Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations for details on allocations in the CIO Area.
Note Use an AND of an NO condition of the Send Ready Flag (A356 bit 05/13) in the input conditions when executing the TXD instruction for a Board. Receiving from an External Device to the PLC RXD(235) Instruction If the Reception Completed Flag (A356.06) turns ON when CIO 0.02 is ON, the number of bytes of data specified by the Reception Counter (A357) that were received from the external device connected to port 1 of the Serial Communications Board will be stored starting from the upper byte of D100.
0.02 A356.06 RXD Serial Communications Board Port 1 Reception Completed Flag D100 #0100 A357
Note Use an AND of an NO condition of the Reception Completed Flag (A356 bit 06/14) in the input conditions when executing the RXD(235) instruction for a Board.
Program Examples for Serial Communications Units with Unit Version 1.2 or Later
Sending from PLC to External Device TXDU(256) Instruction If CIO 0.00 is ON, the Communications Enabled Flag (A202.03) is ON, and the TXDU Executing Flag (n+9 bit 05 = CIO 1559.05) is OFF, 5 bytes of data starting from the lower byte of D100 will be sent from port 1 of the Serial Communications Unit with unit number 2 using logical port number 3.
285
Section 7-4
0.00
A202.03
Note Use an AND between an NO condition of the Communications Enabled Flag (A202.03) and an NC condition of the TXDU Executing Flag (n+9/n+19 bit 05) when executing TXDU(256) for a Unit. Receiving from an External Device to the PLC RXDU(255) Instruction If CIO 0.00 is ON, the Communications Enabled Flag (A202.03) is ON, and the Reception Completed Flag (CIO 1559.06) is ON, 10 bytes of data received from the external device connected to port 1 of the Serial Communications Unit with unit number 2 will be stored without converting the data starting from the lower byte of D100 using logical port number 3.
0.00 A202.03 1559.06 RXDU Communications Enabled Flag Reception Completed Flag (unit number 2, port 1) D100 #31120001 &10
Note Use an AND between an NO condition of the Communications Enabled Flag (A202.03) and an NC condition of the Reception Completed Flag (n+9/n+19 bit 06) when executing RXDU(255) for a Unit.
Program Examples for Serial Communications Units with Unit Version 2.0 or Later
Sending from PLC to External Device DTXDU(262) Instruction When the DTXDU Send Ready Flag (CIO 1559.04) is ON and CIO 0.00 turns ON, 5 bytes starting from the lower byte of D100 will be sent from port 1 of the Serial Communications Board with unit number 2 without converting the data.
0.00 1559.04 DTXDU DTXDU Send Ready Flag (unit number 2, port 1) D100 #01120001 &5
Note
(1) To use the DTXDU(262) instruction, the CJ1W-SCU22/32/42 must be used with a CJ2 CPU Unit with unit version 1.1 or higher. (2) Use an AND of the NO condition of the Send Ready Flag (n+9/n+19 bit 04) in the input conditions when executing DTXDU(262) for a Unit.
286
Section 7-4
If the Reception Completed Flag (CIO 1559.06) turns ON when CIO 0.00 is ON, 10 bytes of data received from the external device connected to port 1 of the Serial Communications Unit with unit number 2 will be stored without converting the data starting from the lower byte of D100.
0.00 1559.06 DRXDU Reception Completed Flag (unit number 2, port 1) D100 #31120001 &10
Note
(1) To use the DRXDU(261) instruction, the CJ1W-SCU22/32/42 must be used with a CJ2 CPU Unit with unit version 1.1 or higher. (2) Use an AND of the NO condition of the Reception Completed Flag (CIO 1559.06) in the input conditions when executing DRXDU(261) for a Unit. (3) Programming Example for Using the DRXDU(261) Instruction in an External Interrupt Task
1,2,3...
1. System Setup Area in Allocated DM Area Words The following settings are made in words m+25 or m+35 of the System Setup Area in the allocated DM Area words. m = D30000 + 100 unit number
15
Port 1: m+25 Port 1: m+35
12
11
08
07 0 0 0
04 1
03 0 0 0
00 0
Clearing the reception buffers 1: Clear, 0: Do not clear
Example: The following settings are for an external interrupt task number of 5 and a Serial Communications Unit with a unit number of 0.
15
Port 1: D30025
12
0 hex
11
5 hex
08
07
1 hex
04
03
0 hex
00
The above words allocated in the DM Area can be set from the Unit Setup for the Serial Communications Unit in the I/O Table Window.
287
Section 7-4
2. Right-click the program for the external interrupt task in the project tree of the CX-Programmer and select Properties from the pop-up menu. Select interrupt task 5 for the task type.
3. Enter the following instructions in the program assigned to the external interrupt task.
0.00 DRXDU D100 #01120001 &10
Note Note
The Reception Completed Flag is not required in an external interrupt task. Flags Related to Instructions Addressed to Serial Communications Units The changes and processing timing of flags related to instructions addressed to Units (TXDU(256), RXDU(255), DTXDU(262), and DRXDU(261)) are shown below. TXDU(256) Instruction
TXDU Instruction executed.
CPU Unit Communications Enabled Flag (logical ports 0 to 7: A202 bits 00 to 07)
TXDU Executing Flag (n+9/n+19 bit 05) Serial Communications Unit Send processing Send processing
Note Internally, the TXDU(256) instruction uses a FINS command. Instruction processing is therefore performed in peripheral servicing. To achieve this, sometimes multiple cycles are required after the instruction is executed to process the send.
288
Section 7-4
DTXDU Send Ready Flag (n+9/n+19 bit 04) Serial Communications Unit Send processing Send processing
Note The DTXDU(262) instruction is executed immediately. Send processing is therefore started as soon as the instruction is executed. RXDU(255) Instruction
Port reception processing Serial Communications Unit Reception Completed Flag (n+9/n+19 bit 06)
Reception processing
RXDU instruction
Instruction executed.
CPU Unit
Communications Enabled Flag (logical ports 0 to 7: A202 bits 00 to 07) Writing to I/O memory in the CPU Unit
Write processing
Note Internally, the RXDU(255) instruction uses a FINS command. Instruction processing is therefore performed in peripheral servicing. To achieve this, sometimes multiple cycles are required after the instruction is executed until the received data is stored in I/O memory. DRXDU(261) Instruction
Port reception processing Serial Communications Unit Reception Completed Flag (n+9/n+19 bit 06)
Reception processing
Instruction executed.
Write processing
Note The DRXDU(261) instruction is executed immediately. Received data is therefore stored in I/O memory in the same cycle as the one in which the instruction is executed. Note Refer to the following manual for details on the instructions used in No-protocol Mode (TXD(236), RXD(235), TXDU(256), RXDU(255), DTXDU(262), or DRXDU(261)): SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ-series Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W474).
289
Section 7-4
290
291
Section 8-1
8-1
1:N NT Link
PT
PT
Note
1. Set the serial port on the PT to a 1:N NT Link. The Serial Communications Board or Unit will not be able to communicate if the PT port is set for a 1:1 NT Link. Connection is not possible to PTs that do not support 1:N NT Links. 2. The number of PTs that can be connected to one port is limited by the CPU Units cycle time when a Serial Communications Board or Unit is used in a 1:N NT Link, as shown in the following diagrams. Although some communications will be possible even if these restrictions are exceeded, communications errors will occur depending on the PT operating conditions and communications load. Always abide by these restrictions. 3. The Programming Console functions of the PT (Expansion Mode) cannot be used when connected to Serial Communications Board or Unit ports. They can be used only by connecting to the peripheral port or RS-232C port on the CPU Unit. 4. Set a unique unit number for each PT connected to the same PLC. If the same unit number is set for more than one PT, malfunctions will occur.
292
Section 8-1
5. NT Link serial communications are unique and are not compatible with other serial communications modes.
6. The NT20S, NT600S, NT30, NT30C, NT620, NT620C, and NT625C cannot be used if the cycle time of the CPU Unit is 800 ms or longer (even if only one of these PTs is used in a 1:N NT Link). 7. With some PTs, timeout settings can be changed to eliminate some of the communications errors. Refer to the operation manual for the PT for details. 8. If more PTs are required by the system than allowed by the above restrictions, connect the PTs in smaller groups to different ports and increase the number ports by adding Serial Communications Units or a Serial Communications Board (if one is not already being used).
293
Section 8-2
8-2
8-2-1
Setup Area Allocated in the DM Area: D30000 to D31599 First Word in Setup Area Allocated in the DM Area: m = D30000 + 100 unit number
DM Area D30000 to D30099 D30100 to D30199 D30200 to D30299 D30300 to D30399 D30400 to D30499 D30500 to D30599 D30600 to D30699 D30700 to D30799 D30800 to D30899 D30900 to D30999 D31000 to D31099 D31100 to D31199 D31200 to D31299 D31300 to D31399 D31400 to D31499 D31500 to D31599
Unit No. Unit No. 0 Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8 Unit No. 9 Unit No. A Unit No. B Unit No. C Unit No. D Unit No. E Unit No. F
m to m + 1, m + 6: Port 1 Settings m + 10 to m + 11, m + 16: Port 2 Settings m + 2 to m + 5, m + 7 to m + 9, m + 12 to m + 15, m + 17 to m + 19: Not used with 1:N NT Links m+20 to m+99: Not used
294
Section 8-3
8-2-2
Reserved Serial communications mode: Always 2 Hex (1:N NT Link) Reserved Start bits Data length Stop bits Parity Parity Setting not required. Setting not required. Setting not required. Setting not required. Setting not required.
D32006
D32016
m+6
m + 16
03 to 15 00 to 02
Reserved Baud rate (bps) 0 to 9 Hex: Standard NT Link A Hex: High-speed NT Link (See note.) Reserved 1:N NT Link Maximum unit number: 0 to 7 hex
Note With CS-series, a high-speed NT Link is available only with Serial Communications Boards or Serial Communications Units manufactured on or after December 20th, 1999. With earlier models, only standard NT Link is available.
Lot No: 20Z9 Manufactured on December 20th, 1999 The year is indicated with the last digit. In this case, "9" indicates "1999." Month of manufacture. October, November, and December are indicated with X, Y, and Z respectively. In this case, the month is "December." Day of manufacture. In this example, the day is "20." NT31/631(C)-V2 are the only PTs for which high-speed NT link is supported.
Except for the baud rate, the 1:N NT Link communications specifications are fixed. Therefore, the port settings, start bits, stop bits, and parity need not be set. Even if they are set, they are ignored. Serial Communications Mode Maximum 1:N NT Links Unit No. Set the serial communications mode to 2 Hex to use 1:N NT Link mode. With 1:N NT Links, up to eight Programmable Terminals (PTs) can be connected. The highest connected unit number is set here.
8-3
295
Section 8-3
8-3-1
09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Note
1. When any one of bits 05 to 11 is ON, A40208 (Inner Board Error Flag) (non-fatal error) will be ON. 2. When bit 00 or 01 is ON, A40112 (Inner Board Fatal Error Flag) will be ON. For details on errors, refer to Section 12 Troubleshooting and Maintenance.
296
Section 8-3
8-3-2
Words CIO 1900 to CIO 1999 in the Inner Board Area are used for a Status Area. Only the words shown in the following table are used for the Status Area with 1:N NT Links. Inner Board CIO Area CIO 1900 to CIO 1999
Words CIO 1901 to CIO 1904 CIO 1905 to CIO 1914 CIO 1915 to CIO 1924 CIO 1925 to CIO 1999 Usage Board status Port 1 status Port 2 status Reserved
Words CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the CIO Area are allocated according to the unit number setting. Each Unit is allocated 25 words. Only the words shown in the following table are used for the Status Area with 1:N NT Links. CPU Bus Unit Area CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 n = CIO 1500 + 25 unit number
Unit No. Unit No. 0 Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8 Unit No. 9 Unit No. A Unit No. B Unit No. C Unit No. D Unit No. E Unit No. F Words CIO 1500 to CIO 1524 CIO 1525 to CIO 1549 CIO 1550 to CIO 1574 CIO 1575 to CIO 1599 CIO 1600 to CIO 1624 CIO 1625 to CIO 1649 CIO 1650 to CIO 1674 CIO 1675 to CIO 1694 CIO 1700 to CIO 1724 CIO 1725 to CIO 1749 CIO 1750 to CIO 1774 CIO 1775 to CIO 1799 CIO 1800 to CIO 1824 CIO 1825 to CIO 1849 CIO 1850 to CIO 1874 CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
297
Section 8-3
8-3-3
Boards Units (CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series) Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 CIO 1901 n+1 02 to 15 01 00 CIO 1902 CIO 1903 CIO 1904 CIO CIO 1905 1915 n+2 n+3 n+4 n+5 00 to 15 00 to 15 00 to 15 12 to 15 08 to 11 05 to 07 04 03 02 01 00 15 14 13 02 to 12 01 00 11 to 15 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 00 to 02 00 to15 15 to 00
Reserved 1: Error log data error 1: Protocol data error Reserved Reserved Reserved Port set- Setup ting Area status 0: Error log data normal 0: Protocol data normal
n + 15
Serial communications mode: Always 2 Hex (see note) Baud rate: 0 to 9 Hex, A Hex (see note) Reserved Start bit: Always 0 Hex Data length: Always 1 Hex (see note) Stop bit: Always 1 Hex (see note) Parity, Yes/No: Always 0 Hex (see note) Parity, Even/Odd: Always 1 Hex (see note)
CIO 1906
CIO 1916
n+6
n + 16
0: Terminating resistance OFF 1: Terminating resistance ON Reserved 1: Setup error 0: Setup normal 1: Port operating 0: Port stopped Commu- Reserved nica1: Remote Unit receive busy (flow control) tions 0: Remote Unit receive wait (Always 0 Hex) status Reserved 1: Local Unit receive busy (flow control) 0: Local Unit receive wait (Always 0 Hex) ER signal Transmission DTR signal control Reserved signal status CTS signal RTS signal Reserved Reserved Protocol status
CIO 1907
CIO 1917
n+7
n + 17
CIO 1918
n+8
n + 18
298
Section 8-3
Note The present port setting status is stored. If the Board/Unit is operating on default settings due to a System Setup error, the default settings will be stored. Error Log EEPROM Error This bit will be set to 1 if an error occurs in reading or writing the error log stored in EEPROM on the assumption that the EEPROM has reached its useful life. If a Serial Communications Unit is being used, the ERC indicator will also light. If a Serial Communications Board is being used, A42411 will turn ON and the ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash, indicating a nonfatal error. This bit will be turned ON if a checksum error is detected in the protocol data at startup. The checksum is checked for all serial communications modes. If a Serial Communications Unit is being used, the ERC indicator will also flash. If a Serial Communications Board is being used, A42409 will turn ON, the ERR/ ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash, and the RDY indicator will flash at 1second intervals, indicating a non-fatal error. The operation of the 1:N NT Links will not be affected by a protocol data error. Port Setting Status The settings in the Setup Area for the following items will be stored: Serial communications mode, baud rate, start bits, data length, stop bits, parity, ports, terminating resistance, terminating resistance, setup error, and port operating/stopped status. The port operating/stopped status will always be 1 for 1:N NT Links. The flow control and buffer status is stored. This status is not used for 1:N NT Links. These bits are cleared at startup or when a port is restarted using STUP(237) or a Port Settings Change Bit (Auxiliary Area). The status of the transmission control signals is stored. The bits corresponding to the unit numbers of the connected PTs for which priority processing has been set and the bits corresponding to the unit numbers for which communications are being executed are turned ON.
Words Boards (CS Series Only) Port 1 Port 2 CIO CIO 1909 1919 CIO 1910 to CIO 1914 CIO 1920 to CIO 1924
15
Communications Status
Bit
Contents
15 to 08 07 to 00 n + 10 to n + 20 to 15 to 00 n + 14 n + 24
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
299
Section 8-3
300
Communications Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
301
Section 9-1
9-1
Host-initiated Communications
The host computer sends a command to the PLC. The PLC processes the command and returns a response to the host computer. This process is repeated, allowing the host computer to monitor and control PLC operation. Note Only Modbus-RTU slave mode is supported. A Modbus-ASCII slave mode is not supported by the Serial Communications Boards or Serial Communications Units.
Modbus-RTU Specifications
Item Mode Baud rate Description Modbus-RTU slave mode (See note 1.) 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200/ 230,400 bps (See note 2.) Default: 19,200 bps 8 bits (See note 3.) Odd, even, or none Default: Even Odd or even parity:1 bit No parity: 2 bits (See note 4.) 1 to 247 (broadcasting: 0) (See note 5.) Slave address: 1 byte Function code: 1 byte Data: 0 to 252 bytes CRC code: 2 bytes
Data length Parity Stop bits Address setting range Frame format
Note
1. Modbus-ASCII mode is not supported. 2. Supported only by CJ1W-SCU@2 Units with unit version 2.0. 3. The data length is fixed at 8 bits and cannot be changed by the user. 4. The number of stop bits is automatically determined by the parity and cannot be set by the user. 5. The address cannot be set to 0. In commands, 0 is used to indicate broadcast commands.
9-1-1
302
Section 9-2
4. Holding Registers: DM or EM Area The Modbus-RTU command that access a specific Modbus data model is used to read and write I/O memory areas in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit.
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit I/O Memory CIO Area
0 1 2 : 0 1 2 : 0 1 2 : 0 1 2 : 0 1 2 :
Modbus-RTU command
Work Area
Coils
1 2 3 : 1 2 3 :
Holding Area
Input Registers
DM Area
Holding Registers 1
2 3 :
Modbus Commands Read Coils Read Discrete Inputs Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers Write Single Coil Write Single Register Write Multiple Coils Write Multiple Registers
EM Area
DM Area settings are used to allocate the area for each data model except for discrete inputs.
Refer to 9-2 Setup Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) for the DM Area settings to allocate areas. Refer to 9-3-4 Command and Response Details for details on Modbus-RTU commands. Note 1. DM Area settings are read when the power is turned ON to the CPU Unit, when the Serial Communications Board/Unit is restarted, or when the port is restarted. Always cycle the power to the CPU Unit or restart the Serial Communications Board/Unit or port after changing the settings. 2. Addresses in Modbus data models start from 1, but addresses specified in Modbus-RTU commands and addresses in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit start from 0. Refer to Allocation Areas for Coils, Input Registers, and Holding Registers on page 306 for the I/O memory area addresses in CS/CJseries CPU Units that are allocated to Modbus data models (coils, input registers, and holding registers), addresses in Modbus data models, and addresses specified in Modbus-RTU commands.
9-2
9-2-1
303
Section 9-2
Usage Port 1 Settings Port 2 Settings Port 1 Settings for Modbus-RTU slave mode Port 2 Settings for Modbus-RTU slave mode Reserved for the system
Allocated DM Area Words: The following words between D30000 and D31599 are used. m = D30000 + 100 unit number
Unit No. Unit No. 0 Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8 Unit No. 9 Unit No. A Unit No. B Unit No. C Unit No. D Unit No. E Unit No. F Words D30000 to D30099 D30100 to D30199 D30200 to D30299 D30300 to D30399 D30400 to D30499 D30500 to D30599 D30600 to D30699 D30700 to D30799 D30800 to D30899 D30900 to D30999 D31000 to D31099 D31100 to D31199 D31200 to D31299 D31300 to D31399 D31400 to D31499 D31500 to D31599
304
Section 9-2
9-2-2
Words Board Unit (CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series) Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 D32000 D32010 m m + 10
15 12 to 14 08 to 11 05 to 02 01 00 04 to 15 00 to 03
D32001
D32011
m+1
m + 11
m + 12 to m + 15 m + 16
15 14 to 00 15 to 08 07 to 00
Port settings 0: Defaults; 1: User settings Reserved Serial communications mode A hex: Modbus-RTU slave Reserved Parity 0: Yes; 1: No Parity 0: Even; 1: Odd Reserved Baud rate (bps) 0: Default (19,200); 3: 1,200; 4: 2,400; 5: 4,800; 6: 9,600; 7: 19,200; 8: 38,400; 9: 57,600; A: 115,200; B: 230,400 (See note.) Reserved. Reserved. Modbus Slave Address 01 to F7 hex (1 to 247) Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Coils Allocation Area 00 hex: CIO Area B0 hex: CIO Area, B1 hex: Work Area, B2 hex: Holding Area, B3 hex: Auxiliary Area Input Registers Allocation Area 00 hex: CIO Area B0 hex: CIO Area, B1 hex: Work Area, B2 hex: Holding Area, B3 hex: Auxiliary Area Holding Registers Allocation Area 00 hex: DM Area 82 hex: DM Area 50 to 5C hex: EM Area, bank 0 to 12 5D to 68 hex: EM Area, bank 13 to 24 (See note.) A0 to AC hex: EM Area, bank 0 to 12 AD to AF hex: EM Area, bank 13 to 15 (See note.) 98 hex: Current bank of EM Area Reserved. Reserved.
m + 17 to m + 19 m + 30
15 to 08 07 to 00 15 to 08 07 to 00
D32021
D32031
m + 21
m + 31
15 to 08
07 to 00
m + 32 to m + 39
15 to 08 07 to 00
9-2-3
Port Settings
305
Section 9-3
The default settings used are as follows: Baud rate: 19,200 bps, start bits: 1 bit, data length: 8 bits, parity: even, and stop bits: 1 bit. If user port settings are specified, set bits 00 and 01 and set the baud rate in D32001. Serial Communications Mode Parity and Baud Rate Modbus-RTU Slave Address Set the serial communications mode to A hex to use Modbus-RTU Slave communications. If user settings are specified for the port settings, the parity and baud rate must be set. Set the Modbus-RTU slave address to between 1 and 247 (1 and F7 hex).
1 to 5120 1 to 65536
1 to 8192 1 to 8192 1 to 15360 Input Registers 1 to 6144 1 to 512 1 to 512 1 to 960 1 to 32768 1 to 32768
Work Area Holding Area Auxiliary Area CIO Area (default) Work Area Holding Area Auxiliary Area DM Area (default) DM Area bank @
Holding Registers
Note
1. Bits in the following word addresses can be accessed in the CIO Area for Coils: CIO 0 to CIO 4095 2. An EM bank can be allocated to the Holding Registers by specifying a value from either 50 to 5C hex or A0 to AC hex (for EM bank 0 to C). 3. Addresses in Modbus data models start from 1, but addresses specified in Modbus-RTU commands and addresses in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit start from 0. Refer to the above table when specifying addresses in applications.
9-3
306
Section 9-3
9-3-1
09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Note
1. When any one of bits 05 to 11 is ON, A40208 (Inner Board Error Flag) (non-fatal error) will be ON. 2. When bit 00 or 01 is ON, A40112 (Inner Board Fatal Error Flag) will be ON. For details on errors, refer to Section 12 Troubleshooting and Maintenance.
307
Section 9-3
9-3-2
Words CIO 1900 to CIO 1999 in the Inner Board Area are used for a Status Area. Only the words shown in the following table are used for the Status Area with Modbus-RTU Slave communications. Inner Board CIO Area CIO 1900 to CIO 1999
Words CIO 1901 to CIO 1904 CIO 1905 to CIO 1914 CIO 1915 to CIO 1924 Usage Board status Port 1 status Port 2 status
Words CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the CIO Area are allocated according to the unit number setting. Each Unit is allocated 25 words. Only the words shown in the following table are used for the Status Area with Modbus-RTU Slave communications. CPU Bus Unit Area CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 n = CIO 1500 + 25 unit number
Unit No. Unit No. 0 Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8 Unit No. 9 Unit No. A Unit No. B Unit No. C Unit No. D Unit No. E Unit No. F Words CIO 1500 to CIO 1524 CIO 1525 to CIO 1549 CIO 1550 to CIO 1574 CIO 1575 to CIO 1599 CIO 1600 to CIO 1624 CIO 1625 to CIO 1649 CIO 1650 to CIO 1674 CIO 1675 to CIO 1699 CIO 1700 to CIO 1724 CIO 1725 to CIO 1749 CIO 1750 to CIO 1774 CIO 1775 to CIO 1799 CIO 1800 to CIO 1824 CIO 1825 to CIO 1849 CIO 1850 to CIO 1874 CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
Status Area
The Status Area is used for status information input from Serial Communications Board or Unit to the CPU Unit. The Status Area is where the Serial Communications Board or Unit set communications status, the transmission control signal status, and the transmission error status. n = CIO 1500 + 25 unit number
Words Bit Contents
Boards Units (CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series) Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 CIO 1901 n+1 02 to 15 01 00
308
Section 9-3
n + 15
CIO 1906
CIO 1916
n+6
n + 16
00 to 15 00 to 15 00 to 15 12 to 15 08 to 11 05 to 07 04 03 02 01 00 15 14 13 02 to 12 01 00 11 to 15 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 00 to 02 15 14 to 08 07 06 to 05 04 03 02 00, 01 15 to 00 15 to 00 15 to 00 15 to 00 15 to 00
CIO 1907
CIO 1917
n+7
n + 17
CIO 1908
CIO 1918
n+8
n + 18
CIO 1909 CIO 1910 CIO 1911 CIO 1912 CIO 1913
CIO 1919 CIO 1920 CIO 1921 CIO 1922 CIO 1923
n+9 n + 10 n + 11 n + 12 n + 13
n + 19 n + 20 n + 21 n + 22 n + 23
Reserved Reserved Reserved Setup Serial communications mode (A hex: fixed) Port settings Baud rate (Note 1) setting status Reserved Start bits: Always 0 Data length: Always 1 Stop bits (Note 2) Parity: Yes/No (Note 1) Parity: Even/Odd (Note 1) 0 No 0 RS-232C 1 RS-422A/485 1 Reserved Hardware 0 1 0 1 settings 0: Terminating resistance OFF 1: Terminating resistance ON Reserved 1: Setup error; 0: Setup normal 1: Port operating; 0: Port stopped Commu- Reserved nica1: Remote Unit busy receiving (Flow control) tions 0: Remote Unit ready to receive (Note 3) status Reserved 1: Local Unit busy receiving (Flow control) 0: Local Unit ready to receive (Note 4) TransER signal mission DTR signal control Reserved signal status CTS signal RTS signal Reserved Trans1: Transmission error; 0: No transmission error mission Note used. error sta1: CRC error, 0: Normal tus Note used. 1: Overrun error; 0: Normal 1: Framing error; 0: Normal 1: Parity error; 0: Normal Reserved Number of normally received commands Number of normally sent responses Number of overrun errors, framing errors, and parity errors (transmission errors) Number of CRC errors (transmission errors) Number of command format errors (illegal function codes and illegal addresses)
309
Section 9-3
Reserved.
Note
1. The settings in the Setup Area are reflected here. The default settings will be used and will be stored here if a setup error occurs. 2. Always 1 (1 stop bit) when there is parity and always 0 (2 stop bits) when there is no parity. 3. The status of this bit is not stable in Modbus-RTU Slave mode. 4. Always 0 in Modbus-RTU Slave mode.
This bit will be set to 1 if an error occurs in reading or writing the error log stored in EEPROM on the assumption that the EEPROM has reached its useful life. If a Serial Communications Unit is being used, the ERC indicator will also light. If a Serial Communications Board is being used, A42411 will turn ON and the ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash, indicating a nonfatal error. This bit will be turned ON if a checksum error is detected in the protocol data at startup. The checksum is checked for all serial communications modes. If a Serial Communications Unit is being used, the ERC indicator will also flash. If a Serial Communications Board is being used, A42409 will turn ON, the ERR/ ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash, and the RDY indicator will flash at 1second intervals, indicating a non-fatal error. The operation of Modbus-RTU Slave communications is not affected by a protocol data error.
The settings in the Setup Area for the following items will be stored: Serial communications mode, baud rate, start bits, data length, stop bits, parity, ports, terminating resistance, setup error, and port operating/stopped status. The port operating/stopped status will always be 1 for Modbus-RTU Slave mode. The flow control and buffer status is stored. This status is not used in the Modbus-RTU slave mode. These bits are cleared at startup or when a port is restarted using STUP(237) or a Port Settings Change Bit (Auxiliary Area). The status of the following transmission control signals is stored: ER signal, DTR signal, CTS signal, and RTS signal. 1: High, 0: Low The Transmission Error Flag (bit 15) will turn ON if any of the following flags turn ON: CRC error (bit 07), Overrun Error (bit 04), Framing Error (bit 03), or Parity Error (bit 02). The number of normal Modbus-RTU commands received from the communications port is stored. The number of normal Modbus-RTU responses sent to the communications port is stored. The number of overrun errors, framing errors, and parity errors that has occurred is stored. The number of CRC errors that has occurred is stored.
Communications Status
Number of Normally Received Commands Number of Normally Sent Responses Number of Overrun Errors, Framing Errors, and Parity Errors Number of CRC Errors
310
Section 9-3
The number of illegal function codes and illegal addresses in received Modbus-RTU commands is stored. Note The above counters (number of normally received commands, number of normally sent responses, number of overrun errors, framing errors, and parity errors, number of CRC errors, and number of command format error) are cleared to 0 when the power supply to the Serial Communications Board/Unit is turned ON. Counting will stop if they reach FFFF hex.
9-3-3
05 06 08 0F 10
Write Single Coil Write Single Register Diagnostic Write Multiple Coils Write Multiple Registers
Note The CRC code is given in the order low byte, high byte. Note 1. Setting the slave address to 0 indicates a broadcast command. Responses are not returned for broadcast commands. 2. DM Area settings are read when the power is turned ON to the CPU Unit, when the Serial Communications Board/Unit is restarted, or when the port is restarted. 3. Program retry processing on the host computer (e.g., personal computer) when a transmission error or other communications error occurs.
9-3-4
Function
Read Coils
311
Section 9-3
Data 01 hex 0000 to FFFF hex (See note.) 1 to 3E8 hex (1 to 1000)
Response
Length Function Code Byte Count Coil Status 1 byte 1 byte n byte Data 01 hex N n = N or N+1
Request Function Code Starting Address (H) Starting Address (L) Quantity of Coils (H) Quantity of Coils (L) Data 01 hex 00 hex 14 hex 00 hex 13 hex
Response Function Code Byte Count Coil Status 27 to 20 Coil Status 35 to 28 Coil Status 38 to 36 Data 01 hex 03 hex CD hex 6B hex 05 hex
15 15 31 1 47 63
14 14 30 0 46 62
13 13 29 1 45 61
12 12 28 1 44 60
11 11 27 1 43 59
10 10 26 1 42 58
9 9 25 0 41 57
8 8 24 0 40 56
7 7 23 1 39 55
6 6 22 1 38 1 54
5 5 21 0 37 0 53
4 4 20 1 36 1 52
3 3 19 35 0 51
2 2 18 34 1 50
1 1 17 33 1 49
0 0 16 32 0 48
Note The subscript numbers in the shaded boxes indicate the ON/OFF (1/0) status of the bits that are read.
Response
Length Function Code Byte Count Coil Status 1 byte 1 byte n byte Data 02 hex N (See note.) n = N or N+1
312
Section 9-3
Request Function Code Starting Address (H) Starting Address (L) Quantity of Coils (H) Quantity of Coils (L) Data 02 hex 00 hex 14 hex 00 hex 13 hex
Response Function Code Byte Count Coil Status 27 to 20 Coil Status 35 to 28 Coil Status 38 to 36 Data 02 hex 03 hex CD hex 6B hex 05 hex
15 15 31 1 47 63
14 14 30 0 46 62
13 13 29 1 45 61
12 12 28 1 44 60
11 11 27 1 43 59
10 10 26 1 42 58
9 9 25 0 41 57
8 8 24 0 40 56
7 7 23 1 39 55
6 6 22 1 38 1 54
5 5 21 0 37 0 53
4 4 20 1 36 1 52
3 3 19 35 0 51
2 2 18 34 1 50
1 1 17 33 1 49
0 0 16 32 0 48
Note The subscript numbers in the shaded boxes indicate the ON/OFF (1/0) status of the bits that are read.
Response
Length Function Code Byte Count Register Value 1 byte 1 byte N 2 bytes Data 03 hex N 2 (See note.)
Request Function Code Starting Address (H) Starting Address (L) Quantity of Registers (H) Quantity of Registers (L) Data 03 hex 03 hex E8 hex 00 hex 03 hex
Response Function Code Byte Count Register Value (H) DM1000 Register Value (L) DM1000 Register Value (H) DM1001 Register Value (L) DM1001 Register Value (H) DM1002 Register Value (L) DM1002 Data 03 hex 06 hex AB hex 12 hex 56 hex 78 hex 97 hex 13 hex
313
Section 9-3
14
13 A 5 9
12
11
10
9 B 6 7
6 1 7 1
2 2 8 3
Reads multiple words from the CIO, Work, Holding, or Auxiliary Area of I/O memory.
Response
Length Function Code Byte Count Register Value 1 byte 1 byte N 2 bytes Data 04 hex N 2 (See note.)
Request Function Code Starting Address (H) Starting Address (L) Quantity of Registers (H) Quantity of Registers (L) Data 04 hex 03 hex E8 hex 00 hex 03 hex
Response Function Code Byte Count Register Value (H) DM1000 Register Value (L) DM1000 Register Value (H) DM1001 Register Value (L) DM1001 Register Value (H) DM1002 Register Value (L) DM1002 Data 04 hex 06 hex AB hex 12 hex 56 hex 78 hex 97 hex 13 hex
14
13 A 5 9
12
11
10
9 B 6 7
6 1 7 1
2 2 8 3
314
Section 9-3
Data 0 to FFFF hex (See note.) 0000 hex (OFF) or FF00 (ON)
Response
Length Function Code Output Address Output Value 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes Data 05 hex 0 to FFFF hex 0000 hex (OFF) or FF00 (ON)
Request Function Code Output Address (H) Output Address (L) Output Value (H) Output Value (L) Data 05 hex 00 hex 22 hex FF hex 00 hex
Response Function Code Output Address (H) Output Address (L) Output Value (H) Output Value (L) Data 05 hex 00 hex 22 hex FF hex 00 hex
15 15 31 47 63
14 14 30 46 62
13 13 29 45 61
12 12 28 44 60
11 11 27 43 59
10 10 26 42 58
9 9 25 41 57
8 8 24 40 56
7 7 23 39 55
6 6 22 38 54
5 5 21 37 53
4 4 20 36 52
3 3 19 35 51
2 2 18 34 50
1 1 17 33 49
0 0 16 32 48
Note The shaded number indicate the ON/OFF status of the bit that is written.
Response
Length Function Code Register Address Register Value 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes Data 06 hex 0 to 7FFF hex 0 to FFFF hex
315
Section 9-3
14 3
13
12
11
10
9 A
5 C
2 5
Diagnostic
Function Command
Function Code Sub-function Code Data Length 1 byte 2 bytes N 2 bytes (See note.) Data 08 hex 0 hex ---
Response
Length Function Code Sub-function Code Data 1 byte 2 bytes N 2 bytes (See note.) 08 hex 0 hex --Data
Writes multiple bits in I/O memory. Allocated memory is in the CIO Area (fixed).
316
Section 9-3
Writing 10 Bits Starting from CIO 0001.04 (xxxx xx11 1100 1101)
Request Function Code Starting Address (H) Starting Address (L) Quantity of Output (H) Quantity of Output (L) Byte Count Output Value (H) Output Value (L) Data 0F hex 00 hex 14 hex 00 hex 0A hex 02 hex 3A hex 01 hex
Response Function Code Starting Address (H) Starting Address (L) Quantity of Output (H) Quantity of Output (L) Data 0F hex 00 hex 14 hex 00 hex 0A hex
CIO 0 CIO 1
15 15 31 0
14 14 30 0
13 13 29 0
12 12 28 1
11 11 27 0
10 10 26 0
9 9 25 1
8 8 24 1
7 7 23 1
6 6 22 0
5 5 21 1
4 4 20 0
3 3 19 0
2 2 18 0
1 1 17 0
0 0 16 0
Note The subscript numbers in the shaded boxes indicate the ON/OFF (1/0) status of the bits that are written. Other bits in the same word are set to 0.
Response
Length Function Code 1 byte Starting Address 2 bytes Quantity of Registers 2 bytes Data 10 hex 0 to 17FF hex 1 to7B hex
Request Function Code Starting Address (H) Starting Address (L) Quantity of Registers (H) Data 10 hex 03 hex E8 hex 00 hex
Response Function Code Starting Address (H) Starting Address (L) Quantity of Registers (H) Data 10 hex 03 hex E8 hex 00 hex
317
Communications Timing
Request Quantity of Registers (L) Byte Count Registers Value (H) Registers Value (L) Registers Value (H) Registers Value (L) Data 02 hex 04 hex 3A hex C5 hex 97 hex 13 hex Response Quantity of Registers (L)
Section 9-4
Data 02 hex
15 D1000 D1001
14 3 9
13
12
11
10
9 A 7
5 C 1
2 5 3
Error Format
Length Function Code Exception Code Error code 01 1 byte 1 byte Name Illegal function Data Function code + 80 hex Error code Description
02
03
04
There is an error in the specified function code. A function code not supported by the Serial Communications Board/Unit was specified. Illegal data address There is an error in the specified starting address. The combination of the specified starting address and data length (quantity of registers/coils) exceeds the valid range. The specified data length (quantity of registers/ coils) exceeds the valid range. The specified data length (quantity of registers/ coils) differs from the actual data length. Less than 4 bytes of data was received. Illegal data value There is an error in the specified data. (The data for the Write Single Coil Command is not 0000 hex or FF00 hex.) Slave device failure Reading or writing could not be performed because an error occurred in the CPU Unit.
9-4
Communications Timing
This section describes the timing of sending commands and controlling communications in the Modbus-RTU Slave mode.
9-4-1
318
Communications Timing
Board or Unit Logical port 5 1 6 3 7 2 0 4 CPU Unit Instruction 1 Instruction 2 Instruction 3 Instruction 4 Instruction 5 Instruction 6 Instruction 7 Instruction 8
Section 9-4
Note
1. If more than eight communications instructions are being used, then exclusive control must be performed to make sure that not more than eight are executed at the same time. Refer to descriptions of network communications instructions in the CS/CJ-series Communications Commands Reference Manual (W342). 2. The same communications port numbers are used by both the communications instructions (SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490)) and the PROTOCOL MACRO instruction (PMCR(260)). The same port number cannot be used by more than one of these instructions at the same time.
9-4-2
9-4-3
A Communications Port Enabled Flag turns ON when SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) can be executed. The flag will turn OFF during execution of these commands and turn ON again when the command execu-
319
Communications Timing
Section 9-4
tion is completed. When creating the ladder diagram, use these flags as input conditions when executing these instructions.
Word A202 Bit 08 to 15 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Content Reserved Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 7 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 6 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 5 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 4 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 3 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 2 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 1 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 0
A Communications Port Error Flag will turn ON in the following cases. When an error is generated during execution of SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490). When an error response or retry error has been generated for the port. These Flags will turn OFF when the corresponding Communications Port Enabled Flag is turned OFF at the start of operation or at the start of executing the SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490).
Word A219 Bit 08 to 15 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Content Reserved Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 7 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 6 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 5 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 4 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 3 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 2 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 1 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 0
The Communications Port Completion Code words will contain the FINS end code after SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490) has been executed. If the Communications Port Enabled Flag turns OFF when operation is started or SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490) are executed, the contents of these words will be cleared.
Word A203 A204 A205 A206 A207 A208 A209 A210 A211 to A218 Content Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 0 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 1 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 2 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 3 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 4 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 5 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 6 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 7 Reserved
320
Communications Timing
Flag Transitions
Communications Port Enabled Flag Network communications instructions (PMCR(260)/SEND(090)/ RECV(098)/CMND(490)) Communications Port Error Flag Communications Port Completion Code (Normal end) End of previous processing (No unit corresponding to unit address) (Normal end) Instruction 1 being executed Instruction 2 being executed Instruction 3 being executed
Section 9-4
9-4-4
Response
No Response Required Host computer Serial Communications Board/Unit Command (1) Command (2) Response
Command transmission to the host computer can start even when the port is receiving a command from the host computer (1). The transmission of a response to the command from the host computer is postponed until the transmission of the command to the host computer is completed (2). When a response is not required from the host computer, the Communications Port Enabled Flag will turn ON when the command to the host computer has passed from the CPU Unit to the port.
321
Communications Timing
Host Computer Receiving Data
Response Required Host computer Serial Communications Board/Unit Communications Port Enabled Flag Command acknowledged Command (1) Response (2) Command Response
Section 9-4
Command completed
No Response Required Host computer Serial Communications Board/Unit Communications Port Enabled Flag Command acknowledged Command completed Command (1) Response (2) Command
At (1) in the diagram, the response to a command sent from the host computer is being transmitted from the port. In this case, the command transmission to the host computer is postponed until the response transmission is completed (2). When a response is not required from the host computer, the Communications Port Enabled Flag will turn ON when the command to the host computer has passed from the CPU Unit to the port. Response Wait Time After Host Computer Sends Data
Response Required
No Response Required Host computer Serial Communications Board/Unit Communications Port Enabled Flag Command acknowledged Command completed Command (1) Command Response wait time Response (2)
When response wait time has been set in the command format from the host computer, commands to the host computer will not be transmitted until the response time has elapsed (1). Transmission of responses to commands from the host computer will be postponed until the command transmission to the host computer has been completed (2).
322
Section 9-5
When a response is not required from the host computer, the Communications Port Enabled Flag will turn ON when the command to the host computer has passed from the CPU Unit to the port.
9-4-5
Reception Buffers
In Modbus-RTU Slave mode, each port has a reception buffer of 1,200 bytes. This is sufficient to hold the maximum Modbus-RTU Slave frame length for an FA command response frame (1,115 bytes) + 85 bytes. If a frame larger than 1,200 bytes is sent from the host computer (from @ to the carriage return), the frame will be discarded and no response will be returned.
9-4-6
Error Responses
When Modbus-RTU Slave FA commands are used for FINS commands, an error code will returned as the end code in the FINS response whenever there is a mistake in the FINS command settings or an FINS response is required that is too long for the legal response frame. An end code of 110B Hex is returned when the response exceeds the maximum response length. The Modbus-RTU Slave response frame will contain the requested read data after the end code through the end of the maximum legal response frame length. Note We recommend programming retry processing at any device sending commands in case noise or other factors result in transmission errors.
9-5
9-5-1
RS-232C Ports
Take the following differences into consideration when changing from an existing Modbus-RTU Slave System to one using an RS-232C port on a CS/CJseries CPU Unit, Serial Communications Boards, or Serial Communications
323
Section 9-5
Unit (CS1H/G-CPU@@ RS-232C port, CS1W-SCU21-V1 ports, CJ1WSCU21/41 port 2, CS1W-SCB21-V1 ports, or CS1W-SCB41-V1 port 1).
Previous products C-series Modbus-RTU Slave Units Model number 3G2A5-LK201-E C500-LK203 3G2A6-LK201-E Changes required for CS/CJ-series product Wiring Other The connector has been The following changes are necessary for changed from a 25-pin to a systems that sync with ST1, ST2, and RT. 9-pin connector. Synchronized transfers will no longer be possiThe CS/CJ-series products ble. do not support the ST1, ST2, Full-duplex transmissions will be possible with and RT signals and wiring the CS/CJ-series product, but the host comthem is not required. puters communications program, hardware, or both will need to be altered. The following changes are necessary for systems that did not sync with ST1, ST2, and RT. It may be possible to use the host computer programs without alteration as long as the same communications settings (e.g., baud rate) are used. It may be necessary, however, to change programs to allow for different text lengths in frames or different CS/CJ command specifications. (See note.) The connector has been It may be possible to use the host computer changed from a 25-pin to a programs without alteration as long as the 9-pin connector. same communications settings (e.g., baud rate) are used. It may be necessary, however, to change programs to allow for different text lengths in frames or different CS/CJ command specifications. (See note.) No changes have been made It may be possible to use the host computer in wiring. programs without alteration as long as the same communications settings (e.g., baud rate) are used. It may be necessary, however, to change programs to allow for different CS/CJ command specifications.
C200H-LK201
CV500-LK201
No changes have been made It may be possible to use the host computer in wiring. programs without alteration as long as the same communications settings (e.g., baud rate) are used. It may be necessary, however, to change programs to allow for different CS/CJ command specifications. Port 1: The following changes are necessary for The connector has been half-duplex transmissions that use CD. changed from a 25-pin to a Check the system for timing problems when 9-pin connector. using SEND, RECV, or CMND to initiate comPort 2 set for RS-232C: munications from the PLC or timing problems in The SG signal has been sending commands from the host computer. If changed from pin 7 to pin 9. necessary, switch to full-duplex transmissions. The following changes are necessary for full-duplex transmissions that do not use CD. Half-duplex It may be possible to use the host computer programs without alteration as long as the same communications settings (e.g., baud rate) are used. It may be necessary, however, to change programs to allow for different CS/CJ command specifications.
324
Section 9-5
Note The number of words that can be read and written per frame (i.e., the text lengths) when using C-mode commands is different for C-series Modbus-RTU Slave Units and CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards/Units. A host computer program previously used for C-series Modbus-RTU Slave Units may not function correctly if used for CS/CJ-series PLCs. Check the host computer program before using it and make any corrections required to handle different frame text lengths. Refer to the CS/CJ-series Communications Commands Reference Manual (W342) for details.
9-5-2
RS-422A/485 Ports
Take the following differences into consideration when changing from an existing Modbus-RTU Slave System to one using an RS-422A/485 port on a CS/ CJ-series Serial Communications Board (CS1W-SCB41-V1 port 2 or CJ1WSCU41 port 1).
Previous products
Model number
Changes required for CS/CJ-series product Wiring Other Wiring pins have been changed as shown below. SDA: Pin 9 to pin 1 SDB: Pin 5 to pin 2 RDA: Pin 6 to pin 6 RDB: Pin 1 to pin 8 SG: Pin 3 to Not connected FG: Pin 7 to pin Connector hood No changes have been made in wiring. It may be possible to use the host computer programs without alteration as long as the same communications settings (e.g., baud rate) are used. It may be necessary, however, to change programs to allow for different text lengths in frames or different CS/CJ command specifications. (See note.)
C200HW-COM@@-E
CVM1/CV-CPU@@ CV500-LK201
It may be possible to use the host computer programs without alteration as long as the same communications settings (e.g., baud rate) are used. It may be necessary, however, to change programs to allow for different CS/ CJ command specifications. No changes have been made It may be possible to use the host computer in wiring. programs without alteration as long as the same communications settings (e.g., baud rate) are used. It may be necessary, however, to change programs to allow for different CS/ CJ command specifications.
Note For pre-Ver. 1.2 Units, the number of words that can be read and written per frame (i.e., the text lengths) when using C-mode commands is different for Cseries Modbus-RTU Slave Units and CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards/Units. A host computer program previously used for C-series ModbusRTU Slave Units may not function correctly if it is used in CS/CJ-series PLCs. When using Serial Communications Boards/Units with Unit Ver. 1.2 or later, these programs can be reused by setting the Modbus-RTU Slave compatible device mode to mode C (C500/120) or mode D (D200H). (Alternatively, check the host computer program before using it and make any corrections required to handle different frame text lengths. Refer to the CS/CJ-series Communications Commands Reference Manual (W342) for details.)
325
Section 9-6
9-6
9-6-1
The earlier Serial Communications Units/Boards support only 1:N Modbus-RTU Slaves.
C Series C500-LK101/201/103/203, C120-LK101/201/202 C Series C200H-LK101/201/202 1:1 protocol A Modbus-RTU Slave protocol that enables a single host to be connected to a single PLC only. C Series C500-LK101/201/103/203, C120-LK101/201/202 C Series C200H-LK101/201/202
The CVM1/CV Series supports only 1:N Modbus-RTU Slaves for the CPU Units built-in port and Modbus-RTU Slave Unit/Serial Communications Unit/Board. The C-series Modbus-RTU Slave Units shown here support both 1:1 protocol and 1:N protocol.
326
Section 9-6
Note The differences between the command and response frames for 1:N ModbusRTU Slaves and 1:1 Modbus-RTU Slaves is as follows:
Modbus-RTU command
Work Area
Coils
1 2 3 : 1 2 3 :
Holding Area
Input Registers
DM Area
Holding Registers 1
2 3 :
Modbus Commands Read Coils Read Discrete Inputs Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers Write Single Coil Write Single Register Write Multiple Coils Write Multiple Registers
EM Area
DM Area settings are used to allocate the area for each data model except for discrete inputs.
Response Format
@ 0 0 R D 0 0 * CR Host Link Header Unit No. code End code FCS Terminator
Response Format
R D 0 0 * CR Header End code code Terminator
9-6-2
327
Modbus-RTU Slave Function for Replacing Existing PLCs Unit Ver. 1.2 or Later
Section 9-6
When Serial Communications Units/Boards with Unit Ver. 1.2 or later are used, however, the Board/Units Modbus-RTU Slave specifications can be switched according to the CPU Unit or other Unit in which the host computer program is to be reused. The Modbus-RTU Slave specifications change according to the Modbus-RTU Slave compatible device mode that is selected. When the following commands for reading I/O memory (RR, RL, RH, RC, RD, RJ, and RG) are received, the number of data words in each response frame that is returned to the host is different.
Command RR RL RH RC RD RJ RG Name CIO AREA READ LINK AREA READ HR AREA READ PV READ DM AREA READ AR AREA READ T/C STATUS READ
When the command for reading the status of the CPU Unit (MS) is received, the response format that is returned to the host according to the FAL/FALS instruction execution status is different.
Command MS Name PROCESSOR STATUS READ
328
Modbus-RTU Slave Function for Replacing Existing PLCs Modbus-RTU Slave Compatible Device Modes
ModbusCompatible models (models that supRTU Slave- ported host computer programs) compatible device mode RR, RL, RH, RC, RD, RG command and RJ commands Number of words in each response frame First frame Second First frame Second frame frame 30 words 31 words 121 words 125 words
Section 9-6
Mode A (CS/ C Series CJ/C) SRM1 (built-in port) CPM1 (built-in port) CPM1A (built-in port) CQM1-CPU@@ (built-in port) C200HS-CPU@@ (built-in port) C200HE/HG/HX-CPU@@ (built-in port) C200HW-COM@@ (built-in port) CS/CJ Series CS1G/H-CPU@@H (built-in port) CS1G/H-CPU@@-V1 (built-in port) CS1D-CPU@@H (built-in port) CJ1G/H-CPU@@H (built-in port) CJ1G/M-CPU@@ (built-in port) Earlier models (pre-Ver. 1.2): CS1W-SCB21(-V1)/41(-V1) CS1W-SCU21(-V1) CJ1W-SCU21/41 Mode B CVM1/CV Series (CVM1/CV) CVM1/CV-CPU@@ CVM1 (built-in port), CV500-LK201 Mode C C Series (C200H) 29 words (C200H) C200H-LK101/201/202 Mode D C Series (C500/120) (C500/120) C500-LK101/201/103/203, C120LK101/201/202
Fixed length
30 words
89 words 89 words
89 words 60 words
Variable length
Note
1. The response data formats for MS commands when FAL/FALS is not executed are as follows: Types for which a space (20 hex) is added to the FAL/FALS message in the response data (indicated as fixed length in the above table). Types for which a FAL/FALS message is not added to the response data (indicated as variable length in the above table). (A FAL/FALS message is added to the response data for both types if FAL/ FALS is executed.) 2. The following condition is an exception: When reusing the RG command created using a CVM1/CV-series PLC with mode B selected, the host computer program cannot be reused without being changed. The difference in the response returned when the RG command is reused and the Timer/Counter Flag for 121 words (maximum text area) is read is as follows:
Using mode B with a CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Unit/Board with unit version 1.2 or later CVM1/CV-series Host Link Unit
First frame 121 words (including terminator) First frame 121 words Second frame 0 words (terminator only)
329
Modbus-RTU Slave Function for Replacing Existing PLCs Relationship with 1:N/1:1 Protocol Settings
Section 9-6
The 1:N/1:1 Modbus-RTU Slave protocol setting depends on the compatible device mode, as follows: Mode A (CS/CJ/C), mode B (CVM1/CV): 1:N Modbus-RTU Slaves only Mode C (C200H), mode D (C500/120): Either 1:N or 1:1 Modbus-RTU Slaves Allocated DM Area Settings (Setup Area) m = D30000 + 100 unit number
Words Board Port 1 D32003 Port 2 D32013 Port 1 m+3 Unit Port 2 m+13 14 1:N/1:1 protocol setting (Unit Ver. 1.2 or later only) 1: 1:1 protocol; 0: 1:N protocol If the Modbus-RTU Slave compatible device mode is set between 0 and 2 hex (mode A or B), the setting in this bit is invalid (always 1:N Modbus-RTU Slaves) Modbus-RTU Slave compatible device mode 0 hex: Default (mode A) 1 hex: Mode A (CS/CJ/C) 2 hex: Mode B (CVM1/CV) 3 hex: Mode C (C200H) 4 hex: Mode D (C500/120) Bit Setting contents
D32003
D32013
m+3
m+13
08 to 10
Setting Examples when Replacing PLCs A host computer program that has been created using a C500-LK101/201/ 103/203 Modbus-RTU Slave Unit can be reused in a Serial Communications Board/Unit with Unit Ver. 1.2 or later by making the following settings to enable the 1:1 Modbus-RTU Slave protocol. 1:N/1:1 Modbus-RTU Slave protocol setting: 1 (ON = 1:1 Modbus-RTU Slave) Modbus-RTU Slave compatible device mode setting: 3 hex (mode C (C500/120))
330
331
Section 10-1
Sending Data
The times that are given in the following table are the times required from when the No-protocol Mode instruction is executed until the data is placed on the communications line.
Item Number of bytes CJ1W-SCU@1CJ1W-SCU@2 V1 TXDU(256) TXDU(256) DTXDU(262) (ms) (ms) (s) 19.0 2.0 105 19.5 2.0 155 21.0 2.5 355
10 50 256
Note
(1) The measurement conditions for the above values are as follows: The ladder program contained only the No-protocol Mode instruction and instructions to measure the time. Port 1 was used as the reception port and port 2 was not used. The following serial communications parameters were used: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, even parity, start code of 0, and specified number of received data bytes for end code. Configuration used for reception performance measurement: CJ2H-CPU65-EIP + Serial Communications Unit + OD211 Configuration used for send performance measurement: CJ2H-CPU65-EIP + Serial Communications Unit
332
Section 10-1
The time was measured from when all of the data was placed on the communications time until the Reception Completed Flag turned ON, the Noprotocol Mode instruction was executed, and the received data was stored in memory in the CPU Unit. External Interrupt Task The time was measured from when all of the data was placed on the communications time until the interrupt task was started, the No-protocol Mode instruction was executed, and the received data was stored in memory in the CPU Unit. Sending Data The time was measured from when the No-protocol Mode instruction was executed until outputting data to the communications line was started. Note The performance values depend on the cycle time of the CPU Unit except when the DRXDU(261) instruction is used in an interrupt task.
Receiving Data
The times that are given in the following table are the shortest intervals for which data will not be missed on the receiving end when data is sent cyclically from the sending end.
Baud rate Number of bytes CJ1WSCU@1-V1 RXDU(255) (ms) CJ1W-SCU@2 RXDU(255) (ms) DRXDU(261) (ms) Cyclic task External interrupt task 2.3 2.3 10.0 10.0 49.4 49.4 1.3 1.3 5.2 5.2 25.0 25.0 0.8 0.8 2.8 2.8 12.8 12.7
57,600 bps
---
333
Section 10-1
The times that are given in the following table are the times from when a send instruction was executed until the next send instruction can be executed.
Baud rate Number of bytes CJ1WSCU@1-V1 TXDU(256) (ms) CJ1W-SCU@2 TXDU(256) (ms) DTXDU(262) (ms) Cyclic task Scheduled interrupt task 2.5 2.3 10.2 10.0 49.7 49.4 1.5 1.3 5.4 5.2 25.2 25.0 1.1 0.8 3.0 2.8 13.0 12.7
57,600 bps
---
Note
(1) The measurement conditions for the above values are as follows: The ladder program contained only the No-protocol Mode instruction and instructions to measure the time. Port 1 was used as the reception port and port 2 was not used. The following serial communications parameters were used: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, even parity, start code of 0, and specified number of received data bytes for end code. Configuration used for receive performance measurement: CJ2H-CPU65-EIP + Serial Communications Unit + OD211 Configuration used for send performance measurement: CJ2H-CPU65-EIP + Serial Communications Unit (2) The following measurement methods were used. Receiving Data The shortest intervals were measured for which data will not be missed on the receiving end when a value incremented by 1 each cycle is sent cyclically from the sending end. Sending Data The time was measured from send instruction execution until the next send instruction could be executed.
Note
The performance values depend on the cycle time of the CPU Unit except when the DTXDU(262) or DRXDU(261) instruction is used in an interrupt task.
334
Section 10-1
Sending Data
The times that are given in the following table are the times required from executing PMCR(260) until the data is placed on the communications line.
Item From instruction execution until send is started Number of bytes 10 50 256 498 CJ1W-SCU@1-V1 PMCR(260) (ms) 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 CJ1W-SCU@2 PMCR(260) (ms) 32.0 32.0 35.5 35.5
Note
(1) The measurement conditions for the above values are as follows: The ladder program contained only PMCR(260) and instructions to measure the time. Port 1 was used as the reception port and port 2 was not used. The following serial communications parameters were used: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, even parity, start code of 0, and specified number of received data bytes for end code. Configuration used for reception performance measurement: CJ2H-CPU65-EIP + Serial Communications Unit + OD211 Configuration used for send performance measurement: CJ2H-CPU65-EIP + Serial Communications Unit (2) The following measurement methods were used. Receiving Data The protocol macro contained only Recv. PMCR(260) was executed in advance to achieve reception standby state. The time was measured from when all of the data was placed on the communications time until the received data was stored in memory in the CPU Unit. Sending Data The protocol macro contained only Send. The time was measured from when PMCR(260) was executed was executed until data was output to the communications line.
335
Section 10-1
The performance values depend on the cycle time of the CPU Unit.
Receiving Data
The times that are given in the following table are the shortest intervals for which data will not be missed on the receiving end when data is sent cyclically from the sending end.
Baud rate 57,600 bps Number of bytes 10 50 256 10 50 256 10 50 256 CJ1W-SCU@1-V1 PMCR(260) (ms) 10.1 10.9 49.4 --CJ1W-SCU@2 PMCR(260) (ms) 2.3 10.0 49.4 1.3 5.9 25.0 0.8 2.8 12.7
115,200 bps
230,400 bps
---
Sending Data
The times that are given in the following table are the times required from executing PMCR(260) until the next PMCR(260) can be executed.
Baud rate 57,600 bps Number of bytes 10 50 256 10 50 256 10 50 256 CJ1W-SCU@1-V1 PMCR(260) (ms) 70.3 69.9 111.1 --CJ1W-SCU@2 PMCR(260) (ms) 61.0 60.8 102.2 60.7 60.8 81.2 60.7 60.8 60.8
115,200 bps
230,400 bps
---
Note
(1) The measurement conditions for the above values are as follows: The ladder program contained only PMCR(260) and instructions to measure the time. Port 1 was used as the reception port and port 2 was not used. The following serial communications parameters were used: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, even parity, start code of 0, and specified number of received data bytes for end code. Configuration used for reception performance measurement: CJ2H-CPU65-EIP + Serial Communications Unit + OD211 Configuration used for send performance measurement: CJ2H-CPU65-EIP + Serial Communications Unit (2) The following measurement methods were used. Receiving Data The protocol macro contained only Recv.
336
Section 10-1
PMCR(260) was executed in advance to achieve reception standby state. The shortest intervals were measured for which data will not be missed on the receiving end when a value incremented by 1 each cycle is sent cyclically from the sending end. Sending Data The protocol macro contained only Send. The time was measured from PMCR(260) execution until the next PMCR(260) could be executed. Note The performance values depend on the cycle time of the CPU Unit.
CJ1W-SCU@2
337
Section 10-1
338
339
Section 11-1
05
01
Command code
RS-422A/485 Port
Command code
RS-422A/485 Port
CJ1W-SCU32/42
Tra Ma Bo Co
11-1-3 Procedure
The loopback test is performed using the procedure shown below. 1,2,3... 1. Connect the connector of the port to be used to execute the loopback test. See 11-1-2 Connection Method for details. 2. Set the serial communications mode in the Setup Area to Loopback Test (F Hex). Refer to 11-2 Setup Area Allocations. 3. Set the following communications settings for the loopback test in the Setup Area: Baud rate, stop bits, parity, and data length. Refer to 11-2 Setup Area Allocations. 4. Cycle the power, restart the Unit or Board, or restart the port.
340
Section 11-1
Use the following bits to restart the Board or Unit. Board: A60800 Units: A501, bits 00 to 15 (bits correspond to unit numbers 0 to F) Use the following bits to restart the port. Board: A636, bit 01 for port 1 and bit 02 for port 2 Units: A620 + unit number, bit 01 for port 1 and bit 02 for port 2 5. Turn ON the Loopback Test Switch. To end the test, turn OFF the switch. The Loopback Test Switches are as follows: Board: CIO 1900, bit 06 for port 1 and bit 14 for port 2 Unit: n, bit 06 for port 1 and bit 14 for port 2 (n = CIO 1500 + 25 x Unit No.) Refer to 11-3 CIO Area Allocations. 6. Use the protocol status to check the results. Refer to 11-3 CIO Area Allocations.
341
Section 11-2
15 14 to 12 11 to 08 07 to 05 04 03 02 01 00 15 to 04 03 to 00
D32001
D32011
m+1
m + 11
Port settings 0: Defaults, 1: User settings Reserved Serial communications mode: Always F Hex (Loopback test) Reserved Start bits 0: 1 bit; 1: 1 bit (1 start bit is always used regardless of this setting) Data length 0: 7 bits, 1: 8 bits Start bits 0: 2 bits, 1: 1 bit Parity 0: Yes, 1: No Parity 0: Even, 1: Odd Reserved Baud rate (bps) 0 hex: Default (9,600); 3 hex: 1,200; 4 hex: 2,400; 5 hex: 4,800; 6 hex: 9,600; 7 hex: 19,200; 8 hex: 38,400; 9 hex: 57,600; A hex: 115,200; B hex: 230,400 (See note.)
Note Supported only by CJ1W-SCU@2 Units with unit version 2.0. Serial Communications Mode Set the serial communications mode to F Hex to perform a loopback test. For the other settings, refer to 4-2 Setup Area Allocations.
342
Section 11-3
15 14 to 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 15 to 00 15 to 00
Test status
Error Reserved DTR check error CTS check error Reserved Timeout error Parity error
n + 10 n + 11
n + 20 n + 21
Overrun error Framing error Reserved Conveyor error Test execution count Test error count Reserved
n + 12 to n + 22 to 15 to 00 n + 14 n + 24
The test execution count and test error count are cleared at startup. If the number of tests or the number of test errors is counted to FFFF (hex), the value of the count will remain at FFFF, but testing will continue.
343
Section 11-3
344
345
Section 12-1
Not lit
Flashing
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Lit
Lit
Flashing
The Board has started normally. --The Board is faulty (hardware self-diagnos- If the ERR and ALM indicators light when tic function). the Board is mounted to another CPU Unit, replace the Board. A bus error has occurred. Firmly secure the Board to the CPU Unit. An initialization recognition error has If the ERR and ALM indicators light when occurred (the Board is not correctly recog- the Board is mounted to another CPU Unit, nized by the CPU Unit). replace the Board. If the ERR and ALM indicators light when An initialization recognition error has the Board is mounted to another CPU Unit, occurred (the Serial Communications Unit replace the Board. was not recognized by the CPU Unit). The CPU Unit is not receiving normal power Check the power supply voltage and supply the correct electric power to the Unit. supply. Firmly secure the Board. The Board is not correctly secured to the CPU Unit. If all the indicators are not lit when the Board is mounted to another CPU Unit, The Board is faulty. replace the Board. Eliminate the cause of the error. If the error An error (such as a CPU Unit WDT error) persists, replace the CPU Unit. has occurred in the CPU Unit. The Board is faulty. If all the indicators are not lit when the Serial Communications Unit is mounted to another CPU Unit, replace the Unit. A bus error has occurred. Check the operating environment and eliminate the cause of the error. Firmly secure the Board. Refer to A42400 and A42401. Conduct a loopback test. If an error occurs, The communications circuit is faulty. replace the Board. A protocol data syntax error has occurred. Correct the protocol data and transfer it to the Board. Try executing a normal sequence for the serial port where the error is occurring or switch the CPU Unit to PROGRAM mode and remove the cause of the error. Correct the Setup Area settings, and cycle A system setting error has occurred. the power, restart the Board, restart the port, or execute STUP(237). When the routing tables are used, set them The routing tables are not set correctly. correctly. When the routing tables are not used, delete the Board settings from the table. Eliminate the cause of the error. If the error An error has occurred in the CPU Unit. persists, replace the CPU Unit. Cycle the power supply. If the error persists, The error log EEPROM is faulty. replace the CPU Unit. A Protocol Data File (BACKUP@@.PRM) is --being read (restored) from the CPU Units Memory Card to the Board.
Flashing
Not lit
346
Section 12-1
RDY Lit
Flashing
Flashing
A Protocol Data File (BACKUP@@.PRM) was read (restored) from the CPU Units Memory Card to the Board properly. A protocol data write error has occurred or protocol data has been destroyed. There is no protocol data.
---
If the indicator status remains the same when the protocol data is retransmitted, replace the Board. Transfer protocol data to the Board. Write (backup) the protocol data from the Board to the Memory Card again and then execute the restore operation again. If the restore operation fails two times in succession, use CX-Protocol to transfer the protocol data to the Board.
Flashing
Flashing
The Protocol Data File (BACKUP@@.PRM) restore operation failed when restoring protocol data from the CPU Units Memory Card to the Board. The Protocol Data Error Flag (bit A42409 in CPU Units Auxiliary Area) will be turned ON if the restore operation fails.
For Serial Communications Boards, refer to the following Auxiliary Area word (A424) as well as the indicator displays shown on the previous page. When an error occurs, the corresponding flag is turned ON.
Possible cause The Board is faulty. Remedy Firmly secure the Board to the CPU Unit. If the error persists when the Board is mounted to another CPU Unit, replace the Board. Firmly secure the Board to the CPU Unit. If the error persists when the Board is mounted to another CPU Unit, replace the Board. Install a Board with Unit Ver. 1.2 or later and then execute the TXD(236)/RXD(235) instruction.
Fatal error
01
04
Nonfatal error
05
07 08
Inner Board ser- The TXD(236)/RXD(235) vice failure instruction was sent using noprotocol mode to a Board that does not support no-protocol communications (pre-Ver.1.2). Cyclic monitor- The Inner Bus access right ing error cannot be retained for more than the specified time. Routing table The routing tables are not set error correctly. System setting A system setting error has error occurred. Protocol data error Protocol macro execution error A protocol data checksum error has occurred. A syntax error has occurred during protocol macro execution.
CPU Unit and system load is too high. Review the application. Correct the routing tables and retransfer them. Correct the Setup Area settings, cycle the power supply, restart the Board, or restart the port, or execute STUP(237). If the error persists when protocol data is retransmitted, replace the Board. Correct the protocol data and retransfer it. Try executing a correct sequence for the serial port where the error is occurring or switch the CPU Unit to PROGRAM mode and remove the cause of the error. If this error persists even if the power supply is cycled, replace the Board.
09 10
11
When a fatal error occurs, the ERR and ALM indicators on the CPU Unit will light. When a non-fatal error occurs, the ERR and ALM indicators on the CPU Unit will flash. Refer to the indicator error displays. Note The ERR/ALM indicator will continue to flash even after the cause of a nonfatal error has been removed for the Serial Communications Board. The indicator can be stopped by clearing the error from a Programming Console or
347
Section 12-1
other Programming Device for errors for bits 05, 07, 08, 09, and 10. Press the FUN Key and then the MONITOR Key from the Programming Console. Refer to the CX-Programmer Operation Manual for the CX-Programmer procedure.
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Lit Lit
Not lit
If the ERC indicator lights up when the Serial Communications Unit is mounted to another CPU Unit, replace the Unit. Assign a unique unit number to each Not lit Lit --Serial Communications Unit on the CPU Rack and Expansion Racks. An initial recognition error has occurred (the If the ERH indicator lights up when the Serial Communications Unit was not correctly Serial Communications Unit is mounted recognized by the CPU Unit). to another CPU Unit, replace the Unit. If the ERC and ERH indicators light Lit Lit --An initial recognition error has occurred (the Serial Communications Unit was not correctly when the Serial Communications Unit is mounted to another CPU Unit, replace recognized by the CPU Unit). the Unit. Check the power supply voltage and Not lit Not lit Not lit The CPU Unit is not receiving normal power supply. supply the correct electric power to the Unit. The Serial Communications Unit is not corFirmly secure the Unit. rectly secured to the Backplane (CS-series only) or not correctly secured to the next Unit (CJ-series only). Mount the Unit in an appropriate slot. The Serial Communications Unit is not mounted in an appropriate slot. If all the indicators are not lit when the Serial Communications Unit is mounted The Serial Communications Unit is faulty. to another CPU Unit, replace the Unit. --Flash- --A system setting error has occurred. Correct the Setup Area settings, cycle ing the power supply, restart the Unit/Board, or restart the port, or execute STUP(237). Lit ----The error log EEPROM is faulty. If the problem persists even if the power supply is cycled, replace the Unit. When the routing tables are used, set --Lit --The routing tables are not set correctly. them correctly. When the routing tables are not used, delete the Unit settings from the table. An error (such as a CPU Unit WDT error) has Eliminate the cause of the error. If the occurred in the CPU Unit. error persists, replace the CPU Unit. A CPU Unit service monitoring error has Check the operating environment and occurred. eliminate the cause of the error. (Check to be sure that the problem is not caused A bus error has occurred. by another CPU Bus Unit having the same unit number.) Check the operating environment and eliminate the cause of the error. Firmly secure the Unit. Not lit Not lit Flash- A Protocol Data File (BACKUP@@.PRM) is --ing being read (restored) from the CPU Units Memory Card to the Serial Communications Unit.
348
Section 12-2
Remedy
RUN Lit
Lit
Flash- --ing
Lit
Flash- --ing
Lit
Lit
---
A Protocol Data File (BACKUP@@.PRM) was --read (restored) from the CPU Units Memory Card to the Serial Communications Unit properly. If the indicator status remains the same Flash- A protocol data write error has occurred or when the protocol data is retransmitted, ing protocol data has been destroyed. replace the Unit. Transfer protocol data to the Unit. There is no protocol data. Lit A protocol data syntax error has occurred. Correct the protocol data and transfer it to the Unit. The ERC indicator can also be turned OFF by executing a normal sequence for the serial port for which the error is occurring or by switching the CPU Unit to PROGRAM mode temporarily. Flash- The flash memory for protocol data is faulty. Transfer the protocol data to the Unit. ing If the problem persists after correct The Protocol Data File (BACKUP@@.PRM) protocol data is transferred, replace restore operation failed when restoring prothe Unit. tocol data from the CPU Units Memory Write (backup) the protocol data from Card to the Serial Communications Unit. the Unit to the Memory Card again and then execute the restore operation again. If the restore operation fails two times in succession, use CX-Protocol to transfer the protocol data to the Serial Communications Unit.
Word Bit Boards Units (CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series) CIO 1901 n+1 01
Error Log data error Protocol data error System Setup error
The error log EEPROM is faulty. A protocol data checksum error has occurred. A System Setup error has occurred.
00
CIO 1906
CIO 1916
n+6
n + 16
01
CIO 1907
CIO 1917
n+7
n + 17
10
08
The remote node is in reception buffer busy status when flow control is set for the protocol. The local node is in Increase the transmission interval reception buffer busy to reduce transmission load to status. the remote node for which flow control is set.
If the problem persists even if the power supply is cycled, replace the Board/Unit. If the error persists when protocol data is retransmitted, replace the Board or Unit. Correct the Setup Area settings, cycle the power supply, restart the Unit/Board, or restart the port, or execute the STUP(237) instruction. Cancel the communications with the remote node until this flag is turned OFF.
349
Troubleshooting
Section 12-3
12-3 Troubleshooting
This section describes how to resolve transmission and reception problems. m and n in the tables represent the following word addresses for the Board and Unit.
Symbol m n Boards (CS Series only) D32000 CIO 1900 Units (CS/CJ Series) D30000 + 100 x unit number CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number
Set bits 08 to 11 (Serial Communications Mode) of DM Area words m/m + 10 to 0 or 5 Hex (Host Link).
350
Troubleshooting
Serial communications mode Serial communications mode is set to Host Link. Indicator status The SD@/RD@ and COM@ indicators do not flash at all. (Communications have not been electrically established.) Status information, etc. ----CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
Cables are incorrectly connected. The RS-422A/485 port setting (2-wire or 4-wire) is incorrect. Adapters such as the NT-AL001-E are incorrectly wired or set. Commands are not being set from the host. This is a hardware error.
Check the wiring. Reset the port to the correct wiring setting. Wire all nodes using the 4wire method.
There is no The RD@ and COM@ indica- transmission error. tors are flashing, but the response has not been returned from the host. For the Unit, the SD@ indicator does not flash at all (Communications have been electrically established.)
CIO Area words n + 8/n + 18 (transmission error status) are set to 0000 Hex. CIO Area words n + 5/n + 15 (port settings in the System Setup) do not correspond to the settings of the remote device.
---
Reset the serial port at the host, and rewrite the program. Set bits 08 to 11 (Serial Communications Mode) of DM Area words m/m + 10 to F Hex (Loopback Test Serial Communications Mode). Then, connect the connector wire for a loopback test and conduct a loopback test by turning ON bit 14 (Loopback Test Switch) of CIO Area word n. The test data is reflected in CIO Area words n+9/n+19. If an error occurs during the test, replace the Board or Unit. The System Setup Reset the settings in DM in DM Area words m Area words m + 2 and m + 3/m + 12 and m + 13 of the + 2 and m + 3/m + Board or Unit (Host Link 12 and m + 13 of Unit No., Host Link send the Board or Unit (Host Link Unit No., delay time, etc.) so that they correspond to the setHost Link send tings at the host device. delay time, etc.) does not correCorrect the command spond to the setframe (header, Host Link tings for the remote Unit No., terminator, etc.) device. and the program. The command format and data length of the data sent from the host are incorrect. Check the wiring. Cables are incorrectly connected. Reset the port to the corThe RS-422A/485 port setting (2-wire rect wiring setting. or 4-wire) is incorWire all nodes using the 4rect. wire method. Adapters such as the NT-AL001-E are incorrectly wired or set.
351
Troubleshooting
Serial communications mode Serial communications mode is set to Host Link. Indicator status Status information, etc. --CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
There is no The RD@ and COM@ indica- transmission error. tors are flashing, but the response has not been returned from the host. For the Unit, the SD@ indicator does not flash at all. (Communications have been electrically established.)
Conduct a loopback test in serial communications mode to check the transmission lines. If an error occurs during the test, replace the Board or Unit. Reset the frame parameThe following settings in the FA com- ters correctly. mand frame are incorrect. The ICF is set to have no response. The value of the remote destination address (DNA, DA1, DA2) has not been properly set. The send delay time Reset the parameters in setting is too long. the System Setup correctly. The CTS control is Perform one of the followCTS control is ON set, but the RTS sig- ing: and bit 04 of CIO Area words n + 7/n nal from the remote Wire the local Unit RTS + 17 (CTS signal) is Unit has not entered signal to the CTS signal in the CTS signal of using loopback. OFF. the local Unit. Disable the CTS control. Enter the RTS signal of the remote Unit into the CTS signal of the local Unit, and then use CTS control. Review the System Setup, In CIO Area words n The communications conditions and the hosts settings and pro+ 8/n + 18, bit 15 gram (such as commands (transmission error baud rate do not match the settings and frame format) based status) is turned at the host. on the response contents, ON, and bit 04 and the transmission error (overrun error), bit codes in CIO Area words n 03 (framing error), + 8/n + 18. or bit 02 (parity error) is turned ON. There is noise inter- Use shielded twisted-pair ference. cables. Lay power lines separately using ducts. Review the installation environment to reduce noise interference.
352
Troubleshooting
Serial communications mode Serial communications mode is set to Host Link. Indicator status The RD@/SD@ and COM@ indicators are flashing, and an error response has returned to the host. The RD@/SD@ and COM@ indicators are flashing, but sometimes there is no response returned. Status information, etc. There is no transmission error. There is a transmission error. CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
CIO Area words n + 8/n + 18 (transmission error status) are set to 0000 Hex. In CIO Area words n + 8/n + 18, bit 15 (transmission error status) is turned ON, and bit 04 (overrun error), bit 03 (framing error), or bit 02 (parity error) is turned ON. In CIO Area words n + 8/n + 18, bit 15 (transmission error status) is turned ON, and bit 04 (overrun error), bit 03 (framing error), or bit 02 (parity error) is turned ON. Terminating resistance switch (TERM ON/OFF) status
A command was sent from the host with incorrect parameters. The communications conditions and baud rate do not match the settings at the host.
Review the hosts settings and program (such as parameter settings) based on the response contents. Review the System Setup, the hosts settings and program (such as commands and frame format) based on the response contents, and the transmission error codes in CIO Area words n + 8/n + 18. Review the System Setup. Review the hosts settings and program (such as baud rate and frame format).
The baud rate is outside the allowable range, and the stop bits do not match, causing the bits to be out of alignment.
Cables are incorrectly connected. The RS-422A/485 port terminating resistance setting is incorrect. Adapters such as the NT-AL001-E are incorrectly wired or the terminating resistance is incorrectly set. CIO Area words n + Transmission errors 8/n + 18 (transmis- are occurring that are caused by noise sion error status) are not set to 0000 interference. Hex.
Check the wiring. Turn ON the terminating resistance of the Board and the last node by using the terminating resistance switch. Turn OFF the terminating resistance of other nodes.
Use shielded twisted-pair cables. Lay power lines separately using ducts. Review the installation environment to reduce noise interference. Programming retry processing for communications if necessary.
353
Troubleshooting
Serial communications mode Host Link (with unsolicited communications) Indicator status The SD@/RD@ and COM@ indicators are all flashing. Status information, etc. SEND(090)/ RECV(098)/ CMND(490) instructions have been executed but have not been sent. CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
The contents of the S, C, and D operands for the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions is set in a read-protected area. Bit 00 to 07 of word The contents of the A219 (Communica- S, C, and D operands for the tions Port Error SEND(090), Flag) are set to 1 RECV(098), and (ON). CMND(490) instructions is set incorrectly. The ER Flag (one of The communicathe condition flags) tions port number to is ON. be used is executing a SEND(090)/ The CommunicaRECV(098)/ tions Port Enabled CMND(490) instrucFlag (A20200 to tion or PMCR(260) A20207)is OFF (execution disabled) instruction.
Check the contents of the S, C, and D operands of the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions, and correct if necessary.
Check the contents of the S, C, and D operands of the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions, and correct if necessary.
Program is incorThe Communicarect. tions Port Enabled Flag (A20200 to A20207) is set as an NC the execution condition for SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions. The Board or Unit is Bit 15 of DM Area words m + 3/m + 13 set for CTS control, but the RTS signal (CTS control) is from the host is not turned ON, and bit input into the CTS 04 of CIO Area words n + 7/n + 17 signal of the local Unit. (CTS signal) is turned OFF.
Either use a different communications port number than the one being used to execute the SEND(090)/ RECV(098)/ CMND(490) instruction or PMCR(260) instruction, or wait for the same communications port number to be enabled and execute the instruction. Set the Communications Port Enabled Flag as an NC execution condition for SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions.
Perform one of the following error processing methods. Loopback the RTS and CTS signals on the local Unit. Set to no CTS control. Input the RTS signal from the remote Unit into the CTS signal of the local Unit for CTS control.
354
Troubleshooting
Serial communications mode Host Link, slave-initiated communications Indicator status The SD@ and COM@ indicators are flashing, but there is no response from the host. Status information, etc. --A transmission error has not been detected at the host. CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
Conduct a loopback test in serial communications mode to check the transmission lines. If an error occurs during the test, replace the Board or Unit. --Cables are incorCheck the wiring and correctly wired. rect. --There is a hardConduct a loopback test in ware error in the serial communications reception circuit. mode to check the transmission lines. If an error Adapters such as the NT-AL001-E are occurs during the test, incorrectly wired or replace the Board or Unit. set. ----Check the program at the host. When unsolicited communications are used with Host Link mode, there must be a response returned from the host for every command sent from the Board or Unit. Reset the parameters in CIO Area words n + The communications conditions and the System Setup and at 5/n + 15 (port setthe host correctly. ting status in Setup baud rate do not match the settings Area settings) do not correspond with at the host. the settings at the host.
Note The System Setup cannot be changed unless the power supply is cycled, the Board or Unit is restarted, the port is restarted, or the STUP(237) instruction is executed. Refer to 1-7 Comparison to Previous Products for details.
355
Troubleshooting
Section 12-3
The Board/ Unit cannot convert the received (via CPU bus) FINS command into either of the protocols.
Bits 12 to 15 of the words allocated in the CIO Area n+5/n+15 (serial communications mode) are set to a value other than 9 hex or 6 hex. 2 hex, F hex, or 3 hex
Set DM Area word m/ m+10 bits 08 to 11 (serial communications mode) either to 9 hex (Serial Gateway mode) or 6 hex (protocol macro mode).
---
FINS command was sent using Serial Gateway to a Board/Unit with Unit Ver. 1.2 or later. FINS command was sent using Serial Gateway to a preVer. 1.2 Board/Unit that does not support Serial Gateway communications. Replace the Board/Unit with one that supports Serial Gateway mode (Unit Ver. 1.2 or later), and set the serial communications mode to Serial Gateway or protocol macro mode.
356
Troubleshooting
Error conditions Serial commuIndicator FINS end nications mode display code sent to FINS transmission source The serial communications mode is set to Serial Gateway or protocol macro mode. The SD@/ RD@ and COM@ indicators do not flash at all. (Communications have not been electrically established.) The SD@ and COM@ indicators do not flash. Cause Words allocated in CIO Area
Section 12-3
Remedy
Board/Unit status
The Board/ Unit cannot convert the received (via CPU bus) FINS command into either of the protocols.
Conduct a loopback test in serial communications mode to check the transmission lines. If an error occurs during the test, replace the Board or Unit.
The serial communications mode is set to Serial Gateway or protocol macro mode
The SD@ and 2605 hex COM@ indi- (service execators do not cuting) flash at all.
Correct the FINS destination address specification, and then resend the FINS message. (Refer particularly to 6-7 Conditions Requiring Routing Tables.) Include retry processing The serial port received at the FINS command a sixth FINS transmission source for when the FINS response command code 2605 hex is when five received. FINS commands are already waiting. The FINS destination address is not specified correctly.
357
Troubleshooting
Error conditions Indicator FINS end display code sent to FINS transmission source The SD@ and 0204 hex Serial communications COM@ indi- (remote node cators do not busy) mode is set flash at all. to protocol macro mode Serial communications mode Cause Words allocated in CIO Area
Section 12-3
Remedy
Board/Unit status
The Board/ Unit converted the received (via CPU bus) FINS command, but could not send the command to the remote device after conversion.
Bit 05 of CIO word n+9/ n+19 (Serial Gateway Send Start Timeout/ Response Timeout Flag) is ON.
Bit 08 of CIO word n+9/ n+19 (Serial Gateway Prohibited Flag) is ON (prohibited status) 0205 hex Bit 15 of CIO (response word m+3/ timeout), etc. m+13 (CTS control) is ON but bit 4 of CIO word n+7/n+17 is OFF. 2607 hex (transmission command error (no right to execute service))
A Serial Gateway send start timeout has occurred. (The converted command will be discarded without being sent). The FINS command was received by the Board/ Unit, but the step transition in the communications sequence of the protocol macro is suspended for either of the following reasons. 1) The next step is a RECEIVE command. 2) The WAIT command is being executed. The Serial Gateway is prohibited.
Correct the communications sequence. Alternatively, include retry processing at the FINS command transmission source for when the FINS response code 0204 hex is received. Adjust the time set for the serial gateway Send Start Timeout Monitoring Time in DM Area word m+7/m+17, as required.
Turn OFF bits 04/12 of CIO word n (Port 1/2 Serial Gateway Prohibit Switch).
CTS control is set to ON but the RS signal from the remote device has not been input to the CS signal of the local node.
Perform either of the following: Loop the RS-CS signals of the local node. Disable CTS control. Input the RS signal from the remote node to the CS signal of the local node and use CTS control.
358
Troubleshooting
Transmission Successful but Response from Remote Device Not Received
Board/Unit Serial comstatus munications mode Error conditions Indicator FINS end display code sent to FINS transmission source 0205 hex The SD@ The serial and COM@ (response communicatimeout), etc. tions mode is indicators are flashing set to Serial but the RD@ Gateway or does not protocol macro mode. flash. Cause Words allocated in CIO Area
Section 12-3
Remedy
The converted command could be sent to the remote device but a normal response is not received from the remote device.
Bit 05 of CIO word n+8/ n+18 (Serial Gateway Send Start Timeout/ Response Timeout) is ON.
A Serial Gateway response timeout has occurred and the response data cannot be received after the timeout. Either of the following causes is possible. A remote device that can receive the command after conversion does not exist at the specified FINS destination address. The sent command frame is illegal. The communications conditions and baud rate settings for the serial communications path do not match the settings at the remote device. Cable connections are incorrect or faulty. The RS-422A/485 port setting (2-wire or 4-wire) is incorrect. Adapters such as the NT-AL001-E are incorrectly wired or terminating resistance is not set correctly. A command was sent in a protocol not understood by the remote device.
Revise the command frame to be converted. Revise the settings in the Setup Area and at the remote device.
Review the wiring or switch settings. Turn ON the terminating resistance switch at two locations (remote device or board) and turn OFF the terminating resistance switch at all other nodes.
Check the command specifications of the remote device and the source of command conversion.
A hardware error Replace the remote has occurred in device. the remote device.
359
Troubleshooting
Error conditions Indicator FINS end display code sent to FINS transmission source 0205 hex Either the (response SD@/RD@ and COM@ timeout), etc. indicators all flash. Cause Words allocated in CIO Area
Section 12-3
Remedy
The converted command could be sent to the remote device but a normal response is not received from the remote device.
The serial communications mode is set to Serial Gateway or protocol macro mode.
The SD@ and COM@ indicators flash, but a response is not always returned. The RD@/ SD@, and COM@ indicators all flash, but a response is not always returned.
Bit 05 of CIO word n+8/ n+18 (Serial Gateway Send Start Timeout/ Response Timeout) is ON. Bit 02, 03, 04, or 15 of CIO word n+8/ n+18 (transfer error, overrun error, framing error, or parity error) is ON.
The response from the remote device is too fast and the data received by the Board/Unit has been discarded. A hardware error has occurred in the reception circuit of the Board/ Unit.
Conduct a loopback test in serial communications mode to check the transmission lines. If an error occurs during the test, replace the Board or Unit. A transmission Use shielded twistederror has occurred pair cables. due to noise. Lay power lines separately using ducts. Increase the number of resends at the FINS transmission source. Perform communications retry as required.
360
Troubleshooting
Response Received from Remote Device but Error Remains
Board/Unit status Error conditions Words alloSerial comIndicator FINS end cated in municadisplay code sent CIO Area tions mode to FINS transmission source The serial The RD@/ 0000 hex --communica- SD@ and tions mode COM@ indiis set to cators all Serial Gate- flash. way or protocol macro mode. Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
A normal FINS end code is returned from the remote device, but there is no response data after the end code. A response was received from the remote device after a response timeout error was received for a converted command that was sent to the remote device. A FINS error end code was returned to the FINS transmission source.
The FINS command Check the specifications of the command to be conrequires a verted. response, but the command after conversion does not require a response (e.g., broadcasting)
Bit 05 of CIO word n+8/ n+18 (Serial Gateway send start timeout or Serial Gateway response timeout) is ON.
A Serial Gateway response timeout occurred, but the response data was received normally after the timeout. This is a result of the Serial Gateway response timeout monitoring time setting in DM Area word m+7/m+17 being too short.
Set a longer time for the Serial Gateway response timeout monitoring time in DM Area word m+7/m+17.
CIO word n+8/n+18 bit 07 (FCS check error) or bit 02 (parity error) is ON.
Either of the following errors occurred in the protocol after conversion. Conversion to CompoWay/F command: BCC error or parity error Conversion to Modbus-RTU command: CRC error or parity error Conversion to Modbus-ASCII command: CRC error or checksum error Conversion to Host Link FINS command: FCS error or parity error The Serial Gateway was executed, but the FINS error completion occurred.
Use shielded twisted-pair cables. Lay power lines separately using ducts. Increase the number of resends at the FINS transmission source. Perform communications retry as required.
---
Perform error processing based on the following table of FINS end codes.
361
Section 12-3
Corrective measure
--The Serial Gateway cannot be executed as an interrupt between steps in the protocol macro. The message frame was destroyed by noise.
--Perform FINS send retry processing or change the communications sequence. If Bit 05 of CIO word n+8/n+18 is OFF, a response timeout has occurred at the FINS transmission source. Perform the following: Test communications to check the noise conditions. Increase the number of retries at the FINS command transmission source. Perform communications retries, if necessary. Increase the length of the response monitoring time. Take appropriate measures based on the error history. If bit 05 of CIO word n+8/n+18 is ON, take appropriate measures for a Serial Gateway response timeout. Use shielded twisted-pair cables. Lay power lines separately using ducts. Increase the number of resends at the FINS transmission source. Perform communications retry as required. Check the command format and correct the command data. Check the command format and correct the command data.
Bit 05 in CIO word n+8/n+18 (Serial Gateway timeout or Serial Gateway response timeout) CIO word n+8/n+18 bit 07 (FCS check error) or bit 02 (parity error)
The response monitoring time is too short. The send/receive frame was discarded. A Serial Gateway response timeout has occurred.
06
Conversion to CompoWay/F command: BCC error or parity error Conversion to Modbus-RTU command: CRC error or parity error Conversion to Modbus-ASCII command: CRC error or checksum error The command is longer than the maximum permissible length. The command is shorter than the maximum permissible length.
10
01
Command data
02
Command data
362
Troubleshooting
MRC (Main response code) Value Contents (hex) 11 SRC (Sub-response code) Value Contents (hex) Check point Probable cause
Section 12-3
Corrective measure
Parameter error 0C
26
Command error 05
07
No execution right
Check the command data and correct the parameter settings. The service is being Include retry processing at the FINS executed. (A sixth FINS command has command transmisbeen received at the sion source for when serial port when five the FINS response FINS commands are code 2605 hex is already waiting to be received. processed.) Serial Gateway is If the Serial Gateprohibited (bit 08 of way is prohibited, CIO word n+9/n+19 turn OFF bit 04/12 in is ON) CIO word n (Serial Gateway Prohibit Switch port 1/2).
363
Troubleshooting
Section 12-3
CIO Area word n+5/n+15 bits The serial commu- --12 to 15 (serial communica- nications mode is tions mode) is set to a value not set correctly. other than 3 hex. Bit A42404 (Inner Board service failure) in the Auxiliary Area is ON during execution of the RXD(235) instruction. Set bits 08 to 11 of DM Area word m/ m+10 (serial communications mode) to 3 hex (no-protocol mode). Or Install a Board with Unit Ver. 1.2 or later that supports no-protocol communications, and after replacing, set the serial communications mode to no-protocol mode. FINS end The serial commu- Set bits 08 to 11 of code such as nications mode is DM Area word m/ m+10 (serial com0401 hex not set correctly. munications mode) (undefined Or to 3 hex (no-protocommand) is A no-protocol col mode). returned. instruction was FINS end sent using no-pro- Or code such as tocol mode to a Install a Board with 0205 hex Unit Ver. 1.2 or Board that does (response not support no-pro- later that supports timeout) is tocol communica- no-protocol comreturned. tions (pre-Ver.1.2). munications, and after replacing, set the serial communications mode to no-protocol mode. The serial communications mode is not set correctly. Or A no-protocol instruction was sent using no-protocol mode to a Board that does not support no-protocol communications (pre-Ver.1.2). The P_ER Flag turns ON immediately after instruction execution. The P_ER Flag turns ON 1 ms after instruction execution. The serial commu- Set bits 08 to 11 of nications mode is DM Area word m/ not set correctly. m+10 (serial communications mode) to 3 hex (no-protocol mode). DRXDU(261) is Change the Unit to supported only by a CJ1W-SCU@2 the CJ1W-SCU@2. and set the serial communications mode to no-protocol mode.
Unit: Protocol macro mode, NT Link, loopback test Unit: Host Link
---
---
Unit: CJ1WSCU@2
---
---
---
---
364
Troubleshooting
Error conditions Serial communiIndicator Status and cations mode display other conditions The serial com--munications mode is set to noprotocol mode. --Words allocated in CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
Conduct a loopback test in serial communications mode to check the transmission lines. If an error occurs during the test, replace the Board or Unit. ----The cables are not Check the wiring. connected correctly. Reset the port to The setting of the the correct wiring 2/4-wire switch for setting. the RS-422A/485 Wire all nodes port does not using the 4-wire match the actual method. wiring. The wiring of adapters such as the NT-AL001-E is incorrect. --CTS control is ON, but bit 04 CTS control is set, Perform either of the following: but the remote of word n+7/n+17 (CS) is nodes RS signal is Loop the RS-CS OFF. not being input in signals of the local the local nodes CS node. signal. Disable CTS control. Input the RS signal from the remote node to the CS signal of the local node and use CTS control. The RD@ A transmisCIO word n+8/n+18 bit 15 The settings in the Correct the settings in the Setup and COM@ sion error has (transmission error) or bit 04 Setup Area such Area. indicators occurred. (overrun error) is ON. as baud rate and flash but frame format do Revise the remote communicanot match those of device settings and tions are not the remote device. program (e.g., always possiThe baud rate is baud rate, frame ble. outside the permis- format) sible range, or the bits have been displaced due to a stop bit error or other error.
---
365
Troubleshooting
Error conditions Serial communiIndicator Status and cations mode display other conditions The serial com--munications mode is set to noprotocol mode. Words allocated in CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
The ER Flag (type of condiWith Serial Communica- tion flag) is ON. tions Units: The RXDU(255) instruction was sent, but reception is not being executed.
Either use a communications port other than that executing the TXDU(256), RXDU(255), SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), or PMCR(260) instruction, or wait until the required port can be used and execute the instruction. Insert an AND in The Communications Port FINS end code: Error Flags A21900 to 2201 hex (not pos- the input condition A21907 are ON. sible during execu- for a NO condition tion) was returned. of the Communications Port Enabled If the RXDU(255) Flag. instruction was executed, the operation is disabled due to the port being busy while receiving. Insert an AND in FINS end code: 2202 hex (not pos- the input condition for a NC condition sible while of the Serial Comstopped) was munications Units returned. Execution is not possible Port Settings while the protocol Change Bit (A62001 to is being switched A63504). using the STUP(237) instruction. Either use a comThe Communications Port The TXDU(256)/ munications port Enabled Flags (A20200 to RXDU(255) other than that exeA20207) are OFF (execution instruction, or cuting the disabled). SEND(090), TXDU(256), RECV(098), RXDU(255), CMND(490), or SEND(090), PMCR(260) instruction is being RECV(098), executed using the CMND(490), or same communica- PMCR(260) instruction (Bits 12 tions port No. to 15 of C1), or wait until the required port can be used and then execute the RXDU(255) instruction.
The setting contents indicated by the operand in the RXDU(255) instruction is incorrect. The TXDU(256)/ RXDU(255) instruction, or SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), or PMCR(260) instruction is being executed using the same communications port No.
366
Troubleshooting
Error conditions Serial communiIndicator Status and cations mode display other conditions The serial com--munications mode is set to noprotocol mode. Words allocated in CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
The P_ER Flag is ON. With Serial Communications Units: DRXDU(261) was executed but reception was not.
With Serial Communications Boards: The RXD(235) instruction was sent, but reception is not being executed.
Auxiliary Area bit A42404 (Inner Board service failure: (non-fatal error)) is ON.
The control data is out of range. Operand N is not between &0 and &256 or #0000 and #0100. A DTXDU(262)/ DRXDU(261) instructions was interrupted by an interrupt task and DTXDU(262)/ DRXDU(261) was executed in the interrupt task as well. The specified Unit was not the CJ1W-SCU22/32/ 42. (In this case the instruction will take up to 1 ms to execute.) The specified Serial Communications Unit was being initialized. The port on the Serial Communications Unit is not specified for noprotocol mode. The setting contents indicated by the operand in the RXD(235) instruction is incorrect. The RXD(235) instruction was sent to a preVer.1.2 Board that does not support no-protocol communications, or a Board is not installed.
Check the DRXDU(261) instruction and make sure all operands are within the specified ranges. Replace the Unit if it is not the CJ1W-SCU@2 Check the program to be sure the DRXDU(261) was not executed at the times specified on the left.
Review the contents of the operand for the RXD(235) instruction. Replace the Board with one that is Unit Ver. 1.2 or later, or install a Board.
367
Troubleshooting
Error conditions Serial communiIndicator Status and cations mode display other conditions The serial com--munications mode is set to noprotocol mode. --Words allocated in CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
---
---
---
Cycle the power or restart the Board, and clear the reception buffer. Note: If an overrun error occurs, the Overrun Error Flag can be turned OFF by cycling the power or restarting the Unit/Board or restarting the port. The Reception Overrun Flag After reception was After data reception is completed is ON completed (after (after Reception the Reception Board: Auxiliary Area bit Completed Flag Completed Flag A35607/A35615 is ON. turned ON), further turns ON), re-exeUnit: CIO Area word n+9/ data was received cute the RXD(235)/ n+19 bit 07 is ON. RXDU(255) (1 byte or more). instruction. --The Reception Completed Reception does Flag is OFF. not complete due to the following facBoard: Auxiliary Area bit tors. A35606/A35614 is OFF. The start code/ Revise the setUnit: CIO Area word n+9/ end code setting tings for the start n+19 bit 06 is OFF. is incorrect. code/end code in DM Area word m+5/m+15. No data has been received. The specified Revise the specinumber of data fied number of bytes has not receive data bytes been received. in allocation DM Area word m+5/ m+15. Cycle the power or Data of 260 restart the Board bytes or more was received in and clear the reception buffer. the reception buffer before the Note: If an overrun error occurs, the RXD(235)/ Overrun Error Flag RXDU(255) can be turned OFF instruction was by cycling the executed. power or restarting the Unit/Board or restarting the port. --A hardware error Conduct a loophas occurred in the back test in serial reception circuit of communications the Board/Unit. mode to check the transmission lines. If an error occurs during the test, replace the Board or Unit. The Overrun Error Flag is ON. Board: CIO 190804/CIO 191804 is ON. Unit: CIO Area word n+8/ n+18 bit 04 is ON. Data of 260 bytes or higher was received in the reception buffer during execution of the RXD(235)/ RXDU(255) instruction.
368
Troubleshooting
Transmission Failure (TXD(236), TXDU(256), or DTXDU(262) Instruction)
Error conditions Words allocated in CIO Area Serial communiIndicator Status and cations mode display other conditions --CIO Area word n+5/n+15 bits Serial communi- --12 to 15 (serial communicacations mode is tions mode) is set to a value no-protocol mode other than 3 hex. Board ----Bit A42404 (Inner Board service failure) in the Auxiliary Area is ON when the TXD(236) instruction is executed. Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
The serial communications mode is not set correctly. The serial communications mode is not set correctly. Or A no-protocol instruction was sent using noprotocol mode to a Board that does not support no-protocol communications (preVer.1.2).
---
---
FINS end code such as 0401 hex (undefined command) is returned. FINS end code such as 0205 hex (response timeout) is returned.
The serial communications mode is not set correctly. Or A no-protocol instruction was sent using noprotocol mode to a Board that does not support no-protocol communications (preVer.1.2).
Set bits 08 to 11 of DM Area word m/ m+10 (serial communications mode) to 3 hex (no-protocol mode). Or Install a Board with Unit Ver. 1.2 or later that supports noprotocol communications, and after replacing, set the serial communications mode to noprotocol mode. Set bits 08 to 11 of DM Area word m/ m+10 (serial communications mode) to 3 hex (no-protocol mode). Or Install a Board with Unit Ver. 1.2 or later that supports noprotocol communications, and after replacing, set the serial communications mode to noprotocol mode. Set bits 08 to 11 of DM Area word m/ m+10 (serial communications mode) to 3 hex (no-protocol mode). Change the Unit to a CJ1W-SCU@2 and set the serial communications mode to no-protocol mode.
Unit: CJ1WSCU@2
---
---
The P_ER Flag turns ON immediately after instruction execution. The P_ER Flag turns ON 1 ms after instruction execution.
---
---
369
Troubleshooting
Error conditions Serial communiIndicator Status and cations mode display other conditions The serial communications mode is set to noprotocol mode. --The SD@/ RD@ and COM@ indicators do not flash at all. (Communications have not been electrically estab--lished.) --Words allocated in CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
---
---
CIO word n+8/n+18 bit 15 The SD@ and A transmission error has (transmission error) or bit 04 COM@ indioccurred. (overrun error) is ON. cators flash but communications are not always possible.
A hardware error Conduct a loopback has occurred. test in serial communications mode to check the transmission lines. If an error occurs during the test, replace the Board or Unit. The cables are Check the wiring. not connected correctly. Reset the port to The setting of the the correct wiring setting. 2/4-wire switch for the RS-422A/ Wire all nodes 485 port does not using the 4-wire match the actual method. wiring. The wiring of adapters such as the NT-AL001-E is incorrect. Perform either of CTS control is the following: set, but the remote nodes Loop the RS-CS RS signal is not signals of the local being input in the node. local nodes CS Disable CTS consignal. trol. Input the RS signal from the remote node to the CS signal of the local node and use CTS control. Correct the setThe settings in tings in the Setup the Setup Area Area. such as baud rate and frame Revise the remote format do not device settings and match those of program (e.g., baud the remote rate, frame format) device. The baud rate is outside the permissible range, or the bits have been displaced due to a stop bit error or other error.
370
Troubleshooting
Error conditions Serial communiIndicator Status and cations mode display other conditions The serial com--munications mode is set to noprotocol mode. Words allocated in CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
The ER Flag (type of condiWith Serial Communica- tion flag) is ON. tions Units: The TXDU(256) instruction was sent, but reception is not being executed.
The setting contents indicated by the operand in the TXDU(256) instruction is incorrect. The TXDU(256)/ RXDU(255) instruction, or SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), or PMCR(260) instruction is being executed using the same communications port No.
FINS end code: 2201 hex (not possible during execution) was returned. If the TXDU(256) instruction was executed, the operation is disabled because the port being busy while receiving. FINS end code: 2202 hex (not possible while stopped) was returned. Execution is not possible while the protocol is being switched using the STUP(237) instruction.
Either use a communications port other than that executing the TXDU(256), RXDU(255), SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), or PMCR(260) instruction, or wait until the required port can be used and execute the instruction. Insert an AND in the input condition for a NC condition of the Communications TXDU(256) Executing Flag (n+9/n+19 bit 05).
Insert an AND in the input condition for a NC condition of the Serial Communications Units Port Settings Change Bits (A62001 to A63504).
371
Troubleshooting
Error conditions Serial communiIndicator Status and cations mode display other conditions The serial com--munications mode is set to noprotocol mode. With Serial Communications Units: The TXDU(256) instruction was sent, but reception is not being executed. Words allocated in CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
The Communications Port Enabled Flags (A20200 to A20207) are OFF (execution disabled).
The TXDU(256)/ RXDU(255) instruction, or SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), or PMCR(260) instruction is being executed using the same communications port No.
With Serial The P_ER Flag is ON. Communications Units: DTXDU(262) was executed but reception was not.
The control data is out of range. Operand N is not between &0 and &256 or #0000 and #0100. A DTXDU(262)/ DRXDU(261) instructions was interrupted by an interrupt task and DTXDU(262)/ DRXDU(261) was executed in the interrupt task as well. The specified Unit was not the CJ1W-SCU22/ 32/42. (In this case the instruction will take up to 1 ms to execute.) The specified Serial Communications Unit was being initialized. The port on the Serial Communications Unit is not specified for no-protocol mode. DTXDU(262) was executed when the Send Ready Flag was OFF.
Either use a communications port other than that executing the TXDU(256), RXDU(255), SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), or PMCR(260) instruction (Bits 12 to 15 of C1), or wait until the required port can be used and then execute the TXDU(256) instruction. Check the DTXDU(262) instruction and make sure all operands are within the specified ranges. Replace the Unit if it is not the CJ1WSCU@2 Check the program to be sure the DTXDU(262) was not executed at the times specified on the left.
372
Troubleshooting
Error conditions Serial communiIndicator Status and cations mode display other conditions The serial com--munications mode is set to noprotocol mode. Words allocated in CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
The ER Flag (type of condiWith Serial Communica- tion flag) is ON. tions Boards: The TXD(236) instruction was sent, but reception is not being executed.
Auxiliary Area bit A42404 (Inner Board service failure: (non-fatal error)) is ON.
---
The setting contents indicated by the operand in the TXD(236) instruction is incorrect. The TXD(236) instruction was sent while the Send Delay Flag (bit A35605/ A35613) was OFF. The TXD(236) instruction was sent to a preVer.1.2 Board that does not support no-protocol communications, or the Board is not installed. A hardware error has occurred in the transmission circuit.
Insert an AND in the input condition for a NO condition of the Send Delay Flag (bit A35605/ A35613). Replace the Board with one that is Unit Ver. 1.2 or later, or install a Board.
Conduct a loopback test in serial communications mode to check the transmission lines. If an error occurs during the test, replace the Board or Unit.
373
Troubleshooting
Section 12-3
Review the Setup Area setSerial communications mode is not set tings. correctly.
Serial communi- The SD@/RD@ cations mode is and COM@ indicators do not set to NT Link. flash at all. (Communications have not been electrically established.) --The SD@ and COM@ indicators are flashing, but the Unit or Board cannot communicate with the Programmable Terminal (PT).
Conduct a loopback test in serial communications mode to check the transmission lines. If an error occurs during the test, replace the Board or Unit.
---
The baud rate setting is different to the PTs baud rate setting. There is a setting error for the PT serial port. The 1:N NT Link unit number of the PT is incorrect. The same 1:N NT Link unit number has been set for more than one PT The maximum allowable NT Link unit number is incorrectly set for the system. Cables are incorrectly connected. The RS-422A/485 port setting (2-wire or 4-wire) is incorrect. Adapters such as the NT-AL001-E are incorrectly wired or set. A communications error frequently occurs due to noise, etc. There is a PT hardware error.
Either change the baud rate setting in the System Setup or change the baud rate setting for the PT. Correct the PT serial port settings. Review the NT Link unit number of the PT.
374
Troubleshooting
Serial communications mode Indicator display Status information, etc. Words allocated in the CIO Area --Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
Serial communi- The SD@/RD@ --cations mode is and COM@ indiset to NT Link. cators are flashing, but a communications error sometimes occurs in the PT.
Cables are incorrectly connected. The RS-422A/485 port setting (2-wire or 4-wire) is incorrect. Adapters such as the NT-AL001-E are incorrectly wired or set. A communications error frequently occurs due to noise, etc.
Review the wiring or switch settings. Check whether the terminating resistances of the host computer and the last Unit are set to ON, and the terminating resistances of other Units are set to OFF.
Review the wiring and installation environment. Increase the number of retries for the PT as required. The communicaIncrease the communications monitoring time tions monitoring time for the for the PT is insuffi- PT. cient. The load on the PLC Lighten the load on the is too high. PLC. Reduce the number of PTs connected to each serial port by using other ports for some of the PTs. Adjust the timeout and retry settings in the PT.
Note
1. The PT serial port must be set for a 1:N NT Link. The PT will not be able to communicate with a Serial Communications Board or Unit if the PT is set for a 1:1 NT Link. 2. The System Setup cannot be changed unless the power supply is cycled, the Board or Unit is restarted, the port is restarted, or the STUP(237) instruction is executed. Refer to 1-7 Comparison to Previous Products for details.
375
Troubleshooting
Section 12-3
---
Bits 12 to 15 of the words allocated in the CIO Area n+5/ n+15 are set to a value other than 6 Hex. The PMCR(260) Bits 00 to 07 of the The SD@/ Communications instruction is RD@ and COM@ indi- executed, but bit Port Error Flags in A219 are set to 1 15 (Protocol cators do (ON). not flash at Macro Executing Flag) of the As PMCR(260) all. (Comwords allocated instruction execution municain the CIO Area conditions, bit 15 tions has n+9/n+19 does (Protocol Macro Exenot been electrically not turn ON. cuting Flag) of the estabwords allocated in lished.) the CIO Area n+9/ n+19 is set as a NO execution condition. The ER Flag (one of Condition Flags) is set to ON.
Serial communications Set bits 11 to 08 (Serial mode is not set correctly. Communications Mode) of the Allocation DM Area m/m+10 to 6 Hex (Protocol Macro). The PMCR(260) instruction operand settings or execution timing are incorrect. See note on page 381.
The program is incorrect. As PMCR(260) instruction execution conditions, set bit 15 (Protocol Macro Executing Flag) of the words allocated in the CIO Area n+9/n+19 to a NC execution condition.
The AER Flag (one of the Conditions Flags) is ON. Bits 00 to 03 (Error Code) of the words allocated in the CIO Area n+9/n+19 are set to 2 Hex (Sequence Number Error).
Bits 00 to 03 (Error Code) of the words allocated in the CIO Area n+9/n+19 are set to 3 Hex (Data Read/Write Range Error).
The problem cause is one of the following: - The data range for the PMCR(260) instruction C1 operand is incorrect. - The number of data words in the S or D operand exceeds 250. - The Communications Port Error Flag is set to OFF. An illegal address is specified for the S or D operands of the PMCR(260) instruction. The sequence number specified in the PMCR(260) instruction C2 operand is a value other than 000 Hex to 3E7 Hex (000 to 999 in decimal notation). The specified communications sequence number does not exist in the protocol data. The data range of the specified area is exceeded when data is being written to or read from the I/O memory of the CPU Unit.
Check the PMCR(260) instruction C1, C2, C3, S, and D operand settings for errors.
Correct any mistakes in the operands of PMCR(260). Set the PMCR(260) instruction C2 operand to a value between 000 Hex and 03E7 Hex (between 000 and 999 in decimal notation). Check whether the communications sequence number is correct.
Specify another area, or reduce the size of the data to be sent or received.
376
Troubleshooting
Serial communications mode Serial communications mode is set to protocol macro. Indicator display Status information, etc. The PMCR(260) instruction is executed, but bit 15 (Protocol Macro Executing Flag) of the words allocated in the CIO Area n+9/n+19 does not turn ON. Words allocated in the CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
The SD@/ RD@ and COM@ indicators do not flash at all. (Communications have not been electrically established.)
Execute the PMCR(260) instruction using a communications port number (set in bits 12 to 15 of C1) other than that used for the SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), or another PMCR(260) instruction. The program is incorrect. As PMCR(260) instrucAs PMCR(260) tion execution conditions, instruction execution set the Network Commuconditions, the Netnications Instruction Exework Communicacution Enabled Flag tions Instruction (A20200 to A20207) to a Execution Enabled NO execution condition. Flag (A20200 to A20207) is set as a NC execution condition. Wait for the transfer of Bit 00 (Port Active) of Protocol data is being protocol data to finish or the words allocated transferred, or a SUM in the CIO Area n+6/ value error has occurred. use CX-Protocol to transfer the protocol data. n+16 remains 0 (Port Inactive). The send wait time speci- Use CX-Protocol to check Bit 15 (Protocol Send processing is not executed. fied in communications whether the send wait Macro Executsequence step units is time is correctly set. ing Flag) of the too long. words allocated in the CIO Area Bit 10 (Remote Node The CS signal from the Release the remote node n+9/n+19 is Receive Busy) of the remote node cannot turn busy status to enable the turned ON when words allocated in local node CS signal to ON (the remote node the PMCR(260) the CIO Area n+7/ turn ON. remains in busy status) instruction is because the transmission n+17 is set to ON executed, but control parameter RS/ (Remote Node data cannot be Busy). CS Flow Control is set to sent or received Yes. properly. Bit 09 (Sequence The WAIT command can- Review the program so Wait) of the words not be released. that bits 00 and 08 (Wait allocated in the CIO Release Switch) of word Area n+9/n+19 is set n in the words allocated to ON (Sequence in the CIO Area can be Wait Status). switched from OFF to ON. The SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), or another PMCR(260) instruction is currently being executed using the same communications port number.
Bits 00 to 03 (Error Code) of the words allocated in the CIO Area n+9/n+19 are set to 4 Hex (Protocol Data Syntax Error). The Network Communications Instruction Execution Enabled Flag (A20200 to A20207) is set to OFF (Execution Disabled).
The protocol data in the Use CX-Protocol to corBoard or Unit is incorrect. rect and transfer the protocol data.
377
Troubleshooting
Serial communications mode Serial communications mode is set to protocol macro. Indicator display Status information, etc. Bit 15 (Protocol Macro Executing Flag) of the words allocated in the CIO Area n+9/n+19 momentarily turns ON when the PMCR(260) instruction is executed, but it cannot remain ON. Send data has already been transmitted, but there is no response from the remote node. Words allocated in the CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
The SD@/ RD@ and COM@ indicators do not flash at all. (Communications has not been electrically established.)
Bits 03 and 11 (Abort Abort Switch is force-set. Release the forced or Switch) of the words Abort Switch. allocated in the CIO Area n are force-set.
---
The SD@/ RD@ and COM@ indicators are flashing, but the Unit or Board cannot perform communications.
Bit 10 (Sequence Abort End Flag) of the Protocol words allocated in the CIO Area n+9/n+19 is set to ON. Bit 15 (Protocol Macro Executing Flag) of the words allocated in the CIO Area n+9/n+19 remains ON when the PMCR(260) instruction is executed without setting the monitoring time in sequence units.
Protocol macro data is not set correctly. The Setup Area settings such as the baud rate and frame format differ from those of the remote node.
Set bits 11 to 08 (Serial Communications Mode) of the Allocation DM Area to F Hex (Loopback Test Serial Communications Mode), connect the connector wired for a loopback test, then conduct a loopback test by turning ON bit 14 of word n. The test data is reflected in the Allocation DM Area n+9/n+19. If an error occurs during the test, replace the Board or Unit. Use CX-Protocol transmission line trace to check whether the protocol data and Setup Area settings are correct.
The sequence is running and does not end (the words allocated in the CIO Area is in receive status).
378
Troubleshooting
Serial communications mode Serial communications mode is set to protocol macro. Indicator display Status information, etc. Send data has already been transmitted, but there is no response from the remote node. Words allocated in the CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
The SD@/ RD@ and COM@ indicators are flashing, but the Unit or Board cannot perform communications.
The contents of the words allocated in the CIO Area n+5/ n+15 (System Port Settings) do not match those of the remote node. Bit 15 (Transmission Error) of the words allocated in the CIO Area n+8/n+18 is set to ON. There is an error in bits 0 to 14.
The baud rate is outside the allowable range, or there are bit errors due to mismatched stop bits and so on.
Review the Setup Area settings. Review the remote node settings and the program (including the baud rate, frame format, and so on). Check the wiring. Turn ON the terminating resistances of the Board and the last node. Turn OFF the terminating resistances of other nodes. Review the Setup Area settings. Review the remote node settings and the program (including the baud rate, frame format, and so on).
A transmission The SD@/ error occurs. RD@ and COM@ indicators are flashing, but the Unit or Board cannot perform communications or a communications error sometimes occurs. Data is received --through CX-Protocol transmission line trace, but the protocol macros behave as if no data is received. --The remote node sometimes returns no response to sent data. Response may be received by performing retries.
The wiring is faulty. The setting of the 2/4wire switch for the RS422A/485 port does not match the actual wiring. The wiring of adapters such as the NT-AL001-E is faulty. Bit 15 (Transmission The Setup Area settings Error) of the words such as the baud rate allocated in the CIO and frame format differ Area n+8/n+18 is set from those of the remote to ON. node. The baud rate is outside the allowable There is an error in range, or there are bit bits 0 to 14. errors due to mismatched The contents of the stop bits and so on. words allocated in the CIO Area n+5/ n+15 (System Port Settings) do not match those of the remote node. Because response from the remote node in halfduplex mode is received too fast, the data received from the time the data send processing was completed until the Send operation was completed is discarded. The transmission timing is too fast for the remote node to receive data.
Set or increase the transmission wait time (time to await data transmission) in step units.
379
Troubleshooting
Serial communications mode Serial communications mode is set to protocol macro. Indicator display Status information, etc. Words allocated in the CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
A transmission The SD@/ error someRD@ and COM@ indi- times occurs. cators are flashing, but the Unit or Board cannot perform communications or a communications error sometimes occurs.
Bit 15 (Transmission Error) of the words allocated in the CIO Area n+8/n+18 is set to ON. There is an error in bits 0 to 14.
The wiring is faulty. The RS-422A/485 port terminating resistance setting is incorrect. Adapters such as the NTAL001-E are incorrectly wired, or the terminating resistance setting is incorrect. A communications error frequently occurs due to noise and so on.
Check the wiring. Turn ON the terminating resistance of the Board and the last node by using the terminating resistance switch. Turn OFF the terminating resistance of other nodes. Use shielded twisted pair cables. House the communications cables in a different duct from those for power lines and so on. Review the operating environment to prevent noise problems. Programming retry processing for communications if necessary. Use CX-Protocol to transfer the correct protocol data.
--The RDY and ERC indicators are flashing (ERR/ ALM). --The RDY indicator is lit and the ERC indicator is flashing (ERR/ ALM).
Bit 00 (Protocol Data The protocol macro data SUM value is abnormal. Error) of the words allocated in the CIO Area n+1 is set to ON. Bits 00 to 03 (Port Status Error Code) of the words allocated in the CIO Area n+9/n+19 are set to a value other than 0 Hex. (An error has occurred.)
An error has been See note on page 382. detected in the protocol macros, making the operation impossible.
380
Troubleshooting
Section 12-3
Note The following table shows the measures to correct the errors indicated by network communications end codes (A203 to A210).
Network communiError details cations end code Bits Bits 08 to 15 00 to 07 02 Hex 02 Hex There is no Board or Unit corresponding to the unit address. 04 Hex 01 Hex The specified service is not supported.
Remedy
Check whether a different Board/Unit or serial port (physical port) is specified in the PMCR(260) instruction C1 operand (communications port number).
02 Hex
05 Hex
11 Hex
06 Hex
22 Hex
01 Hex
24 Hex
01 Hex
Check whether a different Board/Unit or serial port (physical port) is specified in the PMCR(260) instruction C1 operand (communications port number). Check whether the serial communications mode of the serial port specified in the C1 operand is protocol macro. If not, set the serial communications mode to protocol macro. The watchdog timer Check whether the serial communications mode of the expires because no serial port specified in the C1 operand is protocol macro. If response is not, set the serial communications mode to protocol macro. received from the remote node within the specified time. The specified com- The communications sequence number specified in the PMCR(260) instruction C2 operand is unregistered. munications sequence number Use CX-Protocol to register the communications sequence does not exist. number. PMCR(260) instruc- An attempt is made to execute the PMCR(260) instruction tion cannot be exe- while protocol macros are being executed. cuted because Modify the ladder program so that bit 15 (Protocol Macro protocol macro is Executing Flag) of the words allocated in the CIO Area n+9/ currently being exe- n+19 is set to a NC execution condition for the PMCR(260) cuted. instruction. No registration table The problem cause is one of the following: exists. Protocol macro (communications sequence) data has not been registered. Protocol macro (communications sequence) data is currently being registered or transferred. Protocol macro (communications sequence) data contains a SUM value error. Use CX-Protocol to transfer the correct protocol macro (communications sequence) data.
381
Troubleshooting
Section 12-3
Note The following table shows the measures to correct the errors indicated in bits 00 to 03 (Error Code) of words allocated in the CIO Area words n+9/n+19.
Indicator
Error details
Cause ----The communications sequence number specified in the PMCR(260) instructions C2 operand is not registered. The data range of the specified area is exceeded when data is being written to or read from the I/O memory of the CPU Unit. There is a code that cannot be executed during protocol execution.
Remedy ----Correct the communications sequence number. Use CX-Protocol to register the specified communications sequence number.
3 Hex
For operand specification: Check the PMCR(260) instruction S and D operand specifications. For direct specification of link words: Use CX-Protocol to check the specified range. Check the following items and correct the problem. Check whether the total specified number of link words in the area (O1, O2, I1, I2) exceeds 500. The same area with link word specification is used by both ports 1 and 2. A write instruction with constant specification is specified. An EM Area read/write instruction is specified as an interrupt notification (for Boards only). An interrupt notification is specified at the Unit (for Units only). There are more than 30 write attributes set for one message. The length of a send/receive message is set to 0 bytes. The length of a send/receive message is longer than the maximum send/ receive message bytes setting. No messages are registered for matrix reception. Both RTS/CTS flow control and Xon/ Xoff flow control are set for the same transmission line.
4 Hex
382
Troubleshooting
Section 12-3
Set bits 08 to 11 (Serial Communications Mode) of DM Area words m/m + 10 to A Hex (Modbus-RTU slave mode). Check the wiring. Reset the port to the correct wiring setting. Wire all nodes using the 4wire method.
There is no The RD@ and COM@ indica- transmission error. tors are flashing, but the response has not been returned from the host. For the Unit, the SD@ indicator does not flash at all (Communications have been electrically established.)
Reset the serial port at the host, and rewrite the program. Set bits 08 to 11 (Serial Communications Mode) of DM Area words m/m + 10 to F Hex (Loopback Test Serial Communications Mode). Then, connect the connector wire for a loopback test and conduct a loopback test by turning ON bit 14 (Loopback Test Switch) of CIO Area word n. The test data is reflected in CIO Area words n+9/n+19. If an error occurs during the test, replace the Board or Unit. CIO Area words n + The System Setup Correct the setting in DM 8/n + 18 (transmis- in DM Area words m Area words m + 6/m + 16 of the Board or Unit (Mod+ 6/m + 16 of the sion error status) are set to 0000 Hex. Board or Unit (Mod- bus slave address) so that they correspond to the setCIO Area words n + bus-RTU slave tings at the host device. address) does not 5/n + 15 (port setcorrespond to the Correct the command tings in the System frame (destination ModSetup) do not corre- settings for the remote device. bus slave address) and the spond to the setprogram. tings of the remote The command format and data length device. of the data sent from the host are incorrect.
Cables are incorrectly connected. The RS-422A/485 port setting (2-wire or 4-wire) is incorrect. Adapters such as the NT-AL001-E are incorrectly wired or set. Commands are not being set from the host. This is a hardware error.
383
Troubleshooting
Serial communications mode Serial communications mode is set to Modbus-RTU slave mode. Indicator status Status information, etc. --CIO Area Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
There is no The RD@ and COM@ indica- transmission error. tors are flashing, but the response has not been returned from the host. For the Unit, the SD@ indicator does not flash at all (Communications have been electrically established.)
---
Conduct a loopback test in serial communications mode to check the transmission lines. If an error occurs during the test, replace the Board or Unit. Correct the destination The destination Modbus slave address in Modbus slave address in the com- the command frame. mand frame is set to 0, i.e., it is set for a broadcast. Review the System Setup, In CIO Area words n The communications conditions and the hosts settings and pro+ 8/n + 18, bit 15 gram (such as commands (transmission error baud rate do not and frame format) based match the settings status) is turned on the response contents, ON, and bit 07(CRC at the host. and the transmission error error), bit 04 (overcodes in CIO Area words n run error), bit 03 + 8/n + 18. (framing error), or bit 02 (parity error) There is noise inter- Use shielded twisted-pair is turned ON. ference. cables. Lay power lines separately using ducts. Review the installation environment to reduce noise interference. There is an error in Append the correct CRC the CRC code code. appended to the host command frame.
Cables are incorrectly connected. The RS-422A/485 port setting (2-wire or 4-wire) is incorrect. Adapters such as the NT-AL001-E are incorrectly wired or set. This is a transmission circuit hardware error.
Check the wiring. Reset the port to the correct wiring setting. Wire all nodes using the 4wire method.
384
Troubleshooting
Serial communications mode Serial communications mode is set to Modbus-RTU slave mode. Status CIO Area information, etc. CIO Area words n + The RD@/SD@ There is no transmission 8/n + 18 (transmisand COM@ error. sion error status) indicators are are set to 0000 Hex. flashing, and an error response There is a In CIO Area words n has returned to transmission + 8/n + 18, bit 15 the host. error. (transmission error The RD@/SD@ status) is turned and COM@ ON, and bit 07(CRC indicators are error), bit 04 (overflashing, but run error), bit 03 sometimes (framing error), or there is no bit 02 (parity error) response is turned ON. returned. There is a In CIO Area words n transmission + 8/n + 18, bit 15 error some(transmission error times. status) is turned ON, and bit 07(CRC error), bit 04 (overrun error), bit 03 (framing error), or bit 02 (parity error) is turned ON. There is a Terminating resistransmission tance switch (TERM error someON/OFF) status times. Indicator status Cause
Section 12-3
Remedy
A command was sent from the host with incorrect parameters. The communications conditions and baud rate do not match the settings at the host.
Review the hosts settings and program (such as parameter settings) based on the response contents. Review the System Setup, the hosts settings and program (such as commands and frame format) based on the response contents, and the transmission error codes in CIO Area words n + 8/n + 18.
The baud rate is outside the allowable range, and the stop bits do not match, causing the bits to be out of alignment.
Review the System Setup. Review the hosts settings and program (such as baud rate and frame format).
Cables are incorrectly connected. The RS-422A/485 port terminating resistance setting is incorrect. Adapters such as the NT-AL001-E are incorrectly wired or the terminating resistance is incorrectly set. CIO Area words n + Transmission errors 8/n + 18 (transmis- are occurring that sion error status) are caused by noise are not set to 0000 interference. Hex.
Check the wiring. Turn ON the terminating resistance of the Board and the last node by using the terminating resistance switch. Turn OFF the terminating resistance of other nodes.
Use shielded twisted-pair cables. Lay power lines separately using ducts. Review the installation environment to reduce noise interference. Programming retry processing for communications if necessary.
385
Error Logs
Section 12-4
Records are stored in order from the oldest to the most recent errors.
When the number of errors recorded in the RAM error log table reaches 64 (or 32 (see note) records for the EEPROM error log table), the oldest records will be deleted to store the most recent errors. Note Up to 64 records can be stored in the error log table in EEPROM in the CS1W-SCU@2.
386
Error Logs
Section 12-4
Refer to the list of error codes and details on page 387. The time the error occurred is recorded including the year (rightmost two digits), month, day, hour, minute, and second in 1-byte BCD (binary coded decimal). The error log table can be read or cleared using FINS commands sent to the Serial Communications Board or Serial Communications Unit. Refer to 12-4-6 Reading and Clearing Error Log Tables for details. Note The Serial Communications Board and Serial Communications Unit use the time information read from the CPU Unit. If the time cannot be read from the CPU Unit, the time of the error in the error log will be recorded as all zeros. For all CS/CJ-series PLCs, the time of the CPU Units built-in clock must be set when the power is turned ON after the battery is mounted. If the built-in clock time is not set, the time recorded in the error log will be incorrect, and when the error log is read, the time will be irregular.
CPU Unit watchdog timer error CPU Unit service monitoring Monitoring time (Unit: 1 ms) error Other CPU Unit errors Bit 11: The unit number is not included in the registered I/ O tables. Other bits not used. CPU Unit initial processing Always 00 Hex Always 00 Hex error CPU Unit initial processing Not fixed Not fixed error CPU Unit memory error 01 Hex: Read error 03 Hex: Routing tables 02 Hex: Write error 05 Hex: CPU Bus Unit/ Inner Board DM Area
Yes Yes No
387
Error Logs
Error code 0014 Hex 0108 Hex 010B Hex 010D Hex 010E Hex Details First byte Second byte Inner bus error Always 00 Hex Always 00 Hex Send not possible because Event Send/Receive Errors Unit is not detected Commands: Send source network address < 80 Send not possible due to CPU Unit error Bit 15: OFF Bits 08 to 14: Send source network address Send not possible due to Send source node address remote address setting error Bits 00 to 07: Send not possible because Send source network address 80 Bit 15: OFF routing tables are not set properly Bits 08 to 14: 00 Bits 00 to 07: Send source network address Send not possible due to header setting error Responses: Internal reception buffer full Send destination network address < 80 Bit 15: ON Illegal packet discarded Bits 08 to 14: Send destination network address Bits 00 to 07: Send destination node address Send destination network address 80 Bit 15: ON Bits 08 to 14: 00 Bits 00 to 07: Send destination network address Parity error Framing error Overrun error FCS check error Setting table logic error 01 Hex: Port 1 02 Hex: Port 2 Always 00 Hex Error contents
Section 12-4
Stored in EEPROM Yes No No No No
No No No
011B Hex 011C Hex 011D Hex 011E Hex 021A Hex
0300 Hex 0301 Hex 0302 Hex 0601 Hex 0602 Hex
03 Hex: Routing tables 05 Hex: CPU Bus Unit/ Inner Board DM Area Parameter packet discarded Same contents as event send/receive errors. Protocol macro operation 01 Hex: Port 1 Protocol macro error code error 02 Hex: Port 2 Illegal protocol packet dis01 Hex: Port 1 Always 00 Hex carded. 02 Hex: Port 2 Board/Unit error Check the operating environment. 01 Hex: Read error 06 Hex: Error log CPU Bus Unit/Inner Board memory error 02 Hex: Write error 07 Hex: Protocol data
Always 00 Hex
No No No No No
No No No Yes No
388
Error Logs
Section 12-4
0001 Hex 0002 Hex 0006 Hex 000F Hex 0011 Hex 0012 Hex 0014 Hex 0108 Hex 010B Hex
Yes No
Yes Yes
No Yes
Yes Yes
Yes No
Yes No
Yes Yes
011C Hex
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
011D Hex
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
011E Hex
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes Yes No
Yes Yes No
Yes Yes No
Yes Yes No
Yes Yes No
Yes Yes No
0302 Hex
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
389
Error Logs
Error code Troubleshooting Protocol macro Command too long Service cannot be executed in current serial communications mode and was discarded. There is no remote device. No No
Section 12-4
Serial communications mode Host Serial No1:N LoopModLink Gate- proto- NT back bus-RTU way col Link test Slave No Yes No No No No No Yes No No No No
0107 Hex
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Command code
Response Format
05 01 End code 20 bytes Board/Unit Model 20 bytes Board/Unit Version
Command code
Parameters
Model, Version (Response) The Serial Communications Board or Serial Communications Unit model and version are specified in the response each as ASCII data up to 20 bytes max. If the data is less than 20 bytes, the remaining bytes will be expressed as 20 hexadecimal (space). The following example shows the data returned for a CS1W-SCU21-V1:
390
Error Logs
Model: "CS1W-SCU21-V1
Section 12-4
" Padded with ASCII spaces (20 hex) to make 20 bytes total, including the model number. Model number
Version: "V1.00V1.00V1.00V1.00" Trace function version Macro function version Board or Unit version Communications control version
Command code
No. of records
Response Format
21 02 10 bytes 10 bytes
Command code
End code
No. of records
Parameters
Beginning record number (command) Specify the first record to be read as 2-byte (4-digit) hexadecimal. The first record number is 0000 Hex and the setting range is 0000 to 003F Hex (0 to 63 decimal). Number of records (command, response) Specify the number of records to read. The setting range is 0001 to 0040 Hex (1 to 64 decimal). The number of read records will be returned with the response. If there is no error log, the response will be 0000. Maximum number of stored records (response) Indicates the maximum number of records that can be stored. The number is always 0040 Hex (64 records) for Serial Communications Boards and Units. Number of stored records (response) Indicates the number of records recorded at the time the command is executed. The number of stored records will be returned with the response within the range of 0000 to 0040 Hex (0 to 64 decimal). When the FA command for Host Link communications is used to read the error log, set the number of stored records to between 0001 and 0035 Hex (1 to 53 decimal). Higher numbers cannot be set because they would cause the response to exceed the maximum Host Link frame length. If a larger number is set and the setting agrees with the actual number of stored records, 110B Hex will be returned as the end code followed by all the records that can be returned without exceeding the maximum frame length. Error log data (response) The specified number of error log records will be returned in sequence start-
391
Error Logs
Section 12-4
ing from the beginning record number. The total number of bytes for the error log data required is calculated as follows: No. of records x 10 bytes The configuration of each error log record is returned in 10 bytes, as follows:
1st byte 07 01 10th byte
Error code
Error Code and Details Indicates the error contents of the error recorded. Refer to 12-4-4 Error Codes and Details. Minute, Second, Day, Hour, Year, Month Records the time the error occurred. Comments If the error log does not contain the specified number of records, the records up to the last recorded stored at the time the command was executed will be returned, and a normal response will be returned. The number of records actually read will be returned as the number of stored records. If the beginning record is specified higher than the current number of records in the error log, an end code of 1103 hex will be returned. If the beginning record number is specified as 0000, the response will be completed normally, even if no error log is recorded. If the number of records is set to 0000, the end code will be returned as 110C Hex.
Command code
Response Format
21 03
Command code
End code
Comments
The ERROR LOG CLEAR: 21 03 command clears the error log records that are stored in the RAM error log table and the EEPROM error log table.
392
Section 12-5
12-5-1 Cleaning
To keep the Serial Communications Board in optimum condition, regularly clean the Board or Unit, as follows: Wipe the surface of the Board or Unit daily with a soft, dry cloth. If any dirt cannot be removed with a dry cloth, moisten the cloth with a mild detergent diluted to 2%, and squeeze out any excess moisture before wiping the Board or Unit. Do not adhere materials, such as gum, vinyl, or tape to the Board or Unit for long periods of time. Doing so may cause scratches on the device. Remove any adhered materials when cleaning the Board or Unit. Note Never use benzene, paint thinner, or other volatile solvents, and do not use chemically treated cloths.
12-5-2 Inspection
To keep the Board or Unit in optimum condition, regular inspections must be performed. Normally, inspect the devices once every six months or every year. Inspect the devices at more regular intervals when they are being used in environments subject to high temperatures, high humidity, or high dust levels. Materials for Inspection Prepare the following materials before performing any inspections. Materials Required Daily For daily inspection, a Phillips screwdriver, flat-blade screwdriver, tester (or digital voltmeter), industrial strength alcohol, and all-cotton cloth are required. Materials Required Occasionally For some inspections, a synchroscope, a pen oscilloscope, a temperature gage, and a hydroscope will be required. Inspection Items Inspect the following items to check whether the Board or Unit is operating within the specified criterion. If the Board or Unit is not within the criterion, improve the ambient operating environment and readjust the device.
Item Details Criterion Inspection materials Temperature gage
Operating Check the ambient temperature 0 to 55C environment and the temperature of the control panel. Check the ambient humidify and 10% to 90% RH Hydroscope the humidity of the control panel. (no condensation or icing) Check for accumulated dust. No dust Visual inspection Installation Check that the Board or Unit is Board or Unit --mounted securely. must be mounted securely. Check for loose screws on the Screws must be Phillips screwcommunications cables. securely tightdriver ened. Check for damaged Cables should Visual communications cables. be fully intact. inspection
393
Replacement Precautions
Section 12-6
394
Replacement Precautions
2-wire or 4-wire switch (RS-422A/485 ports)
Section 12-6
4. Turn ON the power of the PLC to which the replacement Serial Communications Board or Unit is mounted, and to all serially connected external devices, and start operating the system. 5. Check from the indicators and status display that the system is operating normally. Protocol Macros Designed with CX-Protocol Using CX-Protocol 1,2,3... 1. Connect Programming Console or CX-Protocol to the PLC to which the replacement Serial Communications Board or Unit is mounted, and switch to PROGRAM mode. 2. Save the protocol macro data using the CX-Protocol. Refer to the CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344) for details. 3. Turn OFF the power to the PLC to which the Serial Communications Board or Unit to be replaced is mounted, and to all serially connected external devices. 4. Disconnect the communications cables connected to the Serial Communications Board or Unit to be replaced, and also remove the Board or Unit. 5. Set the hardware switches of the replacement Board or Unit to the same settings of the Board or Unit being replaced before mounting, as follows: Unit number setting switch (Serial Communications Units) Terminating resistance switch (RS-422A/485 ports) 2-wire or 4-wire switch (RS-422A/485 ports) 6. Turn ON the power of the PLC to which the replacement Serial Communications Board or Unit is mounted, and to all serially connected external devices, and start operating the system. 7. Switch the CPU Unit to PROGRAM mode, and using the CX-Protocol, transfer the protocol macro data to the Board or Unit. Refer to the CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344) for details. 8. Switch the CPU Unit to MONITOR mode, and start operating the system. 9. Check from the indicators and status display that the system is operating normally. Using the Simple Backup Function This function can be used with a CS1-H, CJ1-H /CJ1M, or CJ2 CPU Unit only. 1,2,3... 1. Check the settings of pins 7 and 8 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit. Turn ON pin 7 and turn OFF pin 8 to backup the protocol data from the Serial Communication Board/Unit to the Memory Card. 2. Insert the Memory Card into the CPU Unit. 3. Press and hold the Memory Card power supply switch for 3 seconds. When the switch is pressed, the MCPWR Indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash once and then remain lit while the data is being written. The Indicator will go OFF after the data has been written properly. 4. If necessary, compare the data in the Memory Card with the protocol data in the Serial Communication Board/Unit. To compare the protocol data, turn OFF pins 7 and 8 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit and press the Memory Card power supply switch for 3 seconds. When the Memory Card power supply switch is pressed, the MCPWR Indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash once and then re-
395
Replacement Precautions
Section 12-6
main lit while the data is being compared. If the data matches, the Indicator will go OFF after the data has been compared. 5. Turn OFF the power to the PLC to which the Serial Communications Board or Unit to be replaced is mounted, and to all serially connected external devices. 6. Disconnect the communications cables connected to the Serial Communications Board or Unit to be replaced, and also remove the Board or Unit. 7. Set the hardware switches of the replacement Board or Unit to the same settings of the Board or Unit being replaced before mounting, as follows: Unit number setting switch (Serial Communications Units) Terminating resistance switch (RS-422A/485 ports) 2-wire or 4-wire switch (RS-422A/485 ports) 8. To restore the protocol data from the Memory Card to the Serial Communications Board or Unit, turn ON pin 7 and turn OFF pin 8 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit for which the Board or Unit was replaced. 9. Turn ON the PLCs power supply. At this point, leave the power supplies OFF to all serially connected external devices. When the PLCs power is turned ON, the MCPWR Indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light and flash once. The MCPWR Indicator will remain lit while the data is being read. The Indicator will go OFF after the data has been read properly. Serial Communications Board Operation: The Boards RDY Indicator will flash during the restore operation and it will be lit when the restore operation is completed normally. If the restore operation fails, the RDY Indicator will continue to flash. The CPU Units ERR/ALM Indicator will flash and bit A42409 (the Protocol Data Error Flag) will be turned ON. Serial Communications Unit Operation: The Units RDY Indicator will flash during the restore operation. Both the RDY Indicator and RUN Indicator will be lit when the restore operation is completed normally. If the restore operation fails, the RDY Indicator will continue to flash and the ERC Indicator will be lit. If the restore operation fails, return to step 1 and perform the replacement procedure again. If the restore operation fails two times in succession, use CX-Protocol to transfer the protocol data to the Board. Refer to Using CXProtocol on page 395 for details. 10. If necessary, compare the data in the Memory Card with the protocol data in the Serial Communication Board/Unit. To compare the protocol data, turn OFF the PLCs power supply, turn OFF pins 7 and 8 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit, turn the PLC ON again, and press the Memory Card power supply switch for 3 seconds. When the Memory Card power supply switch is pressed, the MCPWR Indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash once and then remain lit while the data is being compared. If the data matches, the Indicator will go OFF after the data has been compared. 11. Turn ON the power to all serially connected external devices, switch the CPU Unit to MONITOR mode, and start the system. 12. Check the status of the Serial Communications Board or Units indicators and status display and confirm that the system is operating normally.
396
Replacement Precautions
Note
Section 12-6
1. The protocol macro data for the Board or Unit is stored in the flash memory of the Board or Unit. 2. When protocol macro data designed with the CX-Protocol is used, a backup of the protocol macro data created from the CX-Protocol must be transferred to the Board or Unit after replacing. 3. The System Setup of the Serial Communications Board or Unit is allocated to the DM Area saved in the battery backup of the CPU Unit, and if the exclusively designed macro data is not used, the System Setup can be used as before, simply by setting the hardware.
When using the Simple Backup Function in CS1H/G-CPU@@H products of Lot No. 011101 or earlier* combined with the Serial Communications Board (CS1W-SCB@@-V1), proper backup will not be possible if the backup file
(BACKUPE1.PRM) remains in the Memory Card.
Production day (in this example: 1) Production month (in this example: 11) Production year (in this example: 2001) In order to use the Simple Backup Function in this combination, delete the
backup file (BACKUPE1.PRM) inside the Memory Card, then execute the backup.
If backup is executed without deleting this backup file, the RDY LED and the CPU Units ERR/ARM LED will both flash, and the Protocol Data Error Flag (bit A42409) will turn ON with the restore operation. The Serial Communications Board will also automatically delete the backup file (BACKUPE1.PRM).
397
Replacement Precautions
Section 12-6
398
Appendix A
Introduction
Appendices B the N provide information on the standard system protocols provided with the CX-Protocol, the Serial Communications Boards, and the Serial Communications Units. Refer to 5-4 Using Protocol Macros for details on using PMCR(260).
Offset
S+0 S+1 S+2 S+3
Data
0005 to 00FA Hex (5 to 250 decimal) 00 to 99
SRC (2 digits Hex) Set the command code for the required service Number of data bytes from the next byte after the command code until the byte just before the ETX. 0000 to 0492 The data specified in hexadecimal here will be converted to ASCII and the number of bytes specified in S+3 will be sent.
S+4 on
399
Introduction
D: Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand)
Receive data storage words +0 +1 +2 Number of receive data words Response code Receive data
Appendix A
Offset
D+0 D+1 D+2 on
Data
0003 to 00FA Hex (3 to 250 decimal) The response code will be stored in hexadecimal form. The data from just after the response code until just before the ETX will be converted from ASCII to hexadecimal and stored here.
400
Introduction
Protocol name V600/V620 ID Controllers
Appendix A
Function Protocol for controlling an ID Controller via the Communications Board. Procedures for performing Read/Write operations of the ID Controller and writing/reading operating parameters. Protocol for controlling a Hayes modem (AT commands) via the Communications Board. Procedures for initialization of the modem, dialing, data transmission, switching to escape mode, and disconnecting the line.
401
Introduction
Appendix A
402
Appendix B
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
The CompoWay/F Master Protocol is used to send CompoWay/F commands with the CS/CJ-series PLC serving as the host (master).
CompoWay/F
CompoWay/F is a protocol used by many OMRON components for serial communications. A host computer of a PLC can function as a host (master) to send CompoWay/F commands (message frames) to OMRON components, which function as slaves. The components will return responses to these commands. Using CompoWay/ F commands, the host can read/write data, settings, and operating status to control the operation of the components. CompoWay/F has the following features. The same message frame format is used, eliminating the need for special protocols for each component. The same commands can thus be used for serial communications with all CompoWay/F components. The CompoWay/F protocol conforms to OMRONs standard FINS command protocol, providing compatibility with other networks and more flexible expansions in the future. The CompoWay/F Master Protocol is provided as a standard system protocol to enable the CS/CJ-series PLC to execute read/write sequences for CompoWay/F commands.
CompoWay/F command
RS-422A/486 Connections
403
Appendix B
Communications Specifications
Item Transmission path connections Communications Synchronization Baud rate Transmitted code Data length Stop bits Error detection Specification Multipoint RS-232C, RS-422A/485, 4-wire half-duplex, 2-wire half-duplex Start-stop 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400 bps Default: 9,600 bps ASCII 7 bits or 8 bits (Default: 7 bits) Note: A 7-bit code is used with 0 added to the beginning. 1 bit or 2 bits (Default: 2 bits) Horizontal parity (none, even, or odd) (Default: Even) BCC (block check character) *1: Start-stop Sync Data Configuration for Protocol Macros LRC, 1 byte, equivalent to binary
Transmission Procedure
The PLC or host computer serving as the master sends a command and the component serving as the slave returns a response for the command message contained in the command. One response message is returned for each command message. The movement of command and response messages is shown below.
Master (PLC or host computer) Command message
Response Format
Node No. Subaddress "00" 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes End code "00" 2 bytes Response Text Data (See note.)
1 byte
1 byte
Note 1. Data is not saved in the response if there is a command frame error (i.e., if the end code is not 00 or 0F). 2. Other values are possible for the subaddress and SID.
404
Appendix B
Meaning
A code, 02 Hex, indicating the beginning of a communications frame (text). This code must always be set as the first byte. The node number identifies the source of the command frame. Specify XX to broadcast a transmission. There will be no response made to a broadcast. Set 00 for most components. Other values must be set for special components. Set 0 for most components. Other values must be set for special components. The command and required text are placed here. Refer to the command codes and text for individual sequences. The command code specifies the service being used. Refer to the command codes and text for individual sequences. A code, 03 Hex, indicating the end of text. The block check character (horizontal parity, 1 byte). The character is an exclusive OR of all data from just after the STX to the ETX.
Subaddress SID Command and text MRC and SRC ETX BCC
Meaning
A code, 02 Hex, indicating the beginning of a communications frame (text). This code must always be set as the first byte. The node number identifies the source of the command frame. XX is specified to broadcast a transmission. There will be no response made to a broadcast. 00 for most components. Other values must be set for special components. 0 for most components. Other values must be set for special components. The results of executing the command frame. Note: The response code (MRES and SRES) indicates the results for the command code; the end code indicates the results for the command frame. These are not the same. The response and requested text are placed here. Refer to the response and text for individual sequences. The response code specifies the results of processing the service requested by the command code. Refer to the response codes and text for individual sequences. A code, 03 Hex, indicating the end of text. The block check character (horizontal parity, 1 byte). The character is an exclusive OR of all data from just after the STX to the ETX.
ETX BCC
Name
Normal end Command error Parity error Framing error Overrun error BCC error Format error
Meaning
The command frame was processed normally without any of the following errors. The specified command could not be executed. Refer to the response code for more information. A parity error was detected for one of the characters that was received. A framing error was detected for one of the characters that was received. A overrun error was detected for one of the characters that was received. The BCC for the receive frame was incorrect. An illegal command or illegal character was received in the command and text (characters other than ASCII 0 to 9 or A to F). The receive frame contained an illegal subaddress. The receive frame was too long.
16 18
405
Appendix B
The command and response frames for a K3N@-series Intelligent Signal Processor are shown below. Command Frame
Node No.
Subaddress
"00"
"0"
Command
Text
Command VARIABLE AREA READ VARIABLE AREA WRITE PARAMETER AREA READ PARAMETER AREA WRITE PROCESSOR STATUS READ CONTROLLER STATUS READ ECHOBACK TEST OPERATION COMMAND
Command code 01 01 01 02 02 05 06 08 30 02 01 02 03 01 01 05
Data contents Variable type Variable type Parameter type Parameter type Address Address Address Address No. of elements 00 No. of elements No. of elements No. of elements 00
Response Format
Node No. Subaddress End code
"00"
Response
Text
406
Appendix B
The following command and text are used to read the present value, maximum value, minimum value, and status of the Intelligent Signal Processor. Command and Text
Variable type First read address No. of elements
"00"
2 bytes
"00"
2 bytes
"C0"
2 bytes 4 bytes
"00"
"0001"
4 bytes
1. Variable Type
Variable type C0 Contents Present value, maximum value, minimum value, status, and comparison value
2. First Read Address Specify the address of the data to be read in 4 digits Hex. 3. Number of Elements: 4 Digits Hex
Number of elements Process 0001 Read the data and end normally.
Note If 0000 is specified, nothing will be read and a normal end will be returned. A parameter error will occur for any settings other than 0000 and 0001. Response Text
"01"
"01"
2 bytes 2 bytes
407
Appendix B
Converts the specified data beginning with the command code to ASCII and sends it to the specified Unit. The response is converted to hexadecimal and stored starting at the specified word.
Broadcast with no conversion and no response General-purpose send with no conversion and with response
605 (025D)
606 (025E)
607 (025F)
General-purpose broadcast with no conversion and no response Send/receive with ASCII conversion and with response Send: Leftmost to rightmost word order Receive: Leftmost to rightmost word order Send/receive with ASCII conversion and with response Send: Rightmost to leftmost word order Receive: Rightmost to leftmost word order Variable area read
A broadcast version of sequence No. 600. No responses are received. Sends specified data beginning with the command code to the specified Unit. The response is stored starting at the specified word. This is the same as sequence No. 600 without data conversion and can be used when conversion is not required. A broadcast version of sequence No. 602. No responses are received. Sends specified data beginning with the subaddress and SID to the specified Unit. The response is stored starting at the specified word. This sequence can be used whenever it is necessary to specify the subaddress or SID. A broadcast version of sequence No. 604. No responses are received. Converts specified data beginning with the command code (MRC, SRC) into ASCII and sends it to the specified Unit. The response is converted into hexadecimal and stored starting at the specified word.
Yes Yes
No Yes
Yes Yes
No Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Converts specified data beginning with the command code (MRC, SRC) into ASCII and sends it to the specified Unit. The response is converted into hexadecimal and stored starting at the specified word.
Yes
Yes
610 (0262)
Reads the contents of the specified number of elements from the address of the specified variable type to the specified node number and stores the data starting at the specified word.
Yes
Yes
408
Appendix B
Ladder interface Send word Receive word allocation allocation Yes Yes
612 (0264)
613 (0265)
614 (0266)
615 (0267)
616 (0268)
617 (0269)
618 (026A)
619 (026B)
Writes the contents of the specified number of elements from the address of the specified variable type to the specified node number. Writes the specified number of elements from the address of the specified variable type using a broadcast address. Writes the same data from the address of the specified variable type to the specified node number. Writes the same data from the address of the specified variable using a broadcast address. Reads the contents of the specified number of elements from the address of the specified parameter area to the specified node number and stores the data starting at the specified word. Writes the contents of the specified number of elements from the address of the specified parameter area to the specified node number. Writes the specified number of elements from the address of the specified parameter area using a broadcast address. Reads the Controller/component model and communications buffer size and stores the data starting at the specified word. Reads the Controller/component status and stores the data starting at the specified word. Executes an echoback test at the specified node. Remotely stops/starts operations of the device at the specified node number.
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Note The hexadecimal equivalents of sequences numbers are given in parentheses. Sequence No. 600 can be used for the normal CompoWay/F Master function (ASCII conversion, specification from command code). Refer to the communications specifications for the OMRON CompoWay/F component to which the command is being sent and set the command code and required data starting at the words specified for the 3rd operand of PMCR(260). The relationship between the CompoWay/F command and response frames and the operands of PMCR(260) is described next.
409
Appendix B
Variable type
No. of elements
"00"
"0"
"01"
"01"
"C0"
"0000"
Send data
"00"
"0001"
Command
PMCR(260) Instruction
#0258
Communications sequence No. 600 (0258 Hex) S S+1 S+2 S+3 S+4 S+5 S+6 Send data Number of send bytes Number of send data words (Undefined) Node number
Response Frame
Node No.
Subaddress End code
"00"
"01"
"01"
PMCR(260) Instruction
#0258
D D+1 D+2 D+3 Receive data
Number of receive data words
Response code
410
Appendix B
"12"
"34"
"56"
607 (025F)
Send with ASCII Conversion, with Response: (Sequence No. 600 (Hex 0258))
Send word order: Rightmost to leftmost Receive word order: Leftmost to rightmost This sequence converts the specified data beginning with the command code to ASCII and sends it to the specified Unit. The response is converted to hexadecimal and stored starting at the specified word. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 Number of send data words (Undefined) MRC Node No. SRC
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
0005 to 00FA Hex (5 to 250 decimal) 00 to 99
SRC (2 digits Hex) Set the command code for the required service Number of data bytes from the next byte after the command code until the byte just before the ETX. 0000 to 03D8 Hex (0 to 984 decimal) The data specified in hexadecimal here will be converted to ASCII and the number of bytes specified in S+3 will be sent.
+4 on
Note 1. Set the number of send bytes to twice the number of bytes in memory. This is necessary because the data is converted to ASCII data before being sent. 2. Frames are created and sent starting from the rightmost to leftmost word of the address in I/O memory.
Send data words 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 "12" Send frame "34" "56" "78"
411
Appendix B
Offset
+0 +1 +2 on
Data
0003 to 00FA Hex (3 to 250 decimal) The response code will be stored in hexadecimal form. The data from just after the response code until just before the ETX will be converted from ASCII to hexadecimal and stored here.
Note Received frames are stored starting from the leftmost to rightmost word of the address in I/O memory.
Receive frame "12" "34" "56" "78" Receive data words 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
Example: The following example illustrates reading the present value from a K3N@-series Intelligent Signal Processor.
CS/CJ-series PLC
CompoWay/F response Read data = present value CompoWay/F command VARIABLE AREA READ Command code: 01 01 First read address
Sequence No. 600 (Send with ASCII Conversion, with Response) is used. The specified data beginning with the command code is converted ASCII and sent to the Intelligent Signal Processor with the specified node number. The response is converted to hexadecimal and stored starting at the specified word. The command frame for reading the present value for a K3N@-@@@@-FLK1/2/3/4/5/6 Intelligent Signal Processor (command code 01 01) is shown below. The following data is specified in the operands for PMCR(260). Rightmost byte of S+1: Node number (2 digits BCD) S+2: Command code: MRC + SRC = 0101 S+4 on: Send data = Variable type + first read address + 00 + number of elements.
STX Node No. Subaddress SID Command code MRC SRC Variable type C0 Send data First read address (Note) 0000 Always No. of ele00 ments 00 0001 (03 Hex) ETX BCC
(101)
00
01
01
Data in shaded portions is specified in the PMCR(260) instruction. Note A first read address of 0000 specifies the present value. An address of 0001 specifies the maximum value; 0002, the minimum value; and 0003, the status. The response frame is shown below. The response code and receive data are stored according to the operands for PMCR(260) as follows:
412
Appendix B
ETX
BCC
(02 Hex)
01
01
00
00
(03 Hex)
Data in shaded portions is stored at the location specified by the operand in the PMCR(260) instruction. Note 1. Response Codes
Response code 0000 1001 1002 1100 1101 1103 2203 Meaning Normal end Command too long Command too short Parameter error Area type error First address range error Operating error
2. The read data is returned as 4-digit hexadecimal as follows: F0019999 to 00099999 Hex. The 3rd and 4th operands of the PMCR(260) instruction are specified as follows. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6
Data
SRC (2 digits Hex) 0101 Hex 000C Hex C000 Hex 0000 Hex 0001 Hex
Number of send bytes (4 digits BCD) Send data (12 digits Hex)
Data
EX is stored at reception (0004 Hex) The response code will be stored in hexadecimal form. The normal end response code is 0000. The 4 bytes of read data.
+2 +3
413
Appendix B
Broadcast with ASCII Conversion, No Response (Sequence No. 601 (Hex 0259))
This sequence converts the specified data beginning with the command code to ASCII and broadcasts it. No responses are received. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 MRC Number of send data words (Undefined) SRC Number of send bytes Send data
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
0005 to 00FA Hex (5 to 250 decimal) --Set the command code for the required service Number of data bytes from the next byte after the command code until the byte just before the ETX. 0000 to 03D8 Hex (0 to 984 decimal) The data specified in hexadecimal here will be converted to ASCII and the number of bytes specified in S+3 will be sent.
+4 on
Note 1. Set the number of send bytes to twice the number of bytes in memory. This is necessary because the data is converted to ASCII data before being sent. 2. When hexadecimal data is converted to ASCII data, data is sent starting from the send data word with the largest offset. This is done because ladder programming handles data in 4-byte units.
Send data words 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 "56" Send frame "78" "12" "34"
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. (Specify a dummy value for the operand, such as #0000.)
Send with No Conversion and with Response (Sequence No. 602 (Hex 025A))
This sequence sends the specified data beginning with the command code to the specified Unit. The response is stored starting at the specified word. No conversions are performed on the send and receive data. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 Number of send data words (Undefined) MRC Node No. SRC
414
Appendix B
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) (Undefined) MRC (2 digits Hex) Node No. (2 digits BCD) SRC (2 digits Hex)
Data
0005 to 00FA Hex (5 to 250 decimal) 00 to 99 Set the command code for the required service Number of data bytes from the next byte after the command code until the byte just before the ETX. 0000 to 01EC Hex (0 to 492 decimal) The data specified in hexadecimal here is not converted and the number of bytes specified in S+3 is sent.
+4 on
Offset
+0 +1 +2 on
Data
0003 to 00FA Hex (3 to 250 decimal) The response code will be stored in hexadecimal form. The data from just after the response code until just before the ETX is stored here without conversion.
Broadcast with No Conversion and No Response (Sequence No. 603 (Hex 025B))
This sequence broadcasts the specified data beginning with the command code No responses are received and no conversions are performed on the send data. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 MRC Number of send data words (Undefined) SRC Number of send bytes Send data
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
0005 to 00FA Hex (5 to 250 decimal) --Set the command code for the required service Number of data bytes from the next byte after the command code until the byte just before the ETX. 0000 to 01EC Hex (0 to 492 decimal)
415
Appendix B
Contents (data format)
Send data +1 +3 +5
Data
The data specified in hexadecimal here is not converted and the number of bytes specified in S+3 is sent.
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. (Specify a dummy value for the operand, such as #0000.)
General-purpose Send with No Conversion and with Response (Sequence No. 604 (Hex 025C))
This sequence sends the specified data beginning with the subaddress and SID to the specified Unit. The response is stored starting at the specified word. No conversions are performed on the send and receive data. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 Number of send data words (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) Node No. Subaddress SID
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Data
0006 to 00FA Hex (6 to 250 decimal) 00 to 99 Specify the subaddress of the device being communicated with. Set the service ID of the required service (e.g., retries). Number of data bytes from the MCR until the byte just before the ETX. 0000 to 01EA Hex (0 to 490 decimal) The data specified in hexadecimal here is not converted and the number of bytes specified in S+4 is sent.
+5 on
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0003 to 00FA Hex (3 to 250 decimal) The response code will be stored in hexadecimal form.
416
Appendix B
Contents (data format)
Receive data +1 +3 +5
Data
The data from just after the response code until just before the ETX is stored here without conversion.
General-purpose Broadcast with No Conversion and No Response (Sequence No. 605 (Hex 025D))
This sequence broadcasts the specified data beginning with the subaddress and SID. No responses are received and no conversions are performed on the send data. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 Number of send data words (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) Subaddress SID
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Data
0006 to 00FA Hex (6 to 250 decimal) --Specify the subaddress of the device being communicated with. Set the service ID of the required service (e.g., retries). Number of data bytes from the MCR until the byte just before the ETX. 0000 to 01EA Hex (0 to 490 decimal) The data specified in hexadecimal here is not converted and the number of bytes specified in S+4 is sent.
+5 on
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. (Specify a dummy value for the operand, such as #0000.)
417
Appendix B
Connections
Connection methods between a Serial Communications Board or Unit and the K3N@-series Intelligent Signal Processor are shown below. RS-232C RS-232C connections are one-to-one. The max. cable length is 15 m. Use an RS-232C optical interface (Z3RN) when extending the transmission line beyond 15 m. Use shielded, twisted-pair cable.
Serial Communications Unit/Board RS-232C
Abbrevi- Pin ation No.
MAX232C or equivalent
1 9 2 3 4 5 7 8 Shield
1 7 2 3 4 5 6
MAX232C or equivalent
9 2 3 4 5 7 8
1/ Shell
5 3 2 7 8 6 4 Shield
TX RX
418
Appendix B
RS-422 4-wire Connections RS-422 connections can be one-to-one, or one-to-N when a 3G2A9-AL001 Link Adapter is used. A maximum of 32 Serial Communications Boards and Unit can be connected in one-to-N systems. The total cable length can be 500 m max. Use shielded, twisted-pair cable. Be sure to turn ON the terminating resistance switches at the device at each end of the transmission line.
Serial Communications Board/Unit RS-422 Abbreviation Shell 6 8 1 2 Pin AbNo. breviation Intelligent Signal Processor Terminal 220 block switch
SN751177N or equivalent
*1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch to the 4-wire setting. *2: Turn ON the terminating resistance switch.
Shield
220 The terminator (220 ) is set with the terminal block switch.
RS-485 2-wire Connections RS-485 connections can be one-to-one or one-to-N. A maximum of 32 Serial Communications Units/ Boards can be connected in one-to-N systems. The total cable length can be 500 m max. Use shielded, twisted-pair cable. Be sure to turn ON the terminator switches only in the devices at each end of the transmission line.
Serial Communications Board/Unit RS-485 Abbreviation Shell 1 2 +
Ter- Abminal breviation
Intelligent Signal Processor Turn OFF all terminal block switches except at the end-station. Terminal block 220 switch
SN751177N or equivalent
Shield
*1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch to the 2-wire setting. *2: Turn ON the terminating resistance switch.
Send/Receive with ASCII Conversion, with Response: (Sequence No. 606 (Hex 025E))
Send word order: Leftmost to rightmost Receive word order: Leftmost to rightmost This sequence converts the specified data beginning with the command code (MRC, SRC) to ASCII and sends it to the specified Unit. The response is converted to hexadecimal and stored starting at the specified word.
419
Appendix B
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
0005 to 00FA hex (5 to 250 decimal) 00 to 99
MRC (2 digits hex) SRC (2 digits hex) Set the command code for the required service Number of send bytes (4 digits hex) Number of data bytes from the next byte after the command code (MRC, SRC) until the byte just before the ETX. 0000 to 03D8 hex (0 to 984 decimal) Note: The data is converted to ASCII in the communications line, so the number of data bytes is doubled from S+4 and onwards. The data specified in hexadecimal here will be converted to ASCII and the number of bytes specified in S+3 will be sent in word order from the leftmost to the rightmost word.
+4 on
Set the number of send bytes to twice the number of bytes in memory. This is necessary because the data is converted to ASCII data before being sent. The frames are created and sent in order from the leftmost word to rightmost word of the I/O memory address.
Send data words 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 "56" Send frame "78" "12" "34"
Offset
+0 +1 +2 on
Data
0003 to 00FA Hex (3 to 250 decimal) The CompoWay/F command response code will be stored in hexadecimal code The data from just after the response code until just before the ETX is converted from ASCII to hexadecimal and stored in order from the leftmost word to the rightmost word.
The received frames are stored in order from the leftmost word to rightmost word of the I/O memory address.
Receive frame "12" "34" "56" "78" Receive data words 5 6 7 8 Rightmost word 1 2 3 4 Leftmost word
420
Appendix B
Send/Receive with ASCII Conversion with Response (Sequence No. 607 (Hex 025F))
Send word order: Rightmost to leftmost Receive word order: Rightmost to leftmost This sequence converts the specified data beginning with the command code (MRC, SRC) to ASCII and sends it to the specified Unit. The response is converted to hexadecimal and stored starting at the specified word. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 Number of send data words (Undefined) MRC Node No. SRC
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
0005 to 00FA hex (5 to 250 decimal) 00 to 99
MRC (2 digits hex) SRC (2 digits hex) Set the command code for the required service Number of send bytes (4 digits hex) Number of data bytes from the next byte after the command code (MRC, SRC) until the byte just before the ETX. 0000 to 03D8 hex (0 to 984 decimal) Note: The data is converted to ASCII in the communications line, so the number of data bytes is doubled from S+4 and onwards. The data specified in hexadecimal here will be converted to ASCII and the number of send bytes specified in S+3 will be sent in word order from the rightmost to the leftmost word.
+4 on
Set the number of send bytes to twice the number of bytes in memory. This is necessary because the data is converted to ASCII data before being sent. The frames are created and sent in order from the rightmost word to leftmost word of the I/O memory address.
Send data words 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 "12" Send frame "34" "56" "78"
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
0003 to 00FA Hex (3 to 250 decimal) The CompoWay/F command response code is stored in hexadecimal code. The data from just after the response code until just before the ETX is converted from ASCII to hexadecimal and stored in order from the rightmost word to the leftmost word.
421
Appendix B
The received frames are stored in order from the rightmost word to leftmost word of the I/O memory address.
Receive frame "12" "34" "56" "78" Receive data words 1 2 3 4 Rightmost word
5 6 7 8 Leftmost word
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Always 0005 hex (5 decimal)
Set the area type (2 digits) and the first read word (6 digits). The leftmost 16 bits of the first read word specify the address and the rightmost 8 bits specify the bit location. Set the rightmost 8 bits to 00 when bit access is not required. Set the number of elements to read.
+4
Offset
+0 +1 +2 on
Data
0003 to 00FA Hex (3 to 250 decimal) The CompoWay/F command response code is stored in hexadecimal code. The read data is stored.
The received frames are stored in order from the leftmost word to the rightmost word of the I/O memory address.
Receive frame "12" "34" "56" "78" Receive data words 1 2 3 4 Rightmost word
5 6 7 8 Leftmost word
422
Appendix B
Offset Contents (data format) +0 Number of send data words +1 (Undefined) Node No. (2 digits BCD) +2 Variable type (2 digits hex) +3 First write address (6 digits BCD) +4 +5 Number of elements (4 digits BCD) Number of bytes to write (4 digits hex)
Data 0007 to 00FA hex (7 to 250 decimal) 00 to 99 Set the area type (2 digits) and the first read word (6 digits). The leftmost byte of the first write address specifies the address and the rightmost byte specifies the bit location. Set the rightmost byte to 00 when bit access is not required. Set the number of elements to write. Set the number of bytes to send in the communications line. Note: The data is converted to ASCII in the communications line, so the number of data bytes is doubled from S+6 and onwards. Set the data to write from the first write address.
+6 on
Write data
Set the number of write bytes to twice the number of send data in memory. This is necessary because the data is converted to ASCII data before being written. When hexadecimal data is converted to ASCII data, data in the first write address +0 and +1 is stored in I/O memory in order from the rightmost word to leftmost word and the data is sent starting from the send data word with the largest offset. This is done because ladder programming handles data in 2-word (4-byte) units.
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
Send frame
1 2 3 4
Offset Contents (data format) +0 Number of receive data words +1 Response code (4 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The CompoWay/F command response code is stored in hexadecimal code.
423
Appendix B
+6
Write data
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
Data
0007 to 00FA hex (7 to 250 decimal)
Set the area type (2 digits) and the first read word (6 digits). The leftmost byte of the first write address specifies the address and the rightmost byte specifies the bit location. Set the rightmost byte to 00 when bit access is not required. Set the number of elements to write. Set the number of write bytes to send. Note: The data is converted to ASCII in the communications line, so the number of data bytes is doubled from S+6 and onwards. Set the data to write from the first write address.
+6 on
Write data
Set the number of write bytes to twice the number of send data in memory. This is necessary because the data is converted to ASCII data before being written. When hexadecimal data is converted to ASCII data, data in the first write address +0 and +1 is stored in I/O memory in order from the leftmost word to the rightmost word and the data is sent starting from the send data word with the largest offset. This is done because ladder programming handles data in 2-word (4-byte) units.
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
Send frame
1 2 3 4
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. (Specify a dummy value for the operand, such as #0000.)
424
Appendix B
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
Data
Always 0006 hex (6 decimal)
Set the area type (2 digits) and the first read word (6 digits). The leftmost byte of the first write address specifies the address and the rightmost byte specifies the bit location. Set the rightmost byte to 00 when bit access is not required. Set the number of elements to write. Set the write data.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The CompoWay/F command response code is stored in hexadecimal code.
425
Appendix B
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (Undefined) Variable type (2 digits hex) First write address (6 digits BCD) --Set the area type (2 digits) and the first read word (6 digits). The leftmost byte of the first write address specifies the address and the rightmost byte specifies the bit location. Set the rightmost byte to 00 when bit access is not required. Set the write data.
Data
Always 0006 hex (6 decimal)
Number of elements (4 digits BCD) Set the number of elements to write. Write data (4 digits hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. (Specify a dummy value for the operand, such as #0000.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Data
Always 0006 hex (6 decimal)
Parameter type (4 digits hex) First read address (4 digits hex) Number of elements (4 digits hex)
Set the parameter type. Set the first read address. Set the number of elements to read. (The leftmost bit in the number of elements is always 1.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +4 +5
Data
0006 to 00FA Hex (6 to 250 decimal) The CompoWay/F command response code is stored in hexadecimal code. The parameter type is stored in hexadecimal code. The first read address is stored in hexadecimal code. The read data is stored.
426
Appendix B
The received frames are stored in order from the leftmost word to the rightmost word of the I/O memory address.
Receive frame "12" "34" "56" "78" Receive data words 1 2 3 4 Rightmost word
5 6 7 8 Leftmost word
Offset Contents (data format) +0 Number of send data words +1 (Undefined) Node No. (2 digits BCD) +2 Parameter type (4 digits hex) +3 First write address (4 digits hex) +4 Number of elements (4 digits hex) +5 +6 on Number of bytes to write (4 digits hex) Write data
Data 0007 to 00FA Hex (7 to 250 decimal) 00 to 99 Set the parameter type. Set the first write address. Set the number of elements to write. (The leftmost bit in the number of elements is always 1.) Set the number of bytes of write data to send in hexadecimal code. Set the data to write from the first write address.
Set the number of write bytes to twice the of the actual number of send data bytes. This is necessary because the data is converted to ASCII data before being written. When hexadecimal data is converted to ASCII data, data in the first write address +0 and +1 is stored in I/O memory in order from the leftmost word to the rightmost word and the data is sent starting from the send data word with the largest offset. This is done because ladder programming handles data in 2-word (4-byte) units.
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
Send frame
1 2 3 4
427
Appendix B
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Always 0002 Hex (2 decimal) The CompoWay/F command response code is stored in hexadecimal code.
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Parameter type (4 digits hex) First write address (4 digits hex) Number of elements (4 digits hex)
Set the parameter type in hexadecimal code. Set the first write address in hexadecimal code. Set the number of elements to write in hexadecimal code. (The leftmost bit in the number of elements is always 1.) Set the number of bytes of write data to send in hexadecimal code. Set the data to write from the first write address.
+5 +6
Set the number of write bytes to twice the of the actual number of send data bytes. This is necessary because the data is converted to ASCII data before being written. When hexadecimal data is converted to ASCII data, data in the first write address +0 and +1 is stored in I/O memory in order from the leftmost word to the rightmost word and the data is sent starting from the send data word with the largest offset. This is done because ladder programming handles data in 2-word (4-byte) units.
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
Send frame
1 2 3 4
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. (Specify a dummy value for the operand, such as #0000.)
428
Appendix B
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Node No. (2 digits BCD)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
Data
Always 0006 Hex (6 decimal) The CompoWay/F command response code is stored in hexadecimal code.
Model number (10 digits hex (Undefined) Buffer size (4 digits hex)
The model number is stored in hexadecimal code. The send/receive buffer size is stored in hexadecimal code.
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Node No. (2 digits BCD)
429
Appendix B
Offset Contents (data format) +0 Number of receive data words +1 Response code (4 digits hex) +2 +3 Run status (2 digits hex) Error status, etc.
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) The CompoWay/F command response code is stored in hexadecimal code. The run status, error status, and other status information is stored in hexadecimal code.
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Node No. (2 digits BCD) Number of bytes to send (4 digits hex) Test data
Data 0004 to 00FA Hex (4 to 250 decimal) 00 to 99 0001 to 007A Hex (1 to 122 decimal) Set the number of data bytes for the test. The test data is sent.
+3 on
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Response code (4 digits hex) Test data
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) The CompoWay/F command response code is stored in hexadecimal code. The test data is stored.
430
Appendix B
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Node No. (00 hex) (2 digits BCD) Number of bytes to send (4 digits hex) Command code (2 digits hex) Related information
Data 0004 to 00FA Hex (4 to 250 decimal) 00 to 99 Set the number of send bytes for related information (Set to 0002 hex when there is no related information.) Set the command code and related information.
+3 +4
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Response code (4 digits hex) Command code (4 digits hex) Related information
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) The CompoWay/F command response code is stored in hexadecimal code. The command code and related information are stored.
431
Appendix B
432
Appendix C
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master
The C-mode (Host Link) command master protocol provides communications sequences using C-mode command codes for a PLC (CS/CJ Series) host (master). This protocol enables any C-mode command to be sent from a Serial Communications Unit/Board installed in a CS/CJ-series PLC to a CS/CJ-series or C-series (see note) CPU Unit that is connected via RS-232C or RS422A/485. Note C-series PLCs refer to the C200H, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), C120, C500, C500F, C1000HF, CQM1, CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1, CQM1H, C1000H, and C2000H.
Serial Communications Board/Unit CS/CJ-series PLC Serial Communications Board/Unit CS/CJ-series PLC
PMCR (260)
PMCR (260)
C-mode command
Response
C-mode command
Note 1. Multiple-frame commands and multiple-frame responses are not supported. 2. Slave-initiated operations from the slave CPU Unit to the PLC master cannot be used.
Command code
Text
FCS
"*"
2A hex
CR 0D hex
2 bytes
Response Frame
"@"
40 hex 1 byte Host Link unit number (X10 )(X10 ) 2 bytes 2 bytes
1 0
Command code
Text
FCS
"*"
2A hex
CR 0D hex
1 byte
2 bytes
433
Appendix C
For details on C-mode command codes for sending to CS/CJ-series CPU Units, refer to the CS/CJ Series Communications Commands Reference Manual (W342). For details on C-mode command codes for sending to C-series CPU Units, refer to each of the C-series PLC operation manuals.
700 (02BC)
701 (02BD)
Send/receive Cmode command (with ASCII conversion) Send/receive Cmode command (without conversion) CIO AREA READ
702 (02BE)
Converts the text data for the specified C-mode comYes mand into ASCII and sends to the specified Host Link Unit. The response is converted into hexadecimal and stored starting from the specified word. Sends the text data for the specified C-mode command Yes to the specified Host Link Unit without converting into ASCII. The response is stored starting from the specified word without converting into hexadecimal. Reads the contents of the specified number of CIO Area Yes words beginning with the designated word from the specified Host Link Unit and stores starting from the specified storage word.
Yes
Yes
434
Appendix C
Ladder interface Send word Receive allocation word allocation Yes Yes
703 (02BF)
LR AREA READ
704 (02C0)
HR AREA READ
705 (02C1)
TIMER/COUNTER PV READ
706 (02C2)
707 (02C3)
DM AREA READ
708 (02C4)
AR AREA READ
709 (02C5)
EM AREA READ
710 (02C6)
711 (02C7)
LR AREA WRITE
712 (02C8)
HR AREA WRITE
713 (02C9)
714 (02CA)
715 (02CB)
AR AREA WRITE
718 (02CE)
STATUS CHANGE
Reads the contents of the specified number of LR Area (CS/CJ Series: CIO 1000 to CIO 1199) words beginning with the designated word from the specified Host Link Unit and stores starting from the specified storage word. Reads the contents of the specified number of HR Area words beginning with the designated word from the specified Host Link Unit and stores starting from the specified storage word. Reads the contents of the specified number of timer/ counter PV words beginning with the designated word from the specified Host Link Unit and stores starting from the specified storage word. Reads the contents of the specified number of timer/ counter status words beginning with the designated word from the specified Host Link Unit and stores starting from the specified storage word. Reads the contents of the specified number of DM Area words beginning with the designated word from the specified Host Link Unit and stores starting from the specified storage word. Reads the contents of the specified number of AR Area words beginning with the designated word from the specified Host Link Unit and stores starting from the specified storage word. Reads the contents of the specified number of EM Area words beginning with the designated word from the specified Host Link Unit and stores starting from the specified storage word. Writes the specified write data to the specified Host Link Unit starting from the designated CIO Area word. Writing is done in word units. Writes the specified write data to the specified Host Link Unit starting from the designated Link Area (CS/CJ Series: CIO 1000 to CIO 1199) word. Writing is done in word units. Writes the specified write data to the specified Host Link Unit starting from the designated HR Area word. Writing is done in word units. Writes the specified write data to the specified Host Link Unit starting from the designated timer/counter PV word. Writing is done in word units. Writes the specified write data to the specified Host Link Unit starting from the designated DM Area word. Writing is done in word units. Writes the specified write data to the specified Host Link Unit starting from the designated AR Area word. Writing is done in word units. Writes the specified write data to the specified Host Link Unit starting from the designated EM Area word. Writing is done in word units. Reads the CPU Units operating conditions (status) from the specified Host Link Unit and stores in the words starting from the designated word. Changes the CPU Units operating mode for the specified Host Link Unit.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
435
Appendix C
Ladder interface Send word Receive allocation word allocation Executes a data loopback test for the specified Host Link Yes Yes Unit. Initializes the port of the specified Host Link Unit. Yes No Initialize the ports of all Host Link Units. No No
The values in parentheses are hexadecimal. In normal operations sequence No. 700 (converts to ASCII and is specified from the command code to the designated Host Link unit number) is used for the C-mode Command Code Master function. The relationship between the Host Link C-mode command code/response frame and the PMCR(260) instruction operand is shown in the following diagram.
Relationship Between Host Link C-mode Command/Response Frames and PMCR(260) Operands
The relationship between Host Link C-mode command/response frames and PMCR(260) operands is shown in the following diagram using communications sequence No. 700 as an example. Command Frame
Host Link unit number "@" 40 hex (X101)(X100) Command code Text FCS "*" 2A hex CR 0D hex
User-specified C-mode command code (ASCII) Number of send bytes Text for user-specified C-mode command (ASCII)
436
Appendix C
End code
(X101)(X100)
Text
FCS
"*" 2A hex
CR 0D hex
D D+1 D+2
Number of receive data words End code (Undefined) (2 digits BCD) Receive data (hex)
User-specified Send/Receive Command with ASCII Conversion (Sequence No. 700 (Hex 02BC))
This sequence converts the text data for the specified C-mode command into ASCII and sends to the specified Host Link Unit. The response is converted into hexadecimal and stored starting from the specified word.
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) C-mode command code
+2
+3
Specify the C-mode command code in ASCII (e.g., RR is specified as 5252 hex.) Specify the number of send bytes for the communications line. 0000 to 007A hex (0 to 122 decimal) Note: The text data is converted into ASCII on the communications line, so specify twice the number of bytes of text data bytes in S+4 onwards. Specify the text that corresponds to the command. The specified hexadecimal data will be converted into ASCII and sent.
+4
Text
437
Appendix C
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The read data is converted into hexadecimal stored.
Note The read data from the end code area (+1 word, rightmost byte) is stored for responses without end codes.
User-specified Send/Receive Command without Conversion (Sequence No. 701 (Hex 02BD))
Sends the text data for the specified C-mode command to the specified Host Link Unit without converting into ASCII. The response is stored starting from the specified word without converting into hexadecimal.
Offset
+0 +1
+2
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) C-mode command code
Specify the C-mode command code in ASCII (e.g., RR is specified as 5252 hex.) Specify the number of send bytes for the communications line. 0000 to 007A hex (0 to 122 decimal) Note: The text data is converted into ASCII on the communications line, so specify twice the number of bytes of text data bytes in S+4 onwards. Specify the text that corresponds to the command. The specified hexadecimal data will be converted into ASCII and sent.
+3
+4
Text
438
Appendix C
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The read data is converted into hexadecimal stored.
Note The read data from the end code area (+1 word, rightmost byte) is stored for responses without end codes. Only the data stored in the end code area will be converted into ASCII.
CIO AREA READ (RR Command) (Sequence No. 702 (Hex 02BE))
Reads the contents of the specified number of CIO Area words beginning with the designated word from the specified Host Link Unit and stores starting from the specified storage word.
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) First read word (4 digits BCD) Number of read words (4 digits BCD)
+2 +3
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The contents of the first read word is stored The contents of the first read word +1 is stored
439
Appendix C
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) First read word (4 digits BCD) Number of read words (4 digits BCD)
+2 +3
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The contents of the first read word is stored The contents of the first read word +1 is stored
440
Appendix C
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) First read word (4 digits BCD) Number of read words (4 digits BCD)
+2 +3
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The contents of the first read word is stored The contents of the first read word +1 is stored
441
Appendix C
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) First read word (4 digits BCD)
+2
+3
Timers: T0000 to T2047 Counters: C2048 to C4095 Note: Specify T0000 to T2047 for timers and in C2048 to C4095 for counters. Depends on the remote CPU Unit.
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex or BCD) (Depends on the method used to refresh the timer/counter PVs.)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The contents of the first read word is stored The contents of the first read word +1 is stored
442
Appendix C
TIMER/COUNTER STATUS READ (RG Command) (Sequence No. 706 (Hex 02C2))
Reads the contents of the specified number of timer/counter status words (T0000 to T2047, C0000 to C2047) beginning with the designated word from the specified Host Link Unit and stores starting from the specified storage word.
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) First read word (4 digits BCD)
+2
Timers: T0000 to T2047 (timer No.s 0000 to 2047)) Counters: C2048 to C4095 (counter No.s 0000 to 2047) Note: Specify T0000 to T2047 for timers and in C2048 to C4095 for counters. Depends on the remote CPU Unit.
+3
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex) +0 +4 +1 +5 +2 +6 +3 +7
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. ON: 1 hex OFF: 0 hex The Timer/Counter Completion Flag is 1 digit hex (4 bits) per point, and the ON (1 hex) or OFF (0 hex) status is stored in order from the leftmost to rightmost digit in 1 word for each 4 points.
443
Appendix C
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) First read word (4 digits BCD) Number of read words (4 digits BCD)
+2 +3
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The contents of the first read word is stored The contents of the first read word +1 is stored
444
Appendix C
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) First read word (4 digits BCD) Number of read words (4 digits BCD)
+2 +3
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The contents of the first read word is stored The contents of the first read word +1 is stored
445
Appendix C
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) (Undefined) Bank No. (2 digits hex)
+2 +3 +4
Current bank: Cannot be specified. Bank specification: 00 to 0C hex 0000 to 9999 Depends on the remote CPU Unit.
First read word (4 digits BCD) Number of read words (4 digits BCD)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The contents of the first read word is stored The contents of the first read word +1 is stored
446
Appendix C
CIO AREA WRITE (WR Command) (Sequence No. 710 (Hex 02C6))
Writes the specified write data to the specified Host Link Unit starting from the designated CIO Area word. Writing is done in word units.
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) First write word (4 bits hex) Number of write bytes (4 digits hex)
+2 +3
0000 to 6143 Specify the number of write bytes for the communications line. Note: The text data is converted into ASCII on the communications line, so specify twice the number of bytes of text data bytes in S+4 onwards. Sends the write data to the first write word. Sends the write data to the first write word +1.
+4 +5
Write data
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal.
447
Appendix C
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) First write word (4 bits hex) Number of write bytes (4 digits hex)
+2 +3
0000 to 0199 Specify the number of write bytes for the communications line. Note: The text data is converted into ASCII on the communications line, so specify twice the number of bytes of text data bytes in S+4 onwards. Sends the write data to the first write word. Sends the write data to the first write word +1.
+4 +5
Write data
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal.
448
Appendix C
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) First write word (4 bits hex) Number of write bytes (4 digits hex)
+2 +3
0000 to 0511 Specify the number of write bytes for the communications line. Note: The text data is converted into ASCII on the communications line, so specify twice the number of bytes of text data bytes in S+4 onwards. Sends the write data to the first write word. Sends the write data to the first write word +1.
+4 +5
Write data
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal.
449
Appendix C
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) First write word (4 bits hex) Number of write bytes (4 digits hex)
+2 +3
Timers: 0000 to 2047 Counters: 2048 to 4095 Specify the number of write bytes for the communications line. Note: The text data is converted into ASCII on the communications line, so specify twice the number of bytes of text data bytes in S+4 onwards. Sends the write data to the first write word. Sends the write data to the first write word +1.
+4 +5
Write data
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal.
450
Appendix C
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) First write word (4 bits hex) Number of write bytes (4 digits hex)
+2 +3
0000 to 9999 Specify the number of write bytes for the communications line. Note: The text data is converted into ASCII on the communications line, so specify twice the number of bytes of text data bytes in S+4 onwards. Sends the write data to the first write word. Sends the write data to the first write word +1.
+4 +5
Write data
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal.
451
Appendix C
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) First write word (4 bits hex) Number of write bytes (4 digits hex)
+2 +3
0448 to 0959 Specify the number of write bytes for the communications line. Note: The text data is converted into ASCII on the communications line, so specify twice the number of bytes of text data bytes in S+4 onwards. Sends the write data to the first write word. Sends the write data to the first write word +1.
+4 +5
Write data
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal.
452
Appendix C
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) (Undefined) Bank No. (2 digits hex) First write word (4 bits hex) Number of write bytes (4 digits hex)
+2 +3 +4
Current bank: Cannot be specified. Bank specification: 00 to 0C hex 0000 to 9999 Specify the number of write bytes for the communications line. Note: The text data is converted into ASCII on the communications line, so specify twice the number of bytes of text data bytes in S+5 onwards. Sends the write data to the first write word. Sends the write data to the first write word +1.
+5 +6
Write data
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal.
453
Appendix C
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex) Status data (4 digits hex) Message
Data 0003 hex or 0007 hex (3 or 7 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The CPU Unit status is stored. The message is stored only when FAL/ FALS messages are used.
Offset
+0 +1
+2
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) (Undefined) Mode (2 digits hex)
454
Appendix C
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (Undefined) End code (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal.
Offset
+0 +1
+2 +3
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) Number of test data send bytes (4 digits hex) Test data
Specify the number of test data bytes. The user-specified data is sent.
Offset
+0 +1
455
Appendix C
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (Undefined) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD)
456
Appendix D
Host Link FINS Command Master
The Host Link FINS Command Master Protocol provides communications sequences using FINS commands with the CS/CJ-series PLC as the host (master). This protocol is used to send user-specified or specific (e.g., MEMORY AREA READ) FINS commands enclosed in a Host Link header and terminator from a Serial Communications Unit/Board installed in a CS/CJseries PLC connected through RS-232C or RS-422A/485 to a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit or to a Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit on the network.
Serial Communications Board/Unit CS/CJ PLC Network Communications Unit CS/CJ or CVM1/CV PLC Protocol macro mode (Host Link master)
FINS command
PMCR (260)
Communications Unit CPU Unit PLC on network Personal computer on network Communications Board
FINS command
Note Slave-initiated operation from the PLC slave is not supported. 1, 2, 3... 1. Sending to a PLC Slave Directly Connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board
Serial Communications Unit/Board Protocol macro mode PLC master
FINS command
Note The remote destination network address (DNA) specifies the local network address (00 hex), the remote destination node address (DA1) specifies the local node (00 hex), and the remote destination unit address (DA2) specifies the CPU Unit in the PLC Slave (00 hex). 2. Sending to a CPU Unit on the Network
Serial Communications Unit/Board Protocol macro mode PLC master Host Link mode PLC slave Host Link FINS command PLC slave
Note
1. The response monitoring time for both sending methods 1 and 2 is 3 s. These commands can be sent across up to 3 network levels. 2. Slave-initiated FINS commands sent from the PLC slave to the PLC master are not supported for either method 1 or 2.
457
Appendix D
Host Link command code "A" "F" 46 hex 1 byte DA1 @@ hex 1 byte 41 hex 1 byte
RSV "00" 30 hex 1 byte SNA "00" 30 hex 1 byte SA1 "00" 30 hex 1 byte
GCT "02" 30 hex 1 byte 32 hex 1 byte SA2 "00" 30 hex 1 byte 30 hex 1 byte
@@ hex 1 byte
30 hex 1 byte
30 hex 1 byte
30 hex 1 byte
Text @@ hex
FCS @@ hex
"*"
2A hex 1 byte
CR 0D hex 1 byte
Response Frame
Host Link unit number (X10 )(X10 ) 1 byte
1 0
"@"
40 hex 1 byte
Host Link command code "A" "F" 46 hex 1 byte DA1 "00" 30 hex 1 byte 30 hex 1 byte 41 hex 1 byte 30 hex 1 byte
ICF "C0" 43 hex 1 byte SNA @@ hex 1 byte @@ hex 1 byte 30 hex 1 byte
RSV "00" 30 hex 1 byte SA1 @@ hex 1 byte @@ hex 1 byte 30 hex 1 byte
GCT "02" 30 hex 32 hex 1 byte SA2 @@ hex 1 byte @@ hex 1 byte 1 byte
Text @@ hex
FCS @@ hex
"*"
2A hex 1 byte
458
Appendix D
SNA (Source network address) SA1 (Source node address) SA2 (Source unit address) SID (Service ID) Command code, text FCS (frame check sequence) Terminator
Specify the unit address of the unit at the PLC slave that is connected to the PLC master. SA2 is automatically set to 00 (ASCII: 30, 30) to indicate the CPU Unit. When 00 is set, internal processing converts the value to the unit address of each serial port. The SID is used as a counter when resending. It is automatically set to 55 (ASCII: 35, 35). Set the command code and text according to the FINS command and response formats. A 2-character FCS is automatically set. The terminator is a required delimiter at the end of a command. The terminator is automatically set to *CR (ASCII: 2A, 0D).
459
Appendix D
The same contents specified for SNA, SA1, and SA2 in the command that was received will be returned.
The same contents specified for DNA, DA1, and DA2 in the command that was received will be returned.
The SID that was specified in the command that was received will be returned. The command code, end code, and text corresponding to the FINS command and response formats will be returned. A 2-character FCS is returned. The terminator is a required delimiter at the end of a command. The terminator is automatically set to *CR (ASCII: 2A, 0D).
For details on FINS command codes for sending to CS/CJ-series CPU Units, refer to the CS/CJ Series Communications Commands Reference Manual (W342).
750 (02EE) FINS COMMAND SEND/RECEIVE 751 (02EF) MEMORY AREA READ
752 (02F0)
753 (02F1)
AR AREA READ
754 (02F2)
DM AREA READ
755 (02F3)
Sends user-specified FINS commands to the specified Host Link Unit and stores the response starting from the designated word. Sends command code 0101 hex to the specified Host Link Unit, reads the contents of consecutive I/O memory area words, and stores the data starting from the designated word. Sends command code 0101 hex to the specified Host Link Unit, reads the contents of consecutive CIO Area words, and stores the data starting from the designated word. Sends command code 0101 hex to the specified Host Link Unit, reads the contents of consecutive AR Area words, and stores the data starting from the designated word. Sends command code 0101 hex to the specified Host Link Unit, reads the contents of consecutive DM Area words, and stores the data starting from the designated word. Sends command code 0101 hex to the specified Host Link Unit, reads the contents of consecutive EM Area words in Bank 0, and stores the data starting from the designated word.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
460
Appendix D
Ladder interface Send word Receive allocation word allocation Yes Yes
756 (02F4)
Sends command code 0102 hex to the specified Host Link Unit and writes data to consecutive I/O memory area words. 757 (02F5) CIO AREA WRITE Sends command code 0102 hex to the specified Host Link Unit and writes data to consecutive CIO Area words. 758 (02F6) DM AREA WRITE Sends command code 0102 hex to the specified Host Link Unit and writes data to consecutive DM Area words. 759 (02F7) EM0 AREA WRITE Sends command code 0102 hex to the specified Host Link Unit and writes data to consecutive EM Area words in Bank 0. 760 (02F8) MEMORY AREA Sends command code 0103 hex to the specified Host FILL Link Unit and writes the same data to consecutive I/O memory area words. 761 (02F9) CIO AREA FILL Sends command code 0103 hex to the specified Host Link Unit and writes the same data to consecutive CIO Area words. 762 (02FA) DM AREA FILL Sends command code 0103 hex to the specified Host Link Unit and writes the same data to consecutive DM Area words. 763 (02FB) EM0 AREA FILL Sends command code 0103 hex to the specified Host Link Unit and writes the same data to consecutive EM Area words in Bank 0. 764 (02FC) OPERATING MODE Sends command code 0401 hex to the specified Host CHANGE (RUN) Link Unit and changes the CPU Units operating mode to MONITOR mode. 765 (02FD) OPERATING MODE Sends command code 0401 hex to the specified Host CHANGE (STOP) Link Unit and changes the CPU Units operating mode to PROGRAM mode. 766 (02FE) UNIT DATA READ Sends command code 0501 hex to the specified Host Link Unit and stores the Unit data starting from the designated word. 767 (02FF) UNIT STATUS Sends command code 0601 hex to the specified Host READ Link Unit and stores the Units operating conditions (status) starting from the designated word.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
The values in parentheses are hexadecimal The relationship between the Host Link FINS command code/response frame and the PMCR(260) instruction operand is shown in the following diagram.
461
Appendix D
Relationship Between Host Link FINS Command/Response Frames and PMCR(260) Operands
The relationship between Host Link FINS command/response frames and PMCR(260) operands is shown in the following diagram using communications sequence No. 750 as an example. Command Frame
Response wait time
0 0
8 SA1 0
ICF 0
RSV 0 0
GCT 2
DNA
DA1
DA2
SNA 0 0
Host Link unit number 40 hex (101)(100) @
SA2 0 0
SID 5 5
Command code
Text
FCS
* 2A hex
CR 0D hex
PMCR #02EE S D Communications sequence No. 750 S Number of send data words S+1 Host Link unit No. Remote destination network address (DNA) (2 digits BCD) (2 digits hex) S+2 Remote destination node Remote destination unit address
address (DA1) (2 digits hex) (DA2) (2 digits hex)
S+3 User-specified FINS command code (MRC, SRC) (4 digits hex) S+4 Number of bytes of FINS text from S+4 onwards 2 S+5 Text for user-specified FINS command code (hexadecimal)
Response Frame
ICF RSV GCT DNA DA1 DA2
F
SNA
0
SA1
C
SA2
0
SID
@ 40 hex
Command code
End code
Text
FCS
CR * 2A hex 0D hex
PMCR(260) #02EE S D
Communications sequence No. 750
D D+1
Number of send data words End code (4 digits hex) User-specified FINS receive data (4 digits hex)
462
Appendix D
+1 Host Link unit number destination node +2 Remote address (DA1) +3 +4 +5 MRC
SRC
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex) MRC (2 digits hex)
Remote destina- Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 tion network Remote destination network address address (DNA) (DNA): 00 to 7F hex (2 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex) SRC (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex User-specified FINS command 0000 to 03D4 hex Specify the number of FINS command text bytes for the communications line (i.e., twice the number of bytes of FINS text in S+5 onwards) The text for the user-specified FINS command to send.
+2
+3 +4
+5
FINS text
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex) FINS receive text
Data 0002 to 00FA hex (2 to 250 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The received text is stored.
463
Appendix D
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Remote destinaHost Link unit tion network No. address (DNA) (2 digits BCD) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex) Memory area code (2 digits hex) First read address (6 digits hex) Number of read elements (4 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0006 hex (6 decimal) Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 Remote destination network address (DNA): 00 to 7F hex Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex Specify the memory area (2 digits hex) and the first read address (2 digits hex)
+2
+3
+4 +5
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex) Receive data
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The receive data is stored.
464
Appendix D
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex)
Remote destina- Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 tion network Remote destination network address address (DNA) (DNA): 00 to 7F hex (2 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex 0000 to 17FF hex Specify the first read address (4 digits hex) 0001 to 00F0 hex Specify the number of read elements (4 digits hex)
+2
+3
+4
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex) Receive data
Data 0003 to 00F2 hex (3 to 250 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The receive data is stored.
465
Appendix D
+3 +4
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex)
Remote destina- Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 tion network Remote destination network address address (DNA) (DNA): 00 to 7F hex (2 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex 0000 to 01BF hex Specify the first read address (4 digits hex) 0001 to 00F0 hex Specify the number of read elements (4 digits hex)
+2
+3
+4
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex) Receive data
Data 0003 to 00F2 hex (3 to 250 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The receive data is stored.
466
Appendix D
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex)
Remote destina- Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 tion network Remote destination network address address (DNA) (DNA): 00 to 7F hex (2 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex 0000 to 7FFF hex Specify the first read address (4 digits hex) 0001 to 00F0 hex Specify the number of read elements (4 digits hex)
+2
+3
+4
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex) Receive data
Data 0003 to 00F2 hex (3 to 250 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The receive data is stored.
467
Appendix D
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex)
Remote destina- Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 tion network Remote destination network address address (DNA) (DNA): 00 to 7F hex (2 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex 0000 to 7FFF hex Specify the first read address (4 digits hex) 0001 to 00F0 hex Specify the number of read elements (4 digits hex)
+2
+3
+4
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex) Receive data
Data 0003 to 00F2 hex (3 to 250 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The receive data is stored.
468
Appendix D
+1 Host Link unit number destination node +2 Remote address +3 Memory area code +4 +5 +6 +7
First write address Number of write elements Number of write data bytes Write data
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Remote destinaHost Link unit tion network No. address (DNA) (2 digits BCD) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex) Memory area code (2 digits hex) First write address (6 digits hex) Number of write elements (4 digits hex) Number of write data bytes (4 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex)
Data 0008 to 00FA hex (8 to 250 decimal) Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 Remote destination network address (DNA): 00 to 7F hex Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex Specify the memory area (2 digits hex) and the first write address (2 digits hex)
+2
+3
+4 +5 +6
+7 +8 on
Specify the number of write elements (4 digits hex) 0004 to 03B8 hex Specify the number of FINS command text bytes for the communications line (i.e., twice the number of write data bytes in S+7 onwards) Write data to send to the first write word Write data to send to the first write word + 1 and onwards
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal.
469
Appendix D
First write address Number of write elements Number of write data bytes Write data
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Data Number of send data words 0007 to 00F4 hex (7 to 244 decimal) (4 digits hex) Remote destina- Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 Host Link unit tion network DNA: 00 to 7F hex No. address (DNA) (2 digits BCD) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex 0000 to 17FF hex Specify the first write address (4 digits hex) 0001 to 00EE hex Specify the number of write elements 0004 to 03B8 hex Specify the number of FINS command text bytes for the communications line (i.e., twice the number of write data bytes in S+6 onwards) Write data to send to the first write word Write data to send to the first write word + 1 and onwards
+2
+3
+4 +5
Number of write elements (4 digits hex) Number of write data bytes (4 digits hex)
+6 +7 on
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal.
470
Appendix D
First write address Number of write elements Number of write data bytes Write data
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Remote destinaHost Link unit tion network No. address (DNA) (2 digits BCD) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex)
Data 0007 to 00F4 hex (7 to 244 decimal) Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 Remote destination network address (DNA): 00 to 7F hex Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex 0000 to 7FFF hex Specify the first write address (4 digits hex) 0001 to 00EE hex Specify the number of write elements 0004 to 03B8 hex Specify the number of FINS command text bytes for the communications line (i.e., twice the number of write data bytes in S+6 onwards) Write data to send to the first write word Write data to send to the first write word + 1 and onwards
+2
+3
+4 +5
Number of write elements (4 digits hex) Number of write data bytes (4 digits hex)
+6 +7 on
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal.
471
Appendix D
First write address Number of write elements Number of write data bytes Write data
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex)
Remote destina- Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 tion network Remote destination network address address (DNA) (DNA): 00 to 7F hex (2 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex 0000 to 7FFF hex Specify the first write address (4 digits hex) 0001 to 00EE hex Specify the number of write elements 0004 to 03B8 hex Specify the number of FINS command text bytes for the communications line (i.e., twice the number of write data bytes in S+6 onwards) Write data to send to the first write word Write data to send to the first write word + 1 and onwards
+2
+3
+4 +5
Number of write elements (4 digits hex) Number of write data bytes (4 digits hex)
+6 +7 on
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal.
472
Appendix D
+3 Memory area code +4 First write address +5 +6 Number of write data bytes Write data
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex)
Remote destina- Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 tion network Remote destination network address address (DNA) (DNA): 00 to 7F hex (2 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex Specify the memory area (2 digits hex) and the first write address (2 digits hex)
+2
+3
+4 +5 +6
Memory area code (2 digits hex) First write address (6 digits hex) Number of write elements (4 digits hex) Write data (4 digits hex)
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal.
473
Appendix D
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex)
Remote destina- Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 tion network Remote destination network address address (DNA) (DNA): 00 to 7F hex (2 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex 0000 to 17FF hex Specify the first write address (4 digits hex) Specify the number of write elements. Specify the write data.
+2
+3
+4 +5
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal (4 digits hex).
474
Appendix D
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex)
Remote destina- Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 tion network Remote destination network address address (DNA) (DNA): 00 to 7F hex (2 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex 0000 to 7FFF hex Specify the first write address (4 digits hex) Specify the number of write elements. Specify the write data.
+2
+3
+4 +5
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal.
475
Appendix D
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Host Link unit No. (2 digits BCD) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex)
Remote destina- Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 tion network Remote destination network address address (DNA) (DNA): 00 to 7F hex (2 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex 0000 to 7FFF hex Specify the first write address (4 digits hex) Specify the number of write elements. Specify the write data.
+2
+3
+4 +5
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal.
476
Appendix D
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Remote destinaHost Link unit tion network No. address (DNA) (2 digits BCD) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0003 hex (3 decimal) Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 Remote destination network address (DNA): 00 to 7F hex Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex
+2
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal.
477
Appendix D
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Remote destinaHost Link unit tion network No. address (DNA) (2 digits BCD) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0003 hex (3 decimal) Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 Remote destination network address (DNA): 00 to 7F hex Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex
+2
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex)
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal.
478
Appendix D
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Remote destinaHost Link unit tion network No. address (DNA) (2 digits BCD) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0003 hex (3 decimal) Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 Remote destination network address (DNA): 00 to 7F hex Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex
+2
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex) Unit data
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The unit data is stored.
479
Appendix D
Offset
+0 +1
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Remote destinaHost Link unit tion network No. address (DNA) (2 digits BCD) (2 digits hex) Remote destination node address (DA1) (2 digits hex) Remote destination unit address (DA2) (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0003 hex (3 decimal) Host Link unit number: 00 to 31 Remote destination network address (DNA): 00 to 7F hex Remote destination node address (DA1): 00 to FE hex Remote destination unit address (DA2): 00 to FE hex
+2
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words (4 digits hex) End code (4 digits hex) Unit status
Data Always 0002 hex (2 decimal) The end code is stored in hexadecimal. The Units operating status is stored.
480
Appendix E
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1)
The Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C frame, model 1) Protocol is used to send user-specified or specific (e.g., Device Memory Read/Write) Computer Link commands using the A-compatible 1C frame model 1 control protocol from a CS/CJ-series PLC (CPU Unit) connected through RS-232C or RS-422A to a Mitsubishi PLC (Sequencer CPU Module installed in a Computer Link Module). This protocol enables the OMRON PLC to be used as the host (master) to remotely execute RUN/STOP for or read/write the device memory of a Mitsubishi A/QnA/Q-series PLC that is connected either serially or on a MELSECNET/Ethernet network.
OMRON CS/CJ-series PLC
Serial Communications Unit/Board CPU Unit
PMCR(260)
Communications Specifications
Item Protocol Transmission path connection Specifications Computer Link, A-compatible 1C frame, model 1 Multi-point Host (OMRON CS/CJ-series PLC): Mitsubishi Sequencer CPU Module 1:1, 1:n (n = 32 max), m:n (m+n = 32 max) Note 1: Specifying the PLC number enables access of the specified Sequencer CPU Module on the MELSECNET or Ethernet network. Note 2: Sending data using slave-initiated communications from the Sequence CPU Unit to the Host (on-demand function) is not supported. RS-232C, RS-422A (4-wire, half-duplex) Start-stop synchronization ASCII 7, 8 bits Note: 8-bit units with 0 added to the beginning of the 7-bit code 1, 2 bits Horizontal parity (none, 1 bit)
Communications method Synchronization method Transmission code Data length Stop bits Error detection method
481
Appendix E
Error Response
Station PLC No. No. NAK 02 hex @@ hex @@ hex @@ hex @@ hex 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Error code 2 bytes
PLC No.
Device type
482
Appendix E
Specify the addresses for specified device types in hexadecimal. Specify the number of bits for bit data and the number of words for word data in hexadecimal.
803 (0323) Device memory batch read as word data (T/C device type)
804 (0324) Device memory fill WW (Device as word data (all memory fill as device types except word data) T/C)
805 (0325) Device memory fill as word data (T/C device type)
Device other than Reads the word data for the number of device Timer/Counter points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit. Timer/Counter Reads the word (PV) data for the number of (T, C) device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit. Device other than Writes the word data starting from the specified Timer/Counter word + 6 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows). Timer/Counter Writes the word (PV) data starting from the (T, C) specified word + 6 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows).
483
Appendix E
806 (0326) Device memory batch read as bit data (all device types except T/C)
BR (Device mem- Device other than Reads the bit data for the number of device points starting from the specified device address ory batch read as Timer/Counter for the specified device type (except T, C) in the bit data) Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit. 807 (0327) Device memory Timer/Counter Reads the bit (PV) data for the number of device batch read as bit (T, C) points starting from the specified device address data (T/C device for the specified device type (T, C) in the Mitsubtype) ishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit. Device other than Writes the bit data starting from the specified 808 (0328) Device memory fill BW (Device as bit data (all memory fill as bit Timer/Counter word + 6 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to the device types except data) number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type T/C) (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows). 809 (0329) Device memory fill Timer/Counter Writes the bit (PV) data starting from the specias bit data (T/C (T, C) fied word + 6 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to device type) the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows).
484
Appendix E
Device other than Reads the word data for the number of device Timer/Counter points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit. 811 (032B) Device memory Timer/Counter Reads the word (PV) data for the number of batch read as word (T, C) device points starting from the specified device data (T/C device address for the specified device type (T, C) in the type) Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit. Device other than Writes the word data starting from the specified 812 (032C) Device memory fill QW (Device Timer/Counter word + 7 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to the as word data (all memory fill as number of device points starting from the specidevice types except word data) fied device address for the specified device type T/C) (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows). Timer/Counter Writes the word (PV) data starting from the 813 (032D) Device memory fill (T, C) specified word + 7 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit as word data (T/C to the number of device points starting from the device type) specified device address for the specified device type (T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows). 814 (032E) Device memory JR (Device mem- Device other than Reads the bit data for the number of device batch read as bit ory batch read as Timer/Counter points starting from the specified device address data (all device bit data) for the specified device type (except T, C) in the types except T/C) Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit. 815 (032F) Device memory Timer/Counter Reads the bit (PV) data for the number of device batch read as bit (T, C) points starting from the specified device address data (T/C device for the specified device type (T, C) in the Mitsubtype) ishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit. 816 (0330) Device memory fill JW (Device Device other than Writes the bit data starting from the specified as bit data (all memory fill as bit Timer/Counter word + 7 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to the device types except data) number of device points starting from the speciT/C) fied device address for the specified device type (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows). 817 (0331) Device memory fill Timer/Counter Writes the bit (PV) data starting from the specias bit data (T/C (T, C) fied word + 7 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to device type) the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows).
485
Appendix E
Executes a loopback test at the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows). (E.g, if the data starting from the specified word + 3 is sent from the host, the Computer Link Module will return the data unchanged to the host.)
Send/Receive User-specified Computer Link Commands, with ASCII Conversion (Sequence No. 800 (Hex 0320)) Command Code: User-specified
This sequence converts the text data of a user-specified Computer Link command into ASCII and sends to the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows). The response data is converted into hexadecimal and stored in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit starting from the specified word.
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Command (4 digits hex) Number of send bytes (4 digits hex)
Data 0004 to 00FA hex (4 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Specify the service command code to be used in ASCII. 0000 to 007A hex (0 to 122 decimal) Specify the number of text data bytes for the communications line (i.e., twice the number of text bytes in S+4 onwards) Set the text data for the command. The specified hexadecimal data will be converted into ASCII and sent.
+4
Text data
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data bytes Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Receive data (4 digits hex)
Data 0002 to 00FA hex (2 to 250 decimal) Station No: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Any receive data is converted into hexadecimal and stored.
486
Appendix E
Send/Receive User-specified Computer Link Commands without Conversion (Sequence No. 801 (Hex 0321)) Command Code: User-specified
This sequence sends the text data of a user-specified Computer Link command to the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows) without converting into ASCII. The response data is stored in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit starting from the specified word without converting into hexadecimal.
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. (2 digits hex) PLC No. (2 digits hex)
Data 0004 to 00FA hex (4 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Specify the service command code to be used in ASCII. 0000 to 007A hex (0 to 122 decimal) Note: The text data is converted into ASCII on the communications line, so specify twice the number of bytes of text data bytes in S+4 onwards. Set the text data for the command. The specified hexadecimal data will be converted into ASCII and sent.
+4
Text data
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data bytes Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Receive data (4 digits hex)
Data 0002 to 00FA hex (2 to 250 decimal) Station No: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Any receive data is converted into hexadecimal and stored.
487
Appendix E
Device Memory Batch Read as Word data (Any Device Type Except T/C) (Sequence No. 802 (Hex 0322)) (Command Code: WR)
This sequence reads the word data for the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit.
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) (Undefined) Device type (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0005 hex (5 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Set the device type (1 character) in ASCII. Set the first read address of the device to read. Set the number of device words/bits to read.
Device No. (4 digits hex) (Undefined) Device words/ bits (2 digits hex)
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (2 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Stores the number read data converted into hexadecimal.
488
Appendix E
Device Memory Batch Read as Word Data (T/C Device Type) (Sequence No. 803 (Hex 0323)) (Command Code: WR)
This sequence reads the word (PV) data for the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit.
(Undefined)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Device type (4 digits hex) (Undefined) (Undefined) Device No. (3 digits hex) Device words/ bits (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0005 hex (5 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Set the device type (2 characters) in ASCII. Set the first read address of the device to read. Set the number of device words/bits to read.
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (2 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Stores the number read data converted into hexadecimal.
489
Appendix E
Device Memory Fill as Word Data (Any Device Type Except T/C) (Sequence No. 804 (Hex 0324)) (Command Code: WW)
This sequence writes the word data starting from the specified word + 6 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows).
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. (2 digits hex) (Undefined) PLC No. (2 digits hex)
Data 0007 to 00FA hex (7 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Set the device type (1 character) in ASCII. Set the first write address of the write data. Set the number of device words/bits to write. Specify the number of text data bytes for the communications line (i.e., twice the number of text bytes in S+6 onwards) Set the write data.
Device type (2 digits hex) Device No. (4 digits hex) (Undefined) Device words/ bits (2 digits hex) Number of send data bytes (4 digits hex)
+5
+6
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Error code (2 digits hex) (Undefined)
Data 0002 or 0003 hex (2 or 3 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Stores the error code converted to hexadecimal. No error code is stored for normal completion.
490
Appendix E
Device Memory Fill as Word Data (T/C Device Type) (Sequence No. 805 (Hex 0325)) (Command Code: WW)
This sequence writes the word (PV) data starting from the specified word + 6 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows).
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Device type (4 digits hex) (Unde- Device No. (3 digits hex) fined) (Undefined) Device words/ bits (2 digits hex) Number of send data bytes (4 digits hex)
Data 0007 to 00FA hex (7 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Set the device type (2 characters) in ASCII. Set the first write address of the write data. Set the number of device words/bits to write. Specify the number of text data bytes for the communications line (i.e., twice the number of text bytes in S+6 onwards) Set the write data.
+5
+6
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Error code (Undefined) (2 digits hex)
Data 0002 or 0003 hex (2 or 3 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Stores the error code converted to hexadecimal. No error code is stored for normal completion.
491
Appendix E
Device Memory Batch Read as Bit Data (All Device Types Except T/C) (Sequence No. 806 (Hex 0326)) (Command Code: BR)
This sequence reads the bit data for the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit.
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) (Undefined) Device type (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0005 hex (5 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Set the device type (1 character) in ASCII. Set the first read address of the device to read. Set the number of device words/bits to read.
Device No. (4 digits hex) (Undefined) Device words/ bits (2 digits hex)
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Stores the number read data converted into hexadecimal.
492
Appendix E
Device Memory Batch Read as Bit Data (T/C Device Type) (Sequence No. 807 (Hex 0327)) (Command Code: BR)
This sequence reads the bit (PV) data for the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit.
(Undefined)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Device type (4 digits hex) (Undefined) (Undefined) Device No. (3 digits hex) Device words/ bits (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0005 hex (5 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Set the device type (2 characters) in ASCII. Set the first read address of the device to read. Set the number of device words/bits to read.
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Stores the number read data converted into hexadecimal.
493
Appendix E
Device Memory Fill as Bit Data (All Device Types Except T/C) (Sequence No. 808 (Hex 0328)) (Command Code: BW)
This sequence writes the bit data starting from the specified word + 6 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows).
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. (2 digits hex) (Undefined) PLC No. (2 digits hex)
Data 0007 to 00FA hex (7 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Set the device type (2 characters) in ASCII. Set the first write address of the write data. Set the number of device words/bits to write. Specify the number of text data bytes for the communications line (i.e., twice the number of text bytes in S+6 onwards) Set the write data.
Device type (2 digits hex) Device No. (4 digits hex) (Unde- Device words/bits fined) (2 digits hex) Number of send data bytes (4 digits hex)
+6
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Stores the number read data converted into hexadecimal.
494
Appendix E
Device Memory Fill as Bit Data (T/C Device Type) (Sequence No. 809 (Hex 0329)) (Command Code: BW)
This sequence writes the bit (PV) data starting from the specified word + 6 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows).
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. (2 digits hex) PLC No. (2 digits hex)
Data 0007 to 00FA hex (7 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Set the device type (2 characters) in ASCII. Set the first write address of the write data. Set the number of device words/bits to write. Specify the number of text data bytes for the communications line (i.e., twice the number of text bytes in S+6 onwards) Set the write data.
Device type (4 digits hex) (Unde- Device No. (3 digits hex) fined) (Unde- Device words/bits fined) (3 digits hex) Number of send data bytes (4 digits hex)
+6
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Station No. (2 digits hex) Error code (2 digits hex) PLC No. (2 digits hex) (Undefined)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Stores the error code converted to hexadecimal. No error code is stored for normal completion.
495
Appendix E
Device Memory Batch Read as Word Data (All Device Types Except T/C) (Sequence No. 810 (Hex 032A)) (Command Code: QR)
This sequence reads the word data for the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit.
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. (2 digits hex) (Undefined) PLC No. (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0006 hex (6 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Set the device type (1 character) in ASCII. Set the first read address of the device to read. Set the number of device words/bits to read.
Device type (2 digits hex) Device No. (6 digits hex) (Undefined) (Undefined) Device words/ bits (2 digits hex)
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Stores the number read data converted into hexadecimal.
496
Appendix E
Device Memory Batch Read as Word Data (T/C Device Type) (Sequence No. 811 (Hex 032B)) (Command Code: QR)
This sequence reads the word (PV) data for the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit.
PLC No.
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Device type (4 digits hex) Device No. (5 digits hex) (Undefined) (Undefined) Device words/ bits (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0006 hex (6 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Set the device type (2 characters) in ASCII. Set the first read address of the device to read. Set the number of device words/bits to read.
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Stores the number read data converted into hexadecimal.
497
Appendix E
Device Memory Fill as Word Data (All Device Types Except T/C) (Sequence No. 812 (Hex 032C)) (Command Code: QW)
This sequence writes the word data starting from the specified word + 7 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows).
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) (Undefined) Device type (2 digits hex)
Data 0008 to 00FA hex (8 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Set the device type (1 character) in ASCII. Set the first write address of the write data. Set the number of device words/bits to write. Specify the number of text data bytes for the communications line (i.e., twice the number of text bytes in S+6 onwards) Set the write data.
+6
Device No. (6 digits hex) (Undefined) (Undefined) Device words/ bits (2 digits hex) Number of send data bytes (4 digits hex)
+7
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Error code (2 digits hex) (Undefined)
Data 0002 hex or 0003 hex (2 or 3 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Stores the error code converted to hexadecimal. No error code is stored for normal completion.
498
Appendix E
Device Memory Fill as Word Data (T/C Device Type) (Sequence No. 813 (Hex 032D)) (Command Code: QW)
This sequence writes the word (PV) data starting from the specified word + 7 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows).
PLC No.
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Device type (4 digits hex) Device No. (5 digits hex) (Undefined) (Undefined) Device words/ bits (2 digits hex) Number of send data bytes (4 digits hex)
Data 0008 to 00FA hex (8 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Set the device type (2 characters) in ASCII. Set the first write address of the write data. Set the number of device words/bits to write. Specify the number of text data bytes for the communications line (i.e., twice the number of text bytes in S+6 onwards) Set the write data.
+6
+7
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Error code (2 digits hex) (Undefined)
Data 0002 hex or 0003 hex (2 or 3 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Stores the error code converted to hexadecimal. No error code is stored for normal completion.
499
Appendix E
Device Memory Batch Read as Bit Data (All Device Types Except T/C) (Sequence No. 814 (Hex 032E)) (Command Code: JR)
This sequence reads the bit data for the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit.
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. (2 digits hex) (Undefined) PLC No. (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0006 hex (6 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Set the device type (1 character) in ASCII. Set the first read address of the device to read. Set the number of device words/bits to read.
Device type (2 digits hex) Device No. (6 digits hex) (Undefined) (Undefined) Device words/ bits (2 digits hex)
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Stores the number read data converted into hexadecimal.
500
Appendix E
Device Memory Batch Read as Bit Data (T/C Device Type) (Sequence No. 815 (Hex 032F)) (Command Code: JR)
This sequence reads the bit (PV) data for the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit.
PLC No.
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. (2 digits hex) PLC No. (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0006 hex (6 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Set the device type (1 character) in ASCII. Set the first read address of the device to read. Set the number of device words/bits to read.
Device type (4 digits hex) Device No. (5 digits hex) (Undefined) (Undefined) Device words/ bits (2 digits hex)
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Read data (4 digits hex)
Data 0003 to 00FA hex (3 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Stores the number read data converted into hexadecimal.
501
Appendix E
Device Memory Fill as Bit Data (All Device Types Except T/C) (Sequence No. 816 (Hex 0330)) (Command Code: JW)
This sequence writes the bit data starting from the specified word + 7 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows).
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) (Undefined) Device type (2 digits hex)
Data 0008 to 00FA hex (8 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Set the device type (1 character) in ASCII. Set the first write address of the write data. Set the number of device words/bits to write. Specify the number of text data bytes for the communications line (i.e., twice the number of text bytes in S+6 onwards) Set the write data.
+6
Device No. (6 digits hex) (Undefined) (Undefined) Device words/ bits (2 digits hex) Number of send data bytes (4 digits hex)
+7
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Error code (2 digits hex) (Undefined)
Data 0002 hex or 0003 hex (2 or 3 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Stores the error code converted to hexadecimal. No error code is stored for normal completion.
502
Appendix E
Device Memory Fill as Bit Data (T/C Device Type) (Sequence No. 817 (Hex 0331)) (Command Code: JW)
This sequence writes the bit (PV) data starting from the specified word + 7 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to the number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows).
PLC No.
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Device type (4 digits hex) Device No. (5 digits hex) (Undefined) (Undefined) Device words/ bits (2 digits hex) Number of send data bytes (4 digits hex)
Data 0008 to 00FA hex (8 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Set the device type (2 characters) in ASCII. Set the first write address of the write data. Set the number of device words/bits to write. Specify the number of text data bytes for the communications line (i.e., twice the number of text bytes in S+6 onwards) Set the write data.
+6
+7
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Error code (2 digits hex) (Undefined)
Data 0002 hex or 0003 hex (2 or 3 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Stores the error code converted to hexadecimal. No error code is stored for normal completion.
503
Appendix E
Loopback Test (Sequence No. 818 (Hex 0332)) (Command Code: TT)
This sequence executes a loopback test at the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows). (E.g, if the data starting from the specified word + 3 is sent from the host, the Computer Link Module will return the data unchanged to the host.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Contents (data format) Number of send data words (4 digits hex) Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) (Undefined) Loopback data Data length (2 digits hex)
Data Always 0005 hex (5 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex Set the number of bytes of loopback data in S+3 onwards. Set the loopback data to send.
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Contents (data format) Number of receive data words Station No. PLC No. (2 digits hex) (2 digits hex) Data length (2 digits hex) Loopback data
Data 0002 to 00FA hex (2 to 250 decimal) Station No.: 00 to FF hex PLC No.: 00 to FF hex The data length for the loopback data is stored. The loopback data is stored unchanged.
504
Appendix F
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol
The E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol reads and controls various parameters in remote mode for the Controller connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C or RS-485 cable.
Reads the process value. Reads the set point during SP ramp. Reads the MV (heating, cooling). Reads the set point. Reads alarm value 1, 2. Reads the proportional band, integral (reset) time, and derivative (rate) time Reads the cooling coefficient. Reads the dead band. Reads the manual reset value. Reads the hysteresis (heating, cooling). Reads the control period (heating, cooling). Reads the SP ramp time unit and SP ramp set value. Reads the LBA detection time. Reads the MV at stop and the MV at PV error. Reads the MV limits. Reads the input digital filter. Reads the alarm 1, 2 hysteresis. Reads the input shift limits. Reads parameters in level 0. Reads parameters in level 1. Reads parameters in level 1. Reads parameters in level 2. Reads parameters in level 2. Reads the value of the specified parameter.
006 (0006) 007 (0007) 008 (0008) 009 (0009) 010 (000A) 011 (000B) 012 (000C) 013 (000D) 014 (000E) 015 (000F) 016 (0010) 017 (0011) 018 (0012) 019 (0013) 020 (0014) 021 (0015) 022 (0016) 023 (0017)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Note 1. The hexadecimal equivalents of sequences numbers are given in parentheses. 2. Ladder Interface Settings YES: User settings are required for the 3rd or 4th operands of PMCR. NO: Send word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 3rd operand (S). Receive word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 4th operand (D).
505
Appendix F
Connection Configuration
The connection configuration for using the E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol is shown below. RS-232C Connection
Serial Communications Board (CS Series only) Serial Communications Unit (CS/CJ Series)
E5#K RS-232C
PLC PS
RS-232C port
13 14 1
SD RD SG
Note 1. The communications configuration is a one-to-one configuration and the maximum cable length is 15 m. 2. Use shielded twisted-pair cable (AWG28i or greater).
506
Appendix F
E5#K
PLC PS
RS-485 port
RS-485
E5#K
RS-485
Up to 31 units can be connected. E5#K
RS-485
Note 1. The communications configuration is a one-to-one configuration or a one-to-N configuration. In the one-to-N configuration, up to 32 units including the Serial Communications Unit/Board can be connected. 2. The maximum cable length is 500 m. Use a shielded twisted-pair cable for the cable (AWG28i or greater). 3. Connect a terminator only at both ends of the transmission path. For instance, in the example shown below, connect a terminator to the Serial Communications Unit/Board and unit No. 30 and do not connect any terminator to units No. 0 to No. 29. Use a resistance of 120 (1/2 W) for the terminators (the total resistance of both ends must be 54 or more).
Serial Communications Board/Unit
RS-485: D-sub 9 pin female
Pin No. 1 2
Shielded cable
FG
E5CK (No. 0)
RS-485: Terminal block
Terminal No. 13 14 A B
A<B: A>B:
[1] [0]
Mark Space
507
Appendix F
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Read Set Point during SP Ramp (Sequence No. 001 (Hex 0001))
Reads the set point during the SP ramp and stores the results in the specified words. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send +0 data +1 Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
508
Appendix F
Offset
+0 +1
Data
F050 to 1050, 0000 to 1050 for heating/cooling control F indicates a negative value. F050 to 1050 F indicates a negative value.
+2
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
509
Appendix F
Offset
+0 +1
Data
A999 to 9999 F indicates a negative value and A indicates 1. A999 to 9999 F indicates a negative value and A indicates 1.
+2
Read Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative Time (Sequence No. 005 (Hex 0005))
Reads the proportional band, integral time, and derivative time and stores the results in the specified words. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send +0 data +1 Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
510
Appendix F
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
511
Appendix F
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
512
Appendix F
Read SP Ramp Time Unit and Set Value (Sequence No. 011 (Hex 000B))
Reads the SP ramp time unit and SP ramp set value and stores the results in the specified words. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
513
Appendix F
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
F050 to 1050 F indicates a negative value. A050 to 1050 for heating/cooling control A indicates a negative value. F050 to 1050 F indicates a negative value.
+2
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
514
Appendix F
Contents (data format) Data
F050 to MV upper limit 1 F indicates a negative value values. A050 to 1050 for heating/cooling control A indicates a negative value. 0000 to 1000
+3
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
515
Appendix F
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
A999 to 9999 F indicates a negative value and A indicates 1. A999 to 9999 F indicates a negative value and A indicates 1.
+2
~
+9 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
(max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 to 9
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0008 00 to 31
516
Appendix F
~
+36 +37 +38 +39 +40 Process value Set point during SP ramp MV (heating) MV (cooling) Set point
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
Number of units 5 + 1 Scaling lower limit to upper limit Set point lower limit to upper limit
+3
F050 to 1050 F indicates a negative value. 0000 to 1050 for heating/cooling control 0000 to 1050 Set point lower limit to upper limit
+4 +5
1st unit MV (cooling) (4 digits BCD) 1st unit Set point (4 digits BCD)
+40 (max.)
~
+9 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
(max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 to 9
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0008 00 to 31
517
Appendix F
~
+43 +44 +45 +46 +47 +48 Alarm value 1 Alarm value 2 Alarm value 3 Proportional band Integral time Derivative time
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Number of units 6 + 1 A999 to 9999 F indicates a negative value and A indicates 1. A999 to 9999 F indicates a negative value and A indicates 1. A999 to 9999 F indicates a negative value and A indicates 1. 0001 to 9999
+2
+3
+4
+5 +6
+48 (max.)
0000 to 3999
518
Appendix F
~
+9 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
(max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 to 9
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0008 00 to 31
~
+50 +51 +52 +53 +54 +55 +56 Cooling coefficient Dead band Manual reset value Hysteresis (heating) Hysteresis (cooling) Control period (heating) Control period (cooling)
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
Number of units 7 + 1 0001 to 9999 A999 to 9999 F indicates a negative value and A indicates 1. 0000 to 1000
+3
+4
0001 to 9999
+5 +6
+7
0001 to 0099
519
Appendix F
Data
~
+9 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
(max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 to 9
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0008 00 to 31
~
+57 +58 +59 +60 +61 +62 +63 +64 SP ramp time unit SP ramp set value LBA detection time MV at stop MV at PV error MV upper limit MV lower limit MV change rate limit
520
Appendix F
Contents (data format) Data
Number of units 8 + 1 0000: s, 0001: h 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 F050 to 1050 F indicates a negative value. A050 to 1050 for heating/cooling control A indicates a negative value. F050 to 1050 F indicates a negative value. A050 to 1050 for heating/cooling control A indicates a negative value. MV lower limit + 1 to 1050 0000 to 1050 for heating/cooling control F050 to MV upper limit 1 F indicates a negative value. A050 to 1050 for heating/cooling control A indicates a negative value. 0000 to 1000
Number of receive data words (4 digits Hex) 1st unit SP ramp time unit (4 digits BCD) 1st unit SP ramp set value (4 digits BCD) 1st unit LBA detection time (4 digits BCD) 1st unit MV at stop (4 digits BCD)
+5
+6 +7
1st unit MV upper limit (4 digits BCD) 1st unit MV lower limit (4 digits BCD)
+8
+64 (max.)
0000 to 1000
~
+9 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
(max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 to 9
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0008 00 to 31
521
Appendix F
~
+43 +44 +45 +46 +47 +48 Input digital filter Alarm 1 hysteresis Alarm 2 hysteresis Alarm 3 hysteresis Input shift upper limit Input shift lower limit
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
Number of units 6 + 1 0000 to 9999 0001 to 9999
+3
0001 to 9999
+4
0001 to 9999
+5
A999 to 9999 F indicates a negative value and A indicates 1. A999 to 9999 F indicates a negative value and A indicates 1.
+6
+48 (max.)
522
Appendix F
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Note To read parameters in the setup mode or extended mode, execute Switch to Level 1 (Sequence No. 075) in advance.
523
Appendix F
524
Appendix G
E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol
The E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol writes and controls various settings in remote mode for the Controller connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C or RS-485 cable. Note Negative values cannot be written. All values must be set as unsigned BCD.
Writes the set point. Writes alarm value 1, 2. Writes the proportional band, integral time, and derivative time. Writes the cooling coefficient. Writes the dead band. Writes the manual reset value. Writes the hysteresis (heating, cooling) Writes the control period (heating, cooling) Writes the SP ramp time unit and SP ramp set value. Writes the LBA detection time. Writes the MV at stop and the MV at PLC error. Writes the MV limits. Writes the input digital filter. Writes alarm 1, 2 hysteresis. Writes the input shift values. Writes parameters in level 0. Writes parameters in level 1. Writes parameters in level 1. Writes parameters in level 2. Writes parameters in level 2. Writes the value of the specified parameter. Switches the setting level to level 0. Initiates Run or Stop. Switches the mode to remote or local. Executes or cancels AT. Switches the setting level to level 1. Resets the E5@K.
053 (0035) 054 (0036) 055 (0037) 056 (0038) 057 (0039) 058 (003A)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
Write SP ramp time units and set value 059 (003B) Write LBA detection time 060 (003C) Write MV at stop time and PV error 061 (003D) Write MV limits 062 (003E) Write input digital filter 063 (003F) Write alarm hysteresis 064 (0040) Write input shift values 065 (0041) 066 (0042) 067 (0043) 068 (0044) 069 (0045) 070 (0046) 071 (0047) 072 (0048) 073 (0049) 074 (004A) 075 (004B) 076 (004C) Write level 0 parameters Write level 1 parameters 1 Write level 1 parameters 2 Write level 2 parameters 1 Write level 2 parameters 2 General-purpose write Switch to level 0 (software reset) Run/stop Remote/local Execute/cancel AT Switch to level 1 Software reset
Note 1. The hexadecimal equivalents of sequences numbers are given in parentheses. 2. Ladder Interface Settings YES: User settings are required for the 3rd or 4th operands of PMCR.
525
Appendix G
Connections
The connections are the same as that for the E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol.
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
526
Appendix G
Write Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative Time (Sequence No. 052 (Hex 0034))
Writes the proportional band, integral time, and derivative time. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send +0 data +1 +2 +3 +4 Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No. Proportional band Integral time Derivative time
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Data
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
527
Appendix G
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
528
Appendix G
Contents (data format) Data
0001 to 0099 0001 to 0099
Control period (heating) (4 digits BCD) Control period (cooling) (4 digits BCD)
Write SP Ramp Time Unit and Set Value (Sequence No. 058 (Hex 003A))
Writes the SP ramp time unit and SP ramp set value. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No. SP ramp time unit SP ramp set value
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
0000 to 9999
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
529
Appendix G
Write MV at Stop Time and at PV Error (Sequence No. 060 (Hex 003C))
Writes the MV at stop time and the MV at PV error. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No. MV at stop time MV at PV error
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Data
MV lower limit + 1 to 1050 Heating/cooling control time: 0000 to 1050 0000 to MV upper limit 1 0000 to 1000
530
Appendix G
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
531
Appendix G
~
+16 +17 (Undefined) Set point Unit No.
~
8th unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units 2 + 2 0001 to 0008 00 to 31 Set point lower limit to upper limit
+17 (max.)
532
Appendix G
~
+51 +52 +53 +54 +55 +56 +57 (Undefined) Unit No. Alarm value 1 Alarm value 2 Alarm value 3 Proportional band Integral time Derivative time
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units 7 + 2 0001 to 0008 00 to 31 A999 to 9999 F indicates a negative value and A indicates 1. A999 to 9999 F indicates a negative value and A indicates 1. A999 to 9999 F indicates a negative value and A indicates 1. 0001 to 9999 0000 to 3999 0000 to 3999
+4
+5
+6 +7 +8
+57 (max.)
0000 to 3999
533
Appendix G
~
+58 +59 +60 +61 +62 +63 +64 +65 (Undefined) Dead band Manual reset value Hysteresis (heating) Hysteresis (cooling) Control period (heating) Control period (cooling) Unit No. Cooling coefficient
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6
Data
Number of units 8 + 2 0001 to 0008 00 to 31 0001 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 1000 0001 to 9999
+7
0001 to 9999
+8
0001 to 0099
+9
0001 to 0099
+65 (max.)
0001 to 0099
534
Appendix G
~
+65 +66 +67 +68 +69 +70 +71 +72 +73 (Undefined) SP ramp time unit SP ramp set value LBA detection time MV at stop MV at PV error MV upper limit MV lower limit MV change rate limit Unit No.
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +10
Data
Number of units 9 + 2 0001 to 0008 00 to 31 0000 to 0001 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 1050 0000 to 1050 MV lower limit + 1 to 1050 0000 to MV upper limit 1 0000 to 1000
+73 (max.)
0000 to 1000
535
Appendix G
~
+51 +52 +53 +54 +55 +56 +57 (Undefined) Input digital filter alarm 1 hysteresis alarm 2 hysteresis alarm 3 hysteresis Input shift upper limit Input shift lower limit Unit No.
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Data
Number of units 7 + 2 0001 to 0008 00 to 31 0000 to 9999 0001 to 9999
+5
0001 to 9999
+6
0001 to 0099
+7 +8
+57 (max.)
000 to 9999
536
Appendix G
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note To write parameters in the setup mode or extended mode, execute Switch to Level 1 (Sequence No. 075) in advance.
~
+9 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
(max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 to 9
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0008 00 to 31
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note When this sequence is executed, a software reset command is issued and the operation of the E5@K is reset (equivalent to turning on the power supply). About five seconds will be required until communications are enabled.
537
Appendix G
~
+16 +17 (Undefined) Unit No. Command code
~
8th unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units 2 + 2 0001 to 0008 00 to 31 0000: 0001: Run Stop
+17 (max.)
0000: 0001:
Run Stop
~
+16 +17 (Undefined) Unit No. Command code
~
8th unit (max.)
538
Appendix G
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Number of units (4 digits Hex) 1st unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 1st unit Command code (4 digits BCD)
Data
Number of units 2 + 2 0001 to 0008 00 to 31 0000: Local 0001: Remote
+17 (max.)
~
+16 +17 (Undefined) Unit No. Command code
~
8th unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units 2 + 2 0001 to 0008 00 to 31 0000: Stop 0001: Execute AT 40% 0002: Execute AT 100%
+17 (max.)
539
Appendix G
~
+9 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
(max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 to 9
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0008 00 to 31
~
+9 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
(max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 to 9
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0008 00 to 31
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note Communications with the E5@K are disabled for about five seconds after this sequence is executed.
540
Appendix H
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
The E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol reads and controls various parameters in remote mode for the Temperature Controller connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C or RS-422/485 cable. Note All sequences in this appendix operate on memory bank 0 and cannot be used for other memory banks.
105 (0069) 106 (006A) 107 (006B) 108 (006C) 109 (006D) 110 (006E) 111 (006F) 112 (0070) 113 (0071) 114 (0072) 115 (0073) 116 (0074) 117 (0075) 118 (0076) 119 (0077) 120 (0078) 121 (0079) 122 (007A) 123 (007B)
Reads the set points. Reads the process values. Reads the output values. Reads the set points, process values, and output values. Reads the proportional bands, integral times, and derivative times. Reads the control periods. Reads the output modes. Reads the alarm modes. Reads the alarm temperatures. Reads the hysteresis. Reads the operation status. Reads the error status. Reads the setting units. Reads the input shift values. Reads the manual reset values. Reads the ramp values. Reads the present set points. Reads the output value limits. Reads the output value change rate limits. Reads the HB alarm and HS alarm valid channels. Reads the heater burnout/SSR failure detection currents. Reads the heater currents and SSR leakage currents. Reads the dead bands and overlap bands. Reads the cooling coefficients.
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Note 1. The hexadecimal equivalents of sequences numbers are given in parentheses. 2. Ladder Interface Settings YES: User settings are required for the 3rd or 4th operands of PMCR.
541
Appendix H
Set the constant 0000 for the 3rd operand (S). Set the constant 0000 for the 4th operand (D).
Connections
This section shows connections for using the E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol. RS-232C Connections
Serial Communications Board (CS Series only) Serial Communications Unit (CS/CJ Series)
PLC PS
RS-232C port
Signal name Signal ground or common return line Send data Receive data Request to send Clear to send Data set ready Data terminal ready Disabled (Do not connect.)
Pin No.
2 3 4 5 6 20 1, 8 to 19, 21 to 25
E5ZE
RS-232C: D-sub 9-pin female
LT1181CS or equivalent
Shield
FG SG SD RD RTS
1 9
Pin No.
Signal name
7 2
SG SD
TX RX
Note 1. The maximum communications cable length is 15 m. Use a shielded twisted-pair cable for the cable. 2. Use a 25-pin D-sub Plug (OMRON XM2A-2501). 3. Use XM2S-2511 Hood (OMRON) or an equivalent.
542
Appendix H
Turn off the communications switch to disconnect terminating resistance. Serial Communications Board/Unit
RS-485: D-sub 9-pin female
Signal name FG B A Pin No. Hood 2 1
SN751177N or equivalent
5V 51 k 4.7 k 4.7 k 51 k RX
240
TX A 6.8 V
Shield E5ZE
RS-485: Terminals
*1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch to the 2-wire setting. *2: Turn ON the terminating resistance switch.
Shield
Terminal 3 4 5 Signal name SG B A
Terminating resistance
240
Note Terminal block pins 1 and 2 cannot be connected. If these blocks are used, operation of the E5ZE may fail.
543
Appendix H
E5ZE
Terminating resistance
240
SN751177N or equivalent
5V 51 k 4.7 k 4.7 k RX
Shield *1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch to the 4-wire setting. *2: Turn ON the terminating resistance switch.
6.8 V
Terminating resistance
240
Terminating resistance
240
544
Appendix H
Switch Settings
This section shows the switch settings for using the E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol. Communications Parameter DIP Switch
Pins 3 and 4: Terminating resistance Pins 1 and 2: RS-422/RS-485
3 4
ON ON OFF OFF
3 4
3 4
OFF ON ON
OFF OFF
1 2
B 0B
C D E 0C 0D 0E
1 2
1 and 2
RS-422 or RS-485
3 4
OFF
OFF
3 4
Pins 3 and 4
RS-422
OFF ON
DTS-4
1 2
RS-485
F 0F
19,200
ON
1 2
9,600
ON
4,800
ON
1 2
2,400
ON
1 2
1 2
545
Appendix H
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+15 +16 Set point (rightmost 4 digits) Set point (leftmost 1 digit)
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0011 (0017 decimal) Varies according to the temperature sensor type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE. F indicates a negative value.
+2
+15
Channel 7 Set point (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Set point (leftmost 1 digit) (1 digit BCD)
Varies according to the temperature sensor type. Refer the manual for the E5ZE. F indicates a negative value.
+16
Offset
+0 +1
Data
546
Appendix H
~
+15 +16 Process value (rightmost 4 digits) Process value (leftmost 1 digit)
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0011 (0017 decimal) Varies according to the temperature sensor type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE. F indicates a negative value.
+2
+15
Channel 7 Process value (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Process value (leftmost 1 digit) (1 digit BCD)
Varies according to the temperature sensor type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE. F indicates a negative value.
+16
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+15 +16 Output value Cooling output value
~
Channel 7
547
Appendix H
Data
0011 (0017 decimal) 0000 to 1000 0000 to 1000 0000 to 1000 0000 to 1000
+15 +16
Channel 7 Output value (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Cooling output value (4 digits BCD)
Read Set Point, Process Value, and Output Value (Sequence No. 103 (Hex 0067))
Reads the set points, process values, and output values and stores the results in the specified words. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+36 +37 +38 +39 +40 Set point (rightmost 4 digits) Set point (leftmost 1 digit) Process value (rightmost 4 digits) Process value (leftmost 1 digit) Output value
~
Channel 7
548
Appendix H
Data
0029 (0041 decimal) Varies according to the temperature sensor type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
+2 +3
Varies according to the temperature sensor type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
+4
+5
+36
Channel 7 Set point (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Set point (leftmost 1 digit) (1 digit BCD) Channel 7 Process value (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Process value (leftmost 1 digit) (1 digit BCD) Channel 0 Output value (4 digits BCD)
Varies according to the temperature sensor type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
+37 +38
Varies according to the temperature sensor type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
+39
+40
0000 to 1000
Read Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative Time (Sequence No. 104 (Hex 0068))
Reads the proportional bands (constant P), integral times (constant I), and derivative times (Constant D) and stores the results in the specified words. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+22 +23 +24 Constant P Constant I Constant D
~
Channel 7
549
Appendix H
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
0019 (0025 decimal) 0000 to 9999 0000 to 3999 0000 to 3999
Channel 7 Constant P (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Constant I (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Constant D (4 digits BCD)
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+15 +16 Control period Cooling control period
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
0011 (0017 decimal) 0001 to 0099 0001 to 0099
+15 +16
Channel 7 Control period (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Cooling control period (4 digits BCD)
550
Appendix H
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+15 +16 (Undefined) (Undefined) Alarm 1 set code Alarm 2 set code
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
0011 (0017 decimal) 00 to 0C 00 to 0C
+15 +16
Channel 7 Alarm 1 set code (2 digits Hex) Channel 7 Alarm 2 set code (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0C 00 to 0C
551
Appendix H
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+29 +30 +31 +32 Alarm 1 set value (rightmost 4 digits) Alarm 1 set value (rightmost 1 digit) Alarm 2 set value (rightmost 4 digits) Alarm 2 set value (leftmost 1 digit)
~
Channel 7
`
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0021 (0033 decimal) 0000 to 9999 F indicates a negative number. 0000 to 0009 F indicates a negative number. 0000 to 9999 F indicates a negative number. 0000 to 0009 F indicates a negative number.
+2
+3
+4
+29
Channel 7 Alarm 1 set value (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Alarm 1 set value (leftmost 1 digit) (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Alarm 2 set value (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD) Channel 07 Alarm 2 set value (leftmost 1 digit) (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999 F indicates a negative number. 0000 to 0009 F indicates a negative number. 0000 to 9999 F indicates a negative number. 0000 to 0009 F indicates a negative number.
+30
+31
+32
552
Appendix H
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+15 +16 Hysteresis Cooling hysteresis
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
0011 (0017 decimal) 0000 to 0999 0000 to 0999
+15 +16
Offset
+0 +1
Data
553
Appendix H
~
+8 Status code
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
+8
0000 to FFFF
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
554
Appendix H
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+8 Input shift value
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
0000 to 0999 F indicates a negative number. 0000 to 0999 F indicates a negative number.
+8
Offset
+0 +1
Data
555
Appendix H
~
+8 Manual reset value
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1
Data
+2
0000 to 1000
+8
0000 to 1000
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+15 (Undefined) +16 Time unit Ramp value (Undefined)
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
0011 (0017 decimal) 000 to 999 S: Seconds; M: Minutes; H: Hours
556
Appendix H
Data
000 to 999 S: Seconds; M: Minutes; H: Hours
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+15 +16 Present set point (rightmost 4 digits) Present set point (leftmost 1 digit)
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0011 (0017 decimal) Varies according to the temperature sensor type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE. F indicates a negative value.
+2
+15
Channel 7 Present set point (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Present set point (leftmost 1 digit) (1 digit BCD)
Varies according to the temperature sensor type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE. F indicates a negative value.
+16
Offset
+0 +1
Data
557
Appendix H
+3 Cooling control output value lower limit +4 Cooling control output value upper limit
~
+29 +30 Output value lower limit Output value upper limit
~
Channel 7
+31 Cooling control output value lower limit +32 Cooling control output value upper limit
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0021 (0033 decimal) 0000 to 1000
+2
0000 to 1000
+3
Channel 0 0000 to 1000 Cooling control output value upper limit (4 digits BCD) Channel 0 0000 to 1000 Cooling control output value upper limit (4 digits BCD)
+4
+31
Channel 7 0000 to 1000 Cooling control output value upper limit (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 0000 to 1000 Cooling control output value upper limit (4 digits BCD)
+32
Read Output Value Change Rate Limit (Sequence No. 118 (Hex 0076))
Reads the output value change rate limits and stores the results in the specified words. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+8 Output value change rate limit
~
Channel 7
558
Appendix H
Offset
+0 +1
Data
+2
0000 to 1000
+8
0000 to 1000
Read HB Alarm and HS Alarm Valid Channels (Sequence No. 119 (Hex 0077))
Reads the valid or invalid channels for HB alarms and HS alarms and stores the results in the specified words. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Read Heater Burnout and SSR Failure Detection Currents (Sequence No. 120 (Hex 0078))
Reads the heater burnout and SSR failure detection currents and stores the results in the specified words. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
559
Appendix H
~
+15 +16 Heater burnout detection current SSR failure detection current
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0011 (0017 decimal) 0000 to 0500
+2
0000 to 0500
+15
Channel 7 Heater burnout detection current (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 SSR failure detection current (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0500
+16
0000 to 0500
Read Heater Current and SSR Leakage Current (Sequence No.121 (Hex 0079))
Reads the heater currents and SSR leakage currents and stores the results in the specified words. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+15 +16 Heater current SSR leakage current
~
Channel 7
560
Appendix H
Data
0011 (0017 decimal) 0000 to 0500
+2
0000 to 0500
+15
Channel 7 Heater current (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 SSR leakage current (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0500
+16
0000 to 0500
Note The read data will be 0000 for all channels for which HB and HS alarms are not enabled and for all channels for which control is stopped.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+8 Dead band/overlap band
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1
Data
F indicates a number.
0000 to 0999
+2
F indicates a number.
+8
0000 to 0999
F indicates a number.
561
Appendix H
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+8 Cooling coefficient
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
+8
0000 to 0100
562
Appendix I
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
The E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol writes and controls various settings in remote mode for the Temperature Controller connected via a RS-232C or RS-422/485 cable from the PLC via the Serial Communications Unit/Board. Note 1. Negative values cannot be written. All values must be set as unsigned BCD. 2. All sequences in this appendix operate on memory bank 0 and cannot be used for other memory banks.
Write set point (setting unit 1) Write set point (setting unit 0.1) Write proportional band, integral time, and derivative time Write control period Write output mode Write alarm mode Write alarm temperature (setting unit 1) Write alarm temperature (setting unit 0.1) Write hysteresis Start autotuning Cancel autotuning Write setting unit Write input shift value Write manual reset value Write ramp value Write manual output value Write output value limit Write output value change rate limit Save settings
Writes the set points using a setting unit of 1. Writes the set points using a setting unit of 0.1. Writes the proportional bands, integral times, and derivative times. Writes the control periods. Writes the output modes. Writes the alarm modes. Writes the alarm temperatures using a setting unit of 1. Writes the alarm temperatures using a setting unit of 0.1. Writes the hysteresis. Starts autotuning. Cancels autotuning. Writes the setting units. Writes the input shift values. Writes the manual reset values. Writes the ramp values. Writes the manual output values. Writes the output value limits. Write output value change rate limits. Saves settings.
563
Appendix I
Ladder interface Send Receive word word allocation allocation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No
Initialize settings Write HB alarm and HS alarm valid channels Write heater burnout and SSR failure detection currents Write dead band/overlap band Write cooling coefficient Start control Stop operation or control Start manual operation
Initializes settings. Writes the HB alarm and HS alarm valid channels. Writes the heater burnout and SSR failure detection currents. Writes the dead bands/overlap bands. Writes the cooling coefficients. Starts temperature control. Stops temperature control or manual operation. Starts manual operation.
Note 1. The hexadecimal equivalents of sequences numbers are given in parentheses. 2. Ladder Interface Settings YES: User settings are required for the 3rd or 4th operands of PMCR. NO: Send word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 3rd operand (S). Receive word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 4th operand (D).
Connections
The connections are the same as that for the E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol.
Write Set Point (Setting Unit 1) (Sequence No. 150 (Hex 0096))
Writes the set points using a setting unit of 1 (4 digits). Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 Number of send data words (Undefined) Set point (Undefined) Set point (Undefined) Channel 1 Channel 0 Unit No.
~
+16 +17 Set point (Undefined)
~
Channel 7
564
Appendix I
Data
0012 (0018 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 0F Varies according to the temperature sensor type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
+16
Varies according to the temperature sensor type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE. ---
+17
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note When the setting unit for the set point is 0.1 (5 digits), use Write Set Point (Setting Unit 0.1), Sequence No.151.
Write Set Point (Setting Unit 0.1) (Sequence No. 151 (Hex 0097))
Writes the set points using a setting unit of 0.1 (5 digits). Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No. Channel 0 Channel 1 Set point (rightmost 4 digits) Set point (leftmost 1 digit) Set point (rightmost 4 digits) Set point (leftmost 1 digit)
~
+16 +17 Set point (rightmost 4 digits) Set point (leftmost 1 digit)
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
0012 (0018 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 0F Varies according to the temperature sensor type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
+3
+16
Channel 7 Set point (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Set point (rightmost 1 digit) (1 digit BCD)
Varies according to the temperature sensor type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
+17
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note When the setting unit for the set point is 1 (4 digits), use Write Set Point (Setting Unit 1), Sequence No.150.
565
Appendix I
Write Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative Time (Sequence No. 152 (Hex 0098))
Writes the proportional bands (constant P), integral times (constant I), and derivative times (constant D). Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 Number of send data words (Undefined) Constant P Constant I Constant D Channel 0 Unit No.
~
+23 +24 +25 Constant P Constant I Constant D
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Data
001A (0026 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 0F 0000 to 9999 0000 to 3999 0000 to 3999
Channel 7 Constant P (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Constant I (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Constant D (4 digits BCD)
566
Appendix I
~
+16 +17 Control period Cooling control period
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
0012 (0018 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 0F 0001 to 0099 0001 to 0099
+4 +5
+16 +17
Channel 7 Control period (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Cooling control period (4 digits BCD)
567
Appendix I
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
~
+16 +17 (Undefined) (Undefined) Alarm 1 set code alarm 2 set code
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
Data
0012 (0018 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 0F 00 to 0C 00 to 0C 00 to 0C 00 to 0C
+16 +17
Channel 7 Alarm 1 set code (2 digits Hex) Channel 7 Alarm 2 set code (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0C 00 to 0C
568
Appendix I
Write Alarm Temperature (Setting Unit 1) (Sequence No. 156 (Hex 009C))
Writes the alarm temperatures using a setting unit of 1 (4 digits) Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 Number of send data words (Undefined) (Undefined) Alarm 2 set value (Undefined) Channel 0 Unit No. Alarm 1 set value
~
+30 +31 +32 +33 Alarm 1 set value (Undefined) Alarm 2 set value (Undefined)
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
0022 (0034 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 0F 0000 to 9999
+3 +4
+5
+32
0000 to 9999
+33
569
Appendix I
Write Alarm Temperature (Setting Unit 0.1) (Sequence No. 157 (Hex 009D))
Writes the alarm temperatures using a setting unit of 0.1 (5 digits) Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No. Alarm 1 set value (rightmost 4 digits) Alarm 1 set value (leftmost 1 digit) Alarm 2 set value (rightmost 4 digits) Alarm 2 set value (leftmost 1 digit) Channel 0
~
+30 +31 +32 +33 Alarm 1 set value (rightmost 4 digits) Alarm 1 set value (leftmost 1 digit) Alarm 2 set value (rightmost 4 digits) Alarm 2 set value (leftmost 1 digit)
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
0022 (0034 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 0F 0000 to 9999
+3
0000 to 0009
+4
0000 to 9999
+5
0000 to 0009
+32
Channel 7 Alarm 2 set value (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Alarm 2 set value (leftmost 1 digits) (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
+33
0000 to 0009
570
Appendix I
~
+16 +17 Hysteresis Cooling hysteresis
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
Data
0012 (0018 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 0F 0000 to 0999 0000 to 0999 0000 to 0999 0000 to 0999
+16 +17
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
571
Appendix I
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
572
Appendix I
Data
000A (000A decimal) (fixed) 00 to 0F 0000 to 0999 0000 to 0999 0000 to 0999
+8 +9
Channel 6 Input shift value (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Input shift value (4 digits BCD)
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
000A (0010 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 0F 0000 to 1000
+3
0000 to 1000
+4
0000 to 1000
+8
Channel 6 Manual reset value (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Manual reset value (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
+9
0000 to 1000
573
Appendix I
+2 (Undefined) +4 (Undefined)
~
+16 (Undefined) +17 Time unit Ramp value (Undefined)
~
Channel 7
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
Data
0012 (0018 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 0F 000 to 999 S: Seconds; M: Minutes; H: Hours 000 to 999 S: Second M: Minute H: Hour
+16 +17
Channel 7 Ramp value (3 digits BCD) Channel 7 Time unit (one ASCII character)
Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No. Channel 0 Channel 1 Output value Cooling output value Output value Cooling output value
~
+16 +17
~
Output value Cooling output value Channel 7
574
Appendix I
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
0012 (0018 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 0F 0000 to 1000 0000 to 1000
+4 +5
+16 +17
Channel 7 Output value (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Cooling output value (4 digits BCD)
~
+30 +31 +32 +33 Output value lower limit Output value upper limit Cooling output value lower limit Cooling output value upper limit
~
Channel 7
575
Appendix I
Data
0022 (0034 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 0F 0000 to 1000
+3
0000 to 1000
+4
0000 to 1000
+5
0000 to 1000
+32
Channel 7 Cooling output value lower limit (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Cooling output value upper limit (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
+33
0000 to 1000
Write Output Value Change Rate Limit (Sequence No. 167 (Hex 00A7))
Writes the output value change rate limits that restrict the rates of change in the control value output. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No. Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Output change rate limit Output change rate limit Output change rate limit Output change rate limit Output change rate limit Output change rate limit Output change rate limit Output change rate limit
576
Appendix I
Data
000A (0010 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 0F 0000 to 1000
+3
0000 to 1000
+4
0000 to 1000
+8
Channel 6 Output change rate limit (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Output change rate limit (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
+9
0000 to 1000
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
577
Appendix I
Write HB and HS Alarm Valid Channels (Sequence No. 170 (Hex 00AA))
Writes the valid or invalid channels of HB alarm and HS alarm. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 Number of send data words (Undefined) (Undefined) Unit No. Write code
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
Write Heater Burnout and SSR Failure Detection Current (Sequence No. 171 (Hex 00AB))
Writes the currents for detecting heater burnouts and SSR failures. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 Number of send data words (Undefined) Unit No. Channel 0 Channel 1 Heater burnout detection current SSR failure detection current Heater burnout detection current SSR failure detection current
~
+16 +17 Heater burnout detection current SSR failure detection current
~
Channel 7
578
Appendix I
Data
0012 (0018 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 0F 0000 to 0500
+3
0000 to 0500
+4
0000 to 0500
+5
0000 to 0500
+16
Channel 7 Heater burnout detection current (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 SSR failure detection current (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0500
+17
0000 to 0500
579
Appendix I
Data
000A (0010 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 0F 0000 to 0999
+3
0000 to 0999
+4
0000 to 0999
+8
Channel 6 Dead band/overlap band (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Dead band/overlap band (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0999
+9
0000 to 0999
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Data
000A (0010 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 0F 0000 to 0100 0000 to 0100 0000 to 0100
+8 +9
Channel 6 Cooling coefficient (4 digits BCD) Channel 7 Cooling coefficient (4 digits BCD)
580
Appendix I
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
581
Appendix I
582
Appendix J
E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol
The E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol performs various settings and controls in remote mode for the Temperature Controller connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C or RS-422A/485 cable. Note Negative values cannot be written. All values must be set as unsigned BCD.
Switches the Controller to remote mode. Switches the Controller to local mode. Switches from set point write mode to backup mode. Select RAM write mode Switches from set point write mode to RAM write mode. Save set point Saves the set point. Write parameters 1 Writes the set point, alarm value 1, alarm value 2, and heater burnout alarm value. Write parameters 2 Writes the proportional band, integral time, and derivative time. Write input shift value Writes the input shift value. Read parameters 1 Reads the set point, alarm value 1, alarm value 2, and heater burnout alarm value. Read parameters 2 Reads the proportional band, integral time, and derivative time. Read input shift value Reads the input shift value and writes it in IOM. Read output value Reads the output value and stores it in IOM. Read process value Reads the process value and stores it in IOM. Read set point limit Reads the set point limits and stores them in IOM. Read heater current Reads the heater current and stores it in IOM. Read initial status Reads the initial status and stores it in IOM. General-purpose write Writes the specified parameter by setting a header code. General-purpose read Reads the specified parameter by setting a header code.
Note 1. The hexadecimal equivalents of sequences numbers are given in parentheses. 2. Ladder Interface Settings YES: User settings are required for the 3rd or 4th operands of PMCR. NO: Send word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 3rd operand (S). Receive word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 4th operand (D).
583
Appendix J
Connections
The connections for using the E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol are shown below. RS-232C Connections
Serial Communications Board (CS Series only) Serial Communications Unit (CS/CJ Series)
Signal name Signal ground or common return line Send data Receive data
Serial Communications Unit/Board
RS-232C: D-sub 9-pin female
Signal Pin name No.
Abbreviation SG SD RD
E5AJ
MAX232C or equivalent
FG SG SD RD RTS
1 9 2 3 4
Shield
25 SG 27 SG 26 SD 28 RD TX RX
Note 1. The connection configuration is a one-to-one configuration and the maximum cable length is 15 m. 2. Use shielded twisted-pair cable.
584
Appendix J
E5#J
PLC PS
RS-422A/485 port
RS-422A/485
E5#J
RS-422A/485
RS-422A/485
Pin No. 26 25 28 29 27
E5AJ
Terminating resistance
240
SN751177N or equivalent
+5 V 51 k
4.7 k 4.7 k
Shield *1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch to the 4-wire setting. *2: Turn ON the terminating resistance switch. Shield
6.8 V
Terminating resistance (240 ) is connected via the terminator switch. Terminator switch
585
Appendix J
Abbreviation A B SG
+5 V
SN751177N or equivalent
E5AJ
RS-485: Terminal Block
Ter- Signal minal name
Terminating resistance
120
51 k
4.7 k
SDA SDB
4.7 k 6.8 V 51 k
Shield *1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch to the 2-wire setting. *2: Turn ON the terminating resistance switch. Shield E5AJ
RS-485: Terminal Block
Ter- Signal minal name
Terminating resistance (240 ) is connected via the terminator switch. Terminator switch
Note 1. The connection configuration is a one-to-one or a one-to-N configuration. Using a one-to-N configuration, up to 32 units can be connected including the Serial Communications Boards Unit. 2. The maximum cable length is 500 m. Use shielded twisted-pair cable. 3. Connect terminating resistance to the devices only at both ends of the transmission path. 4. The total terminating resistance at both ends must be at least 100 for RS-422A or 54 for RS-485.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
586
Appendix J
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
587
Appendix J
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+122 +123 +124 +125 +126 (Undefined) Unit No. Set point Alarm value 1 Alarm value 2 Heater burnout alarm value
~
25th unit (max.)
588
Appendix J
Contents (data format) Data
Number of units 5 + 2 0001 to 0019 (1 to 25 decimal) 00 to 31 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Number of units (4 digits Hex) 1st unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 1st unit Set point (4 digits BCD) 1st unit Alarm value 1 (4 digits BCD) 1st unit Alarm value 2 (4 digits BCD) 1st unit Heater burnout alarm value 2 (4 digits BCD) 2nd unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+7
00 to 31
+126 (max.)
0000 to 9999
~
+122 +123 +124 +125 (Undefined) Unit No. Proportional band Integral time Derivative time
~
31th unit (max.)
589
Appendix J
Contents (data format) Data
Number of units 4 + 2 0001 to 001F (1 to 31 decimal) 00 to 31 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 00 to 31
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Number of units (4 digits Hex) 1st unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 1st unit Proportional band (4 digits BCD) 1st unit Integral time (4 digits BCD) 1st unit Derivative time (4 digits BCD) 2nd unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+125 (max.)
0000 to 9999
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
590
Appendix J
~
+26 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
(max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0019 (1 to 25 decimal) 00 to 31 00 to 31
+26 (max.)
00 to 31
~
+97 +98 +99 +100 Set point Alarm value 1 Alarm value 2 Heater burnout alarm value
591
Appendix J
Contents (data format) Data
Number of units 4 + 1 0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set. 0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set. 0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set. 0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set. 0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set.
Number of receive data words (4 digits Hex) 1st unit Set point (4 digits BCD) 1st unit Alarm value 1 (4 digits BCD) 1st unit Alarm value 2 (4 digits BCD) 1st unit Heater burnout alarm value (4 digits BCD) 2nd unit Set point (4 digits BCD)
+2
+3
+4
+5
+100 (max.)
0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set.
~
+32 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
(max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 001F (1 to 31 decimal) 00 to 31 00 to 31
+32 (max.)
00 to 31
592
Appendix J
~
+91 +92 +93 Proportional band Integral time Derivative time
~
31th unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Number of units 3 + 1 0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set. 0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set. 0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set. 0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set.
+2
+3
+4
+93 (max.)
0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set.
593
Appendix J
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set. 0000 to 9999
+2
594
Appendix J
Contents (data format) Data
0002 (fixed) 00 to 31
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set. 0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set.
+2
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set. 0000 to 0011
+2
Offset
+0 +1
Data
595
Appendix J
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Data
Header codes that can be set MB, WS, W%, WW, WB, WN, WV 01 to 02 0000 to 9999
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Header codes that can be set RS, R%, RW, RB, RN, RV, RO 01 to 02
596
Appendix J
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0000 to 9999 When the left digit is 1, A is set and when it is , F is set.
597
Appendix J
598
Appendix K
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol
The ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol controls in remote mode and reads various settings from the Controller connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C or RS-422A/485 cable. Note Negative values cannot be written. All values must be set as unsigned BCD.
252 (00FC) Read error detection data 253 (00FD) Read heater burnout data 254 (00FE) Read PV data 255 (00FF) Read SP data 256 (0100) Read MV 257 (0101) Read control monitor data 258 (0102) Read adjustment parameters 259 (0103) Write adjustment parameters 260 (0104) Read PID control parameters 1 261 (0105)
Reads events 1 to 10 in the variable area. Reads time signals 1 to 10 in the variable area. Reads error groups 1 to 15 in the variable area. Reads the heater burnout alarm.
262 (0106) 263 (0107) 264 (0108) 265 (0109) 266 (010A)
267 (010B)
Reads PV data in the variable area. Reads SP data in the variable area. Reads the MV in the variable area. Reads control monitor data (SP, PV, and MV) in the variable area. Reads adjustment parameters in the parameter area. Writes adjustment parameters in the parameter area. Reads PID parameters No. 1 to 4 from the PID control parameters in the parameter area. Read PID control Reads PID parameters No. 5 to 8 from the parameters 2 PID control parameters in the parameter area. Write PID control Writes PID parameters No. 1 to 4 from PID parameters 1 control parameters in the parameter area. Write PID control Writes PID parameters No. 5 to 8 from PID parameters 2 control parameters in the parameter area. Read local SP Reads the local SP in the program parameter area. Write local SP Writes local SP in the program parameter area. Read program parame- Reads local SP, step time, PID No. wait code, ters and events 1 to 10 set values in the program parameter area. Write program parame- Writes the local SP, step time, PID No., wait ters code, and event 1 to 10 set values in the program parameter area. Remote setting mode Switches the setting mode to remote setting. Local setting mode Switches the setting mode to local setting. External setting mode Switches the setting mode to external setting.
Yes
Yes
No No Yes No Yes
Yes
No
No No No
599
Appendix K
Ladder interface Send word Receive word allocation allocation Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Starts control. Stops control. Switches the control mode to auto. Switches the control mode to a manual. Executes A.T. Cancels A.T. Changes the pattern No. Changes the bank No. Reads the controller status. Sends specified data and stores the received data in the specified words.
Note 1. The hexadecimal equivalents of sequences numbers are given in parentheses. 2. Ladder Interface Settings YES: User settings are required for the 3rd and 4th operands of PMCR(260). NO: Send word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 3rd operand (S). Receive word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 4th operand (D).
Connections
Connections for using the ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol are shown below. RS-232C Connections
Serial Communications Board (CS Series only) Serial Communications Unit (CS/CJ Series)
ES100# RS-232C
ES100#-#01#
RS-232C: Terminal Block
Terminal 17 16 15 Signal name
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9
SD RD SG
Shield
600
Appendix K
ES100#
PLC PS
RS-422A/485
ES100#-#04#
RS-422A Terminal Block
Shield
Terminal
Signal name
6 8 1 2
24 25 16 17
*1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch to the 4-wire setting. *2: Turn ON the terminating resistance switch.
24 25 16 17
Next ES100
ES100#-#04#
RS-485 Terminal Block
Shield
Terminal 16 17
Signal name
Hood 16 17
Next ES100
*1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch to the 2-wire setting. *2: Turn ON the terminating resistance switch.
601
Appendix K
Switch Settings
There are two switches located on the board on the left of the Unit. Set SW1 to the interface: RS-422A or RS485. Set SW2 to the same setting as SW1 on the terminating Units and to the center on all other Units.
422 485
422 485
~
+26 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
25th unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0019 (1 to 25 decimal) 00 to 31 00 to 31
+26 (max.)
00 to 31
602
Appendix K
~
+121 +122 +123 +124 +125 Event 1 Event 3 Event 5 Event 7 Event 9 Event 2 Event 4 Event 6 Event 8 Event 10
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Number of units x 5 + 1 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF
+2
+3
+4
+5
+125 (max.)
25th unit Event data 9 (2 digits Hex) Event data 10 (2 digits Hex)
00 to FF 00 to FF
~
+26 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
25th unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0019 (1 to 25 decimal) 00 to 31
603
Appendix K
Contents (data format)
2nd unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 00 to 31
Data
+26 (max.)
00 to 31
~
+121 +122 +123 +124 +125 Time signal 1 Time signal 3 Time signal 5 Time signal 7 Time signal 9 Time signal 2 Time signal 4 Time signal 6 Time signal 8 Time signal 10
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Number of units 5 + 1 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF
+2
+3
+4
+5
+125 (max.)
25th unit Time signal 9 data (2 digits Hex) Time signal 10 data (2 digits Hex)
00 to FF 00 to FF
604
Appendix K
~
+17 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
16th unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0010 (1 to 16 decimal) 00 to 31 00 to 31
+17 (max.)
00 to 31
~
+128 Error group 14 Error group 15
~
16th unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Number of units 8 + 1 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF
+2
+7
1st unit Error group 12 data (2 digits Hex) Error group 13 data (2 digits Hex) 1st unit Error group 14 data (2 digits Hex) Error group 15 data (2 digits Hex) 2nd unit Error group 0 data (2 digits Hex) Error group 1 data (2 digits Hex)
00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF 00 to FF
+8
+9
605
Appendix K
Data
~
+33 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 31 00 to 31
+33 (max.)
00 to 31
~
+32 (Undefined) Heater burnout alarm
~
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Data
+32 (max.)
00 to FF
606
Appendix K
~
+33 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 31 00 to 31
+33 (max.)
00 to 31
~
+63 +64 PV data (rightmost 4 digits) PV data (leftmost 4 digits)
~
32nd unit
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Number of units 2 + 1 00000000 to 09999000 F indicates a negative number.
+2
+3
+4
+63
32nd unit PV data (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD) 32nd unit PV data (leftmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD)
+64
607
Appendix K
~
+33 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 31 00 to 31
+33 (max.)
00 to 31
~
+63 +64 SP data (rightmost 4 digits) SP data (leftmost 4 digits)
~
32nd unit
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Number of units 2 + 1 00000000 to 09999000 F indicates a negative number.
+2
+3
+4
+63
32nd unit SP data (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD) 32nd unit SP data (leftmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD)
+64
608
Appendix K
~
+33 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 31 00 to 31
+33 (max.)
00 to 31
~
+63 +64 MV (rightmost 4 digits) MV (leftmost 4 digits)
~
32nd unit
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Data
Number of units 2 + 1 00000000 to 09999000 F indicates a negative number.
+63 +64
32nd unit MV (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD) 32nd unit MV (leftmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD)
609
Appendix K
~
+22 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
21st unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0015 (1 to 21 decimal) 00 to 31 00 to 31
+22 (max.)
00 to 31
~
+121 +122 +123 +124 +125 +126 SP data (rightmost 4 digits) SP data (leftmost 4 digits) PV data (rightmost 4 digits) PV data (leftmost 4 digits) MV (rightmost 4 digits) MV (leftmost 4 digits)
21st unit
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6
Data
Number of units 6 + 1 00000000 to 09999000 F indicates a negative number.
610
Appendix K
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
611
Appendix K
612
Appendix K
Contents (data format)
Number of receive data words (4 digits Hex) Fixed SP (8 digits BCD) Control output 1 pulse cycle (8 digits BCD) Control output 2 pulse cycle (8 digits BCD) Fuzzy strength (8 digits BCD) Cooling coefficient (8 digits BCD) Heater burnout alarm setting (8 digits BCD) Position-proportional dead band (8 digits BCD) Switching output hysteresis (8 digits BCD) ON/OFF count alarm setting (8 digits BCD) ON/OFF control hysteresis (8 digits BCD) Manual reset (8 digits BCD) SP setting lower limit (8 digits BCD) SP setting upper limit (8 digits BCD) SP rise rate limit (8 digits BCD) SP fall rate limit (8 digits BCD) MV rate-of-change limit (8 digits BCD) Secondary loop fixed SP (8 digits BCD) Secondary loop P (8 digits BCD) Secondary loop I (8 digits BCD) Secondary loop D (8 digits BCD) Secondary loop manual reset (8 digits BCD)
Data
002B (0043 decimal) 00000000 to 09999000 F indicates a negative number.
613
Appendix K
614
Appendix K
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Unit No. (2 digits BCD) Fixed SP (8 digits BCD) Control output 1 pulse cycle (8 digits BCD) Control output 2 pulse cycle (8 digits BCD) Fuzzy strength (8 digits BCD) Cooling coefficient (8 digits BCD) Heater burnout alarm setting (8 digits BCD) Position-proportional dead band (8 digits BCD) Switching output hysteresis (8 digits BCD) ON/OFF count alarm setting (8 digits BCD) value ON/OFF control hysteresis (8 digits BCD) Manual reset (8 digits BCD) SP setting lower limit (8 digits BCD) SP setting upper limit (8 digits BCD) SP rise rate limit (8 digits BCD) SP fall rate limit (8 digits BCD) MV rate-of-change limit (8 digits BCD) Secondary loop fixed SP (8 digits BCD) Secondary loop P (8 digits BCD) Secondary loop I (8 digits BCD) Secondary loop D (8 digits BCD) Secondary loop manual reset (8 digits BCD)
Data
002C (0044 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 31 00000000 to 09999000
Offset
+0 +1
Data
615
Appendix K
~
+51 +52 +53 +54 +55 +56 PID No. 4 MV upper limit PID No. 4 MV upper limit PID No. 4 PV bias value PID No. 4 PV bias value PID No. 4 Automatic selection range upper limit PID No. 4 Automatic selection range upper limit
~
(rightmost 4 digits) (leftmost 4 digits) (rightmost 4 digits) (leftmost 4 digits) (rightmost 4 digits) (leftmost 4 digits)
Offset
+0 +1 to 2 +3 to 4 +5 to 6 +7 to 8 +9 to 10 +11 to 12 +13 to 14
Data
0039 (0057 decimal) 00000000 to 09999000
PID No. 4 P (8 digits BCD) PID No. 4 I (8 digits BCD) PID No. 4 D (8 digits BCD) PID No. 4 MV lower limit (8 digits BCD) PID No. 4 MV upper limit (8 digits BCD) PID No. 4 PV bias value (8 digits BCD) PID No. 4 Automatic selection range upper limit (8 digits BCD)
616
Appendix K
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+51 +52 +53 +54 +55 +56 PID No. 8 MV upper limit PID No. 8 MV upper limit PID No. 8 PV bias value PID No. 8 PV bias value PID No. 8 Automatic selection range upper limit PID No. 8 Automatic selection range upper limit
~
(rightmost 4 digits) (leftmost 4 digits) (rightmost 4 digits) (leftmost 4 digits) (rightmost 4 digits) (leftmost 4 digits)
617
Appendix K
Contents (data format)
Number of receive data words (4 digits Hex) PID No. 5 P (8 digits BCD) PID No. 5 I (8 digits BCD) PID No. 5 D (8 digits BCD) PID No. 5 MV lower limit (8 digits BCD) PID No. 5 MV upper limit (8 digits BCD) PID No. 5 PV bias value (8 digits BCD) PID No. 5 Automatic selection range upper limit (8 digits BCD)
Data
0039 (0057 decimal) 00000000 to 09999000
PID No. 8 P (8 digits BCD) PID No. 8 I (8 digits BCD) PID No. 8 D (8 digits BCD) PID No. 8 MV lower limit (8 digits BCD) PID No. 8 MV upper limit (8 digits BCD) PID No. 8 PV bias value (8 digits BCD) PID No. 8 Automatic selection range upper limit (8 digits BCD)
~
+52 +53 +54 +55 +56 +57 PID No. 4 MV upper limit PID No. 4 MV upper limit PID No. 4 PV bias value PID No. 4 PV bias value PID No. 4 Automatic selection range upper limit PID No. 4 Automatic selection range upper limit
~
(rightmost 4 digits) (leftmost 4 digits) (rightmost 4 digits) (leftmost 4 digits) (rightmost 4 digits) (leftmost 4 digits)
618
Appendix K
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Unit No. (2 digits BCD) PID No. 1 P (8 digits BCD) PID No. 1 I (8 digits BCD) PID No. 1 D (8 digits BCD) PID No. 1 MV lower limit (8 digits BCD) PID No. 1 MV upper limit (8 digits BCD) PID No. 1 PV bias value (8 digits BCD) PID No. 1 Automatic selection range upper limit (8 digits BCD)
Data
003A (0058 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 31 00000000 to 09999000
PID No. 4 P (8 digits BCD) PID No. 4 I (8 digits BCD) PID No. 4 D (8 digits BCD) PID No. 4 MV lower limit (8 digits BCD) PID No. 4 MV upper limit (8 digits BCD) PID No. 4 PV bias value (8 digits BCD) PID No. 4 Automatic selection range upper limit (8 digits BCD)
619
Appendix K
~
+52 +53 +54 +55 +56 +57 PID No. 8 MV upper limit PID No. 8 MV upper limit PID No. 8 PV bias value PID No. 8 PV bias value PID No. 8 Automatic selection range upper limit PID No. 8 Automatic selection range upper limit
~
(rightmost 4 digits) (leftmost 4 digits) (rightmost 4 digits) (leftmost 4 digits) (rightmost 4 digits) (leftmost 4 digits)
620
Appendix K
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Unit No. (2 digits BCD) PID No. 5 P (8 digits BCD) PID No. 5 I (8 digits BCD) PID No. 5 D (8 digits BCD) PID No. 5 MV lower limit (8 digits BCD) PID No. 5 MV upper limit (8 digits BCD) PID No. 5 PV bias value (8 digits BCD) PID No. 5 Automatic selection range upper limit (8 digits BCD)
Data
003A (0058 decimal) (fixed) 00 to 31 00000000 to 09999000
PID No. 8 P (8 digits BCD) PID No. 8 I (8 digits BCD) PID No. 8 D (8 digits BCD) PID No. 8 MV lower limit (8 digits BCD) PID No. 8 MV upper limit (8 digits BCD) PID No. 8 PV bias value (8 digits BCD) PID No. 8 Automatic selection range upper limit (8 digits BCD)
~
+64 +65 (Undefined) Pattern No. Unit No. Step No.
~
32nd unit
621
Appendix K
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Number of units (4 digits Hex) 1st unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 1st unit Pattern No. (2 digits BCD) Step No. (2 digits BCD)
Data
Number of units 2 + 2 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 31
00 to 63 00 to 63
32nd unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 32nd unit Pattern No. (2 digits BCD) Step No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 63 00 to 63
~
+63 +64 Local SP (rightmost 4 digits) Local SP (leftmost 4 digits)
~
32nd unit
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Number of units 2 + 1 00000000 to 09999000 F indicates a negative number.
+2
+3
00000000 to 09999000
+4
+63
32nd unit Local SP (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD) 32nd unit Local SP (leftmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD)
00000000 to 09999000
+64
622
Appendix K
Local SP (rightmost 4 digits) Local SP (leftmost 4 digits) (Undefined) Pattern No. Unit No. Step No.
2nd unit
~
+122 +123 +124 +125 (Undefined) Pattern No. Unit No. Step No.
~
31st unit
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units 4 + 2 0001 to 001F (1 to 31 decimal) 00 to 31
00 to 63 00 to 63 00000000 to 09999000
+4
+5
+122 +123
31st unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 31st unit Pattern No. (2 digits BCD) Step No. (2 digits BCD) 31st unit Local SP (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD) 31st unit Local SP (leftmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 63 00 to 63 00000000 to 09999000
+124
+125
623
Appendix K
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units 2 + 2 0001 to 0004 00 to 31
00 to 63 00 to 63
+8 +9 (max.)
4th unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 4th unit Pattern No. (2 digits BCD) Step No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 63 00 to 63
624
Appendix K
~
+27 +28 Event 10 setting (rightmost) Event 10 setting (leftmost)
~
+85 +86 +87 +88 +89 +90 +91 +92 +93 +94 Local SP (rightmost) Local SP (leftmost) Step bank time (rightmost) Step bank time (leftmost) PID set No. (rightmost) PID set No. (leftmost) Wait code (rightmost) Wait code (leftmost) Event 1 setting (rightmost) Event 1 setting (leftmost)
~
+111 +112 Event 10 setting (rightmost) Event 10 setting (leftmost)
625
Appendix K
Contents (data format)
Number of receive data words (4 digits Hex) 1st unit Local SP (8 digits BCD) 1st unit Step time) (8 digits BCD) 1st unit PID set No. (8 digits BCD) 1st unit Wait code (8 digits BCD) 1st unit Event 1 setting (8 digits BCD) 1st unit Event 2 setting (8 digits BCD)
Data
Number of units 28 + 1 00000000 to 09999000 F indicates a negative number.
+27 to 28 +29 to 30
1st unit Event 10 setting (8 digits BCD) 1st unit Local SP (8 digits BCD)
4th unit Event 9 setting (8 digits BCD) 4th unit Event 10 setting (8 digits BCD)
626
Appendix K
Local SP (rightmost) Local SP (leftmost) Step bank time (rightmost) Step bank time (leftmost) PID set No. (rightmost) PID set No. (leftmost) Wait code (rightmost) Wait code (leftmost) Event 1 setting (rightmost) Event 1 setting (leftmost) 1st unit
~
+30 +31 Event 10 setting (rightmost) Event 10 setting (leftmost)
~
+92 +93 (Undefined) Pattern No. Unit No. Step No.
~
+120 +121 Event 10 setting (rightmost) Event 10 setting (leftmost)
627
Appendix K
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Number of units (4 digits BCD) 1st unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 1st unit Pattern No. (2 digits BCD) Step No. (2 digits BCD) 1st unit Local SP (8 digits BCD) 1st unit Step time (8 digits BCD) 1st unit PID set No. (8 digits BCD) 1st unit Wait code (8 digits BCD) 1st unit Event 1 setting (8 digits BCD) 1st unit Event 2 setting (8 digits BCD)
Data
Number of units 30 + 2 0001 to 0004 00 to 31 00 to 63 00 to 63 00000000 to 09999000
+30 to 31 +32 to 33
1st unit Event 10 setting (8 digits BCD) 2nd unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
4th unit Event 9 setting (8 digits BCD) 4th unit Event 10 setting (8 digits BCD)
~
+33 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
32nd unit (max.)
628
Appendix K
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Number of units (4 digits Hex) 1st unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 2nd unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 31 00 to 31
+33 (max.)
00 to 31
~
+33 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 31 00 to 31
+33 (max.)
00 to 31
~
+33 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
32nd unit (max.)
629
Appendix K
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Number of units (4 digits Hex) 1st unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 2nd unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 31 00 to 31
+33 (max.)
00 to 31
~
+64 +65 (Undefined) Unit No. Pattern No. Bank No.
~
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units 2 + 2 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 31 0000 to 0063
+24
00 to 31
32nd unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 32nd unit Pattern No./Bank No. (4 digits BCD)
00 to 31 0000 to 0063
630
Appendix K
~
+33 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 31 00 to 31
+33 (max.)
00 to 31
~
+33 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 31 00 to 31
+33 (max.)
00 to 31
631
Appendix K
~
+33 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 31 00 to 31
+33 (max.)
00 to 31
~
+64 +65 (Undefined) Unit No. PID set No.
~
32nd unit (max.)
632
Appendix K
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Number of units (4 digits Hex) 1st unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 1st unit PID set No. (4 digits BCD) 2nd unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Data
Number of units 2 + 2 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 31 0000 to 0008 00 to 31
32nd unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 32nd unit PID set No. (4 digits BCD)
00 to 31 0000 to 0008
~
+33 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 31 00 to 31
+33 (max.)
00 to 31
633
Appendix K
~
+64 +65 (Undefined) Unit No. Pattern No.
~
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Data
Number of units 2 + 2 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 31 0001 to 0063 00 to 31
32nd unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 32nd unit Pattern No. (4 digits BCD)
00 to 31 0001 to 0063
~
+64 +65 (Undefined) Bank No. Unit No.
~
32nd unit (max.)
634
Appendix K
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Number of units (4 digits Hex) 1st unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 1st unit Bank No. (4 digits BCD) 2nd unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Data
Number of units 2 + 2 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 31 0000 to 0007 00 to 31
32nd unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 32nd unit Bank No. (4 digits BCD)
00 to 31 0000 to 0007
~
+26 (Undefined) Unit No.
~
25th unit (max.)
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
Number of units + 2 0001 to 0019 (1 to 25 decimal) 00 to 31
+26 (max.)
00 to 31
~
+121 +122 +123 +124 +125 Operation status Auto/manual Setting mode A.T. Wait Hold SP mode Valid pattern No. Valid PID set No. Operation mode
635
Appendix K
Contents (data format)
Number of receive data words (4 digits Hex) 1st unit Operation status (2 digits BCD) Hold (2 digits BCD)
Data
Number of units 5 + 1
00: Reset 01: Run 00: Not hold 01: Hold 00: Auto mode 01: Manual mode 00: Local SP mode 01: Remote SP mode 02: Fixed SP mode 00: Local setting mode 01: Remote setting mode 02: External setting mode 00 to 63 00: Not A.T. 01: A.T. 01 to 08 00: Not waiting 01: Waiting 02: Wait alarm output 00: Setting level 1 (without technical mode) 01: Setting level 1 (with technical mode) 02: Setting level 2 (without technical mode) 03: Setting level 2 (with technical mode)
+2
+3
1st unit Setting mode (2 digits BCD) Valid pattern No. (2 digits BCD)
+4
1st unit A.T. (2 digits BCD) Valid PID set No. (2 digits hex)
+5
+125 (max.) 25th unit Wait (2 digits BCD) 00: Not waiting 01: Waiting 02: Wait alarm output 00: Setting level 1 (without technical mode) 01: Setting level 1 (with technical mode) 02: Setting level 2 (without technical mode) 03: Setting level 2 (with technical mode)
~
+249 Send data
~
(max. = 496 characters)
636
Appendix K
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Number of send data bytes (4 digits Hex) Send data (2 characters ASCII)
Data
0003 to 00FA (3 to 250 decimal) 0001 to 01F0 (1 to 496 decimal) The number of send bytes not including @, the FCS, or the terminator. Refer to the manual for the ES100@. Use ASCII (Up to 496 characters total.)
+2
+249 (max.)
~
+249 Receive data (Undefined)
~
(max. = 251 characters)
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0001 to 00FA (1 to 250 decimal) Refer to the manual for the ES100@. Returned as ASCII (Up to 498 characters total.)
+249 (max.)
Note 1. At transmission, a header code @ is attached before the data and the FCS and a terminator *CR are attached following the send data.
First word of send +0 data +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 0006 0007 "AB" "CD" "EF" "GH" @ABCDEFG[FCS]*CR 2 bytes
2. At reception, data excluding the header code @ at the beginning of the receive data and the FCS and terminator *CR at the end of the data is stored in the receive data storage words.
First word of send +0 data +1 @ABCDEFG[FCS]*CR 2 bytes +2 +3 +4 +5 0006 0007 "AB" "CD" "EF" "G"
3. Refer to the manual for the ES100@ for the contents of send data and receive data.
637
Appendix K
638
Appendix L
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
The K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely the Intelligent Signal Processor connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C or RS-422/485 cable.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol is shown as follows:
Sequence No. 300 (012C) Communications sequence name Reset (by unit number) Function Ladder interface Send word Receive word allocation allocation Yes No Notes
301 (012D)
302 (012E) 303 (012F) 304 (0130) 305 (0131) 306 (0132) 307 (0133)
Write set value (by unit number) Write set value HH (continuous units) Write set value H (continuous units) Write set value L (continuous units) Write set value LL (continuous units) Write set value with bank (by unit number) Write set value HH with bank (continuous units) Write set value H with bank (continuous units) Write set value L with bank (continuous units) Write set value LL with bank (continuous units) Write set value O5 with bank (continuous units) Write set value O4 with bank (continuous units) Write set value O3 with bank (continuous units) Write set value O2 with bank (continuous units) Write set value O1 with bank (continuous units) Read set value (by unit number) Read set value HH (continuous units)
Performs the same processing as when an input is received on the reset terminal. Performs the same processing as when an input is received on the reset terminal. Writes the set value HH, H, L, or LL. Writes the set value HH. Writes the set value H. Writes the set value L. Writes the set value LL. Writes the set value to a bank which is not in use (K3TR: HH to LL, K3TC: O1 to O5). Writes the set value HH to a bank which is not in use. Writes the set value H to a bank which is not in use. Writes the set value L to a bank which is not in use. Writes the set value LL to a bank which is not in use. Writes the set value O5 to a bank which is not in use. Writes the set value O4 to a bank which is not in use. Writes the set value O3 to a bank which is not in use. Writes the set value O2 to a bank which is not in use. Writes the set value O1 to a bank which is not in use. Reads the set value HH, H, L, or LL. Reads the set value HH.
Yes
No
No No No No No No
1 1 1 1 1 2
308 (0134) 309 (0135) 310 (0136) 311 (0137) 312 (0138) 313 (0139) 314 (013A) 315 (013B) 316 (013C) 317 (013D) 318 (013E)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
639
Appendix L
Ladder interface Send word Receive word allocation allocation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Notes
Reads the set value H. Reads the set value L. Reads the set value LL. Reads set value of a bank which is not in use (K3TR: HH to LL, K3TC: O1 to O5). Reads the set value HH of a bank which is not in use. Reads the set value H of a bank which is not in use. Reads the set value L of a bank which is not in use. Reads the set value LL of a bank which is not in use. Reads the set value O5 of a bank which is not in use. Reads the set value O4 of a bank which is not in use. Reads the set value O3 of a bank which is not in use. Reads the set value O2 of a bank which is not in use. Reads the set value O1 of a bank which is not in use. Reads the peak/bottom data (maximum, minimum). Reads the peak data (maximum). Reads the bottom data (minimum). Reads the display value (PV). Reads the display value (PV). Reads the model data. Reads the model data. Send specified data or receives specified data and writes it to the receive data words.
1 1 1 2
323 (0143) 324 (0144) 325 (0145) 326 (0146) 327 (0147) 328 (0148) 329 (0149) 330 (014A) 331 (014B) 332 (014C) 333 (014D) 334 (014E) 335 (014F) 336 (0150) 337 (0151) 338 (0152) 339 (0153)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3
Note 1. Special specifications are required to use communications + comparison output. 2. Special specifications are required to use communications + comparison output for the K3TR and K3TC. The operands HH, H, L, and LL are for the K3TR, and the operands O5, O4, O3, O2, and O1 are for the K3TC. 3. Not available for the K3TC. 4. The hexadecimal equivalents of sequences numbers are given in parentheses.
640
Appendix L
Connections
The connections used for the K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol are shown below. RS-232C Connections
Serial Communications Board (CS Series only) Serial Communications Unit (CS/CJ Series)
K3T#
Signal name Protective ground or earth Signal ground or common return line Send data Receive data Request to send Clear to send Data set ready Data terminal ready
Serial Communications Unit/Board
RS-232C: D-sub 9-pin female
Signal Pin Name No.
Abbreviation FG SG SD RD RS CS DR ER
Intelligent Signal Processor
RS-232C: Terminal block
Terminal
Pin No. 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 20
Signal Name
MAX232C or equivalent
1 9 2 3 4 5 7
Shield
DTR 8
Note 1. The connection configuration is a one-to-one configuration and the maximum cable length is 15 m. 2. Use shielded twisted-pair cable.
641
Appendix L
RS-422/485
K3T#
K3T#
RS-422/485
SN751177N or equivalent
220 Terminal
Signal Name
block SW
6 8 1 2
9 5 6 1 3
SDA
SDB RDA RDB SG 220
*1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch to the 4-wire setting. *2: Turn ON the terminating resistance switch.
6.8 V
Shield Terminating resistance (approx. 220 ) is connected via the terminal block switch.
642
Appendix L
Abbreviation +
Terminal 19 18
Intelligent Signal Processor Turn ON the terminal block switch for 5V terminators only.
RS-485: Terminal block
Terminal.
SN751177N or equivalent
Terminal block SW
220
51 k TX 4.7 k RX
FG SDA SDB 1 2
Signal Name
19 18
6.8 V 4.7 k 4.7 k
Shield *1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch to the 2-wire setting. *2: Turn ON the terminating resistance switch. Intelligent Signal Processor Unit designated as terminator.
RS-485: Terminal block
Termi- Signal nal. Name
220
Terminal block SW ON
18 19
Note 1. The connection configuration is a one-to-one or a 1-to-N configuration. For 1-to-N connections, up to 32 units including the Serial Communications Boards/Units can be connected. 2. The maximum cable length is 500 m. Use shielded twisted-pair cables (AWG28i or greater). 3. Connect terminating resistance at both ends of the transmission path. 4. Turn the terminal block switch ON at the terminators. 5. Turn the terminal block switches OFF for units that are not terminators.
643
Appendix L
~
+33 (Undefined) Relevant unit No.
~
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits BCD) Number of units (4 digits Hex) Relevant unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
0003 to 0022 (3 to 34 decimal) 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 99
+33
00 to 99
Offset
+0 +1
Data
644
Appendix L
Write Set Value (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 302 (Hex 012E))
This sequence writes each set value (HH, H, L, LL). Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 Number of send data words Number of units (Undefined) Relevant unit No. Operand Set value (Undefined) Set value
~
+122 +123 +124 +125 (Undefined) Relevant unit No. Operand Set value (Undefined)
Set value
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
0006 to 007E (6 to 126 decimal) 0001 to 001F (1 to 31 decimal) 00 to 99 4848 (HH), 4820 (H), 4C4C (LL) 4C20 (L)
00000 to 99999 Negative sign: F (5th digit in BCD) Example 12345 +4 +5 2345 0001 Example 1234 +4 +5 1234 000F
Write Set Value HH (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 303 (Hex 012F))
This sequence writes set value HH for continuous units. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 Number of send data words Number of units Set value (Undefined) Set value
~
+64 +65 Set value (Undefined)
~
Set value
645
Appendix L
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0004 to 0042 (4 to 66 decimal) 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal)
00000 to 99999 Negative sign: F (5th digit in BCD) Example 12345 +2 +3 2345 0001 Example 1234 +2 +3 1234 000F
Write Set Value H (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 304 (Hex 0130))
This sequence writes set value H for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 303 (Write Set Value HH (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value L (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 305 (Hex 0131))
This sequence writes set value L for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 303 (Write Set Value HH (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value LL (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 306 (Hex 0132))
This sequence writes set value LL for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 303 (Write Set Value HH (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value with Bank (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 307 (Hex 0133))
This sequence writes set value of a bank which is not in use (K3TR: HH to LL, K3TC:O1 to O5).
646
Appendix L
~
+122 +123 +124 +125 +126 (Undefined) (Undefined) Operand Set value (Undefined) Relevant unit No. Bank No.
Set value
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Data
0007 to 007F (7 to 127 decimal) 0001 to 0019 (1 to 25 decimal) 00 to 99 01 to 04 4848 (HH), 4820 (H), 4C20 (L), 4C4C (LL), 4F31 (O1) 4F32 (O2) 4F33 (O3) 4F34 (O4) 4F35 (O5)
00000 to 99999 Negative sign: F (5th digit in BCD) Example 12345 +5 +6 2345 0001 Example 1234 +5 +6 1234 000F
647
Appendix L
Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 308 (Hex 0134))
This sequence writes set value HH of a bank not in use for continuous units. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 Number of send data words Number of units (Undefined) Set value (Undefined) Set value Bank No.
~
+95 +96 +97 (Undefined) Bank No. Set value (Undefined)
Set value
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
0005 to 0062 (5 to 98 decimal) 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 01 to 04
00000 to 99999 Negative sign: F (5th digit in BCD) Example 12345 +2 +3 2345 0001 Example 1234 +2 +3 1234 000F
Write Set Value H with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 309 (Hex 0135))
This sequence writes set value H of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 308 (Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value L with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 310 (Hex 0136))
This sequence writes set value L of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 308 (Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value LL with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 311 (Hex 0137))
This sequence writes set value LL of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 308 (Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
648
Appendix L
Write Set Value O5 with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 312 (Hex 0138))
This sequence writes set value O5 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 308 (Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value O4 with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 313 (Hex 0139))
This sequence writes set value O4 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 308 (Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value O3 with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 314 (Hex 013A))
This sequence writes set value O3 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 308 (Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value O2 with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 315 (Hex 013B))
This sequence writes set value O2 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 308 (Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value O1 with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 316 (Hex 013C))
This sequence writes set value O1 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 308 (Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 317 (Hex 013D))
Reads set value HH, H, L, or LL. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 Number of send data words Number of units (Undefined) Relevant unit No. Operand
~
+64 +65 (Undefined) Relevant unit No. Operand
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
0004 to 0042 (4 to 66 decimal) 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 99 4848 (HH), 4820 (H), 4C4C (LL) 4C20 (L) 4F31 (01) 4F35 (05)
649
Appendix L
Data
~
+94 +95 +96 (Undefined) Set value (Undefined) End code
Set value
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0004 to 0061 (4 to 97 decimal) 00 to 22
2345 0001
+95 to +96
Same as above
Read Set Value HH (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 318 (Hex 013E))
This sequence reads set value HH for continuous units. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 Number of send data words Number of units
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) This sequence is similar to sequence No. 317 (Read Set Value (by Unit Number)).
Read Set Value H (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 319 (Hex 013F))
This sequence reads set value H for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 318 (Read Set Value HH (Continuous Units)).
650
Appendix L
Read Set Value L (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 320 (Hex 0140))
This sequence reads set value L for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 318 (Read Set Value HH (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value LL (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 321 (Hex 0141))
This sequence reads set value LL for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 318 (Read Set Value HH (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value with Bank (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 322 (Hex 0142))
Reads the set value of a bank which is not in use (K3TR: HH to LL, K3TC:01 to 05) and stores the results in the specified words. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 Number of send data words (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) Operand Number of units Relevant unit No. Bank No.
~
+95 +96 +97 (Undefined) (Undefined) Operand Relevant unit No. Bank No.
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Data
0005 to 0062 (5 to 98 decimal) 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 99 01 to 04 4848 (HH), 4820 (H), 4C20 (L), 4C4C (LL), 4F31 (O1) 4F32 (O2) 4F33 (O3) 4F34 (O4) 4F35 (O5)
651
Appendix L
~
+63 +64 Set value (Undefined)
~
Set value
Offset
+0
Data
0003 to 0041 (3 to 65 decimal)
00000 to 99999 Negative sign: F (5th digit in BCD) Example 12345 +1 +2 2345 0001 Example 1234 +1 +2 1234 000F
Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 323 (Hex 0143))
This sequence reads set value HH of a bank not in use for continuous units. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 Number of send data words Number of units (Undefined) Bank No.
~
`
+33 (Undefined) Bank No.
~
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Number of units (4 digits Hex) Bank No. (2 digits BCD)
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
0003 to 0022 (3 to 34 decimal) 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 01 to 04
+ 33
Same as above
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) The word allocation is similar to sequence No. 322 (Read Set Value with Bank (by Unit Number)).
Read Set Value H with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 324 (Hex 0144))
This sequence reads set value H of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 323 (Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
652
Appendix L
Read Set Value L with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 325 (Hex 0145))
This sequence reads set value L of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 323 (Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value LL with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 326 (Hex 0146))
This sequence reads set value LL of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 323 (Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value O5 with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 327 (Hex 0147))
This sequence reads set value O5 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 323 (Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value O4 with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 328 (Hex 0148))
This sequence reads set value O4 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 323 (Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value O3 with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 329 (Hex 0149))
This sequence reads set value O3 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 323 (Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value O2 with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 330 (Hex 014A))
This sequence reads set value O2 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 323 (Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value O1 with Bank (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 331 (Hex 014B))
This sequence reads set value O1 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 323 (Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
653
Appendix L
~
+64 +65 (Undefined) Relevant unit No. Operand
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
0004 to 0042 (4 to 66 decimal) 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 99 5048 (PH) 4248 (BH)
+65
Same as above
~
+94 +95 +96 Peak/bottom data
~
(Undefined) (Undefined)
Status
Peak/bottom data
Offset
+0
Data
0004 to 0061 (4 to 97 decimal)
00000 to 99999 Negative sign: F (most significant digit) Example 12345 +1 +2 2345 0001 Example 1234 +1 +2 1234 F000
654
Appendix L
Data
d0 bit: If overflow:1 d1 bit: If underflow:1 d2 bit: Not used d3 bit: During forced zero operation:1 (K3TH,K3TR: 0) d4 bit: Not used d5 bit: During hold input:1 d6 bit: Bank input 1:1 (K3TH, K3TX: 0) d7 bit: Bank input 2:1 (K3TH, K3TX: 0) Others: 0 Others: 0 Others: 0 Others: 0 Others: 0
Others: 0
+96
Status
Same as above
Read Holding Data PH (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 333 (Hex 014D))
This sequence reads peak holding data for continuous units. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 Number of send data words Number of units
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) The data allocation is similar to sequence No. 332 (Read Holding Data (by Unit Number)).
Read Holding Data BH (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 334 (Hex 014E))
This sequence reads bottom holding data for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 333 (Read Holding Data PH (Continuous Units)).
Read Display Value (PV) (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 335 (Hex 014F))
Reads the display value (PV) and stores the results in the specified words.
655
Appendix L
~
+33 (Undefined) Relevant unit No.
~
Data
0003 to 0022 (3 to 34 decimal) 0001 to 0020 (1 to 32 decimal) 00 to 99
Offset
+0 +1 +2
+ 33
00 to 99
~
+94 +95 +96 Display value
~
(Undefined)
Status
Display value
Offset
+0
Data
0004 to 0061 (4 to 97 decimal)
00000 to 99999 Negative sign: F (5th digit in BCD) Example 12345 +1 +2 2345 0001 Example 1234 +1 +2 1234 000F
656
Appendix L
Data
d0 bit: If overflow:1 d1 bit: If underflow:1 d2 bit: Not used d3 bit: During forced zero operation:1 (K3TH, K3TR, K3TC: 0) d4 bit: In test mode: d5 bit: While holding input:1 d6 bit: Bank input 1:1 (K3TH, K3TX: 0) d7 bit: Bank input 2:1 (K3TH, K3TX: 0) Others: 0 Others: 0 Others: 0
Others: 0
d8 bit: LL comparison output:1 Others: 0 OUT1 comparison output: 1 (K3TC) d9 bit: L comparison output:1 Others: 0 OUT2 comparison output:1 (K3TC) d10 bit: H comparison output:1 Others: 0 OUT4 comparison output:1 K3TC) d11 bit: HH comparison output:1 Others: 0 OUT5 comparison output:1 (K3TC) d12 bit: PASS comparison output:1 Others: 0 OUT3 comparison output:1 (K3TC) d13 bit: Not used d14 bit: Not used d15 bit: Not used +96 Status (4 digits BIN) Same as above
657
Appendix L
Read Display Value (PV) (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 336 (Hex 0150))
This sequence reads display value (PV) for continuous units. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 Number of send data words Number of units
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) This sequence is similar to sequence No. 335 (Read Display Value (PV) (Continuous Units)).
Model Data Read (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 337 (Hex 0151))
Reads model data and stores the results in the specified words. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 Number of send data words Number of units (Undefined) Relevant unit No.
~
+26 (Undefined) Relevant unit No.
~
Data
0003 to 001B (3 to 27 decimal) 0001 to 0019 (1 to 25 decimal) 00 to 99
Offset
+0 +1 +2
+ 26
Same as above
658
Appendix L
~
+121 +122 +123 +124 +125 Input specifications Input specifications
~
Display specifications
Offset
+0 +1 to +2
Data
0006 to 007E (6 to 126 decimal) 544131 (TA1) (K3TH) 544231 (TB1) (K3TH) 564432 (VD2) (K3TX) 414432 (AD2) (K3TX) 564132 (VA2) (K3TX) 414132 (AA2) (K3TX) 524231 (RB1) (K3TR, K3TC)
+2
Display specifications (ASCII 41 (A) (common) 1 character) 42 (B) (K3TH, K3TX) 43 (C) (K3TR, K3TC) Output specifications (ASCII 2 characters) 5331 (S1) (RS-232C) 5332 (S2) (RS-485) 5333 (S3) (RS-422) 5335 (S5) (RS-485 + comparison output) 5336 (S6) (RS-422 + comparison output) Leftmost digit: 30 (0) to 31 (1) Rightmost digit: 31 (1) to 45 (E) 3030 (00) (K3TH, K3TX) 3031 (00) to 3133 (12) (K3TR) 5542 (UB) (K3TC) 5543 (UC) (K3TC)
+3
+4 +5
+125
Same as above
Model Data Read (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 338 (Hex 0152))
This sequence reads model data for continuous units. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 Number of send data words Number of units
Offset
+0 +1
Data
659
Appendix L
~
+249 Send data
~
Data
0003 to 00FA (3 to 250 decimal) 0001 to 01F0 (1 to 496 decimal) Number of bytes of send data not including @, the FCS, and the terminator. ASCII Send data: 496 characters max.
Offset
+0 +1
+2 to +249
~
+249 Receive data
~
Data
0001 to 00FA (1 to 250 decimal) ASCII Receive data: 498 characters max.
Offset
+0 +1 to +249
660
Appendix M
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol
The V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely the Bar Code Reader connected the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C cable.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol is shown below.
Sequence No. 350 (015E) 351 (015F) 352 (0160) 353 (0161) Communications sequence name BCR read start BCR read stop Data read Complete data read Function Ladder interface Send word Receive word allocation allocation No No No No No Yes No Yes
354 (0162) 355 (0163) 356 (0164) 357 (0165) 358 (0166) 359 (0167) 360 (0168)
BCR function write (V500) BCR function read (V500) Log data output request (V500) Preset data set (V500) BCR connection confirmation (V500) Log data clear (V500) Continuous data read (scan) (V500)
Instructs the Reader to start a BCR read. Instructs the Reader to stop a BCR read. Data read by the Reader is received and saved in the receive words. Instructs the Reader to start a read. After the data read by the Reader is received and saved to the receive words, reading is stopped. Writes the operation mode and read functions. Reads the operation mode and read functions. Requests output of log data sent to host. Writes preset data. Confirms if the Reader is correctly set. Clear log data. Performs the following operations repeatedly: starts reading, receives data read by the Reader, saves the data to the receive words by the scan method. Performs the following operations repeatedly: starts reading, receives data read by the Reader, saves the data to the receive words by the interrupt method (interrupt No.100). Clears the log, confirms BCR connection, and sets BCRs. Performs the following operations repeatedly: starts reading, receives data read by the Reader, saves the data to the receive words by the scan method. Performing the following operations repeatedly: starts reading, receives data read by the Reader, saves the data to the receive words by the interrupt method (interrupt No.100). Used to send data of a specified data length, and receive only ACK as the receive data. Used to send data of a specified data length, and receive ACK together with the return of other receive data. The frame format of the receive data, however, has to contain STX and ETX.
361 (0169)
No
Yes
Yes No
No Yes
364 (016C)
No
Yes
365 (016D)
Yes
No
366 (016E)
Yes
Yes
661
Appendix M
3. Sequences No. 361 and No. 364 (Continuous Data Read with Interrupt) are not supported by the CS1W-SCU@@(-V1) and CJ1W-SCU@@(-V1) Serial Communications Units. A protocol syntax error will occur if an attempt is made to execute either sequence with the Serial Communications Unit.
Connections
The connections for using the V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol are shown below. V500 Connections
Serial Communications Board (CS Series only) Serial Communications Unit (CS/CJ Series) PLC PS RS-232C port V500-C11 ID Controller
100 VAC
V520-R12# Reader
V509-W040 Reader Cable Serial Communications Unit/Board: D-sub 9 pin female Signal Name
FG SD RD RTS CTS DSR DTR SG
Pin No.
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9
Signal Name
FG SD RD RTS CTS DSR DTR SG
662
Appendix M
V520-R121 Serial Communications Board (CS Series only) Serial Communications Unit (CS/CJ Series)
PLC PS
Reader
Pin No.
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9
Signal Name
SD RD RTS CTS DTR SG
System Setting
Shown below are the system settings of the V500-C11 and V520-R121 when this protocol is used. Note The portions enclosed by in boxes are used for this protocol. V500-C11 BCR Functions
Read trigger Read control method
Host Interface
Prefix Suffix
NONE, "STX"
"ETX" , "CR "
V520-R121
Start code Stop code Operation mode Data output mode
NONE, "STX" "ETX" , "CR" External trigger, host trigger 1-shot, continuous
663
Appendix M
~
+15 +16 Read data Read data
Offset
+0 +1 to +16
Data
0002 to 0011 (2 to 17 decimal) 30 (0) to 39 (9), 41 (A) to 5A (Z), 3F (?) Up to 32 characters in ASCII
Note The reception wait time is not set for this sequence.
664
Appendix M
Offset
+0 +1
Data
41 (A): ONLINE *42 (B): ONLINE CONTROL *41 (A): ON 42 (B): OFF 41 (A): 42 (B): 43 (C): 44 (D): 45 (E): 46 (F): 47 (G): 48 (H): 49 (I): 4A (J): 4B (K): JAN NW7 NORMAL NW7 SMALL NW7 HEX CODE39 NORMAL CODE39 ST/SP OUTPUT 2 of 5 (ITF) CODE128 CODE93 2 of 5 (3BAR) 2 of 5 (5BAR)
+2
+3 +4
00 to 32 00: Any number of digits allowed. 41 (A): 42 (B): 43 (C): 44 (D): 45 (E): 46 (F): 47 (G): 1 to 5 1 to 4 41 (A): 42 (B): 43 (C): 41 (A): 42 (B): ON for normal read ON for no-read OFF Normal (continuous rotating) In-zone startup No-check Modulus 10 (all bar codes) Modulus 11 (except JAN) Modulus 16 (NW7 only) Modulus 43 (CODE39 only) Modulus 47 (CODE93 only) Modulus 103 (CODE128 only)
+5
+6
Note Selecting the values marked with asterisks is required for this protocol. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None.
665
Appendix M
Offset
+0 +1
Data
ONLINE ONLINE CONTROL ON OFF JAN NW7 NORMAL NW7 SMALL NW7 HEX CODE39 NORMAL CODE39 ST/SP Output 2 of 5 (ITF) CODE128 CODE93 2 of 5 (3BAR) 2 of 5 (5BAR)
+2
+3 +4
No-check Modulus 10 (all bar codes) Modulus 11 (except JAN) Modulus 16 (NW7 only) Modulus 43 (CODE39 only) Modulus 47 (CODE93 only) Modulus 103 (CODE128 only)
+5
+6
ON for normal read ON for no-read OFF Normal (continuous rotating) In-zone startup
666
Appendix M
Log Data Output Request (V500) (Sequence No. 356 (Hex 0164))
This sequence requests output of the log data sent to host. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 Number of send data words (Undefined) Number of units
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+248 +249 Log data Log data
Offset
+0 +1 to +249
Data
0001 to 00FA (1 to 250 decimal) Log data with the number of designated data is stored including the separator GS (1D). If the log data (including separator) exceeds 498 bytes, only 498 bytes are stored.
667
Appendix M
~
+18 +19 Preset data Preset data
~
+(18N+2) +(18N+3) +(18N+4) +(18N+5) (Undefined) (Undefined) Number of units Preset data Preset data
~
Preset data No.
~
+(18N+18) +(18N+19) Preset data Preset data
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 to +19
Data
18N+2 (N is number of presets 1 to 5) 1 to 5 1 to 5 01 to 32 Combination of the following ASCII characters and up to 32 characters maximum: 30 (0) to 39 (9) 41 (A) to 5A (Z), 3F (?) The area that is not used is undefined Store repeatedly the contents of words with offsets +2 to +19 the same number of times as the number of presets (N)
+20 to +91
668
Appendix M
Data Continuous Read (Scan) (V500) (Sequence No. 360 (Hex 0168))
This sequence performs the following operations repeatedly: Instructs the Bar Code Reader to start reading and receives the data read by the Bar Code Reader. The scan notification method is used for the receive data. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) Receive data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 352 (Data read). Note 1. Since this sequence repeats itself within the sequence, once it is executed, it remains in the execution state until cancelled. 2. Even if execution is cancelled, the Bar Code Reader still keeps reading. Execute sequence No. 351 (BCR read stop) to end the sequence. Note The reception wait time is not set for this sequence.
Data Continuous Read (Interrupt) (V500) (Sequence No. 361 (Hex 0169))
This sequence performs the following operations repeatedly: Instruct the Bar Code Reader to start reading and receives the data read by the Bar Code Reader. The interrupt notification method is used for the receive data and the interrupt No. is 100. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) The receive data word allocation similar to that of sequence No. 352 (data read). Note 1. Since this sequence repeats itself within the sequence, once it is executed, it remains in the execution state until cancelled. 2. Even if execution is cancelled, the Bar Code Reader keeps reading. Execute sequence No. 351 (BCR read stop) to end the sequence. 3. The reception wait time is not set for this sequence. 4. Sequences No. 361 and No. 364 (Continuous Data Read with Interrupt) are not supported by the CS1W-SCU@@(-V1) and CJ1W-SCU@@(-V1) Serial Communications Units. A protocol syntax error will occur if an attempt is made to execute either sequence with a Serial Communications Unit.
669
Appendix M
Data Continuous Read (Scan) (V520) (Sequence No. 363 (Hex 016B))
This sequence performs the following operations repeatedly: instructs the Bar Code Reader to start reading and receives the data read by the Bar Code Reader. The scan notification method is used for the receive data. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) The receive data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 352 (Data Read). Note 1. Since this sequence repeats itself within the sequence, once it is executed, it remains in the execution state until cancelled. 2. Even if execution is cancelled, the bar code still keeps reading. Execute sequence No. 351 (BCR Read Stop) to end the sequence. 3. The reception wait time is not set for this sequence.
Data Continuous Read (Interrupt) (V520) (Sequence No. 364 (Hex 016C))
This sequence performs the following operations repeatedly: Instructs the Bar Code Reader to start reading and receives the data read by the Bar Code Reader. The interrupt notification method is used for the receive data and the interrupt No. is 100. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) The send data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 352 (Data Read). Note 1. Since this sequence repeats itself within the sequence, once it is executed, it remains in the execution state until cancelled. 2. Even if execution is cancelled, the bar code still keeps reading. Execute sequence No. 351 (BCR Read Stop) to end the sequence. 3. The reception wait time is not set for this sequence. 4. Sequences No. 361 and No. 364 (Continuous Data Read with Interrupt) are not supported by the CS1W-SCU@@(-V1) and CJ1W-SCU@@(-V1) Serial Communications Units. A protocol syntax error will occur is an attempt is made to execute either sequence with a Serial Communications Unit.
~
+248 +249 Send data Send data
670
Appendix M
Data
0003 to 00FA (3 to 250 decimal) 0001 to 01F0 (1 to 496 decimal) The byte length of the send data excluding STX and ETX. Inscribe send data up to 496 bytes (max.) by ASCII.
+2 to +249
~
+248 +249 Send data Send data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0003 to 00FA (3 to 250 decimal) 0001 to 01F0 (1 to 496 decimal) The byte length of the send data excluding STX and ETX. Set send data up to 496 bytes (max.) by ASCII.
+2 to +128
~
+126 +127 Receive data Receive data
Offset
+0 +1 to +127
Data
0001 to 00FA (1 to 250 decimal) Up to 498 bytes of ASCII receive data are stored.
Note Shown below is the receive data frame format. The reception data without ACK, STX, and ETX is stored.
Receive data (498 bytes max.) STX ACK ETX
671
Appendix M
672
Appendix N
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
The 3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely the Laser Micrometer connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C cable.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the 3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol is shown below.
Sequence No. Communications sequence name Function Ladder interface Send word Receive allocation word allocation No No Notes
400 (0190)
3Z4L clear
401 (0191) 402 (0192) 403 (0193) 404 (0194) 405 (0195) 406 (0196) 407 (0197) 408 (0198) 409 (0199)
Memory switch set mm unit set E unit set Calibration set Calibration release Program number set (3000-series) Measurement condition set (3000-series) Measurement condition release (3000-series) Measurement condition list request (3000-series)
Resets errors, data, analog output, decision result and places the Laser Micrometer into standby. Sets memory switches and the area for the work position LED. Sets the display unit to mm. Sets the display unit to E. Calibrates the Laser Micrometer. Calibration setting release. Releases the calibration of the Laser Micrometer. Switches the program number to a specified number. Sets measurement conditions.
No No No No No No No No Yes
410 (019A)
411 (019B)
412 (019C)
413 (019D)
Releases measurement conditions that have been set. Requests the measurement conditions that have been set and other settings. Single run measurement start When the sample measurement con(3000-series) dition is from 1 to 999, performs a single run measurement and requests the measurement results. Zero run measurement start If the sample measurement condition (3000-series) is zero, starts a zero run measurement. Continuous measurement start Starts a continuous measurement. (scan) (3000-series) The scan notification method is used for receive data. Continuous measurement start Starts a continuous measurement. (interrupt) (3000-series) The interrupt notification method is used for receive data. Measurement termination (3000series) Measurement termination Terminates a continuous measure(3000-series) ment. Data request (3000-series) Requests display data in the idle measurement status or the latch data generated by the measurement command.
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No No
No*1 Yes
673
Appendix N
Ladder interface Send word Receive allocation word allocation No No No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes No No No Notes
416 (01A0) 417 (01A1) 418 (01A2) 419 (01A3) 420 (01A4) 421 (01A5) 422 (01A6) 423 (01A7)
Statistic processing execution (3000-series) Statistic processing non-execution (3000-series) All statistic memory clear (3000-series) Statistic memory clear (3000-series) Statistic result request (3000-series) Memory switch set 1 (3000-series) Memory switch set 2 (3000-series) Simple AVG times set (3000-series) AVG move interval set (3000-series) AVG move (H) times set (3000-series)
Lights the statistic processing LED and processes the statistics. Turns OFF the statistic processing LED. Statistics are not processed. Clears statistic processing memories of all programs. Clears statistic processing memories of program under display. Requests statistic processing result. Sets memory switches. Sets memory switches. Taking the simple average as the averaging method, sets the averaging times per measurement interval 4. Taking the average move as the averaging method, sets the measurement interval number. Taking the average move and highspeed data output as the averaging method, sets the averaging times per measurement interval 4. Taking the average move and lowspeed data output as the averaging method, sets the averaging times per measurement interval 4. Sets work automatic detection function. Releases the settings of work automatic detection function. Requests the settings of work automatic detection function. Clears the 3Z4L, sets the mm unit, sets the memory unit, does not processes statistics, and clears all statistic memory. Sets measurement conditions. Releases measurement conditions that have been set. Requests the measurement conditions that have been set and other settings. When the sample measurement condition is from 1 to 999, performs a single run measurement and requests the measurement results. Starts a deflection measurement.
424 (01A8)
Yes
No
425 (01A9)
Yes
No
Yes
No
427 (01AB) Automatic detection set (3000-series) 428 (01AC) Automatic detection release (3000-series) 429 (01AD) Automatic detection list request (3000-series) 430 (01AE) 3Z4L initialize (3000-series)
Yes No No Yes
No No Yes No
Measurement condition set (4000-series) Measurement condition release (4000-series) Measurement condition list request (4000-series) Single run measurement start (4000-series)
Yes Yes No
No No Yes
434 (01B2)
No
Yes
Deflection measurement start (4000-series) Continuous measurement start Starts a continuous measurement. (scan) (4000-series) The scan notification method is used for receive data.
No No
No Yes
674
Appendix N
Ladder interface Send word Receive allocation word allocation No Yes Notes
437 (01B5)
Continuous measurement start Starts a continuous measurement. (interrupt) (4000-series) The interrupt notification method is used for receive data. Measurement termination Terminates continuous measurement. (4000-series) Data request (4000-series) Requests measurement data in the idle measurement status or the latch data generated by the measurement command. Sets the forced zero direction to positive (+). Sets the forced zero direction to negative (). Releases the forced zero direction. Clears the 3Z4L, sets the mm unit, and clears the memory unit settings. Used to send data of a specified data length, and receive only OK as the receive data. Used to send data of a specified data length, and receive data other than OK. Sets the Laser Micrometers high calibration. Sets the Laser Micrometers low calibration.
No No
No *1 Yes
440 (01B8)
Forced positive zero (4000-series) 441 (01B9) Forced negative zero (4000-series) 442 (01BA) Forced zero release (4000-series) 443 (01BB) 3Z4L initialize (4000-series) 444 (01BC) General-purpose command 1
No No No Yes Yes
No No No No No
Yes
Yes
446 (01BE) High calibration set 447 (01BF) Low calibration set
Yes Yes
No No
Note 1. Sequences with interrupt notification are not supported by the CS1W-SCU@@(-V1) and CJ1WSCU@@(-V1) Serial Communications Units. A protocol syntax error will occur if an attempt is made to execute either sequence with a Serial Communications Unit. Do not set an EM bank as the receive storage word for interrupt notification. A protocol syntax error will occur if an EM banks is set. 2. Ladder Interface Settings YES: User settings are required for the 3rd and 4th operands of PMCR(260). NO: Send word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 3rd operand (S). Receive word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 4th operand (D). 3. The hexadecimal equivalents of sequences numbers are given in parentheses.
675
Appendix N
Connections
The connections for the 3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol are shown below. RS-232C Connection
Serial Communications Board (CS Series only) Serial Communications Unit (CS/CJ Series) PLC PS RS-232C RS-232C Port Controller Sensor
Signal cable
Serial Communications Unit/Board: D-sub 9 pin (female) Signal name FG SD RD RTS CTS DSR DTR SG Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9
Controller: D-sub 25 pin (female) Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 Signal name FG TXD RXD RTS CTS DSR SG DTR
Setting
Baud rate ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
Status
DIP Switch 2
No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Setting of minimum read value Setting of transparent body measurement function Setting of simultaneous measurement function
Setting
Selection for measurement section ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
Status
ON/OFF
676
Appendix N
Setting
Setting of measurement function by 2 measurement instruments ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
Status
This protocol does not support the error data exclusion function
Setting
Baud rate ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
Status
DIP Switch 2
No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Setting of minimum read value Display unit
Setting
Selection for measurement section ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
Status
677
Appendix N
Delimiter Control Code Setting 3Z4L-4000 Series The delimiter control codes must be set on DIP switch SW1 for the 3Z4L-4000 Series. Turn off pins 4 and 5, set the delimiter codes to CR+LF, and set the delimiter code control setting in the sequence to CR+LF. See the setting for CR+LF in the following diagram.
3 4 5
Turn ON (to use a general-purpose interface) Delimiter Setting Delimiter Pin Pin 4 Pin 5 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON CR+LF CR LF
Handshaking ON: Control (recognize DRT input) OFF: 3-wire method (non-protocol) Baud Rate Baud rate Pin Pin 1 Pin 2 1200 OFF OFF 2400 ON OFF 4800 OFF ON 9600 ON ON
678
Appendix N
3Z4L-3000 Series The delimiter control code does not need to be set on the DIP switch for the 3Z4L-3000 Series. Set the delimiter control codes in the sequence to CR+LF for the send code and to CR or CR+LF for the receive code. See the settings in the following diagram.
3 4
Turn ON (to use a general-purpose interface) Handshaking ON: Control (recognize DRT input) OFF: 3-wire method (non-protocol) Baud Rate Baud rate 1200 Pin Pin 1 Pin 2 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 2400 4800 9600
The High-speed 3Z4L-3000-series Meters must have the delimiter control codes set using the memory switches. Set both the send and receive codes to CR+LF.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the 3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol for the 5000 and 6000 Series is shown below.
Sequence No. 400 (0190) 401 (0191) 402 (0192) 403 (0193) 404 (0194) 405 (0195) 406 (0196) 407 (0197) 408 (0198) 409 (0199) 410 (019A) 411 (019B) 412 (019C) 413 (019D) 414 (019E) 415 (019F) Communications sequence name 5000 Series 3Z4L clear Memory switch set mm unit set E unit set Calibration set Calibration release Program number set (3000-series) Measurement condition set (3000-series) Measurement condition release (3000-series) Measurement condition list request (3000-series) Single run measurement start (3000-series) Zero run measurement start (3000-series) Continuous measurement start (scan) (3000-series) Continuous measurement start (interrupt) (3000-series) Measurement termination (3000-series) Data request (3000-series) Yes No*1 Yes Yes No Yes No*1 No No No No Yes No No No No Operation 6000 Series Yes No*1 Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
679
Appendix N
6000 Series Yes Yes Yes Yes No No*1 No*1 Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes*3 No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes*3 Yes Yes No No
Note 1. *Normal responses will be returned for these sequences for 5000-series and 6000-series Laser Micrometers, but no processing will be performed. 2. *This sequence will be processed the same as sequence No. 425 AVG move (H) times set for 5000series Laser Micrometers. 3. *Memory switch settings will be ignored for these sequences for 5000-series and 6000-series Laser Micrometers. 4. *This sequence will be processed the same as sequence No. 411 Zero run measurement start for 5000-series Laser Micrometers.
680
Appendix N
Offset
+0 +1
Data 3000-series
0003 (fixed) Using buzzer sound: 0 to 3 Automatic latch release time: 0 to 9 Using print timer, the setting for simultaneous measurement: 0 to 3 (high-speed), 0 to 1 (other) Display of the comma for 1/ 1000s digit, number of display digits: 0 to 5 (highspeed), 0 to 3 (other) Measurement interval 4: 0 to 6
4000-series
0003 (fixed) Number of digits for extinguishing indicator: 0 to 2 I/O IF RUN Input: 0 or 1 Display of Err0: 0 or 1
z (1 digit BCD)
+2
v (1 digit BCD)
Use of comma: 0 or 1
681
Appendix N
Note This sequence can be used for the 3Z4L-4000 Series only when pin 8 on DIP switch SW2 is turned ON.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
+2
HC gauge dimension (integer portion) (3 digits BCD) HC gauge dimension (Sign) (ASCII 1 character)
000 to 999
+3
+2 +3
+4 to +6 LC gauge dimensions
Note 1. Use sequences No. 446 (High calibration set) and No. 447 (Low calibration set) to calibrate the Laser Micrometer. If this sequence (No. 404) is used, both the high and low calibration gauges must be set, and the high calibration and low calibration gauges cannot be exchanged. 2. The HC gauge dimension and LC gauge dimension must be set with 3 digits for the integer portion and 4 digits for the decimal portion. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None.
682
Appendix N
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
683
Appendix N
684
Appendix N
+30 +31 +32 +33 +34 +35 +36 +37 +38 +39 +40 +41 +42 +43 +44 +45 +46 +47 +48 +49 +50 +51 +52 +53 (Undefined) Sign (Undefined) Sign
(Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) Schedule output timer Sample measurement pulse (Undefined) (Unused) (Unused) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Offset
+0 +1
Data
+2 to +4 Segment number (ASCII 6 characters) +5 +6 Measurement interval number (1 digit BCD) Lower limit value (decimal portion) (4 digits BCD) Lower limit value (Integer portion) (3 digits BCD) Lower limit value (Sign) (ASCII 1 character) Upper limit value Multistep selection limit value (L1) Multistep selection limit value (L2) Multistep selection limit value (L3) Multistep selection limit value (L4) Multistep selection limit value (L5) Multistep selection limit value (L6) Reference value
+7
000 to 999
+7 +8
+8 +9 to +11 +12 to +14 +15 to +17 +18 to +20 +21 to +23 +24 to +26 +27 to +29 +30 to +32
if +: 20( ) if : 2D() Same as lower limit values Same as lower limit values Same as lower limit values Same as lower limit values Same as lower limit values Same as lower limit values Same as lower limit values Same as lower limit values
685
Appendix N
Contents (data format)
Analog output scale number (1 digit BCD) 1 to 3
Data
Offset classification (ASCII 3 4F4620 (OF), 4F4D20 (OM) characters) Offset value Data output conditions (1 digit BCD) Scheduled output timer (3 digits BCD) Sample measurement pulse (3 digits BCD) Sample measurement classification (ASCII 3 characters) Unused Yes/No for segment setting (1 digit BCD) Yes/No for measurement interval number setting (1 digit BCD) Yes/No for upper/lower limit value setting (1 digit BCD) Yes/No for multistep selection limit value (1 digit BCD) Yes/No for reference setting (1 digit BCD) Yes/No for offset value setting (1 digit BCD) Same as lower limit values 0 to 6 000 to 999 000 to 999 415647 (AVG), 4D4158 (MAX) 4D494E (MIN), 524E47 (RNG) Undefined Set: 1 (SG) Dont set: 0 Set: 1 (M) Dont set: 0 Set: 1 (LL,LH) Dont set: 0 Set: 1 (L1,L2,L3,L4,L5,L6) Dont set: 0 Set: 1 (REF,SCL) Dont set: 0 Set: 1 (OF or OM) Dont set: 0
+48
+49
Yes/No for data output condi- Set: 1 (PR,PRT) tion setting Dont set: 0 (1 digit BCD) Yes/No for sample measure- Set: 1 (SMP, MAX or MIN or RNG or AVG) ment pulse setting Dont set: 0 (1 digit BCD)
+53
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note 1. This sequence cannot be used to set the error lower limit (EL), error upper limit (EH), error exclusion counter (CNT) of the error data exclusion function (centerless grinder function). 2. The following settings must be made together with this sequence; they cannot be set separately. Lower limit, upper limit Multistep selection limit Reference value, analog output scale number Data output conditions, scheduled print timer 3. The limit value, reference value, and offset value can be set to 3 digits for the integer portion and to 4 digits for the decimal portion.
686
Appendix N
Measurement Condition List Request (3000-series) (Sequence No. 409 (Hex 0199))
This sequence requests the measurement condition settings that have been set and other settings. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None.
687
Appendix N
688
Appendix N
Contents (data format)
Number of receive data words (4 digits Hex) Program number (1 digit BCD)
Data
002E (0046 decimal) (fixed) 0 to 9 Combination of 31(1) to 36(6), 20( ) 1 to 4 0000 to 9999
+2 to +4 Segment number (ASCII 6 characters) +5 +6 Measurement interval number (1 digit BCD) Lower limit value (Decimal portion) (4 digits BCD) Lower limit value (Integer portion) (3 digits BCD) Lower limit value (Sign) (BIN) Upper limit value Multistep selection limit value (L1) Multistep selection limit value (L2) Multistep selection limit value (L3) Multistep selection limit value (L4) Multistep selection limit value (L5) Multistep selection limit value (L6) Reference value Analog output scale number (1 digit BCD)
+7
000 to 999
+7 +8
+8 +9 to +11 +12 to +14 +15 to +17 +18 to +20 +21 to +23 +24 to +26 +27 to +29 +30 to +32 +33 +34 to +35 +36 to +38 +39 +40 +41 +42 to +43 +44 to +45
If +: 0 If : F Same as lower limit values Same as lower limit values Same as lower limit values Same as lower limit values Same as lower limit values Same as lower limit values Same as lower limit values Same as lower limit values 1 to 3
Offset classification (ASCII 3 4F4620 (OF), 4F4D20 (OM) characters) Offset value Data output condition (1 digit BCD) Scheduled output timer (3 digits BCD) Sample measurement pulse (3 digits BCD) Sample measurement classification (ASCII 3 characters) Statistical processing calculation classification (ASCII 3 characters) Same as lower limit values 0 to 6 000 to 999 000 to 999 415647 (AVG), 4D4158 (MAX) 4D494E (MIN), 524E47 (RNG) 535420 (ST), 4E5354 (NST)
Note This sequence cannot be used to request the lower limit (EL), error upper limit (EH), error exclusion counter (CNT) of the error data exclusion function (centerless grinder function).
689
Appendix N
Single Run Measurement Start (3000-series) (Sequence No. 410 (Hex 019A))
When the sample measurement condition is from 1 to 999, this sequence performs a single run measurement and requests the measurement results Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260))
Receive data stor +0 age words +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 (Undefined) Sign (Undefined) Sign Number of receive data words (Undefined) Decision result Decimal portion Integer portion (Undefined) Decimal portion Integer portion (Undefined) Deviation value Measurement value Program number
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
With no reference setting: 0006 With reference setting: 0009 0 to 9 With no limit setting: 0000 With limit setting: 2B4E (+N), 4F4B (OK), 2D4E (N)
+3
Measurement value (decimal 0000 to 9999 portion) (4 digits BCD) Measurement value (integer portion) (3 digits BCD) Measurement value (Sign) (BIN) 000 to 999 If +: 0 If : F
+4 +5
+6 to +8 Deviation value
Same as measurement value *The deviation will be stored in this area only when reference setting is made.
Zero Run Measurement Start (3000-series) (Sequence No. 411 (Hex 019B))
If the sample measurement condition is zero, a zero run measurement is started. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note The zero run measurement keeps measuring until sequence No. 414 (Measurement Termination) is executed.
690
Appendix N
Continuous Measurement Start (Scan) (3000-series) (Sequence No. 412 (Hex 019C))
A continuous measurement is started. The scan notification method is used for the receive data. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) The receive data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 410 (Single Run Measurement Start). Note 1. Since this sequence repeats itself within the sequence, once it is executed, it remains in the execution state until cancelled. 2. Even if execution is cancelled, the Laser Micrometer still keeps measuring. Execute sequence No. 414 (Measurement Termination) to end the sequence.
Continuous Measurement Start (Interrupt) (3000-series) (Sequence No. 413 (Hex 019D))
A continuous measurement is started. The interrupt notification method is used for the receive data and the interrupt No. is 101. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) The receive data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 410 (Single Run Measurement Start). Note 1. Since this sequence repeats itself within the sequence, once it is executed, it remains in the execution state until cancelled. 2. Even if execution is cancelled, the Laser Micrometer still keeps measuring. Execute sequence No. 414 (Measurement Termination) to end the sequence. 3. Sequences No. 413 and No. 437 (Continuous Measurement Start with Interrupt) not supported by the CS1W-SCU@@(-V1) and CJ1W-SCU@@(-V1) Serial Communications Units. A protocol syntax error will occur if an attempt is made to execute either sequence with a Serial Communications Unit. Do not set an EM bank as the receive storage word for interrupt notification. A protocol syntax error will occur if an EM banks is set.
691
Appendix N
All Statistic Memory Clear (3000-series) (Sequence No. 418 (Hex 01A2))
This sequence clears statistic processing memories of all programs. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None.
Statistic Processing Memory Clear (3000-series) (Sequence No. 419 (Hex 01A3))
This sequence clears statistic processing memories of the program under display. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None.
692
Appendix N
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0013 (0019 decimal) (fixed) 0 to 9 000000 to 999999 0000 to 9999 000 to 999 If +: 0 If : F Same as average value Same as average value Same as average value Same as average value
+2 to +3 Number of statistic data (6 digits BCD) +4 +5 +6 Average value (decimal portion) (4 digits BCD) Average value (integer portion) (4 digits BCD) Average value (Sign) (BIN)
+7 to +9 Maximum value +10 to +12 +13 to +15 +16 to +18 Minimum value Range Standard deviation
Note The number of digits of the Decimal portion is fixed to 4 digits. If a deviation calculation results in a value with 5 decimal places, it will be stored with one digit overflowing into the integer portion. Examples: The value -0.1234 is stored as follows: Area of decimal portion: 1234; Area of integer portion: 0000; Sign area: F000
693
Appendix N
Memory Switch Set 1 (3000-series, High-speed Type) (Sequence No. 421 (Hex 01A5))
This sequence sets memory switches. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send +0 data +1 +2 Number of send data words W X (Undefined) Y Z V
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0: For single run or zero run measurement start displaying ---. 1: For single run or zero run measurement start displaying the previous measured value 0: Perform single run measurement to the RUN signal of I/O IF 1: Repeat measurement while the RUN signal of I/O IF is input *0: RS-232C Delimiter CR+LF 1: RS-232C Delimiter CR 2: RS-232C Delimiter LF 0: RS-232C no parity check 1: RS-232C odd parity check 2: RS-232C even parity check 0: Displaying Err-0 1: Displaying 0
x (1 digit BCD)
y (1 digit BCD)
z (1 digit BCD)
+2
v (1 digit BCD)
Note Settings marked with asterisks are required for this protocol.
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note 1. Memory switches cannot be set when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON. 2. The setting (y, z) of RS-232C takes effect when the power supply is turned back on.
694
Appendix N
Memory Switch Set 2 (3000-series, High-speed Type) (Sequence No. 422 (Hex 01A6))
This sequence sets memory switches. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send +0 data +1 +2 Number of send data words W X (Undefined) Y Z V
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Work automatic detection is not performed Work automatic detection is performed Diameter detection method (1 scan) Work automatic detection is performed Diameter detection method (8 scan) Work automatic detection is performed Position detection method (1 scan)
For expansion 0 (fixed) For expansion 0 (fixed) For expansion 0 (fixed) *0: Error data exclusion function is not used 1: Error data exclusion function is used
+2
v (1 digit BCD)
Note Settings marked with asterisks are required for this protocol. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note Memory switches cannot be set when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON.
Simple AVG Times Set (3000-series, High-speed Type) (Sequence No. 423 (Hex 01A7))
This sequence uses the simple average as the averaging method and sets the averaging times per measurement interval 4. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send +0 data +1 Number of send data words Number of averaging times
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note This sequence cannot be used when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON.
695
Appendix N
AVG Move Interval Set (3000-series, High-speed Type) (Sequence No. 424 (Hex 01A8))
This sequence uses the average move as the averaging method and sets the measurement interval number. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send +0 data +1 Number of send data words (Undefined) Measurement interval number
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note This sequence cannot be used when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON.
AVG Move (H) Times Set (3000-series, High-speed Type) (Sequence No. 425 (Hex 01A9))
This sequence uses the average move and high-speed data output as the averaging method and sets the averaging times per measurement interval 4. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send +0 data +1 Number of send data words Number of averaging times
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note This sequence cannot be used when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON.
AVG Move (L) Times Set (3000-series, High-speed Type) (Sequence No. 426 (Hex 01AA))
This sequence uses the average move and low-speed data output as the averaging method and sets the averaging times per measurement interval 4. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send +0 data +1 Number of send data words Number of averaging times
Offset
+0 +1
Data
696
Appendix N
Note 1. This sequence cannot be used when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON. 2. This sequence will be processed the same as sequence No. 425 AVG move (H) times set for 5000series Laser Micrometers.
Automatic Detection Set (3000-series, High-speed Type) (Sequence No. 427 (Hex 01AB))
This sequence sets the work automatic detection function. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
Receive data storage words +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 (Undefined) Sign (Undefined) Sign Number of send data words (Undefined) The number of measuring times Invalid time Decimal portion Integer portion (Undefined) Decimal portion Integer portion (Undefined) Detection upper limit Detection lower limit
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
+4
000 to 999
+4 +5
+5
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note 1. This sequence cannot be used when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON. 2. The detection lower and upper limit must be set with 3 digits for the integer portion and 4 digits for the decimal portion.
Automatic Detection Release (3000-series, High-speed Type) (Sequence No. 428 (Hex 01AC))
This sequence releases the setting of work automatic detection function. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None.
697
Appendix N
Note This sequence cannot be used when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON.
Automatic Detection List Request (3000-series, High-speed Type) (Sequence No. 429 (Hex 01AD))
This sequence requests the settings of work automatic detection function. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260))
Receive data storage words +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 (Undefined) Sign (Undefined) Sign Number of receive data words (Undefined) The number of measuring times Invalid time Decimal portion Integer portion (Undefined) Decimal portion Integer portion (Undefined) Detection upper limit Detection lower limit
Offset
+0 +1
Data
+2 +3
+4
000 to 999
+4 +5
+5
Note This sequence cannot be used when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON.
698
Appendix N
699
Appendix N
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Segment number (1 digit BCD) Measurement interval number (1 digit BCD) Lower limit value (Decimal portion) (4 digits BCD) Lower limit value (integer portion) (3 digits BCD) Lower limit value (Sign) (ASCII 1 character)
Data
0019 (0025 decimal) (fixed) 1 to 5 1 to 7 0000 to 9999
+4 +5
000 to 999 If +: 20 ( ) If : 2D () Same as lower limit value Same as lower limit value 0 to 3
+4 +5
+6 to +8 Upper limit value +9 to +11 +12 +13 to +15 +16 +17 +18 Reference value Analog output scale number (1 digit BCD) Unused Data output conditions (1 digit BCD) Data output timer value (3 digits BCD) Number of seconds for latch timer (2 digits BCD) Yes/No for segment setting (1 digit BCD) Yes/No for measurement interval number setting (1 digit BCD) Yes/No for upper/lower limit value setting (1 digit BCD) Yes/No for reference setting (1 digit BCD)
0 to 6 000 to 999 00 to 99
+19 +20
Set: 1(SG) Dont set: 0 Set: 1(M) Dont set: 0 Set: 1(LL, LH) Dont set: 0 Set: 1(REF, SCL) Dont set: 0
+21
+22 +23
Yes/No for data output condi- Set: 1(PR, PRT) tion setting Dont set: 0 (1 digit BCD) Yes/No for latch timer setting (1 digit BCD) Set: 1(RLT) Dont set: 0
+24
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note 1. The following settings must be made together with this sequence; they cannot be set separately. Lower limit, upper limit Reference value, data output timer Data output conditions, scheduled print timer 2. The limit value and reference value can be set to 3 digits for the integer portion and to 4 digits for the decimal portion.
700
Appendix N
Measurement Condition List Request (4000-series) (Sequence No. 433 (Hex 01B1))
This sequence requests the measurement condition settings that have been set and other settings. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260))
Receive data storage words +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +10 +11 +12 +13 +14 +15 +16 +17 +18 (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) Data output condition (PR) Number of seconds for latch timer (RLT) Data output timer (BCD 3 digits) (PRT) Forced zero number (ZERO+) (Undefined) Sign (Undefined) (Undefined) Sign (Undefined) Sign Number of receive data words (Undefined) (Undefined) Decimal portion Integer portion (Undefined) Decimal portion Integer portion (Undefined) Decimal portion Integer portion (Undefined) Analog output scale number (SCL) Reference value (REF) Upper limit value (LH) Lower limit value (LL) Segment number (SG) Measurement interval number (M)
701
Appendix N
Contents (data format)
Number of receive data words (4 digits Hex) Segment number (1 digit BCD) Measurement interval number (1 digit BCD) Lower limit value (Decimal portion) (4 digits BCD) Lower limit value (Integer portion) (3 digits BCD) Lower limit value (Sign) (BIN) Reference value Analog output scale number (1 digit BCD) Forced zero number (ASCII 5 characters) Data output condition (1 digit BCD) Data output timer value (3 digits BCD) Number of seconds for latch timer (2 digits BCD)
Data
0013 (0019 decimal) (fixed) 1 to 5 1 to 7 0000 to 9999
+4
000 to 999
+4 +5
+5
If +: 0 If : F Same as lower limit value Same as lower limit value 0 to 3 5A45524F2B (ZERO+) 4E4F524D20 (NORM ) 5A45524F2D (ZERO) 0 to 6 000 to 999 00 to 99
+6 to +8 Upper limit value +9 to +11 +12 +13 to +15 +16 +17 +18
Note This sequence can be used for the 3Z4L-4000 Series only when pin 8 on DIP switch SW2 is turned ON.
Single Run Measurement Start (4000-series) (Sequence No. 434 (Hex 01B2))
When the sample measurement condition is from 1 to 999, this sequence performs a single run measurement and requests the measurement results. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260))
Receive data storage words +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 (Undefined) Sign (Undefined) Sign Number of receive data words Decision result Decimal portion Integer portion (Undefined) Decimal portion Integer portion (Undefined) Deviation value Measurement value
702
Appendix N
Contents (data format)
Number of receive data words (4 digits Hex) Decision result (ASCII 2 characters)
Data
With no reference setting: 0005 With reference setting: 0008 With no limit setting: 0000 With limit setting: 2B4E (+N), 4F4B (OK), 2D4E ( N)
+2
Measurement value (decimal 0000 to 9999 portion) (4 digits BCD) Measurement value (integer portion) (3 digits BCD) Measurement value (Sign) (BIN) 000 to 999
+3
+4
If +: 0 If : F Same as measurement value *The deviation will be stored in this area only when reference setting is made.
+5 to +7 Deviation value
Continuous Measurement Start (Scan) (4000-series) (Sequence No. 436 (Hex 01B4))
This sequence starts a continuous measurement. The scan notification method is used for the receive data. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) The receive data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 434 (Single Run Measurement Start). Note 1. Since this sequence repeats itself within the sequence, once it is executed, it remains in the execution state until cancelled. 2. Even if execution is cancelled, the Laser Micrometer still keeps measuring. Execute sequence No. 438 (Measurement Termination) to end the sequence.
Continuous Measurement Start (Interrupt) (4000-series) (Sequence No. 437 (Hex 01B5))
This sequence starts a continuous measurement. The interrupt notification method is used for the receive data and the interrupt No. is 101. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None.
703
Appendix N
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) The receive data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 434 (Single Run Measurement Start). Note 1. Since this sequence repeats itself within the sequence, once it is executed, it remains in the execution state until cancelled. 2. Even if execution is cancelled, the Laser Micrometer still keeps measuring. Execute sequence No. 438 (Measurement Termination) to end the sequence. 3. Sequences No. 413 and No. 437 (Continuous Measurement Start with Interrupt) are not supported by the CS1W-SCU@@(-V1) and CJ1W-SCU@@(-V1) Serial Communications Units. A protocol syntax error will occur if an attempt is made to execute either sequence with a Serial Communications Unit. Do not set an EM bank as the receive storage word for interrupt notification. A protocol syntax error will occur if an EM banks is set.
704
Appendix N
+248 +249 Send data Send data CR
705
Appendix N
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Send data byte length (4 digits Hex)
Data
0003 to 00FA (3 to 250 decimal) 0001 to 01F0 (1 to 496 decimal) The number of bytes of send data excluding the terminator (CR) Send data up to 496 bytes maximum Specify in ASCII.
+2 to +249
+128 +249 Send data Send data CR
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0003 to 00FA (3 to 250 decimal) 0001 to 01F0 (1 to 496 decimal) The number of bytes of send data excluding the terminator (CR) Send data up to 496 bytes maximum Specify in ASCII.
+2 to +249
+126 +249 Receive data Receive data
Offset
+0 +1 to +249
Data
0001 to 00FA (1 to 250 decimal) When the receive data exceed 498 bytes, only 498 bytes are stored.
706
Appendix N
707
Appendix N
708
Appendix O
Visual Inspection System Protocol
The Visual Inspection System Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely the Visual Recognition Device connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C cable.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the Visual Inspection System Protocol is shown below.
Sequence No. 450 (01C2) Communications sequence name Measurement execution (F200) Continuous measurement execution (scan) (F200) Continuous measurement execution (interrupt) (F200) Reference object registration (group) (F200) Reference object registration (reference position) (F200) Reference object registration (evaluation criterion) (F200) Evaluation condition change (F200) Function Ladder interface Send word Receive word allocation allocation No Yes Notes
451 (01C3)
452 (01C4)
453 (01C5)
454 (01C6)
455 (01C7)
Carries out one measurement one and stores the measurement results in the specified words. Carries out continuously setting the F200 and storing the measurement results in the specified words. Carries out continuously setting the F200 and storing the measurement results in the specified words. Performs reference position registration and evaluation criterion registration at the same time. Registers the reference position for measuring the amount of position displacement when a position displacement compensation is used. Registers the reference value to discriminate the output format.
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
456 (01C8)
Changes the upper and lower limit values of the evaluation condition of the designated output No. 457 (01C9) Arbitrary measurement Stores the measurement values of arbivalue acquisition (F200) trary measurement item regardless of output format in the specified words. 460 (01CC) Measurement execuCarries out one measurement and tion (F300) stores the measurement results in the specified words. 461 (01CD) Continuous measureCarries out continuously setting the ment execution (scan) F300 and storing the measurement (F300) results in the specified words. 462 (01CE) Continuous measureCarries out continuously setting the ment execution (interF300 and storing the measurement rupt) (F300) results in the specified words. 463 (01CF) Reference object regis- Performs a measurement for the input tration command 1 exe- image and updates the reference object data of the full window. cution (F300) 464 (01D0) Reference object regis- Performs a measurement for the input tration command 2 exe- image and updates the reference object cution (F300) data of the full window 465 (01D1) Illumination fluctuation Executes an illumination fluctuation folfollow execution (F300) low. 470 (01D6) Measurement execuCarries out one measurement and tion and positioning stores the measurement results in the (F350) specified words.
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No No
No Yes
709
Appendix O
Ladder interface Send word Receive word allocation allocation Yes Yes No No No No Notes
Designates the camera for measurement. Switches to a designated scene No. Carries out one inspection and outputs inspection results to the video monitor. Changes the inspection character string of a designated inspection area No. to a designated character string. Decreases the display camera No. by 1.
474 (01DA)
Yes
No
480 (01E0)
No
No
481 (01E1)
No
No
482 (01E2)
483 (01E3) 490 (01EA) 491 (01EB) 492 (01EC) 493 (01ED) 494 (01EE) 495 (01EF)
Modifies the binary levels (upper limit and lower limit values) of a designated window number No. Reset (F200/300) Resets the F200/F300. Scene switch (decrease Decreases the scene No. by 1. by 1) Scene switch (increase Increases the scene No. by 1. by 1) Scene switch (arbitrary) Switches to a designated scene No. Measurement, inspecTerminates the measurement and tion termination returns to the home menu. General-purpose com- Sets and executes commands that are mand (send) otherwise not supported. General-purpose com- Sets and executes commands that are mand send/(receive) otherwise not supported.
Yes
No
No No No No No No Yes
Note 1. The hexadecimal equivalents of sequences numbers are given in parentheses. 2. Ladder Interface Settings YES: User settings are required for the 3rd and 4th operands of PMCR(260). NO: Send word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 3rd operand (S). Receive word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 4th operand (D). 3. Sequences No. 452 and No. 462 (Continuous Measurement Execution with Interrupt) are not supported by the CS1W-SCU@@(-V1) and CJ1W-SCU@@(-V1) Serial Communications Units. A protocol syntax error will occur if an attempt is made to execute either sequence with a Serial Communications Unit. Do not set an EM bank as the receive storage word for interrupt notification. A protocol syntax error will occur if an EM banks is set.
710
Appendix O
Connections
The connections for using the Visual Inspection System Protocol are shown below. RS-232C Connections
Serial Communications Board (CS Series only) Serial Communications Unit (CS/CJ Series)
PLC PS
F200/300/350 RS-232C
RS-232C port
RS-232C Unit
Pin No.
25 13
Signal name Protective ground or earth Send data Receive data Request to send Clear to send Data set ready Signal ground Carrier detection (Data word receive) Data terminal ready
Abbreviation FG (GND) SD (TXD) RD (RXD) RS (RTS) CS (CTS) DR (DSR) SG (GND) CD (DCD) ER (DTR)
F300-E: D-sub 25 pin (female)
Pin No. Signal Name
1 2 3 4 5 6
14
7 8 20
2 3 4 5 7 9 8 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20
2 3 4 5 7 9 8 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20
711
Appendix O
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
+3 to +5 Measurement value (decimal portion) (3 digits BCD) Measurement value (integer portion) (7 digits BCD) Measurement value (sign) (1 digit)
Note 1. Only one output No. can be stored. 2. The ranges of measurement values are as follows: For calibration OFF setting: 2147483.648 to 2147483.647 For calibration ON setting: 9999999.999 to 9999999.999 3. If a measurement value exceeds the range of measurement values when calibration is turned off, undefined data is stored in the specified words.
Continuous Measurement Execution (Scan) (F200) (Sequence No. 451 (Hex 01C3))
This sequence carries out continuously the setting of the F200 and stores measurement results in the specified words. The scan notification method is used for the receive data. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260))
Receive data storage words +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 Sign Number of receive data words (Undefined) (Undefined) Integer portion 0 Output No.
Evaluation result
712
Appendix O
Content (data format)
Number of receive data words (4 digits Hex) Output No. (2 digits BCD) Evaluation result (1 digit BCD) 0006 00 to 07 0: OK 1: NG
Data
+3 to +5 Measurement value (decimal portion) (3 digits BCD) Measurement value (integer portion) (7 digits BCD) Measurement value (sign) (1 digit)
Note 1. Only one output No. can be designated. 2. Turn ON the Abort Switch to end this sequences. Abort Switches for port 1 are CIO 190003 for the Serial Communications Board and CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number, bit 03 for Serial Communications Units. Abort Switches for port 2 are CIO 190011 for the Serial Communications Board and CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number, bit 11 for Serial Communications Units. 3. The ranges of measurement values are as follows: For calibration OFF setting:2147483.648 to 2147483.647 For calibration ON setting: 9999999.999 to 9999999.999 4. If a measurement value exceeds the range of measurement values when calibration is turned off, undefined data is stored in the specified words.
Continuous Measurement Execution (Interrupt) (F200) (Sequence No. 452 (Hex 01C4))
This sequence carries out continuously setting the F200 and stores measurement results in the specified words. The interrupt notification method is used for the receive data. The interrupt No. is 102. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260))
Receive data storage words +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 Sign Number of receive data words (Undefined) (Undefined) Integer portion 0 Output No.
Evaluation result
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
+3 to +5 Measurement value (decimal portion) (3 digits BCD) Measurement value (integer portion) (7 digits BCD) Measurement value (sign) (1 digit)
713
Appendix O
2. Turn ON the Abort Switch to end this sequences. Abort Switches for port 1 are CIO 190003 for the Serial Communications Board and CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number, bit 03 for Serial Communications Units. Abort Switches for port 2 are CIO 190011 for the Serial Communications Board and CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number, bit 11 for Serial Communications Units. 3. The ranges of measurement values are as follows: For calibration OFF setting:2147483.648 to 2147483.647 For calibration ON setting:9999999.999 to 9999999.999 4. If a measurement value exceeds the range of measurement values when calibration is turned off, undefined data is stored in the specified words. 5. Sequences No. 452 and No. 462 (Continuous Measurement Execution with Interrupt) are not supported by the CS1W-SCU@@(-V1) and CJ1W-SCU@@(-V1) Serial Communications Units. A protocol syntax error will occur if an attempt is made to execute either sequence with a Serial Communications Unit. Do not set an EM bank as the receive storage word for interrupt notification. A protocol syntax error will occur if an EM banks is set.
Reference Object Registration (Group) (F200) (Sequence No. 453 (Hex 01C5))
This sequence performs reference position registration and criterion registration at the same time. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None.
Reference Object Registration (Reference Position) (F200) (Sequence No. 454 (Hex 01C6))
This sequence registers the reference position for measuring the amount of position displacement when a position displacement compensation is used. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None.
Reference Object Registration (Criterion) (F200) (Sequence No. 455 (Hex 01C7))
This sequence registers a reference value to discriminate the output format. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None.
714
Appendix O
Sign
(Undefined)
Sign
Offset
+0 +1
Data
000A (0010 decimal) 00 to 07
+2 to +5 Upper limit value (decimal portion) (3 digits BCD) Upper limit value (integer portion) (7 digits BCD) Upper limit value (sign) (ASCII 2 digits)
+6 to +9 Lower limit value (decimal portion) (3 digits BCD) Lower limit value (integer portion) (7 digits BCD) Lower limit value (sign) (ASCII 2 digits)
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note 1. Only one output No. can be designated. 2. Enter values so that upper limit lower limit. 3. Enter upper limit and lower limit values within the range 2147483.648 to 2147483.648.
Arbitrary Measurement Value Acquisition (F200) (Sequence No. 457 (Hex 01C9))
This sequence stores measurement values of arbitrary measurement items regardless of output format in the specified words. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 Number of send data words (Undefined) (Undefined) Data 1 Data 2
715
Appendix O
Content (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Data 1 (2 digits BCD) 0003 00: 01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06: 07: 08: 09: 10: 11: Area Center of gravity x Center of gravity y Main axis angle Output format Reference value of output format X displacement Y displacement Angle displacement X reference position Y reference position Angle reference position
Data
+2
When 00 to 03 is set to data 1 Window No.: 00 to 07 When 04 to 05 is set to data 1 Output No.: 00 to 07 When 06 to 11 is set to data 1 Camera No.: 00 to 01
Offset
+0
Data
+1 to +3 Measurement value (decimal portion) (3 digits BCD) Measurement value (integer portion) (7 digits BCD) Measurement value (sign) (1 digit)
Note 1. Only one output No. can be designated. 2. Measurement is not performed with this command. The measurement results of the last measurement will be stored in the specified words. 3. This command can acquire only the measurement value of the window No. set by output format. 4. For data 1 and 2, the receive data is compared with the send data. If the receive data is not the same as the send data, the following flags will be turned ON: The flags for port 1 are CIO 190914 for the Serial Communications Board and CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number +9, bit 14 for Serial Communications Units. The flags for port 2 are CIO 1919114 for the Serial Communications Board and CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number +19, bit 14 for Serial Communications Units. 5. The ranges of measurement values are as follows: For calibration OFF setting: 2147483.648 to 2147483.647 For calibration ON setting: 9999999.999 to 9999999.999 6. If a measurement value exceeds the range of measurement values when calibration is turned off, unexpected data is stored in the specified words.
716
Appendix O
Offset
+0
Data
1 measurement item 2 measurement items 3 measurement items 4 measurement items 5 measurement items
+1 +2
+3 to +5 Measurement value (decimal portion) (3 digits BCD) Measurement value (integer portion) (7 digits BCD) Measurement value (sign) (1 digit)
Note 1. Exponential expressions are used for numbers larger than 9999999.999 and smaller than 999999.9. 2. The number of measurement items is up to 5, but only one window number can be read. 3. The ranges of measurement values are as follows: For calibration OFF setting: 2147483.648 to 2147483.648 For calibration ON setting: 9999999.999 to 9999999.999
717
Appendix O
Continuous Measurement Execution (Scan) (F300) (Sequence No. 461 (Hex 01CD))
This sequence carries out continuously the settings of F300 and stores measurement results in the specified words. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260))
Receive data storage words +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +10 +11 +12 +13 +14 +15 +16 +17 Sign 0 Sign 0 Decimal portion Integer portion Data 5 Sign 0 Decimal portion Integer portion Data 4 Sign 0 Decimal portion Integer portion Data 3 Sign 0 Decimal portion Integer portion Data 2 Number of receive data words (Undefined) (Undefined) Integer portion Window No.
Evaluation result
718
Appendix O
Content (data format)
Number of receive data words (4 digits Hex) 0006: 0009: 000C: 000F: 0012: 00 to 07 0: OK 1: NG
Data
1 measurement item 2 measurement items 3 measurement items 4 measurement items 5 measurement items
+1 +2
+3 to +5 Measurement value (decimal portion) (3 digits BCD) Measurement value (integer portion) (7 digits BCD) Measurement value (sign) (1 digit)
Note 1. Exponential expressions are used for numbers larger than 9999999.999 and smaller than 999999.9. 2. The number of measurement items are up to 5, but only one window number can be read. 3. The range of measurement values are as follows: For calibration OFF setting: 2147483.648 to 2147483.648 For calibration ON setting: 9999999.999 to 9999999.999 4. The priority of measurement items being output are as follows: 1 Area 2 Center of gravity X 3 Center of gravity Y 4 Main axis angle 5 Edge angle 6 Center X 7 Center Y 8 Inclination 9 Intersecting point X 10 Intersecting point Y
719
Appendix O
Continuous Measurement Execution (Interrupt) (F300) (Sequence No. 462 (Hex 01CE))
This sequence carries out continuously setting the F300 and stores measurement results in the specified words. The interrupt notification method is used for the receive data. The interrupt No. is 102. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260))
Receive data storage words +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +10 +11 +12 +13 +14 +15 +16 +17 Sign 0 Sign 0 Decimal portion Integer portion Data 5 Sign 0 Decimal portion Integer portion Data 4 Sign 0 Decimal portion Integer portion Data 3 Sign 0 Decimal portion Integer portion Data 2 Number of receive data words (Undefined) (Undefined) Integer portion Window No.
Evaluation result
Offset
+0
Data
1 measurement item 2 measurement items 3 measurement items 4 measurement items 5 measurement items
+1 +2
+3 to +5 Measurement value (decimal portion) (3 digits BCD) Measurement value (integer portion) (7 digits BCD) Measurement value (sign) (1 digit)
Note 1. Exponential expressions are used for numbers larger than 9999999.999 and smaller than 999999.9. 2. The number of measurement items is up to 5, but only one window number can be read.
720
Appendix O
5. Sequences No. 452 and No. 462 (Continuous Measurement Execution with Interrupt) are not supported by the CS1W-SCU@@(-V1) and CJ1W-SCU@@(-V1) Serial Communications Units. A protocol syntax error will occur if an attempt is made to execute either sequence with a Serial Communications Unit. Do not set an EM bank as the receive storage word for interrupt notification. A protocol syntax error will occur if an EM banks is set.
Reference Object Registration Command 1 Execution (F300) (Sequence No. 463 (Hex 01CF))
This sequence performs a measurement for the input image and updates reference object data of the full window. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None.
Reference Object Registration Command 2 Execution (F300) (Sequence No. 464 (Hex 01D0))
This sequence performs a measurement for the input image and updates the reference object data of a designated window. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send +0 data +1 Number of send data words (Undefined) Window No.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
721
Appendix O
Illumination Fluctuation Follow Execution (F300) (Sequence No. 465 (Hex 01D1))
This sequence executes an illumination fluctuation follow. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None.
Measurement Execution and Positioning (F350) (Sequence No. 470 (Hex 01D6))
This sequence carries out one measurement and stores the measurement results in the specified words. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260))
Receive data storage words +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 Sign 0 Sign Sign Number of receive data words Decimal portion Integer portion Decimal portion Integer portion Decimal portion Integer portion Correlation value Y displacement X displacement
Offset
+0
Data
+1 to +2 X displacement (decimal portion) (3 digits BCD) X displacement (integer portion) (3 digits BCD) X displacement (sign) (1 digit) (.) +3 to +4 Y displacement (decimal portion) (3 digits BCD) Y displacement (integer portion) (3 digits BCD) Y displacement (sign) (1 digit) (.) +5 to +6 Correlation value (decimal portion) (3 digits BCD) Correlation value (integer portion) (3 digits BCD) Correlation value (sign) (1 digit) (.)
Note 1. The number of models that can be stored in a designated word is 1. 2. If a measurement is carried out without executing a camera designation, a measurement is executed for all cameras in which the measurement model is registered. 3. When the correlation value is less than 70 and the measurement value overflows, the following flags will be turned ON. The flags for port 1 are CIO 190914 for the Serial Communications Board and CIO
722
Appendix O
1500 + 25 x unit number +9, bit 14 for Serial Communications Units. The flags for port 2 are CIO 1919114 for the Serial Communications Board and CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number +19, bit 14 for Serial Communications Units. 4. Data to be output is within the range 999.999 (upper limit) to 999.999 (lower limit). 5. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence. 6. Turn the Abort Bit ON and then OFF to end this sequence.
Camera Designation and Positioning (F350) (Sequence No. 471 (Hex 01D7))
This sequence designates the cameras for measurement. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 +2 Number of send data words (Undefined) (Undefined)
First camera No. Last camera No.
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note 1. Set values so that the first camera No.< last camera No. 2. If a designated camera No. is abnormal, the following flags will be turned ON. The flags for port 1 are CIO 190914 for the Serial Communications Board and CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number +9, bit 14 for Serial Communications Units. The flags for port 2 are CIO 191914 for the Serial Communications Board and CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number +19, bit 14 for Serial Communications Units.
Scene Switching and Positioning (F350) (Sequence No. 472 (Hex 01D8))
This sequence switches to a designated scene No. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send data +0 +1 Number of send data words (Undefined) Scene No.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note 1. If a scene No. is abnormal, the following flags will be turned ON. The flags for port 1 are CIO 190914 for the Serial Communications Board and CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number +9, bit 14 for Serial Communications Units. The flags for port 2 are CIO 191914 for the Serial Communications Board and CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number +19, bit 14 for Serial Communications Units. 2. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
723
Appendix O
Inspection Execution and Character Inspection (F350) (Sequence No. 473 (Hex 01D9))
This sequence carries out one inspection and outputs the inspection results to a video monitor. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None.
Character String Inspection and Character Inspection (F350) (Sequence No. 474 (Hex 01DA))
This sequence changes the inspection character string of a designated inspection area No. to a designated character string. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send +0 data +1 +2 +3 Number of send data words Inspection area No. (Undefined) Number of designated character strings Designated character string
~
Designated character string
~
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3 to
Data
0004 to 000F (0004 to 0015 decimal) 0000 to 0018 (0000 to 0024 decimal) 0 to 7
724
Appendix O
Number of send data words (Undefined) Window No. or Output No. Upper limit value Lower limit value
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note Enter values so that the upper limit lower limit.
725
Appendix O
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
Offset
+0 +1 +2 to Number of send data words (4 digits Hex)
~
Contents (data format) Data
0003 to 00FA (3 to 250 decimal) 0001 to 01F0 (1 to 496 decimal) Specify ASCII data.
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note 1. The processing depends on the command. 2. For a command with a response, use sequence #495.
726
Appendix O
~
Offset
+0 +1 +2 to Number of send data words (4 digits Hex)
~
Contents (data format) Data
0003 to 00FA (3 to 250 decimal) 0001 to 01F0 (1 to 496 decimal) Specify ASCII data.
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) The reception data is stored in the reception data words without the delimiter (CR+LF),
Receive data storage words +0 +1 +2 Number of receive data words Command length Command (Undefined)
~
Offset
+0 +1 +2 to
~
Contents (data format)
Number of receive data words (4 digits Hex) Command length (4 digits Hex) Command (ASCII)
Data
0003 to 00FA (3 to 250 decimal) 0001 to 01F0 (1 to 496 decimal) ASCII data is returned.
Note 1. The processing depends on the command. 2. For a command without a response, use sequence #495.
727
Appendix O
728
Appendix P
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
The V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely the ID Controller Connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C or RS-422 cable.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol is shown below.
Sequence No. 500 (01F4) 501 (01F5) 502 (01F6) 503 (01F7) 504 (01F8) 505 (01F9) 506 (01FA) 507 (01FB) Communications sequence name Read (ASCII/1) Read (ASCII/2) Read (ASCII/4) Read (ASCII/8) Read (Hex/1) Read (Hex/2) Read (Hex/4) Read (Hex/8) Function Ladder interface Send word Receive word allocation allocation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes
508 (01FC) Auto-read (ASCII/1) 509 (01FD) Auto-read (Hex/1) 510 (01FE) 511 (01FF) Polling Auto-read (ASCII) Polling Auto-read Subcommand (ASCII/2) Polling Auto-read Subcommand (ASCII/4) Polling Auto-read Subcommand (ASCII/8) Polling Auto-read (Hex) Polling Auto-read Subcommand (Hex/2) Polling Auto-read Subcommand (Hex/4) Polling Auto-read Subcommand (Hex/8) Write (ASCII/1)
Used when the number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 1. Used when the number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 2. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 4. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 8. Used when the number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 1. Used when the number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 2. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 4. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 8. Used when the number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 1. Used when the number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 1. Used when the number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is from 1 to 8. Used when the number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 2. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 4. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 8. Used when the number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is from 1 to 8. Used when the number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 2. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 4. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 8. Used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 1.
512 (0200)
Yes
Yes
513 (0201)
Yes
Yes
514 (0202) 515 (0203) 516 (0204) 517 (0205) 518 (0206)
729
Appendix P
Ladder interface Send word Receive word allocation allocation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No
Used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 2. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 4. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 8. Used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 1. Used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 2. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 4. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 8. Used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 1. Used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 1. Used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 2. Used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 2. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 4. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 4. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 8. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 8.
Yes Yes
No No
Yes Yes
No No
534 (0216) 535 (0217) 536 (0218) 537 (0219) 538 (021A) 539 (021B) 540 (021C) 541 (021D) 542 (021E) 543 (021F)
Used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 2. Used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 2. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 4. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 4. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 8. Used when the maximum number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 8. Writes and verify the CRC code for the check blocks designated by the user. Control management Performs I/O or an I/O read. Error information read Reads information from the latest error log. Command processing Cancels command processing except polling cancel command processing and returns to the command waiting status.
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
730
Appendix P
Ladder interface Send word Receive word allocation allocation Yes Yes
545 (0221)
Yes
Yes
546 (0222)
Sends arbitrary data and stores receive data to receive data words.
Yes
Yes
Note 1. The hexadecimal equivalents of sequences numbers are given in parentheses 2. Ladder Interface Settings YES: User settings are required for the 3rd and 4th operands of PMCR(260). NO: Send word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 3rd operand (S). Receive word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 4th operand (D). 3. The Read/Write Head is abbreviated as R/W Head and the Data Carrier is abbreviated as simply Carrier in this appendix.
Connections
Connections when using the V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol are shown below. RS-232C Connections
Serial Communications Board (CS Series only) Serial Communications Unit (CS/CJ Series) PLC PS RS-232C port RS-232C ID Controller Head Data Carrier
Pin No.
1 2 3 4 5 9
Signal
GR SD RD RTS CTS SG
Shield
731
Appendix P
Shield
RS-422 Connections
Serial Communications Board (CS Series only) Serial Communications Unit (CS/CJ Series) PLC PS RS-422A/485 port ID Controller Head Data Carrier
RS-422
Up to 16 units can be connected Serial Communications Board/Unit: D-sub 9 pin (female) Signal name
RDB SDB RDA SDA
Pin No.
8 2 6 1
FG
Hood Shield
Note 1. Ground the cable shield at either the ID Controller or the Serial Communications Unit/Board to prevent malfunction. 2. Turn ON the pin 6 on DIP switch SW6 to set the host communications procedure to the 1-to-N procedure for 1-to-N connections.
732
Appendix P
Local communications mode setting Speed priority setting Distance priority setting SW7 Setting This setting is only valid if the EEPROM-type (batterylesstype) Data Carrier (DC) is accessed. The setting of SW7 does not work with the SRAM-type (battery-type) DC. SW7 must be set to OFF when the V620 is used.
Data length (bit) Baud rate (bps) 2,400 4,800 9,600 19,200 Display mode Error display mode I/O display mode 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8
Parity type E O E O N N E O
733
Appendix P
1-to-N protocol 1-to-1 protocol Note When selecting the "1-to-N" protocol, setting is limited to N=1. In this case, the FCS check code may be added. ID Controller Unit Number Setting (Valid Only for 1-to-N Protocol) Unit No. No. 0 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5 No. 6 No. 7 Note 1. Be careful not to set to the same unit number twice. 2. Set them to OFF for the 1-to-1 protocol. Synchronous condition OFF (LL level) ON (HL level) Trailing edge Leading edge
734
Appendix P
SW7 and SW8: Be sure to set to OFF. Communications Format Data length (bit) 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 1 = ON, 0 = OFF (See note 1) Note 1. Data length setting 7 bits: ASCII 8 bits: JIS8 unit code 2. Parity setting E: Even parity O: Odd parity N: No parity designation STOP bit (bit) 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 Parity type E O E O N N E O (See note 2)
1=ON, 0=OFF
DIP Switch 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW8: Receive Side Terminating Resistance Setting (Valid Only for the V600-CA2A) Connected (ID Controller send side) Not connected SW7: Receive Side Terminating Resistance Setting (Valid Only for the V600-CA2A) Connected (ID Controller receive side) Not connected SW6: Communications Protocol Setting 1-to-N protocol 1-to-1 protocol ID Controller Unit Number Setting (Valid Only for the 1-to-N Protocol) Unit No. Local Communications Mode Setting
Speed priority setting Distance priority setting
SW1 Setting This setting is only valid if the EEPROM-type (batteryless-type) Data Carrier (DC) is accessed. The setting of SW7 does not work with the SRAM-type (batterytype) DC.
SW6 Setting When selecting the 1-to-N protocol for the V600-CA1A/RS-232C interface, the setting is limited to N=1. In this case, the FCS check code may be added. Note 1. Be careful not to set to the same unit number twice. 2. Set them to OFF for the 1-to-1 protocol.
No. 0 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5 No. 6 No. 7 No. 8 No. 9 No. 10 No. 11 No. 12 No. 13 No. 14 No. 15
735
Appendix P
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1. 0000 to FFFF 01 to F4 (1 to 244 bytes)
+3 +4
~
+122 Read data
~
Offset Contents (data format)
Number of receive data words (4 digits Hex) Read data (ASCII)
Data
0002 to 007B (2 to 123 decimal) Number of read bytes stored in ASCII
+0 +1 to +122
Note Data from Data Carriers designated for ASCII is stored beginning with the smallest offset from the receive data words, as shown in the following diagram.
Data Carrier Receive data storage words +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 Example for 5 bytes +0 +1 +2
Each byte (address) in the Data Carrier contains the code for one ASCII character.
736
Appendix P
Offset
+0 +1 +(4(N1)+2) +(4(N1)+3)
Data
0006 to 000A (6 to 10 decimal) 0001 to 0002 Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the maximum Unit No. depending on the model) R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1. 0000 to FFFF 01 to 76 (1 to 118 bytes)
+(4(N1)+4) +(4(N1)+5)
N: Number of Heads
~
+59 +60 +61 Read data Not used Read data
CH 1
~
+119 Read data
~
Offset
CH 2
Data
+0 +(60(N1)+1) to +(60(N1)+59)
N: Number of Heads
Note Data from Data Carriers designated for ASCII is stored beginning with the smallest offset from the receive data words.
737
Appendix P
CH 1
CH 2
~
+14 +15 +16 +17 Unit No.
Head CH No.
~
Leading address No. Read bytes CH 4
Offset
+0 +1 +(4(N1)+2) +(4(N1)+3)
Data
0006 to 0012 (6 to 18 decimal) 0001 to 0004 Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the maximum Unit No. depending on the model) R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1. 0000 to FFFF 01 to 30 (1 to 48 bytes)
+(4(N1)+4) +(4(N1)+5)
N: Number of Heads
~
+24 +25 Read data Read data
CH 1
~
+48 Read data
~ ~
Read data
CH 2
~
+73
~
+96 Read data
CH 4
738
Appendix P
Contents (data format)
Number of receive data words (4 digits Hex) Read data (ASCII) 0002 to 0097 Number of read bytes stored in ASCII
Data
N: Number of Heads
Note Data from Data Carriers designated for ASCII is stored beginning with the smallest offset from the receive data words.
CH 1
CH 2
~
+30 +31 +32 +33 (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) Unit No.
Head CH No.
~
CH 8
Offset
+0 +1 +(4(N1)+2) +(4(N1)+3)
Data
0006 to 0022 (6 to 34 decimal) 0001 to 0008 Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the maximum Unit No. depending on the model) R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1. 0000 to FFFF 01 to 14 (1 to 20 bytes)
+(4(N1)+4) +(4(N1)+5)
N: Number of Heads
739
Appendix P
~
+10 +11 Read data Read data
CH 1
~
+20 Read data
~ ~
Read data
CH 2
~
+71
~
+80 Read data
~
Offset
CH 8
Data
+0 +(10(N1)+1) to +(10(N1)+10)
N: Number of Heads
Note Data from Data Carriers designated for ASCII is stored beginning with the smallest offset from the receive data words.
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1. 0000 to FFFF 01 to 7A (1 to 122 bytes)
+3 +4
~
+61 Read data
740
Appendix P
Contents (data format)
Number of receive data words (4 digits Hex) Read data (Hex)
Data
0002 to 003E (6 to 62 decimal) Number of read bytes stored in hexadecimal data
Note Data for Data Carriers designated for hexadecimal is stored beginning with the largest offset from the receive data words, as shown in the following diagram.
Data Carrier +0 +1 +2 Receive data storage words +0 +1
CH 1
CH 2
Offset
+0 +1 +(4(N1)+2) +(4(N1)+3)
Data
0006 to 000A (6 to 10 decimal) 0001 to 0002 Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the maximum Unit No. depending on the model) R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1. 0000 to FFFF 01 to 3C (1 to 60 bytes)
+(4(N1)+4) +(4(N1)+5)
N: Number of Heads
741
Appendix P
~
+30 +31 Read data Not used
CH 1
~
+60 +61 Not used Read data
~
+90 Read data
~
Offset
CH 2
Data
0002 to 005B (2 to 91 decimal) Number of read bytes stored in hexadecimal code
+0 +(60(N1)+1) to +(60(N1)+30)
N: Number of Heads
Note Data for Data Carriers designated for hexadecimal is stored beginning with the largest offset from the receive data words.
CH 1
CH 2
~
+14 +15 +16 +17 (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) Unit No.
Head CH No.
~
CH 4
742
Appendix P
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Number of Heads (4 digits BCD) Unit No. (2 digits BCD) R/W Head CH No. (1 digit BCD) Leading address No. (4 digits Hex) Read bytes (2 digits Hex)
Data
0006 to 0012 (6 to 18 decimal) 0001 to 0004 Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the maximum Unit No. depending on the model) R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1. 0000 to FFFF 01 to 18 (1 to 24 bytes)
+(4(N1)+4) +(4(N1)+5)
N: Number of Heads
~
+12 +13 Read data (Not used)
CH 1
~
+24 +25 (Not used) Read data
~
+36 Read data
~ ~
Read data
CH 2
~
+73
~
+84 Read data
~
Offset
CH 4
Data
0002 to 0055 (2 to 85 decimal) Number of read bytes stored in hexadecimal data
+0 +(24(N1)+1) to +(24(N1)+12)
Note Data for Data Carriers designated for hexadecimal is received beginning with the largest offset from the receive data words.
743
Appendix P
CH 1
CH 2
~
+30 +31 +32 +33 (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) Unit No.
Head CH No.
~
CH 8
Offset
+0 +1 +(4(N1)+2) +(4(N1)+3)
Data
0006 to 0022 (6 to 34 decimal) 0001 to 0008 Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the maximum Unit No. depending on the model) R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1. 0000 to FFFF 01 to 0A (1 to 10 bytes)
+(4(N1)+4) +(4(N1)+5)
N: Number of Heads
744
Appendix P
~
+5 +6 Read data Not used
CH 1
~
+10 +11 Not used Read data
~
+15 Read data
~ ~
Read data
CH 2
~
+71
~
+75 Read data
~
Offset
CH 8
Data
0002 to 004C (2 to 76 decimal) Number of read bytes stored in hexadecimal data
+0 +(10(N1)+1) to +(10(N1)+5)
N: Number of Heads
Note Data for Data Carriers designated for hexadecimal is sent beginning with the largest offset from the receive data words.
745
Appendix P
CH 1
~
+(4(N1)+2) +(4(N1)+3) +(4(N1)+4) +(4(N1)+5) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) Unit No.
Head CH No.
~
CH N * N: Number of Heads
Offset
+0 +1 +(4(N1)+2) +(4(N1)+3)
Data
0006 to 0022 (6 to 34 decimal) 0001 to 0008 Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the maximum Unit No. depending on the model) R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1. 0000 to FFFF If number of Heads is 2 or less 01 to 76 (1 to 118 bytes) If number of Heads is 4 or less 01 to 30 (1 to 48 bytes) If number of Heads is 8 or less 01 to 20 (1 to 20 bytes)
+(4(N1)+4) +(4(N1)+5)
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 510 before executing Sequence No. 511, 512, 513. 2. Execute Sequence No. 544 (Polling Auto-read Command Processing Cancel) to cancel the polling auto-read. 3. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
746
Appendix P
2. Data from Data Carriers designated for ASCII is stored beginning with the smallest offset from the receive data words. 3. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
747
Appendix P
CH 1
~
+(4(N1)+2) +(4(N1)+3) +(4(N1)+4) +(4(N1)+5) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) Unit No.
Head CH No.
~
CH N * N: Number of Heads
Offset
+0 +1 +(4(N1)+2) +(4(N1)+3) +(4(N1)+4) +(4(N1)+5)
Data
0006 to 0022 (6 to 34 decimal) 0001 to 0008 Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the maximum Unit No. depending on the model) R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 0000 to FFFF If number of Heads is 2 or less 01 to 3C (1 to 60 bytes) If number of Heads is 4 or less 01 to 18 (1 to 24 bytes) If number of Heads is 8 or less 01 to 0A (1 to 10 bytes)
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 514 before executing Sequence No. 515, 516, 517. 2. Execute Sequence No. 544 (Polling Auto-read Command Processing Cancel) to cancel the polling auto-read.
748
Appendix P
2. Data from Data Carrier designated for hexadecimal is stored beginning with the largest offset from the receive data words. 3. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
749
Appendix P
~
Max +249 Write data
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
0006 to 00FA (6 to 250 decimal) 00 to 07 (CD1D) 00 to 15 (CA2A) R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1. 0000 to FFFF 0001 to 01EA (1 to 490 decimal) Input in ASCII Up to 248 bytes (max.) can be set
+3 +4 +5to +249
Leading address No. (4 digits Hex) Number of write bytes (4 digits Hex) Write data (ASCII)
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note Write data designated for ASCII is sent beginning with the smallest offset from the send data words, as shown in the following diagram.
Receive data storage words +0 +1 +2 Example for 5 bytes +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 Data Carrier
Each byte (address) in the Data Carrier contains the code for one ASCII character.
750
Appendix P
~
+64 +65 +66 +67 +68 +69 +70 Write data (Not used) (Undefined) (Undefined) Unit No.
Head CH No.
~
+128 Write data
~
Offset Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Number of Heads (4 digits BCD) Unit No. (2 digits BCD) R/W Head CH No. (1 digit BCD) Leading address No. (4 digits Hex) Number of write bytes (4 digits Hex) Write data (ASCII)
Data
0007 to 0081 (7 to 129 decimal) 0001 to 0002 Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the maximum Unit No. depending on the model) R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1. 0000 to FFFF 0001 to 0076 (1 to 118 decimal) Input in ASCII. Up to 118 bytes (max.) can be set
+0 +1 +(64(N1)+2) +(64(N1)+3)
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note Write data designated for ASCII is sent beginning with the smallest offset from the send data words.
751
Appendix P
~
+29 +30 +31 +32 +33 +34 Write data (Undefined) (Undefined) Unit No.
Head CH No.
~
+57 Write data
~ ~
(Undefined) (Undefined) Unit No.
Head CH No.
~
+86 +87 +88 +89 +90
~
+113 Write data
Offset
+0 +1 +(28(N1)+2) +(28(N1)+3)
Data
0007 to 0072 (7 to 114 decimal) 0001 to 0004 Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the maximum Unit No. depending on the model) R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1. 0000 to FFFF 0001 to 0030 (1 to 48 decimal) Input in ASCII. Up to 48 bytes (max.) can be set
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note Write designated for ASCII is sent beginning with the smallest offset from the send data words.
752
Appendix P
~
+15 +16 +17 +18 +19 +20 Write data (Undefined) (Undefined) Unit No.
Head CH No.
~
+29 Write data
~ ~
(Undefined) (Undefined) Unit No.
Head CH No.
~
+100 +101 +102 +103 +104
~
+113 Write data
~
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words(4 digits Hex) Number of Heads (4 digits BCD) Unit No. (2 digits BCD) R/W Head CH No. (1 digit BCD) Leading address No. (4 digits Hex) Number of write bytes (4 digits Hex) Write data (ASCII)
Offset
+0 +1 +(14(N1)+2) +(14(N1)+3)
Data
0007 to 0072 (7 to 114 decimal) 0001 to 0008 Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the maximum Unit No. depending on the model) R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1. 0000 to FFFF 0001 to 0014 (1 to 20 decimal) Input in ASCII Up to 20 bytes (max.) can be set
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note Write data designated for ASCII is sent beginning with the smallest offset from the send data words.
753
Appendix P
~
Max +35 (Undefined) Write data
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
0006 to 0024 (6 to 36 decimal) 00 to 07 (CD1D) 00 to 15 (CA2A) R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1. 0000 to FFFF 0002 to 007A (2 to 122 decimal) Input in hexadecimal Up to 122 digits (max.)
+3 +4
Leading address No. (4 digits Hex) Number of write digits (4 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note 1. Data of which Data Carrier designated for hexadecimal is sent beginning with the largest offset from the send data words, as shown in the following diagram. 2. Always set an even number of digits for the write data.
Data Carrier Receive data storage words +0 +1 Example for 6 bytes +0 +1 +2 Each byte (address) in the Data Carrier contains 2 digits.
754
Appendix P
~
+19 +20 Write data (Not used)
~
+65 +66 +67 +68 +69 +70 (Not used) (Undefined) (Undefined) Unit No.
Head CH No.
~
+83 Write data
~
Offset Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Number of Heads (4 digits Hex) Unit No. (2 digits BCD) R/W Head CH No. (1 digit BCD) Leading address No. (4 digits Hex) Number of write digits (4 digits Hex) Write data (Hex)
Data
0007 to 0054 (7 to 84 decimal) 0002 to 0002 Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the maximum Unit No. depending on the model) R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1. 0000 to FFFF 0002 to 0038 (2 to 56 decimal) Input in hexadecimal Up to 56 digits (max.) can be set
+0 +1 +(64(N1)+2) +(64(N1)+3)
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) None. Note 1. Write data designated for hexadecimal is sent beginning with the largest offset from the send data words. 2. Always set an even number of digits for the write data.
755
Appendix P
~
+11 +12 Write data Not used
~
+29 +30 +31 +32 +33 +34 Not used (Undefined) (Undefined) Unit No.
Head CH No.
~
+39 Write data
~ ~
(Undefined) (Undefined) Unit No.
Head CH No.
~
+86 +87 +88 +89 +90
~
+95 Write data
~
Offset Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Number of Heads (4 digits Hex) Unit No. (2 digits BCD) R/W Head CH No. (1 digit BCD) Leading address No. (4 digits Hex) Number of write digits (4 digits Hex) Write data (Hex)
Data
0007 to 0060 (7 to 96 decimal) 0001 to 0004 Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the maximum Unit No. depending on the model) R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1. 0000 to FFFF 0002 to 0018 (2 to 24 decimal) Input in hexadecimal code Up to 24 digits (max.) can be set
+0 +1 +(28(N1)+2) +(28(N1)+3)
N: Number of Heads
756
Appendix P
Note 1. Write data designated for hexadecimal is sent beginning with the largest offset from the send data words. 2. Always set an even number of digits for the write data.
~
+8 +9 (Undefined) Not used Write data
~
+15 +16 +17 +18 +19 +20 Not used (Undefined) (Undefined) Unit No.
Head CH No.
~
+22 (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) Write data
~ ~
Unit No.
Head CH No.
~
+100 +101 +102 +103 +104
~
+106 (Undefined) Write data
~
Data
0007 to 006B (7 to 107 decimal) 0001 to 0004 Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the maximum Unit No. depending on the model) R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1. 0000 to FFFF 0002 to 000A (2 to 10 decimal) Input in hexadecimal code Up to 10 digits (max.) can be set
Offset
+0 +1 +(14(N1)+2) +(14(N1)+3)
N: Number of Heads
757
Appendix P
Note 1. Write data designated for hexadecimal is sent beginning with the largest offset from the send data words. 2. Always set an even number of digits for the write data.
758
Appendix P
759
Appendix P
760
Appendix P
Unit No.
Head CH No.
(Undefined)
Number of check block bytes
761
Appendix P
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Unit No. (2 digits BCD) R/W Head CH No. (1 digit BCD) Processing designation (2 digits Hex) Leading address of check object (4 digits Hex) 0006 (fixed) 00 to 07 (CD1D) 00 to 15 (CA2A) R/W Head CH 1 designation:1 R/W Head CH 2 designation:2 The CD1D must be set to 1. Verification: 43 (C) Calculation: 4B (K) Management of number of write times: 4C (L) 0000 to FFFF (If management of number of write times is designated, H @@@0 to H @@@5 or H @@@8 to H @@@D)
Data
+3
+4
+5
Number of check block bytes If verification, calculation is designated: (2 digits Hex) 03 to FF (set 00 for 256 bytes) If management of number of write times is designated: 00 to FF
Offset
+0 +1
Data
(Verification, calculation designation) 00: Normal completion for calculation processing 75: Data in normal condition for verification processing 76: Error Data alarm for verification processing (If management of number of write times is designated) 75: Number of write times is under those which is specified 76: alarm for number of write times is over those which is specified.
Note If L (management of number of write times) is designated by processing designation, management of number of write times for Data Carrier of EEPROM is performed.
Offset
+0 +1 +2
Data
762
Appendix P
Offset
+0 +1 Leftmost 1 byte
Data
Note 1. The V600/620-CA@A does not support this command. 2. This sequence executes the equivalent of the CONTROL command.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
~
+75 Error log
~
Offset Contents (data format)
Number of receive data words (4 digits Hex) Error log (ASCII)
Data
0004 to 004C (4 to 76 decimal) One item of data is stored with 5 characters of generated command, generated Head No., generated error code.
+0 +1 to +75
Note 1. The V600/620-CA@A does not support this command. 2. Up to 30 error records can be stored. 3. The most resent error records are stored first.
763
Appendix P
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Unit No. (2 digits BCD) 0002 (fixed) Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the maximum Unit No. depending on the model)
Data
Offset
+0 +1
Data
00: Normal termination 14: Auto or communications command processing not executed 75: Cancelled before the end of expansion command receive or before sync input went active or before detection of the existence of Data Carrier 76: Cancelled during read/write processing for Data Carrier
Polling Auto-read Command Processing Cancel (Sequence No. 544 (Hex 0220))
This sequence cancels polling auto-read processing. Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send +0 data +1 +2 +3 Number of send data words (Undefined) (Not used) (Undefined)
Head channel No.
Unit No.
Offset
+0 +1 +2 +3
Data
Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the maximum Unit No. depending on the model) R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1 R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2 The CD1D must be set to 1.
Offset
+0 +1
Data
75: Cancelled before communications processing with Data Carrier 76: Cancelled after communications processing with Data Carrier
764
Appendix P
Polling Auto-write Command Processing Cancel (Sequence No. 545 (Hex 0221))
This sequence cancels polling auto-write processing Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260)) The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 544 (Polling Auto-read Command Processing Cancel) Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260)) The receive data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 544 (Polling Auto-read Command Processing Cancel)
~
+249 Send data
~
Contents (data format)
Number of send data words (4 digits Hex) Send data byte length (4 digits Hex) Send data (ASCII)
Offset
+0 +1
Data
0003 to 00FA (3 to 250 decimal) 0001 to 01F0 (1 to 496 decimal) The number of bytes in the send data except for @, the FCS, and the terminator. Input send data up to 496 characters (max.) in ASCII
+2 to +249
~
+249 Receive data
~
Contents (data format)
Number of receive data words (4 digits Hex) Receive data (ASCII)
Offset
+0 +1 to +249
Data
0002 to 00FA (2 to 250 decimal) Receive data is stored in ASCII. Up to 498 characters (max.)
765
Appendix P
766
Appendix Q
Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol
The Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely a Hayes modem connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C cable.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol is shown below.
Sequence No. 550 (0226) Communications sequence name Initialize modem (general-purpose) Function Ladder interface Send word Receive word allocation allocation Yes No
560 (0230) 570 (023A) 580 (0244) 561 (0231) 571 (023B) 581 (0245)
Initializes the modem connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board. The initialization command is set in the words specified for the second operand of PMCR(260). Initializes certain OMRON Modems.
No
No
552 (0228)
Password
553 (0229)
554 (022A)
Escape
555 (022B) 562 (0232) 572 (023C) 582 (0246) 590 (024E)
Dials from the modem connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board. AT commands and telephone numbers are set set in the words specified for the 3rd operand of PMCR(260). This sequence can be used only for certain OMRON modems. After the line is connected, the password sent from the other exchange is verified to confirm that the line is connected to the desired exchange. The normal value of a password is set in the words specified for the 3rd operand of PMCR(260). Sends arbitrary data to the exchange which the line is connected. Send data is set in the words specified for the 2nd operand of PMCR(260). Receive data is stored in the words specified for the fourth operand of PMCR(260). Shifts the modem to escape mode (the condition in which command input is available during data communications). The escape code is fixed to +++ After shifting to escape mode, the line is disconnected. Executes continuously from initialization to dialling operations for certain OMRON Modems. Executes continuously from shifting to the escape mode to hanging up.
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No Yes*1
No No
Escape to hang up
No
No
Note 1. Refer to sequences No. 561, No. 571, and No. 581 for dialing operations. 2. Ladder Interface Settings YES: User settings are required for the 3rd and 4th operands of PMCR(260). NO: Send word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 3rd operand (S). Receive word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 4th operand (D). 3. The hexadecimal equivalents of sequences numbers are given in parentheses.
767
Appendix Q
Connections
The connections when using the Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol is shown below. RS-232C Connection
Serial Communications Board (CS Series only) Serial Communications Unit (CS/CJ Series)
Modem
Telephone line
Modem
1 6
ST2 RT
DTR CI ST1
Compatible Modems
Although most of the sequences in this protocol can be used regardless of modem, the sequences Initialize Modem (specialized) and Dial sequences can be used only for the following Modems: MD24FB10V (OMRON Modem) MD144FB5V (OMRON Intelligent Modem) ME1414BIII, ME2814BII (OMRON FAX/DATA Modem) For other modems, create a modem initialization sequence using the general-purpose Initialize Modem sequence and dial using the Data Communications Sequence (Sequence No. 553).
768
Appendix Q
Modem Settings
When this protocol is used, it is required that the modem connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board be initialized to the following conditions:
Command echo Result code display format Speed display, busy/dialling tone detection at connection Error correction data compression display MNP setting MNP class setting V.42 compression, Error correction Flow control between terminal modems ER signal control Escape code No Numeric format Baud rate display enabled, busy and dialling tone detection enabled. Error correction/data compression display enabled Error correction provided (auto-reliable mode) MNP class 4 Not enabled Not enabled Always ON +
Note 1. It is recommended that, in addition to the above settings, the abort timer should be set so that communications are cut off if a communications error happened due to incidents such as cable disconnection between the Serial Communications Unit/Board and modem. The abort timer is set to 10 minutes for the modem initialization (specialized) (Sequences No. 560, No. 570, No. 580: Initialize Modem (Specialized)). Refer to modems manual for further information about abort timers. 2. The data format of the modem (baud rate, data length, parity, stop bit) is set by AT commands issued from a device connected to the modem. Its settings should conform to communications conditions of the device which issues AT commands. Therefore when communications are made between the modem and Serial Communications Unit/Board, it is required that communications conditions should be set by issuing AT commands from the Serial Communications Unit/Board. 3. Modem settings become invalid if the power supply is turned off and must be set again. However, a memory backup function can be used to protect settings so that even after the power supply to the modem is turned off, it can communicate with the previous setting conditions. For Initialize Modem (specialized), the modem initialization command is built in as message data. However, for Initialize Modem (general-purpose), the command must be specified in the send data for PMCR(260).
OPR 1 OPR 2 OPR 3 OPR 4
S+0 S+1 S+2 : S+n
(Communications port settings) #0226 (Sequence No. 550) Address for first word containing initialization command character string S None (Set #0000)
Number of words from address set for operand 2 to end of data Number of bytes for send data (initialization command) Send data (initialization command) (Fill data to left for odd numbers of bytes) 4 digits Hex 4 digits Hex ASCII
Setting Example for Modem Initialization Command MD24FB10V Using Sequence #550 (OMRON) The following command is set in the words specified by the 3rd operand of PMCR(260). ATE0V0X4\V2\N3%C0*C0\X1&M0S26=10
0012 0020 A T E 0 V 0 X 4 \ V 2 \ N 3 %C 0 * C 0 \ X 1 & M 0 S 2 6 = 1 0 Character string length of modem initialization command (bytes) Code length of PMCR(260) when it is used (words)
Note Turn ON pin 4 of DIP switches SW3 on for this Modem (ER signal always ON).
769
Appendix Q
ME1414BIII/ME2814BII (OMRON) The following command is set in the words specified by the second operand of PMCR(260). AT\J1B8E0V0S0=1X4\V2\N3&M0%C0&D0&E0\X1S26=10
0018 002C A T \ J 1 B 8 E 0 V 0 S 0 = 1 X 4 \ V 2 \ N 3 & M 0 %C 0 & D 0 & E 0 \ X 1 S 2 6 = 1 0 Character string length of modem initialization command (bytes) Code length of PMCR(260) when it is used (words)
Dialling (Sequences No. 561 (Hex 0231), No. 571 (Hex 023B), and No. 581 (Hex 0245))
To dial a telephone numbers for the OMRON ME1414BIII/ME2814BII Modems using sequences No. 561, 571, 581, set the dialling command and telephone number in the words specified by the 3rd operand of PMCR(260). However, for other Modems, make the following settings for the Data Communications sequence. This is an example of telephone number settings for the above mentioned 4 OMRON Modems. Operand and Send Data Word Settings of PMCR(260)
OPR 2 MD24FB10V #0231 MD144FB5V #023B ME1414BIII/ME2814BII #0245 First address S of send data (dialling operation) None (Set #0000)
Number of words from address set for operand 2 to end of data 4 digits Hex Number of bytes of send data (dialling operation) Send data (dialling operation) (Fill data to left for odd numbers of bytes) 4 digits Hex ASCII
OPR 3 OPR 4
S+0 S+1 S+2 : S+n
Character string length of dialling operation sent to modem (bytes) Code length of PMCR(260) when it is used (words)
Note 1. This example uses a tone line. Change ATDT to ATDP for pulse lines. 2. Fill the telephone number to the left in the words if the character string length of the dialling operation is an odd number of bytes.
770
Appendix Q
Character string length of dialling operation sent to modem (bytes) Code length of PMCR(260) when it is used (words)
#0228 Address of first word where the password is set S None (Set #0000)
Number of words from address set for operand 3 to end of data 4 digits Hex Number of bytes of comparison data (normal value of password) Comparison value (password normal value) (Fill data to left for odd numbers of bytes) 4 digits Hex ASCII
Character string length of password sent to modem (bytes) Code length of PMCR(260) when it is used (words)
771
Appendix Q
Verifying password
Verification result
When Protocol Macro Execution Flag turns ON: Port 1: CIO 190915 for the Serial Communications Board and CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number +9, bit 15 for Serial Communications Units. Port 2: CIO 191915 for the Serial Communications Board and CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number +19, bit 15 for Serial Communications Units.
Terminating process
772
Appendix Q
Character string length of send data sent to modem (bytes) Code length of PMCR(260) when it is used (words)
A maximum of 200 bytes (including the CR) can be received. When the received data is RETURN OK, the content stored in the receive words is as follows:
0006 5245 RE 5455 TU 524E RN 204F O 4B00 K
Note An error will occur is the reception data is not received within 90 seconds after the data is sent.
Communication Errors
Three result codes are monitored after an AT command is sent to the modem. When a result code is returned, it will be checked. If the code is not the normal result code (OK, CONNECT 9600/REL4, CONNECT 2400/ REL4, in words), after a fixed time of waiting to send, the following retry processing will be repeated 2 times to send the AT command again and waiting for another result code. The receive monitoring time and send wait time for each sequence are shown below.
Sequence No. 550 (0226) 560 (0230) 570 (023A) 580 (0244) 561 (0231) 571 (023B) 581 (0245) 552 (0228) 553 (0229) 554 (022A) 555 (022B) 562 (0232) 572 (023C) 582 (0246) 590 (024E) Sequence name Initialize modem (general-purpose) Initialize modem (specialized) Receive monitoring time 10 s 10 s Send wait time for retries 1s 1s
Dial
90 s
90 s
None 90 s 10 s 10 s 90s
3s None 1.5 s (after first try) 1.5 s (after first try) Initializing: 1 s Dialling: 90 s 1.5 s (after first try)
10 s
773
Appendix Q
774
Appendix R
Changing Communications Port Settings Using STUP(237)
The STUP(237) instruction can be used to change the serial communications mode, communications specifications, and other settings for each port of the Serial Communications Board/Unit during CPU Unit operation.
Set the following items. Serial Port Number Set the serial port number (physical port number) of the Serial Communications Board or Unit to which the remote node is connected. PORT1: 1 (hex)/PORT2: 2 (hex) Remote Unit Address Specify the unit address of the Serial Communications Board/Unit for which the serial port is to be changed. Serial Communications Board: E1 (hex) Serial Communications Unit: Unit number + 10 (hex) Setting: 10 to 1F (hex) Note The CPU Bus Unit number (0 to F) is set using the rotary switch on the front panel of the Unit. First Word of Port Settings (S) Set the address of the first word containing the serial port settings. The data is stored starting from word S in the say way as the port settings in the 10-word area allocated in the DM Area for each port. For details on the Setup Area, see 2-3 I/O Memory Allocations or 4-2, 5-2, 6-2, and 7-2 Setup Area Allocations.
15 S S+1 S+9 Serial port system setting 10 words per port 00
When the STUP(237) instruction is executed, the CPU Unit changes the contents of the relevant DM Area in the Unit, then automatically turns ON the Port Settings Change Bit (words A620 to A635) in the Auxiliary Area. A620 + unit number Port 1 Port Settings Change Bit: Bit 1 Port 2 Port Settings Change Bit: Bit 2
775
Appendix R
When the cyclic service finishes changing the communications port settings in the Serial Communications Board or Unit, the Board or Unit automatically restarts the port and turns OFF the Port Settings Change Bit.
Data Contents
Area CIO Area Work Area Holding Area Auxiliary Area Timer Area Counter Area Data Memory (DM) Area C 0000 to 6143 W000 to W511 H000 to H511 A000 to A959 T0000 to T4095 C0000 to C4095 D00000 to D32767 0000 to 6134 W000 to W502 H000 to H502 A000 to A950 T0000 to T4086 C0000 to C4086 D00000 to D32758 S
Extended Data Memory (EM) Area E00000 to D32767 E00000 to E32758 Extended Data Memory (EM) Area En_00000 to En_32767 (n = 0 to 18) En_00000 to En_32758 (n = 0 to 18) (including bank specification) Indirect DM/EM address, Binary @D00000 to @D32767, @E00000 to @E32767, @En_00000 to @En_32767 Indirect DM/EM address, BCD Constants Data Registers Index Registers, Direct Index Registers, Indirect *D00000 to *D32767, *E00000 to *E32767, *En_00000 to *En_32767 See Control Data (C). DR0 to DR15 --,IR0 to ,IR15 2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to 2048 to +2047,IR15 DR0 to DR15 ,IR0 to IR15 ,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++) ,( )IR0 to ,( )IR15 #0000 to FFFF (Binary data) ---
Ladder Program
000000 @STUP #02E1 D00200
776
Appendix R
Settings
S: S+1: S+2: S+3: : S+9: D00200 D00201 D00202 D00203 0500 0000 0000 0000 Port setting: Defaults Protocol mode: 1 hex (Host Link) Baud rate: Default (9,600 bps) Transmission delay time: 0 ms CTS control: None Unit number: 00
Transmit D32010 D32011 D32012 D32013 D32019 0500 0000 0000 0000 Settings for port 2 of Serial Communications Board (D32010 to D32019)
Note The STUP instruction transfers 10 words from the Setup Area allocated in the DM Area. When using the Modbus-RTU Slave Mode or No-protocol Mode is used, the Setup Area is expanded and the expanded data is held. (See note.) Before executing the STUP instruction, use MOV or other instructions to write the expanded parameter settings directly to the DM Area Setup Area for the Serial Communications Board/Unit. Doing so will allow STUP to transfer all of the expanded DM Area Setup Area to the Serial Communications Board/Unit. Note For example, these settings include the coils allocation area for Modbus-RTU Slave Mode and the reception buffer clear setting for the DRXDU(261) instruction in No-protocol Mode.
Setup Area 2) Execute STUP(237). Port 1 Settings Port 1 setting data Port 2 Settings Serial Communications Board/Unit Port 1 expansion settings
777
Appendix R
778
Index Numerics
1 1 NT Link, 4, 6 1 N NT Link, 3, 5, 10, 13 Auxiliary Area allocations, 296 CIO Area allocations, 297 commands, 292 connecting Programmable Terminals, 129 connection example, 54 CPU Bus Unit Area allocations, 297 errors, 374 executing communications, 63 Inner Board CIO Area allocations, 297 Inner Board error information, 279, 296 overview, 292 Setup Area allocations, 295 Status Area allocations, 298 2-wire and 4-wire connections, transmission circuits, 109 2-wire or 4-wire switch, 72 3Z4L Laser Micrometer, 166 connections, 676 protocols, sequences, 673, 707
C
C200H Communications Boards, 41, 159, 325 C200H Host Link Units, 41 C200HX/HG/HE Communications Board changes in communications specifications, 159, 325 cables preparation, 136 CIO Area, 88 allocations, 50 1 N NT Link, 297 Host Link, 149, 308 loopback test, 343 protocol macro, 181 Serial Communications Boards, 88, 280 Serial Communications Units, 88 CPU Bus Unit Area allocations 1 N NT Link, 297 Host Link, 150, 308 protocol macro, 182 Inner Board Area allocations 1 N NT Link, 297 Host Link, 149, 308 protocol macro, 181 Status Area allocations 1 N NT Link, 298 Host Link, 150, 308 protocol macro, 185 cleaning, 393 CMND(490) instruction, 11, 144 C-mode commands, 11 commands CONTROLLER DATA READ 05 01, 390 ERROR LOG CLEAR 21 023, 392 ERROR LOG READ 21 02, 391 communications distance Host Link, 31 protocol macro, 32 communications modes, 1 communications modes. See 1 N NT Link Host Link Loopback Test protocol macro serial communications modes Communications Port Completion Codes, 154, 200, 320 Communications Port Enabled Flags, 153, 200, 319 Communications Port Error Flags, 153, 200, 320 Communications Sequence No., 190, 193 communications sequences, 196 communications timing, 152, 318 commands addressed to host computer, 154, 321 comparison
A
Abort Flag, 190, 192 Abort Switch, 208 Access Error Flag, 198 Auxiliary Area allocations 1 N NT Link, 296 Host Link, 148, 307 protocol macro, 180 bits, 94
B
B500-AL001-E Link Adapter, 134 Backplanes applicable Backplanes, 28 Bar Code Readers, 13 baud rate Host Link, 31 protocol macro, 32 Board/Unit Watchdog Timer Error Flags, 181
779
Index
previous products, 41, 159, 325 CompoWay/F Master command and response formats, 404 communications specifications, 404 connections, 418 message frames, 410 protocols, 408 sequences, 403, 408 transmission procedure, 404 CompoWay/F protocol, 166 connectors connector hoods, 139 cover dimensions, 108 pin layout RS-232C ports, 106 RS-422A/485 ports, 106 wiring, 136 CONTROLLER DATA READ 05 01, 390 CPU Bus Unit Area allocations, 88, 280 1 N NT Link, 297 Host Link, 150, 308 protocol macro, 182 CPU Bus Unit DM Area, 27, 29, 30 CPU Units supporting CPU Units, 27, 29, 30 CS1 CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits, 59 CS1 CPU Bus Units, 4 CS1 Expansion Racks, 4 CS1W-SCB21 Serial Communications Board, 3 specifications, 27 CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communication Board, 3 specifications, 27 CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit, 4 specifications, 27, 29 C-series Host Link Units changes in communications specifications, 157, 324 C-series Units changes in communications specifications, 159, 325 CTS control, 147 current consumption, 28, 30 CVM1 Units changes in communications specifications, 158, 159, 324, 325 CV-series Units changes in communications specifications, 158, 159, 324, 325 CX-Protocol, 13, 54
D
dimensions Serial Communications Boards, 72 Serial Communications Units, 74, 77 DM Area allocations, 50 Serial Communications Boards, 82 Serial Communications Units, 83
E
E5_J Temperature Controller, 166 connections, 584 protocols sequences, 583, 597 E5_K Digital Controller, 166 connections read, 506 write, 506 read protocols sequences, 505, 523, 525, 540 E5ZE Temperature Controller, 166 connections read, 542 write, 542 read protocols sequences, 541, 562 write protocols sequences, 563, 581 EC Directives, xxiii, xxiv EMC Directives, xxiii EMI measures, xxiv, xxv error check codes Host Link, 31 error codes, 190, 195, 387 troubleshooting, 389 Error Flag, 198 error log specifications, 386 table configuration, 387 EEPROM, 386 RAM, 386 reading and clearing, 390 ERROR LOG CLEAR 21 023, 392 ERROR LOG READ 21 02, 391 error responses, 156, 323 errors
780
Index
1 N NT Link, 374 framing error, 189 Host Link, 350 overrun error, 189 parity error, 189 protocol macro, 376 troubleshooting, 350 ES100 Digital Controller connections, 600 ES100_ Digital Controller, 166 protocols sequences, 599, 637 Executed Reception Case No. (code), 191, 194 Executed Reception Case No. Flag, 191, 194 Executed Step No. (code), 191, 194 Executed Step No. Flag, 191, 194 external dimensions connector cover, 108 connections, 111 reception buffers, 156, 323 Setup Area allocations, 146, 305 system configuration, 19 unit numbers, 148, 306 Host Link Units changes in communications specifications, 159, 325
I
I/O memory allocations, 82 I/O tables, 54 indicators CPU Unit, 68 error displays Serial Communications Boards, 346 Serial Communications Units, 348 loopback test, 341 Serial Communications Boards, 68 Serial Communications Units, 73, 75 Inner Board CIO Area allocations, 297 1 N NT Link, 297 Host Link, 149, 308 protocol macro, 181 Inner Board DM Area, 27 Inner Board Restart Bit, 59 Inner Boards, 10 error information, 95 1 N NT Link, 279, 296 Host Link, 149, 307 protocol macro, 180 Inner Bus Error Flag, 181 inspection, 393 installation Serial Communications Boards, 50, 100 Serial Communications Units, 51, 52, 101, 103 Intelligent Signal Processors, 13
F
F200/F300/F350 Visual Inspection Unit, 166 ferrite cores, xxv FINS commands, 11 framing errors, 189
H
Hayes Modem AT Command, 166 compatible modems, 768 connections, 768 protocols sequences, 767, 773 heat-shrinking tubes, 138 Host Link, 3, 5, 10, 11 Auxiliary Area allocations, 148, 307 CIO Area allocations, 149, 308 commands, 11 communications timing, 152, 318 connection example, 53 CPU Bus Unit Area allocations, 150, 308 error responses, 156, 323 errors, 350 executing communications, 59 host-initiated communications, 144, 302 Inner Board CIO Area allocations, 149, 308 Inner Board error information, 149, 307 PLC-initiated communications, 144 ports, 105
K
K3T_ Intelligent Signal Processor, 166 connections, 641 protocols sequences, 639, 660
L
ladder programs
781
Index
protocol macro, 201 Link Adapters, 106, 110, 112, 121, 134, 135 loopback test, 3, 6, 10, 14 CIO Area allocations, 343 connections, 340 executing, 340 indicators, 341 port connections, 132 procedure, 340 protocol status, 93 Setup Area allocations, 342 Low Voltage Directive, xxiii Port Settings Change Bits, 59, 181 1 N NT Link, 296 Host Link, 148, 307 protocol macro, 180 Serial Communications Boards, 94 Serial Communications Units, 96 Port Settings Changing Flag, 27 precautions applications, xx general, xvii installation, xx installing Serial Communications Boards, 101 installing Serial Communications Units, 104 noise reduction, 109 operating environment, xix replacement, 394 safety, xviii system configuration, 101 wiring, xx, 105 previous products comparison, 41, 159, 325 Programmable Terminals, 4 1 N NT Link connections, 129 RS-232C port connections, 116 Programming Console, 4 Programming Devices, 4 CX-Programmer, 54 Programming Console, 54 protocol macro, 3, 5, 10, 13 applications, 196 Auxiliary Area allocations, 180 CIO Area allocations, 181 CPU Bus Unit Area allocations, 182 errors, 376 executing communications, 60 functions, 166 Inner Board CIO Area allocations, 181 Inner Board error information, 180 ladder programs, 201 ports, 105 protocol status, 92 Setup Area allocations, 174 Software Switches, 182 specifications, 32 standard system protocols, 166 Status Area allocations, 185 system configuration, 23 time lag, 176 Protocol Macro Error Code, 193 Protocol Macro Executing Flag, 190, 192
M
maintenance cleaning, 393 inspection, 393 modem compatibility, 768 settings, 769 mounting height, 108
N
noise reduction, 109 NT Link ports, 105 protocol status, 92 NT Link commands, 13 NT-AL001-E Link Adapter, 22 DIP switch settings, 110
O
operating environment precautions, xix overrun errors, 189
P
parameters sequence, 169 step, 170 parity errors, 189 PMCR(260) instruction, 13, 410 operand settings, 203 specifications, 196
782
Index
Protocol Macro Execution Error Flag, 181 protocol specifications, 31 protocol status loopback test, 93 NT Link, 92 protocol macro, 92, 190 protocols, 400 3Z4L Laser Micrometer sequences, 673, 707 CompoWay/F sequences, 403 creating, 167 E5_J Temperature Controller sequences, 583, 597 E5_K Digital Controller read sequences, 505, 540 E5ZE Temperature Controller read sequences, 541, 562 E5ZE Temperature Controller write sequences, 563, 581 ES100_ Digital Controller sequences, 599, 637 Hayes Modem AT Command sequences, 767, 773 K3T_ Intelligent Signal Processor sequences, 639 Protocol Support Software list, 400 structure, 168 V500/V520 Bar Code Reader sequences, 661, 671 V600/V620 ID Controller sequences, 729, 765 Visual Inspection System sequences, 709, 727 PT Communications Execution Flag, 299 PT Priority Registered Flag, 299 PTs. See Programmable Terminals, 1 Serial Communications Units, 97 RS-232C connections, 418 RS-232C ports 1 1 connections, 121 1 N connections, 123 changes from previous products, 157, 323 connector pin layout, 70, 106 direct connections 1 N NT Link, 129 Programmable Terminals, 116 host computer connections, 112 Programmable Terminal connections, 116 specifications, 69 wiring, 132 RS-422 connections, 419 RS-422A/485 ports 1 1 connections, 124 1 N connections, 126 changes from previous products, 159, 325 connector pin layout, 71, 106 host computer connections, 114 Programmable Terminal connections, 116 specifications, 71 wiring, 133 RS-485 connections, 419
S
send delay, 147 SEND(090) instruction, 11, 59, 60, 144 Sequence Abort Completion Flag, 190, 192 Sequence End Completion Flag, 190, 192 sequence parameters, 169 Sequence Wait Flag, 190, 193 sequences CompoWay/F Master Broadcast with ASCII Conversion, No Response, 414 Broadcast with No Conversion and No Response, 415 General-purpose Broadcast with No Conversion and No Response, 417 General-purpose Send with No Conversion and with Response, 416 Send with ASCII Conversion, with Response, 411 Send with No Conversion and with Response, 414 sequences, 3Z4L Laser Micrometer 3Z4L Clear, 681 3Z4L Initialize (3000-series), 698 3Z4L Initialize (4000-series), 705 All Statistic Memory Clear (3000-series), 692 Automatic Detection List Request (3000-series), 698
R
reception buffers, 156, 189, 323 reception case number, 191 reception matrixes, 169 RECV(098) instruction, 11, 59, 60, 144 Repeat Counter Setting Value, 191, 195 Reset Counter Present Value, 191, 195 Restart Bit Serial Communications Boards, 95
783
Index
Automatic Detection Release (3000-series), 697 Automatic Detection Set (3000-series), 697 AVG Move (H) Times Set (3000-series), 696 AVG Move (L) Times Set (3000-series), 696 AVG Move Interval Set (3000-series), 696 Calibration Release, 682 Calibration Set, 682 Continuous Measurement Start (Interrupt) (3000-series), 691 Continuous Measurement Start (Interrupt) (4000-series), 703 Continuous Measurement Start (Scan) (3000-series), 691 Continuous Measurement Start (Scan) (4000-series), 703 Continuous Measurement Termination (4000-series), 704 Data Request (3000-series), 692 Data Request (4000-series), 704 Deflection Measurement Start (4000-series), 703 E Unit Set, 681 Forced Negative Zero (4000-series), 705 Forced Positive Zero (4000-series), 704 Forced Zero Release (4000-series), 705 Genera- purpose Command 2 (4000-series), 706 Genera-purpose Command 1 (4000-series), 705 Measurement Condition List Request (3000-series), 687 Measurement Condition List Request (4000-series), 701 Measurement Condition Release (3000-series), 687 Measurement Condition Release (4000-series), 701 Measurement Condition Set (3000-series), 683 Measurement Condition Set (4000-series), 699 Measurement Termination (3000-series), 691 Memory Switch Set, 681 Memory Switch Set 1 (3000-series), 694 Memory Switch Set 2 (3000-series), 695 mm Unit Set, 681 Program Number Set (3000-series), 683 Settings, 676 Simple AVG Times Set (3000-series), 695 Single Run Measurement Start (3000-series), 690 Single Run Measurement Start (4000-series), 702 Statistic Processing Calculation Non-execution (3000-series), 692 Statistic Processing Execution (3000-series), 692 Statistic Processing Memory Clear (3000-series), 692 Statistic Result Request (3000-series), 693 Zero Run Measurement Start (3000-series), 690 sequences, E5_J Temperature Controller General-purpose Read, 596 General-purpose Write, 596 Read Heater Current, 595 Read Initial Status, 595 Read Input Shift Value, 593 Read Output Value, 594 Read Parameters 1, 591 Read Parameters 2, 592 Read Process Value, 594 Read Set Point Limit, 594 Save Set Point, 588 Select Backup Mode, 587 Select Local Mode, 587 Select RAM Write Mode, 587 Select Remote Mode, 586 Write Input Shift Value, 590 Write Parameters 1, 588 Write Parameters 2, 589 sequences, E5_K Digital Controller Execute/Cancel AT, 539 General-purpose Write, 537 Genera-purpose Read, 523 Read Alarm Hysteresis, 515 Read Alarm Value, 509 Read Control Period, 512 Read Cooling Coefficient, 510 Read Dead Band, 511 Read Hysteresis, 512 Read Input Digital Filter, 515 Read Input Shift Limits, 516 Read LBA Detection Time, 513 Read Level 0 Parameters, 516 Read Level 1 Parameters 1, 517 Read Level 1 Parameters 2, 518 Read Level 2 Parameters 1, 520 Read Level 2 Parameters 2, 521 Read Manual Reset Value, 511 Read MV, 508 Read MV at Stop Time and at PV Error, 514 Read MV Limits, 514 Read Process Value, 508 Read Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative Time, 510 Read Set Point, 509 Read Set Point during SP Ramp, 508 Read SP Ramp Time Unit and Set Value, 513 Remote/Local, 538 Run/Stop, 538 Software Reset, 540 Switch to Level 0 (Software Reset), 537 Switch to Level 1, 540 Write Alarm Hysteresis, 531 Write Alarm Value, 526 Write Control Period, 528 Write Cooling Coefficient, 527 Write Dead Band, 527 Write Hysteresis, 528 Write Input Digital Filter, 531
784
Index
Write Input Shift Value, 531 Write LBA Detection Time, 529 Write Level 0 Parameters, 532 Write Level 1 Parameter 2, 534 Write Level 1 Parameters 1, 533 Write Level 2 Parameters 1, 535 Write Level 2 Parameters 2, 536 Write Manual Reset Value, 528 Write MV at Stop Time and at PV Error, 530 Write MV Limits, 530 Write Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative Time, 527 Write Set Point, 526 Write SP Ramp Time Unit and Set Value, 529 sequences, E5ZE Temperature Controller Cancel Autotuning, 572 Initialize Settings, 577 Read Alarm Mode, 551 Read Alarm Temperatures, 552 Read Control Period, 550 Read Cooling Coefficient, 562 Read Dead Band/Overlap Band, 561 Read Error Status, 554 Read HB Alarm and HS Alarm Valid Channels, 559 Read Heater Burnout and SSR Failure Detection Currents, 559 Read Heater Current and SSR Leakage Current, 560 Read Hysteresis, 553 Read Input Shift Value, 555 Read Manual Reset Value, 555 Read Operation Status, 553 Read Output Mode, 551 Read Output Value Change Rate Limit, 558 Read Output Value Limit, 557 Read Output Values, 547 Read Present Set Point, 557 Read Process Value, 546 Read Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative Time, 549 Read Ramp Value, 556 Read Set Point, 546 Read Set Point, Process Value, and Output Value, 548 Read Setting Unit, 554 Save Settings, 577 Start Autotuning, 571 Start Control, 581 Start Manual Operation, 581 Stop Operation or Control, 581 Write Alarm Mode, 568 Write Alarm Temperature (Setting Unit 0.1), 570 Write Alarm Temperature (Setting Unit 1), 569 Write Control Period, 567 Write Cooling Coefficient, 580 Write Dead Band/Overlap Band, 579 Write HB and HS Alarm Valid Channels, 578 Write Heater Burnout and SSR Failure Detection Current, 578 Write Hysteresis, 571 Write Input Shift Value, 572 Write Manual Output Value, 574 Write Manual Reset Value, 573 Write Output Mode, 568 Write Output Value Change Rate Limit, 576 Write Output Value Limit, 575 Write Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative Time, 566 Write Ramp Value, 574 Write Set Point (Setting Unit 0.1), 565 Write Set Point (Setting Unit 1), 564 Write Setting Unit, 572 sequences, ES100_ Digital Controller Auto Mode, 631 Cancel A.T., 633 Change Bank No., 634 Change Pattern No., 634 Execute A.T., 632 External Setting Mode, 629 General-purpose Command, 636 Local Setting Mode, 629 Manual Mode, 632 Read Adjustment Parameters, 611 Read Control Monitor Data, 610 Read Controller Status, 635 Read Error Detection Data, 605 Read Event Data, 602 Read Heater Burnout Data, 606 Read Local SP, 621 Read MV Data, 609 Read PID Control Parameters 1, 615 Read PID Control Parameters 2, 617 Read Program Parameters, 624 Read PV Data, 607 Read SP Data, 608 Read Time Signal, 603 Remote Setting Mode, 628 Reset (Stop), 631 Run Command, 630 Write Adjustment Parameters, 614 Write Local SP, 623 Write PID Control Parameters 1, 618 Write PID Control Parameters 2, 620 Write Program Parameters, 627 sequences, Hayes Modem AT Command Data Send/Receive (General-purpose), 772
785
Index
Dial, 770 Escape, 773 Escape to Hang Up, 767 Hang Up, 773 Initialize and Dial, 767 Initialize Modem (Specialized), 769 Password, 771 Set Modem (General-purpose), 769 sequences, K3T_ Intelligent Signal Processor General-purpose Command, 660 Model Data Read (by Unit Number), 658 Model Data Read (Continuous Units), 659 Read Display Value (PV) (by Unit Number), 655 Read Display Value (PV) (Continuous Units), 658 Read Holding Data, 653 Read Holding Data BH (Continuous Units), 655 Read Holding Data PH (Continuous Units), 655 Read Set Value (by Unit Number), 649 Read Set Value H (Continuous Units), 650 Read Set Value H with Bank (Continuous Units), 652 Read Set Value HH (Continuous Units), 650 Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units), 652 Read Set Value L (Continuous Units), 651 Read Set Value L with Bank (Continuous Units), 653 Read Set Value LL (Continuous Units), 651 Read Set Value LL with Bank (Continuous Units), 653 Read Set Value O1 with Bank (Continuous Units), 653 Read Set Value O2 with Bank (Continuous Units), 653 Read Set Value O3 with Bank (Continuous Units), 653 Read Set Value O4 with Bank (Continuous Units), 653 Read Set Value O5 with Bank (Continuous Units), 653 Read Set Value with Bank (by Unit Number), 651 Reset (by Unit Number), 644 Reset Control (Continuous Units), 644 Write Set Value (by Unit Number), 645 Write Set Value H (Continuous Units), 646 Write Set Value H with Bank (Continuous Units), 648 Write Set Value HH (Continuous Units), 645 Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units), 648 Write Set Value L (Continuous Units), 646 Write Set Value L with Bank (Continuous Units), 648 Write Set Value LL (Continuous Units), 646 Write Set Value LL with Bank (Continuous Units), 648 Write Set Value O1 with Bank (Continuous Units), 649 Write Set Value O2 with Bank (Continuous Units), 649 Write Set Value O3 with Bank (Continuous Units), 649 Write Set Value O4 with Bank (Continuous Units), 649 Write Set Value O5 with Bank (Continuous Units), 649 Write Set Value with Bank (by Unit Number), 646 sequences, V500/V520 Bar Code Reader BCR Connection Confirmation (V500), 668 BCR Function Read (V500), 666 BCR Initialize (V500), 669 BCR Read Start, 664 BCR Read Stop, 664 Complete Data Read, 664 Data Continuous Read (Interrupt) (V500), 669 Data Continuous Read (Interrupt) (V520), 670 Data Continuous Read (Scan) (V500), 669 Data Continuous Read (Scan) (V520), 670 Data Read, 664 General-purpose Command 1, 670 General-purpose Command 2, 671 Log Data Clear (V500), 669 Log Data Output Request (V500), 667 Preset Data Set (V500), 668 System Setting, 663 sequences, V600/V620 ID Controller Auto-read (ASCII/1), 745 Auto-read (Hexadecimal/1), 745 Auto-write (ASCII/1), 758 Auto-write (Hexadecimal/1), 758 Command Processing Cancel, 763 Control, 762 Data Check, 761 Error Information Read, 763 General-purpose Command, 765 Polling Auto-read (ASCII), 746 Polling Auto-read (ASCII/2), 746 Polling Auto-read (ASCII/4), 747 Polling Auto-read (Hexadecimal), 748 Polling Auto-read (Hexadecimal/2), 748 Polling Auto-read (Hexadecimal/4), 749 Polling Auto-read (Hexadecimal/8), 749 Polling Auto-read Command Processing Cancel, 764 Polling Auto-write (ASCII/2), 758 Polling Auto-write (ASCII/4), 759 Polling Auto-write (ASCII/8), 759 Polling Auto-write (Hexadecimal/2), 760 Polling Auto-write (Hexadecimal/4), 760 Polling Auto-write (Hexadecimal/8), 761 Polling Auto-write Command Processing Cancel, 765 Polling Auto-write Subcommand (ASCII/2), 758 Polling Auto-write Subcommand (ASCII/4), 759 Polling Auto-write Subcommand (ASCII/8), 759 Polling Auto-write Subcommand (Hexadecimal/2), 760 Polling Auto-write Subcommand (Hexadecimal/4), 760 Polling Auto-write Subcommand (Hexadecimal/8), 761 Read (ASCII/1), 736 Read (ASCII/2), 737 Read (ASCII/4), 738 Read (ASCII/8), 739 Read (Hexadecimal/1), 740
786
Index
Read (Hexadecimal/2), 741 Read (Hexadecimal/4), 742 Read (Hexadecimal/8), 744 Write (ASCII/1), 750 Write (ASCII/2), 751 Write (ASCII/4), 752 Write (ASCII/8), 753 Write (Hexadecimal/1), 754 Write (Hexadecimal/2), 755 Write (Hexadecimal/4), 756 Write (Hexadecimal/8), 757 sequences, Visual Inspection System Arbitrary Measurement Value Acquisition (F200), 715 Binary Level Modification (F200/300), 725 Camera Change (Decrease by 1) (F200/300), 724 Camera Change (Increase by 1) (F200/300), 724 Camera Designation and Positioning (F350), 723 Character String Inspection and Character Inspection (F350), 724 Continuous Measurement Execution (Interrupt) (F200), 713 Continuous Measurement Execution (Interrupt) (F300), 720 Continuous Measurement Execution (Scan) (F200), 712 Continuous Measurement Execution (Scan) (F300), 718 Evaluation Condition Change (F200), 715 General-purpose Command (Send), 726 General-purpose Command (Send/Receive), 727 Illumination Fluctuation Follow Execution (F300), 722 Inspection Execution and Character Inspection (F350), 724 Measurement Execution (F200), 712 Measurement Execution (F300), 717 Measurement Execution and Positioning (F350), 722 Measurement, Inspection Termination, 726 Reference Object Registration (Criterion) (F200), 714 Reference Object Registration (Group) (F200), 714 Reference Object Registration (Reference Position) (F200), 714 Reference Object Registration Command 1 Execution (F300), 721 Reference Object Registration Command 2 Execution (F300), 721 Reset (F200/300), 725 Scene Switching (Arbitrary), 726 Scene Switching (Decrease by 1), 725 Scene Switching (Increase by 1), 725 Scene Switching and Positioning (F350), 723 Serial Communications Boards, 3 CIO Area allocations, 88, 280 component names, 68 data exchange, 80 DM Area allocations, 82 error information, 347 indicator error displays, 346 installation, 50, 100 replacement, 394 specifications, 27 serial communications modes, 1, 105 1 1 NT Link, 4, 6 1 N NT Link, 3, 5, 10, 13, 292 Host Link, 3, 5, 10, 11, 144, 302 loopback test, 3, 6, 10, 14, 340 protocol macro, 3, 5, 10, 13, 166 See also 1 N NT Link Host Link Loopback Test protocol macro selection, 47 Serial Communications Units, 4 CIO Area allocations, 88 component names, 73, 75 data exchange, 81 DM Area allocations, 83 indicator error displays, 348 installation, 51, 52, 101, 103 precautions, 104 replacement, 394 specifications, 27, 29 Setup Area, 54, 145, 304 allocations, 83 1 N NT Link, 295 Host Link, 146, 305 loopback test, 342 protocol macro, 174 Software Switches, 88, 89, 182, 227, 279 soldering, 138 specifications protocol, 31 Serial Communications Boards, 27 Serial Communications Units, 27 standard system protocol, 166, 399 communications problems, 172 DM Area settings, 171 examples, 171 modifying, 166 Status Area, 89 allocations 1 N NT Link, 298 Host Link, 150, 308 protocol macro, 185 error information, 349 Step Error Processing Flag, 190, 192 step number, 191 step parameters, 170
787
Index
STUP(237) instruction, 27 executing, 775 specifications, 775 system configuration Host Link, 19 precautions, 101 protocol macro, 23
T
terminating resistance switch, 72 trace function protocol macro, 36 Tracing Flag, 190, 192 troubleshooting, 350 1 N NT Link errors, 374 error codes, 389 Host Link errors, 350 protocol macro errors, 376
U
unit number switch, 74, 76
V
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader, 166 connections, 662 protocols sequences, 661, 671 V600/V620 ID Controller, 166 connections, 731 protocols sequences, 729, 765 Visual Inspection System connections, 711 protocols sequences, 709, 727 Visual Inspection Units, 166
W
weight, 28, 30 wiring connectors, 136 precautions, 105 RS-232C ports, 132 RS-422A/485 ports, 133
788
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the previous version.
Revision code 1 2 Date February 1999 April 2000 Original production Changes were made on the following pages. Page 4: Boards corrected to Unit in Connectable Devices. Pages 23-24: Information on 1: N NT link added. Page 29: 1694 corrected to 1699 in Unit No. 7 row of table on right. Page 31: RS-422 changed to RS-422A in Connections. Page 33: Information on NT link changed. Pages 41-42: Information about high-speed NT link added. Page 50: Information on NT link removed from Note 4. Page 97: 1694 corrected to 1699 in Unit No. 7 row. Page 118: Note 3 removed from bottom right box in table. Information on RS/CS flow added. Page 138: Note added. Page 151: Information on D32001 added. Information on high-speed NT link added. Page 154: Information on baud rate and note added. Page 163: Execution error changed to syntax error in table. Page 171: Information added to cause column. Page 347, 348, 349, 350, 352, 353, 358: Negative sign information changed. CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Unit added, CS1 changed to CS or CS/CJ according to context, and CS Series only added to distinguish functions for Serial Communications Boards. Page xiv: Added terminal block precaution, section name changed to this manual, change precaution on locking devices, and precaution added on terminal blocks. Pages 105 and 114: Note added on retry processing. Pages 171 and 181: Information added on retry processing. CJ1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit and information on the Simple Backup Function added. The CS1W-SCB21-V1, CS1W-SCB41-V1, CS1W-SCU21-V1, and CJ1WSCB21/41 support this function. Page xix: EMC changed to EMS. Page 5: Overview of the -V1 upgrades. Pages 21 and 22: Added CS1-H CPU Units, CJ1-H CPU Units, and Simple Backup Function to Specifications. Page 32: Simple Backup Function added to table. Page 149: Modified the Error Flags ON conditions. Pages 158 to 161: Simple Backup Function description added. Pages 177 and 179: Added Indicator Displays related to the protocol data restore operation. Pages 205 to 207: Added Board/Unit replacement procedure that uses the Simple Backup Function to restore protocol data in the new Board/Unit. Front cover: 21 inserted in model number. Page 142: Minor changes made to first table. Page 144: Changes made to first table row in several places. Page 152: Line added before notes. Revised content
May 2001
04
April 2002
05
June 2003
789
Revision History
Revision code 06 Date June 2004 Revised content Additions made throughout the manual to include information on the upgrade to version 1.2, including two new sections on Serial Gateway and no-protocol modes and three new appendices. The following changes were also made. Front cover: -V1 suffix added to CJ-series Serial Communications Unit model numbers. Page xvii: Application precautions added. Page xx: Information on unit versions and summary of upgraded functions added. Pages 3 and 5: Connection diagram for version 1.2 or later added. Page 6: Protocol overview for version 1.2 or later added. Page 7: Information on version 1.2 or later added. Page 8: Information on protocol macros used with version 1.2 or later added. Page 9: Information including diagrams on Serial Gateway and no-protocol mode added. Pages 22 and 23: Information added to table and model numbers changed. Pages 25 and 26: Note added to table. Page 29: Table on Serial Gateway and no-protocol mode specifications added. Page 30: Table changed. Page 32: Note and table changed. Page 35: Information added to table. Page 41: Information on 1:1 Host Link communications added. Page 42: Table changed and new tables on other communications modes added. Page 47: Information on Serial Gateway mode added. Pages 63 and 65: Tables changed. Page 67: Table changed, Note 5 removed, and new notes added. Pages 68 and 69: Tables changed. Page 70: Table changed, note added, and new table added. Page 71: Table added. Page 79: Tables changed. Page 122: Note changed and 4-6 Host Link Function for Replacing Existing PLCs added. Page 132: Table changed and information on new settings added. Page 134: Information on new settings added. Page 139: Table changed. Page 140: Diagram and table changed. Pages 142 and 145: Tables changed. Page 146: Diagram changed. Page 148: Table changed. Page 158: FAL(06)00 and FAL(06)01 corrected respectively to FAL(06)01 and FAL(06)02. Page 163: Table changed. Page 166: 5-6 Enhanced Protocol Macro Functions, SECTION 6 Serial Gateway, and SECTION 7 No-protocol Mode added. Page 171:Table changed. Page 183: Table changed. Page 192: 12-3-2 Serial Gateway (Serial Gateway or Protocol Macro Mode) and 12-3-3 No-protocol Mode added. Page 204: Table changed. Page 214: Table changed. Page 220: Table changed. Page 221: Information including table added on ASCII conversion. Page 222: Notes changed. Page 230: Information on new communications sequences added. Page 231: Appendix C C-mode (Host Link) Command Master, Appendix D Host Link FINS Command Master, and Appendix E Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) added. PC was changed to PLC throughout the manual and the -V1 suffix was added to CJ1W-SCU21/41. Changes were also made to update to unit version 1.3. Other minor changes and corrections were made, including the following changes. Page v: Changed and added information. Page xi: Changed information in table. Page xii: Added warranty and liability information. Page xvi: Changed precaution on ground terminal. Page xvii: Added precaution information. Page xix: Changed Common Emission Standard EN50081-2 to EN61000-6-4. Page xxii: Changed diagram. Page 79: Removed error code 5 from table. Pages 127 and 264: Changed layout of information on hardware settings in table. Page 150: Added information to table. Page 156: Changed information for bit 10 in table. Page 247: Changed values in table for Serial Communications Boards. Page 251: Joined tables together. Page 254: Changed A35607 to A35606 for the Reception Completed Flag bit. Page 311: Changed No to Yes for 0601 and 0602 hex. Page 317: Removed step 2 from procedure for using the simple backup function. Pages 640, 641, and 643: Changed information in note 4. Added information for the CS1W-SCU31-V1 and CJ1W-SCU31-V1.
07
November 2005
08
May 2006
790
Revision History
Revision code 09 Date February 2008 Revised content Pages 50, 77, and 254: 11 changed to 10 for end code. Page 192: Added note. Page 199: Added not in bottom figure. Added the following CJ-series Units: CJ1W-SCU22/32/42. Added information for upgrade to unit version 2.0. Added information on DTXDU(262) and DRXDU(261), and on communications performance.
10
October 2009
791
Revision History
792
OMRON Corporation
Industrial Automation Company Control Devices Division H.Q. Automation & Drive Division Automation Department 1 Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku, Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan Tel: (81) 75-344-7084/Fax: (81) 75-344-7149
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC One Commerce Drive Schaumburg, IL 60173-5302 U.S.A. Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787 OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD. No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2), Alexandra Technopark, Singapore 119967 Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711 OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD. Room 2211, Bank of China Tower, 200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road, PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200
Authorized Distributor:
Regional Headquarters OMRON EUROPE B.V. Wegalaan 67-69-2132 JD Hoofddorp The Netherlands Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON Corporation 1999 All Rights Reserved. In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan Cat. No. W336-E1-10 1009